JP7418064B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] Aiming to improve various performances and maintainability [Solution] A door lock mechanism that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state by locking a door body, a main body, a locking part, and a locked part; The door locking mechanism has a housing section that can accommodate the locking section, and the locking section in the unlocked state and a first inner wall of the housing section are connected to each other. It is possible to set a predetermined state in which a certain metal piece is inserted into a slit-like space formed by the door body, and in the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the door body will not close before the locking part. The certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part and does not enter the locked state, and the door body remains open, and the width of the slit-shaped space is equal to The metal piece is wider than the width of the space formed by the second inner wall of the accommodating part and the locking part, and the certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin. Game console. [Selection diagram] Figure 264

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-296354

In this type of game machine, improvements in various performances and ease of maintenance are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can improve various performances and maintainability.

The game machine according to the present invention includes:
The door body and
The main body and
a door locking mechanism that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part and a locked part are locked;
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing section that can accommodate the locking section,
A certain metal piece may be inserted into a slit-shaped space formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing part, and a predetermined state can be set;
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained,
The width of the slit-shaped space is wider than the width of the space formed by the second inner wall of the accommodating part opposite to the first inner wall and the locking part,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine according to the present invention, various performances and maintainability can be improved.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel developed in a two-dimensional manner. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. 3 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating transitions of game states regarding advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections of the slot machine 100. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. It is a diagram chronologically showing an example of notification when the first operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of notification when a second operation instruction notification is performed in a certain game. (a) It is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the setting key is turned on from off while the power is off. (b) is a front view showing an example in which the first notification is executed in the first state. (c) It is a front view showing an example in which the second notification is executed in the second state. (a) A diagram illustrating example 1 of a setting change operation in chronological order. (b) is a diagram showing example 2 of setting change operation in chronological order; (a) It is a figure showing example 3 of setting change operation in chronological order. (b) is a diagram showing example 4 of setting change operation in chronological order; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. 20 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 19. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 19 viewed diagonally from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and (c) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a sitting position. FIG. 3 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of person H2. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the inside of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. 26 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 25. FIG. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170. FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 39. 42 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 41. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500. 12 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by changing settings and the states of related components. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 45. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is set to setting b. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the payment is made. 48 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 47. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking the settings with setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) shows the state when setting 1 is set. 3 is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking settings in power saving mode. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 49. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the status of related components when checking the settings with setting b set, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting b is set in power saving mode. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when performing confirmation. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 51. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations that are subject to the lottery in RT1 and the high and low winning probabilities. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure for explaining some of the winning combinations which are objects of winning lottery in RT2, and the height of the winning probability. It is a figure showing an example of payout rate of RT1 and RT2. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . If the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored, the related components This is a table summarizing the status. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, check the state of the related components in the event that a power outage occurs and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored. This is a summarized table. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. be. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the setting confirmation is performed once, and a game is played once. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. Relevant components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the status of . After the settings have been confirmed once, the state of the related components is summarized when a medal is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. This is a table. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. 71 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 70. FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68. FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. 7 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. It is a table showing medal number control state commands. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. (a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing details of a response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control section main processing. 83 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 82. 84 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 83. 85 is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 84. 89 is a flowchart of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIG. 84, FIG. 85, and FIG. 89. 87 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 86. 88 is a flowchart of the priority command sending process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 83 and 87. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control unit timer interrupt processing. 91 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 90. 91 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90. It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the medal number control part main processing. 95 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 94. It is a table showing the target range of RAM clear processing. 96 is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like. 95 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 94. 100 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 99. 95 is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 94. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of medal number control part timer interruption processing. 105 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 104. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the scheduled count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 104. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 108. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 108. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 108. 112 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 111. It is a flowchart of the game information setting process (step S4806, S4A19) in FIGS. 114 and 116. 112 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 111. 117 is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 116. 112 is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111. 105 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 104. FIG. It is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 104. 105 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a modification of the process during medal insertion in FIG. 84. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 112. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 107. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st example when the count button 171 was operated. It is a timing chart showing a first example of performance when counting is being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. It is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end effect. It is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 134(c). 2 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs and then power is restored. 127 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 126. FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is restored. It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. It is a figure which shows the example of a sound output showing that automatic counting is in progress. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. 7 is a diagram showing an example of another change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. 146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be performed exceeding the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification. (a) is a timing chart when payout is about to be performed exceeding the second threshold for payout, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number; , is a diagram showing an example of notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification is issued to prompt counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. FIG. 7(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player. 153(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 153(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting once forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) This is an example of the modified example explained using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). It is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value. It is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed for a long time. It is a figure showing an example of the performance performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance performed according to the number of acquired medals in an AT state. It is a figure showing an example of operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement when the upper limit exceeded error of the number of game medals and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a period for allowing the output of the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a). 165(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b). (a) A diagram showing an example of update conditions for a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means). (b) A diagram showing an example of a difference number counter (first counting means), a virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means. FIG. 7 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of counting by a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means). It is a graph showing an example of a change in the number of difference sheets in a certain game period. 172 is a diagram showing an example of various effects during a certain game period shown in FIG. 171. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of various effects during a certain game period shown in FIG. 171. FIG. It is a graph showing an example of a change in the number of difference sheets in a certain game period. 174 is a diagram showing an example of various effects during a certain game period shown in FIG. 173. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of various effects during a certain game period shown in FIG. 173. FIG. (a) A diagram showing an example of complete function advance notification. (b) It is a figure showing an example of completion upper limit reach notification. (c) A diagram showing an example of advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit. (d) It is a diagram showing an example of notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit. It is a graph showing an example of a change in the number of difference sheets in a certain game period. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a modification of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a modification of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a shutter 163. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of complete function advance notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of completion upper limit reaching notification. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 187 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186. 187 is a flowchart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG. 186. It is a diagram showing an example of connection of boards inside the game machine. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the operation when the harness connection state is normal, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. . It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when lever unit harness HA1 is pulled out. It is a figure showing an example of operation when harness HB1 which connects main control board 300B and relay board RB1 is disconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when lever unit harness HA1, stop button unit harness HA2, and bet button unit harness HA3 are each drawn out. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of wiring of a menu button unit. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation|movement when the harness which connects a main control board and a sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the side. FIG. 3 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a sub-board case 500a and a main board case 300a. 3 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the flow of air from the cooling fan 950 when the front door 102 is open. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the display area of the symbol display window and the winning line of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine according to the present embodiment in a superficially developed manner, and a diagram illustrating the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter; b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a reel rotating device of a slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a reel drive unit that constitutes the reel rotation device of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic side view and a schematic front view showing an assembled state of the reel drive unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a stepping motor used in the reel of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 210 is a diagram showing the magnetic pole arrangement of the stator of the stepping motor shown in FIG. 209. FIG. 3 is a table showing the contents of an excitation table for exciting a stepping motor according to the present embodiment. It is a table showing the contents of a rotation control table of this embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 213. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG. 213. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in FIG. 216. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation control process in step S208 shown in FIG. 216. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel control determination processing in step S208g shown in FIG. 218. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. 219. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the stop button reception process of step S208d shown in FIG. 218. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process of step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG. 219. (a) is the first sub-control unit main processing of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, (b) is the first sub-control unit command input processing, (c) is the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and ( d) is a flowchart showing the flow of each timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit. Conventionally, changes in the state of the three reels, changes in the detection state of the light shielding piece provided on each reel in the index sensor, changes in the operation acceptance state of the stop button corresponding to each reel, and changes in the state of each stop button. 5 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of a built-in light emitter. In this embodiment, a change in the state of each reel 110 to 112, a change in the detection state of each light shielding piece, a change in the operation acceptance state of each stop button 137 to 139, and a light emission mode of each stop button LED 137a to 139a 3 is a timing chart showing changes in . 12 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the rotating right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. 12 is a timing chart when a power outage recovery occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 12 is a timing chart when the stop button operation is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emitting mode in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment is stopped at the shortest number of frames after detecting a light shielding piece. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the state of the left reel at each timing. It is a timing chart when the effect regarding the reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st performance in a performance device. This is a timing chart when a slide push operation is performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, but only some operations are accepted. This is a timing chart when all slide push operations performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This is a timing chart when a real game is played after a pseudo game is played in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This is a timing chart when a main game is played after a reel action is performed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols constituting a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. This is a timing chart when, in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed, but only some of the operations are accepted. This is a timing chart when all simultaneous pressing operations performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a timing chart when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This is a timing chart obtained by adding the notification timing by the notification means to the timing chart shown in FIG. 239. As in the case of the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, this is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of successive slide push operations on three stop buttons 137 to 139. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. This is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 among the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. An example is shown in which retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. This is a timing chart. An example is shown in which retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. This is a timing chart. An example is shown in which retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. This is a timing chart. It is a timing chart when sequential slide push operations are performed in each of a pseudo game and a main game that is started following the pseudo game. It is a timing chart showing an example of a case where pull-in control is performed as a result of performing a slide push operation of forward push in a pseudo game. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected in a pseudo game. This is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 among the three reels 110 to 112 automatically comes to a pseudo stop. In a pseudo game, when the detection of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed and the slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. It is a timing chart which shows an example. In a pseudo game, when the detection of the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed and the slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. It is a timing chart which shows an example. In a pseudo game, when the detection of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed and the slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. It is a timing chart which shows an example. This is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously in a pseudo game just before a predetermined third period elapses. It is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. (a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, and (b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in (a) from the rear side of the slot machine 100. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B. (a) is a side view showing a state in which the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A, (b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) with a solid line, and (c) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) with a solid line. It is a view of the lock main body 1401A in a) seen from the back side, (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, and (e) is a view showing the locked shaft It is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft 1401B cannot enter along the approach path 1404ER. (a) is a side view showing a state in which the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A with the locking part 1402 housed in the housing part 1404, and (b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) as shown in solid lines. (c) is a view of the lock main body 1401A in (a) seen from the back side, and (d) shows a state in which the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the approach path 1404ER. (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the door key is operated from the state shown in FIG. 264-1(d), but the locking portion 1402 and the setting key SK do not move; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example in which the locking portion 1402 moves and the game medal MD does not move when the door key is operated from the state of (e). (c) to (f) show a state in which a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted obliquely from the outside of the inner wall 1404WA forming the slit 1401SL, and the tip of the metal piece is pressed against the locking part 1402. FIG. It is a figure showing the locking part 1402 provided with the convex part 1402PR. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration in which a plurality of locking mechanisms 1401 are provided. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a board and a sticker affixed to the board. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a board and a sticker affixed to the board. (a) is a diagram showing an example in which silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of the sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 265(c), and (b) is a diagram of the configuration of FIG. 265(c). It is a figure showing an example in which silk printing SP indicating the pasting position of two corners of the upper right and lower left of the sticker has been applied to the structure. (a) is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to substrate A and a sticker ST2 (facing right) affixed to substrate B are different from the reference direction; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to substrate A and a sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of substrate A are different from the reference direction. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a two-dimensional code QRA1 (facing upward) on board A and a two-dimensional code QRB1 (facing downward) on board B are different with respect to a reference direction. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a two-dimensional code QRA1 (facing upward) on board A and a two-dimensional code QRB1 (facing downward) on board B are different with respect to a reference direction. It is a figure showing an example of power supply module PM. (a) is a diagram of the lower surface BT seen from below, (b) is a diagram showing a cross section taken along line AA in (a), and (c) is a diagram showing a cross section taken along line AA in (a). It is a figure which shows the cross section of a line. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply board PW. (a) is a view when looking in the rear direction from the cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. (a) is a view when looking forward from the cross section taken along the line BB in FIG. It is a figure when seen from the side. (a) is a diagram of the power supply board PW in FIG. 270-1 viewed from below, and (b) is a diagram of the power supply board PW with CA1 attached to the power supply board PW seen from the bottom. FIG. 270-1 is a diagram showing a state in which the cover CA1 is attached to the power supply board PW of FIG. 270-1. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the structure of a board and a board case, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a structure in which caulking CL is provided in unmounted land area NA. It is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement according to time passage from a lever operation. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation|movement when abnormality occurs in a reel after a lever operation. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation|movement when abnormality occurs in a reel after a lever operation. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when reel production is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a pseudo game is executed. It is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a pseudo game is executed. It is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a power failure/recovery occurs during a game. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B corresponding to a second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first substrate CB1.

Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. Note that the configurations of each embodiment in this specification can be freely combined as long as there is no contradiction.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined amount of gaming value (medals, electronic medals, etc.) is inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. Upon acceptance, the rotation is stopped individually, and if the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the lottery result and the symbol combination when the multiple reels are stopped meet the predetermined payout conditions, the game value is paid out and the game ends. This is a gaming machine that runs a series of games that will end without paying out the game value if they do not match.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. and.

In this example, by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140, the front door 102, which is locked in the closed state, can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter also referred to as "opening/closing sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass through the space.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this opening/closing sensor in main control timer interrupt processing to be described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 becomes open and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output to the main control section 300.

That is, the open/close sensor is a detection means that can detect the open/close state of the front door (door) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Furthermore, the detection state is not limited to one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state always switch as the door opens and closes, and even if the detection state can change to the closed detection state even if the door is in the open state. Alternatively, the detection state may be set to the open detection state even when the door is in the closed state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state even if the front door 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forcibly changed to a closed detection state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "door pseudo" state). (sometimes referred to as "closed").

Note that the "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example; for example, a DIP switch that turns the open/close sensor into a closed detection state may be provided and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is constituted by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the opening/closing sensor.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. To explain specifically using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is the middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed on the left reel lower row, and the symbol displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram) The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 112, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 as shown in the figure) are the upper row symbols of the right reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 as shown in the diagram) on the right reel. The middle symbols and the symbols displayed at the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed vertically, nine in total. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight for illuminating the individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be explained later in FIG. Only one line, the middle winning line L1, is provided, which is made up of symbols in the middle of the reels. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the winning lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a downward-sloping winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-to-the-right winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines. Note that the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5, and 8 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as the active line area S1. Further, an area other than the effective line area S1 of the symbol display window 113 (area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as an ineffective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific prize winning combination (specifically, special prize 1, special prize 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a special prize has been internally won or a special game has been won, which will be described later. This is a lamp that informs the player of the current situation. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for presentation, and is also referred to as the presentation button 190. The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, each consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A production device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) provided above inside the slot machine 100 outputs sound to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ).

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key (first operating means) that can be turned on and off by a rotational operation. This setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") is provided that can be pressed to perform an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can perform operations to eliminate various errors (error elimination operations), which will be described later.

These setting keys and reset SW are operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door) is in the open state, and cannot be operated when the front door 102 (door) is in the closed state. difficult or impossible. In other words, it is an operating means that can only be operated by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game parlor, and cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 14) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is configured with a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the set value will be hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board (not shown) is attached to the inner wall of the main body 101, which is connected to the main control board constituting the main control section 300 and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board includes an external cable connection part for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 3) provided in a hall computer (not shown), etc., and an external centralized terminal board LED. (not shown) is provided. The external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole formed on the back surface of the main body 101, and is connected to the external cable connection part of the external common terminal board.

Further, a medal dispensing device (not shown; a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is provided on the inner wall of the main body 101, and a medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is provided on the right side of the medal dispensing device. An overflow terminal is provided behind this (not shown).

Further, a power supply box (not shown) having a power supply board is provided on the left side of the medal payout device, and a power switch (not shown) is provided in front of the power supply box. The power supply box converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as a main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. . Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 3. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 that stores arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Regarding the RAM 308, the description of RAM (Random Access Memory) is used as an example to indicate that it is a readable/writable storage medium, but the description of RWM (Read/Write Memory) or "RAM" is not acceptable. May be used. Furthermore, the name of the process related to RAM may also be written as RWM (read/write memory) or a name that uses the word "RAM". In this specification, the term "RAM" will be mainly used. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, a medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. , a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and an optical sensor for the reels 110 to 112. (index sensor 80, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and are used for insertion operations when inserting medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into a game. Detect. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display) 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output, and the external centralized terminal board LED is turned on when the game information is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, Chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 4. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "bell symbol," the number 2 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "seven 1 symbol," and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "seven symbol." 1B pattern" are arranged respectively.

In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is designed to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed. It is configured.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 5. This figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout (number of awards) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination 1, a replay winning combination, and small winning combinations 1 to 8. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player upon winning. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows replaying without inserting new medals. These special winnings 1 and replaying winnings are sometimes called "actuation winnings." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winnings from re-played roles. In addition, special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning prize, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning prize. be.

The special winning combination 1 is a winning combination (activation winning combination) that shifts to a special gaming state (RT2) upon winning. However, medals will not be paid out for winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is ``Seven 3-Seven 1-Replay'' for special combination 1. In the following explanation, the special winning combination 1 may be referred to as "RB1" or "RB".

When the special winning combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning special winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special winning combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special winning winning state (RT1). This flag remains on until the corresponding activation combination is won, making it easier to win these activation combinations in subsequent games. Specifically, even if you do not win any of those winnings in the game where you win the special prize 1 internally, the state will be the same as the state in which you won the special prize 1 internally in the next game and thereafter, and you will win if the corresponding symbol combinations are aligned. It becomes easy to do.

The special role internal winning state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internal winning state, if a role other than the special role has been internally won, the symbols that make up this other role will be arranged preferentially. Then, reel stop control is executed.

A re-gaming combination is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. In other words, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of coins inserted last time. The corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

The above-mentioned replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a prize in a replay, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in a storage area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308), or in a replay. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small winning combinations 1 to 8 are winning winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for Minor Role 1, "Replay-Cherry-Replay" for Minor Role 2, and "Cherry-Cherry-Cherry" for Minor Role 3. 4 is "Bell B-Bell-Bell", minor role 5 is "Bell B-Bell (or Bell B)-Bell", minor role 6 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", Minor role 7 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2", and minor role 8 is "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3". Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is as shown in FIG.

Among the above minor roles, minor role 1 is "watermelon", minor role 2 is "weak cherry", minor role 3 is "strong cherry", minor role 4 is "common bell", minor role 5 is "push order bell" , Small winning combinations 6 to 8 are sometimes referred to as ``one-card winning hands''.

<Types of gaming status (RT)>
Next, the types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be explained. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between multiple types of states with different advantages: a low replay probability state, a special prize internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree of play is changed to improve the interest of the game. In the following explanation, this gaming state may be referred to as RT, and the above-mentioned low replay probability state, special role internal winning state, and special gaming state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Furthermore, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by main control section 300.

FIG. 6 shows each RT described above, and these transition conditions are written on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is satisfied, RT transitions in the direction of the arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined role, winning a predetermined role internally, a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed on a specific winning line, and playing the specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be explained with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Low replay probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal probability of winning the replay combination than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

The roles that are internally won in RT0 include special role 1, replay role, and small role 1 to 8. Note that if the winning combination is not won, the player loses and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Note that the fact that the winning symbol combination is not stopped on the winning line is sometimes referred to as "losing". Also, not winning a role is sometimes expressed as ``winning by mistake.''

FIG. 6 shows that if the special winning combination 1 is internally won in a state where RT0 is set, the state shifts to a special winning internal winning state which will be described later.

<Special role internal election status (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special combination 1 is set on. Also, the probability of winning a replay combination is higher than RT0, making RT more advantageous than RT0.

The roles that are internally won in RT1 include replay roles and small roles 1 to 8.

FIG. 6 shows that when a special winning combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the game moves to RT2.

<Special gaming state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT that has a higher internal probability of winning the common bell (minor role 4) than other RTs, making it easier to obtain medals.

In RT2, the only winning combination is the common bell (minor combination 4). FIG. 5 shows that in RT2, if a game is played a predetermined number of times (six times in this example) or if a prize is won a predetermined number of times (five times in this example), the transition to RT0 occurs. ing.

Note that the conditions for ending RT2 are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, to end when more than a specified number of coins are paid out, or to end when a predetermined winning combination is won.

<Unfavorable section and advantageous section>
In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, apart from the RT described above, the gaming state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous period and a favorable period. Among these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won winning combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation navigation" or "operation instruction notification") is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is displayed. Not done. In addition, in advantageous sections, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions, but even if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation may not be displayed. These states will be explained below using FIG. 7. This figure is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

In this embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Furthermore, when the RAM is cleared (settings changed), this non-advantageous section is set. Note that the state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as a normal state A. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of advantageous section states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state (including super AT state). FIG. 7 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to off if it is an unfavorable section, and the advantageous section flag is set to on if it is an advantageous section, and the advantageous section flag is used to distinguish between the unfavorable section and the advantageous section. It is differentiated. In addition, in order to prevent gambling from arousing, if the advantageous section continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1,500 games) or if the net increase in coins exceeds a predetermined number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins), is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

Note that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or may further include, for example, a precursor state before transitioning to the AT state, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the non-advantageous section.

Note that since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from RT, for example, there is a case where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally selected and the operation navigation is not displayed, so it is possible to set a non-advantageous section for RT2 and return to the advantageous section after RT2 ends. . Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell is internally selected in RT2, and the operation navigation is displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be explained below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internally won combination. If you win this lottery, you will move to the normal state B of the advantageous sections.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are satisfied. Further, when the transition condition is satisfied, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in normal state B, and a condition that is established by executing a transition lottery to the every game chance state in normal state B and winning this lottery. conditions that hold true when the points (any of 1 to 3) that are added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. conditions may be adopted.

<Chance state>
In the chance state, when a specific winning combination (in this example, a one-card winning combination (small winning combinations 6 to 8)) is internally won, an AT lottery may be performed. If the AT lottery has not been won before the set number of games has elapsed (the number of AT sets is 0), the state shifts to the normal state B, and if the number of AT sets is not 0, the state shifts to the AT state. Upon transition to the AT state, the number of AT sets is subtracted by 1, and a predetermined number of games (for example, 50) is set as the number of remaining AT games.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed in a chance state, but for example, an AT lottery (addition of the number of AT sets) may be performed when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. The timing and execution conditions of the AT lottery can be arbitrarily adopted.

In addition, with the winning of the AT lottery as a trigger, a notification (operation instruction notification) including a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped may be executed (details will be described later). Note that operation instruction notifications are not limited to notifications that include suggestions of symbols that the goal is to stop; for example, notifications that include push orders (for example, "middle → right → left", "press inside", etc.) It may be.

<AT status>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Hereinafter, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when a push order bell (minor combination 5) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the corresponding correct push order is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to the one that shows the push order, but may also show the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the push order and timing. It may also indicate both. In addition, on the payout number display 127, the 7 segments are lit in a manner corresponding to the order in which the correct answer is pressed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number display 127 may also be lit in a manner that corresponds to the timing of the stop operation, or may be lit in a manner that corresponds to both the pressing order and timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the number of AT remaining games becomes 0, if the number of AT sets is greater than 0, the number of AT remaining games is set to a predetermined value (for example, 50) again, and if the number of AT sets is 0, the state returns to the chance state. Execute the lottery. If this lottery is won, the state shifts to a chance state, and if it is not won, the state shifts from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Note that if the special game state (RT2) is entered during the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is restarted when the AT state reaches RT0. Note that the number of AT remaining games may be added by winning an additional lottery (in this embodiment, executed during an internal lottery).

Note that the AT state is not limited to the configuration using the number of AT sets or the number of AT remaining games, but may be configured such that the AT state is started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific gaming state is reached).

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 8 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (handled or operated by bet buttons 130 and 132), and the winning line display lamp 120 is turned on in response to the insertion of medals. Furthermore, when medals are inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random number value obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internally elected roles. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activated winning combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination will be turned on. Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-control unit 400 an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery. For example, when a re-gaming combination (replay) is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating that the re-gaming combination (replay) has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning of the winning combination), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating the loss to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition to the information on the internal winning combination, the internal winning command includes information on the current advantageous section (if the period is limited, it includes information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and the AT lottery. and information that can identify the result of the AT additional lottery. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command that includes the internal winning of the push order bell (small role 5) also includes operation instruction information that indicates the correct operating order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (pressing order). included.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S113, a reel rotation start process is executed on the condition that a game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S115, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S117.

In step S117, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Watermelon-Watermel-Watermelon" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that Small Win 1 has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S119, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, a game state update process is performed. Here, the status regarding the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 7 is updated based on the result of the game. For example, when transitioning from normal state A to normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when transitioning from AT state to normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF. Also, preparations are made to send a gaming state update command. This command includes information regarding RT, information regarding non-advantageous sections and advantageous sections (for example, advantageous section flag, number of AT sets, and number of AT remaining games).

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status (obtaining various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. For example, if the interrupt status is in the process of inserting medals, a medal insertion acceptance process is performed, and if the interrupt status is in the process of dispensing, a process of dispensing medals is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel Consists of the first to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) has been done.

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 10. Note that FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of the input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 10(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 10(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 10A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 11(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 11(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 11(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 11A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to Embodiment C will be explained using FIGS. 12 and 13. Note that for words and phrases that overlap with other embodiments, the words and phrases of this embodiment are given priority, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS. 12 and 13, priority is given to the descriptions of FIGS. 12 and 13.

<Notification means>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, etc. described using FIG. In this example, these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 3.

<Notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the side lamp 144, title panel (lamp) 162, production button 190, stop buttons 137 to 139, and start lever 135 described using FIG. 1, as well as the upper lamp 142 ( (see FIG. 14), reel backlights (not shown) for each reel 110 to 112, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

Note that the performance button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention is also applicable to pachinko machines, and examples of light emitting means included in pachinko machines include frame lamps, performance buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Stop instruction notification>
Next, stop instruction notification will be explained. Here, the stop instruction notification refers to a notification (for example, an operation navigation) that includes a suggestion of a symbol whose goal is to stop the game machine, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a goal of stopping the symbol. A first operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a first symbol whose goal is to stop the game, and a second operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a second symbol whose goal is to stop the game may be executed.

<First stop instruction notification>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of notification in chronological order when the first operation instruction is notified in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and when the AT lottery is won in the chance state, the first operation instruction is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Notification ID 1 is being executed.

The first operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol that the goal is to stop. In this example, as the first operation instruction notification ID1, the Seven 1 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID1a (in this example, includes an image of the Seven 1 symbol and the character string "Aim!") that prompts the stop button 137 to 139 to be stopped so that the first symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed. display) and press order notification ID1b that suggests the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed (in this example, a display that suggests that the stop operation is performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137) ) is running.

Note that the first operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol whose goal is to stop, for example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. The notification may not include the pressing order notification ID1b indicating the order, or may be a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Aim for blue 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means ( Alternatively, notification by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Aim for Blue 7") may be applied.

Further, the execution conditions for the first operation instruction notification are not limited to this example. For example, if a predetermined internal winning combination is won (or won), if a specific gaming state is entered, the points are reduced to a specified number ( For example, it may be the case that up to 100 points have been accumulated.

<First stop instruction notification → First stop mode → Execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a first stop state (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "1-Seven 1-Seven 1", at least the first notification is executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 1 symbol. Then, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and reels 110 to 112 are in the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode). Since it has stopped (the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) has been completed on the winning line L1), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, seven A display including an image of one symbol, a character string saying "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game where the first operation instruction notification is executed after winning the AT lottery, the reels 110 to 112 are in the first stop state (in this example, the symbols "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), the AT state is entered and the AT game is started.

In addition, in this example, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations may be used, including the first symbol that targets.

Further, the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Congratulations to Blue 7", or in addition to (or instead of) notification by a display means. ), notifications by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations to Blue 7") and notifications by light emission means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red). May be applied.

Further, the execution timing of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, or In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<First stop instruction notification → second stop mode → non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a second stop mode (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination ``3-73-73'', at least the first notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, and seven Aim at the symbol and perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop). Since the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stopping pattern) has been completed on the winning line L1), the first notification shown in FIG. 12 (b-1) RD1 (first notification; in this example, a display including an image of the 71 symbol, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, When it stops at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", at least the first notification in the game (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is executed. , when the reels stop in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game where the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first operation instruction notification is executed in the game. Since this is not carried out, the notification can be made without misunderstanding the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (main symbol in this example) is stopped on all reels. In the example, since the 73 symbol) is in a stopped state, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be confused.

In addition, in this example, the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, 7 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the 7 3 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<First stop instruction notification → Fourth stop mode → Non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a fourth stop state (in this example, the first If the game stops in a stopping mode other than the stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends), at least the first notification is not executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and aims at the Seven 1 symbol. , the player performed the stop operations in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (or the player did not follow the first operation instruction notification ID 1 and performed stop operations on stop buttons 137 to 139). ), the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stopping mode) (the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) appeared on the winning line L1). 12 (b-1), the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "Get!", (Display including effect images) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, the reels do not have a specific symbol on all the reels. When stopping in the fourth stopping mode (in this example, stopping modes other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends)), at least Since the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made without misleading the player, and the player This prevents players from misunderstanding and prevents players from losing their desire to play.

In addition, in this example, the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which a specific symbol (in this example, any one of the 7 1 symbol, 7 2 symbol, and 7 3 symbol) is stopped on all the reels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an embodiment in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Further, the non-execution timing of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<First stop instruction notification → Third stop mode → Execution of third notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1) is executed, the reels are in a third stop state (in this example, the When the game stops at the symbol combination ``2-72-72'', at least the third notification is executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, and seven Aiming at the symbols, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (the third stop Since the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stop pattern) has been completed on the winning line L1), the third notification RD3 (third notification. This example In this case, a display including an image of the Seven 2 symbol, a character string saying "Get!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game where the first operation instruction notification is executed after winning the AT lottery, the reels 110 to 112 are in the third stop state (in this example, the symbols "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") In the next game after stopping in combination), as shown in FIG. 12(d), the AT state is entered and the AT game is started.

According to this example, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID 1 shown in FIG. In this example, when the 7 2 symbol) stops in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination ``7 2 - 7 2 - 7 2''), at least the third notification ( In this example, in order to execute the third notification RD3) shown in FIG. 12(b-3), it is possible to make it appear that the reels have stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed. It is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this example, the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, 7 2 symbols) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, the 7 2 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the third notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Congratulations to Red 7", or in addition to (or instead of) the notification by the display means. ), notifications by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations to Red 7") and notifications by light emission means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamps 144 (for example, flashing yellow). May be applied.

Further, the execution timing of the third notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels have stopped in the third stop mode, or In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Temporary stop of first stop mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), a reel effect is executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the second stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification was executed. (c-1) shows the state in which the reel effect is executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the fourth stop mode in the game in which the first operation instruction notification was executed. It is in a state of being.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, after the reels stop in the second stop mode (or after the reels stop in the fourth stop mode), the first stop mode (in this example, " It is configured to stop at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1".

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game as shown in FIG. 12(a), as shown in FIG. 12(b-4), The reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), but in the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second pattern). Although the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed since the stop mode has been stopped in the stop mode), in the next game of a certain game, the reel production will be performed in response to the pressing operation of the start lever 135. is started, and the reel is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel performance, and after executing the first notification RD1. , has started AT gaming.

According to this example, since the reels can be stopped in the first stopping mode after being stopped in the second stopping mode, the player's interest can be increased. In addition, even if the reels stop in the second stopping mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in subsequent games of the certain game, so there is no need to surprise the player. can.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c-1), after executing the first operation instruction notification ID1 in a certain game as shown in FIG. 12(a), as shown in FIG. 12(b-2), In this case, the reels 110 to 112 are not in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") but in the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (the fourth symbol combination). Although the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed since the stop mode has been stopped in the stop mode), in the next game of a certain game, the reel production will be performed in response to the pressing operation of the start lever 135. is started, and the reel is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as the reel performance, and after executing the first notification RD1. , has started AT gaming.

According to this example, since the reels can be stopped in the first stopping mode after being stopped in the fourth stopping mode, it is possible to increase the player's interest. In addition, even if the reels stop in the fourth stop mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next game after the certain game, so there is no need to surprise the player. can.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of notification in chronological order when the second operation instruction is notified in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. This is the state in which notification has been executed.

In this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and when the super AT lottery is won in the chance state, a second operation is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Instruction notification ID2 is being executed.

The second operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of a second symbol that the goal is to stop, and in this example, as the second operation instruction notification ID2, the seven 3 symbol ( Target symbol notification ID 2a (in this example, includes an image of the Seven 3 symbol and the character string “Aim!” display) and press order notification ID2b that suggests the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed (in this example, a display that suggests that the stop operation is performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137) ) is running.

Note that the second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol that the goal is to stop; for example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. The notification may not include the pressing order notification ID2b indicating the order, or may be a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Aim for gold 7", or in addition to the notification by the display means ( Alternatively, notification by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Aim for Gold 7") may be applied.

Furthermore, the execution conditions for the second operation instruction notification are not limited to this example. For example, if a predetermined internal winning combination is won (or won), if a specific gaming state is entered, the points are reduced to a specified number ( For example, it may be the case that up to 100 points have been accumulated.

<Second stop instruction notification → second stop mode → execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a second stop state (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination ``3-73-73'', at least the second notification is executed in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2 and aims at the Seven 3 symbol. Then, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 appear in the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop mode). Since it has stopped (the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stop mode) has been completed on the winning line L1), the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, the seven 3 symbol images, the character string "Get!", and an effect image).

In addition, in a game where the second operation instruction notification is executed after winning the super AT lottery, the reels 110 to 112 are set to the second stop state (in this example, "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"). In the next game after stopping at the symbol combination), as shown in FIG. 13(d), the game shifts to a super AT state which is more advantageous to the player than the AT state, and starts a super AT game.

As mentioned above, in the next game after stopping in the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1 - Seven 1 - Seven 1"), the second In the next game after stopping in the stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), the game will shift to a super AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the AT state. The second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") is better than the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"). ) has higher value as a symbol combination.

In addition, in the next game after stopping in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), the first stopping mode ( In this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") and the third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") are the symbol combinations. have the same value.

In addition, in this example, the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, 7 3 symbols) is stopped on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the 7 3 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations may be used, including a second symbol that targets.

Further, the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting only of a character string such as "Congratulations on Friday 7", or in addition to (or instead of) the notification by the display means. ), notifications by sound output means such as the speakers 272 and 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on Friday 7") and notifications by light emission means such as the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red). May be applied.

Further, the execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the second stop mode, or In addition to the game, it may be executed in any game after the game.

<Second stop instruction notification → first stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "1-Seven 1-Seven 1", the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, and seven Aiming at the symbols, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop Since the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” (first stop mode) has been completed on the winning line L1), the second notification shown in FIG. 13 (b-4) RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of a 73 symbol, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), the reels are in the second stop state (in this example, When it stops at the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3", at least while executing the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 12(b-4)), , when the reels stop in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game where the second operation instruction notification is executed, at least the second operation instruction notification is executed in the game. Since this is not carried out, the notification can be made without misunderstanding the player, the player will not be misunderstood, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which the second symbol (main symbol in this example) is stopped on all reels. In the example, since the 73 symbol) is in a stopped state, the symbol suggested by the second operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be confused.

In addition, in this example, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the 7 1 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<Second stop instruction notification → fourth stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a fourth stop state (in this example, the first If the game stops in a stopping mode other than the stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends), the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the second operation instruction notification ID2 and aims at the Seven 3 symbol. , the player performed the stop operations in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 (or the player did not follow the second operation instruction notification ID 2 and performed stop operations on stop buttons 137 to 139). ), the reels 110 to 112 stopped at the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stopping mode) (the symbol combination "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) appeared on the winning line L1). 13(b-4), the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, the image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "Get!", (Display including effect images) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. When stopping in the fourth stopping mode (in this example, stopping modes other than the first stopping mode, the second stopping mode, and the third stopping mode (so-called loose ends)), at least Since the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) is not executed in the game, the notification can be made without misleading the player, and the player This prevents players from misunderstanding and prevents players from losing their desire to play.

In addition, in this example, the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which a specific symbol (in this example, any one of the 7 1 symbol, 7 2 symbol, and 7 3 symbol) is stopped on all the reels. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an embodiment in which other specific symbols are not aligned and stopped.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<Second stop instruction notification → third stop mode → non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping mode in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the reels are in a third stop state (in this example, "7 When the game stops at the symbol combination "2-Seven 2-Seven 2", the second notification is not executed at least in the game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), in the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, Aiming at the symbols, perform the stop operation in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137, and the reels 110 to 112 will appear in the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (the third stop Since the symbol combination “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2” (third stop pattern) has been completed on the winning line L1), the second notification shown in FIG. 13 (b-4) RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of a 73 symbol, a character string "Get!", and an effect image) is not executed.

According to this example, in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. When the game stops in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), the second notification (in this example, in FIG. 13( Since the second notification RD2) shown in b-4) is not executed, the notification can be made in a manner that does not mislead the players, and the players will not be misunderstood and the player's desire to play will be reduced. This can be prevented.

In addition, in this example, the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, 7 2 symbols) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stopping mode is a mode in which the third symbol (in this example, the 7 2 symbol) is stopped. Other symbol combinations that do not include the first symbol aiming at this may be used.

Further, the non-execution timing of the second notification may be only for a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels are stopped in the third stop mode, In addition to the game, any game after the game may not be executed.

<Temporary stop of second stop mode>
The state shown in FIG. 13(c) is when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode (in this example, the first, third, and fourth stop modes) in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed. In the next game after stopping in any of the above modes, reel effects are being executed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, after the reels stop in a stop mode other than the second stop mode, the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") is used as a reel effect. combination).

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), after executing the second operation instruction notification ID2 in a certain game, as shown in FIG. If it stops at the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stop mode) instead of the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" in this example, Although the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed, as shown in FIG. After starting and stopping (temporary stop) at the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3”) as the reel production, and executing the second notification RD2, Start super AT game.

According to this example, after the reels are stopped in a stop mode other than the second stop mode, they can be stopped in the second stop mode, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, even if the reels stop in a stop mode other than the second stop mode in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in subsequent games after the certain game, so the player is not surprised. can be given.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and stop operation means (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1). stop buttons 137 to 139), and a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps), the notification means including: It is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (for example, first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), and the first operation instruction notification is aimed at stopping the first operation instruction notification. The notification includes a suggestion of a first symbol (for example, 7 1 symbol), and the notification means is configured to cause the reel to be in a first stop state (for example, 7 1 symbol) in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. - Seven 1 - Seven 1" symbol combination), it is a means for executing at least the first notification in the game (for example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)), and the said notification The means is configured such that when the reels stop in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first operation instruction notification is executed in the game. The game machine is characterized in that it is provided with means for not executing one notification.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the reels stop in the first stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, at least while executing the first notification in the game, the first operation instruction notification is executed. When the reels stop in the second stop mode in a game in which operation instruction notification is executed, at least the first notification is not executed in the game, so notification can be performed without misleading the player, and the player This prevents players from misunderstanding and prevents players from losing their desire to play.

In addition, the first stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, a 71 symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stopping mode is a mode in which a second symbol (for example, a 71 symbol) is stopped on all reels. For example, it may be a mode in which the seven 3 symbols) are stopped.

With such a configuration, the symbols suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be stopped and displayed, and the player will not be confused.

Furthermore, when the reels stop in a third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means at least It is a means for executing a third notification (for example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12(b-3)) in a game, and the third stop mode is a means for executing a third notification (for example, a third notification RD3 shown in FIG. It may be a mode in which the seven (2) symbols are stopped.

With such a configuration, the player can be made to think that the reels have stopped in the first stop mode in which the first notification is executed, and the player's interest can be increased.

Further, the notification means may be configured to cause the reels to stop in a fourth stop mode (for example, in a stop mode other than the first stop mode, second stop mode, or third stop mode) in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed. The fourth stopping mode is a means of not executing the first notification in the game, and the fourth stopping mode is a means of not executing the first notification in the game, and the fourth stopping mode is a means of not executing the first notification in the game. , Seven 2 symbols, and Seven 3 symbols) may be stopped without being aligned.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a manner that does not mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding the game, and prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, after the reels have stopped in the second stop mode, they may be stopped in the first stop mode as a reel effect.

With such a configuration, the reels can be stopped in the first stopping mode after being stopped in the second stopping mode, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, the notification means is a means that may execute a second operation instruction notification (for example, second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), and the second operation instruction notification includes: The notification includes a suggestion of the second symbol whose goal is to stop the reel, and the notification means is a notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol that the goal is to stop, and the notification means is a notification that the reel is in the second stop mode (for example, " When it stops at the symbol combination “Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3”, it is a means for executing at least a second notification (for example, second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) in the game, When the reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, the notification means at least stops the game. It may also be a means for not executing the second notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a manner that does not mislead the player, prevent the player from misunderstanding the game, and prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Note that the first operation instruction notification and the second operation instruction notification are not limited to notifications that include a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped. The notification may include "right → left", "inside!!", "press inside", etc.).

Further, the third stopping mode or the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which the first symbol (for example, 71 symbol) and the second symbol (for example, 73 symbol) do not stop on all the reels. It may be.

Furthermore, all, a plurality, or one of the first stop mode, the second stop mode, the third stop mode, and the fourth stop mode may be specified by specific characters, numbers, Alternatively, it may include a figure (for example, the number 7).

With such a configuration, since the stopping manners are similar, it may be possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in a game which is equipped with a lottery means capable of internal lottery, and in which the first winning combination (for example, 1-card winning combination (small winning combination 6)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, in FIG. 12(a)) When (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed according to the first operation instruction notification ID1) shown in FIG. It may be configured such that it can be stopped with a symbol combination of ``Seven 1''.

In addition, in a game in which a second winning combination (for example, a one-card winning combination (small winning number 8)) is won, according to the second operation instruction notification (for example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), When (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the reels can be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in a game in which a third winning combination (for example, a one-card winning combination (small winning combination 7)) is won, the first operation instruction notification (for example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) If (or only if) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed without following the instructions, the reels will stop in the third stop mode (for example, a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") It may be configured such that it can be stopped by

<<Embodiment D>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to Embodiment D will be described using FIGS. 14 to 16. Note that for words and phrases that overlap with other embodiments, the words and phrases of this embodiment are given priority, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than FIGS. 14 to 16, priority is given to the descriptions of FIGS. 14 to 16.

<Notification means>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the power is off and the setting key is turned on from off.

<Notification means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. Examples of display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 shown in FIG. , a stored coin count display 125, a game information display 126, and the like. In this example, these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, and the like.

<Notification means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 14(a).

<Notification means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means included in the slot machine 100 include the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and title panel (lamp) 162 shown in FIG. 139, a start lever 135, a reel backlight (not shown) for each reel 110 to 112, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are constituted by LEDs.

Note that the performance button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention is also applicable to pachinko machines, and examples of light emitting means included in pachinko machines include frame lamps, performance buttons, accessories, and the like.

<Setting change/setting confirmation mode>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be explained.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on with a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. (or when the setting key is turned from OFF to ON before the predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off status of the setting key)). It is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which changes (setting changes) are possible.

Here, setting change refers to changing the setting value of the game machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the setting value display device 101a, the operation means ( Each time a press operation of the setting switch (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1 and updated, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the process returns to 1, which is repeated. It is possible to change the setting value.

Further, in the setting change mode, when a push operation by the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted, the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation by the setting key is canceled (in this example, the on When the setting key is pulled out after the operation to turn it off), the state in which the setting values can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the state shifts to the normal game state in which normal games can be played. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

Note that if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or if the operation means (setting switch) is repeatedly pressed down, the set value may change one cycle (e.g. , setting 5→setting 6→setting 1→...→setting 5) and then operating the operating means (start lever 135), the setting is the same as the previous setting.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, after opening the front door 102 (door body) and turning on the power, a certain operation (operation from OFF to ON) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101. It is possible to shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, setting confirmation refers to checking the setting values of the game machine, and in this example, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or By displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) set by changing the setting on the setting value display device 101a, the setting value can be confirmed.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation using the setting key is canceled (in this example, the setting key is removed after the operation to turn from on to off is performed) and the front door 102 is closed, the set value is changed. The state in which confirmation is possible (setting confirmation mode) ends, and a transition is made to the normal game state in which normal games are possible. Note that "cancellation of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off and then removing it", but also "the operation of turning the setting key from on to off". Good too.

In addition, in this specification, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed may be collectively referred to as setting change/setting confirmation mode. , a settings change mode in which only settings can be changed, a settings confirmation mode in which only settings can be confirmed, and a mode in which settings can be changed and settings confirmed.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 14 to 16.

<Various notifications/first status, first notification>
The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment issues the first notification in a first state in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the door (in this example, the front door 102).

FIG. 14(b) is a front view showing an example in which the first notification is executed in the first state.

In this example, the power is turned from OFF to ON while a certain operation (from OFF to ON) is performed using the setting key, and the state changes to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode). The first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open state) in which operations related to the The open state is detected), and the first notification is executed in the first state.

Although the notification mode of the first notification is not particularly limited, in the first notification IF1 of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the character string "Settings changing". By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

Furthermore, since the setting has been changed to a state where settings can be changed, a numerical value (1 in this example) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 1) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

Note that the notification mode of the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emission means (lamp), Notification may be made by multiple or all of them, or in addition to (or in place of) these, notification may be made by a movable body.

Additionally, the first notification is not limited to notifications suggesting that settings are being changed; for example, a display suggesting that operations related to setting changes are possible (for example, ``Settings can be changed.'' ” or a display including a character string such as “Setting switch operation is valid.”).

<Various notifications/second status, second notification>
The notification means of the game machine according to the present embodiment sends the second notification in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. configured to run.

Here, the second state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the closed state of the door (in this example, the front door 102).

FIG. 14(c) is a front view showing an example in which the second notification is executed in the second state.

In this example, the power is turned from OFF to ON while a certain operation (from OFF to ON) is performed using the setting key, and after the state changes to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode), the front door 102 Since the front door 102 is closed, the state is set to a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. , the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the second notification is executed in the second state.

The notification mode of the second notification is not particularly limited, but in the second notification IF2 of this example, the message "Please open the door with the door key when changing settings" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. By displaying the character string, the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please open the door with the door key before changing settings." By executing the second audio notification IF 2b, turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light, and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white, the second sound notification IF 2c is running.

In addition, since the setting value has been changed from setting 1 to setting 2 after transitioning to a state where setting changes are possible, a numerical value indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. (2) is displayed in this example.

According to this example, the notification means is in a first state in which it can accept operations related to setting changes (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). In the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first notification is executed and the operation related to the setting change can be accepted. Since the second notification, which is different from the first notification, is executed in the detected state), the clerk at the game parlor can grasp the state of the game machine at the time of the setting change based on the notification mode by the notification means. settings can be changed appropriately.

Further, the first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the door (in this example, the front door 102), and the second state is the state in which the detection means (in this example, the opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the door (in this example, the front door 102). This is the state in which the closed state is detected, and since the notification is different depending on whether the door is open or closed, the clerk at the game parlor can appropriately change the settings. Furthermore, since notifications are made differently depending on whether the door is open or closed during operation of the game parlor, the clerk of the game parlor may become aware of fraudulent activity by an unauthorized person.

Note that the second state is not limited to a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102; the second state is not limited to a state in which the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102. It may also be a state in which the closed state of the door is detected.

According to this example, in the second state (in this example, the state in which the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), when the door (in this example, the front door 102) is closed, and when the door In some cases, the door may be left open, and even if the door is pseudo-closed by an unauthorized person while the amusement parlor is open, a second notification will be issued, allowing the clerk at the gaming parlor to notice the fraudulent activity of the unauthorized person. There are cases.

Further, the notification mode of the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be one of notification by display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by sound output means (speaker), notification by light emission means (lamp), Notification may be made by multiple or all of them, or in addition to (or in place of) these, notification may be made by a movable body.

In addition, the second notification is not limited to notifications that call attention to settings changes, but may also include, for example, a display indicating that operations related to setting changes are not possible (e.g., "settings cannot be changed"). It may be a display that includes a character string or a display that includes a character string such as "Setting switch operation is invalid"), or a notification that prompts an operation that allows setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). It may be a display including a character string such as

<Setting change operation>
Next, a specific example of the setting change operation will be described in detail using FIGS. 15 and 16.

Here, to explain the terms in the figure, the "power switch" is the "power switch" explained using FIG. 2, and the "door status" is the status (closed or open) of the door (front door 102). The "door sensor" is the "opening/closing sensor (detection means)" described using FIG.

Further, the "setting key" is the "setting key" explained using FIG. 1, and the "setting value display means" is the "setting value display device 101a" explained using FIG. 1 and FIG. The external concentrated terminal board LED is the "external concentrated terminal board LED" described using FIG.

Further, the "liquid crystal display device" is the "liquid crystal display device 157 (display means)" explained using FIG. 1, and the title panel lamp is the title panel lamp 162 (light emitting means) explained using FIG. The upper and side lamps are the upper lamp 142 (light emitting means) and the side lamp 144 (light emitting means) explained using FIG. 14, and the speakers are the speakers 272 and 277 explained using FIG. 3 and FIG. (sound output means).

<Example 1 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing example 1 of the setting change operation in chronological order.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, door closing>
In the state shown in FIG. 15A (1), the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is closed, and the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, since power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED, liquid crystal display device, title panel lamp, and upper and side lamps are all The lights are off and the speakers have stopped producing sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, door closed → door open, setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) is the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(1) with the power OFF, the door closed, and the setting key OFF, with the front door 102 open and the setting key inside the main body 101 pressed. This is a state where it was turned from OFF to ON.

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state and the setting key changes from OFF to ON, so the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is in the open state, and the setting key is However, since power is not being supplied to the slot machine 100, the set value display means is not displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED, liquid crystal display, title panel lamp, upper/side lamp All lights are off and the speakers have stopped producing sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF → Power ON, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(3) is the state in which the power switch is turned on from OFF in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) with the power OFF, the door open, and the setting key ON.

In the same state, the power switch changes from ON to OFF, and the power switch changes from OFF to ON, so the door sensor detects the opening of the door and changes to ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display means. (in this example, 1 indicating setting 1) is displayed, and the external centralized terminal board LED is outputting a control signal (in this example, information indicating that the setting is being changed) from the external centralized terminal board. Lights up to indicate that the

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the open state of the front door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(4) is the state in which the front door 102 is closed while the door is open, the setting key is turned on, and the first notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(3). .

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, but the set value display means continues to display and the external centralized terminal board The LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. By displaying the character string "Please change the settings", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please use the door key to open the door before changing settings." By doing so, the second audio notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are fully lit to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white. The light emission notification IF2c is being executed.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door close, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened while the door is closed, the setting key is turned on, and the second notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(4). .

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and enters the second state (main state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and then the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Setting change operation while opening the door and performing the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(6) is the state in which the setting change operation is performed while the door is opened, the setting key is turned on, and the first notification is being executed as shown in FIG. 15(a)(5). .

In the same state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the front door 102 is in an open state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) was operated (setting change operation) in the state in which the sensor detected the open state of the front door 102, the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Opening the door, turning on the setting key, and operating the lever during the first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(7) is the state in which the start lever 135 is pressed down after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(6).

In the same state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the front door 102 is in an open state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. When the sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operation means is operated (in this example, the operation to confirm the set value using the start lever 135), so the first notification is continued. At the same time, the set value is confirmed to setting 2, and a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the set value is confirmed is displayed on the set value display means.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door open, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(7).

In the same state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation by the setting key has been canceled), the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) ) is completed (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the open state of the front door 102), and the state returns to the normal game state where normal games can be played. At the same time, the first notification is completed, and the setting change completion notification and demonstration performance are started.

Specifically, the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Settings have been changed" to notify that the settings change mode has ended, and a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are turned on in a demonstration pattern corresponding to the demonstration effect, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is turned on in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/door open, setting key OFF → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(9) is a state in which the setting key is turned on in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) in which the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, since the setting key changed from OFF to ON when the power was turned on (a certain operation was performed using the setting key), an operation related to setting confirmation (in this example, an operation of the setting switch, operation of the start lever 135) (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the open state of the front door 102), and in the first state, Execute setting confirmation notification.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a setting confirmation notification display indicating that the settings can be confirmed is executed by displaying a character string "Confirming settings", and the speaker 272 , 277, outputs a voice saying "Settings are being checked" to issue a setting confirmation voice notification indicating that the settings can be confirmed, and lights up all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144, turning them on in blue. By emitting light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in blue, a setting confirmation light emission notification indicating that setting confirmation is possible is executed.

<Example 2 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing example 2 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that Figure 15(b)(1) to Figure 15(b)(3), Figure 15(b)(8), and Figure 15(b)(9) are the same as Figure 15(a)(1) to Figure 15(b)(9). Since this is the same state as (a) (3), (a) (8) in the same figure, and (a) (9) in the same figure, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Setting change operation during door opening, setting key ON, and first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) is the state in which the setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(3) with the door open, the setting key ON, and the first notification in progress.

In the same state, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the front door 102 is in an open state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the first operation means (in this example, the setting switch) was operated (setting change operation) in the state in which the sensor detected the open state of the front door 102, the first notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/door open, first notification → door closed, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(5) is the state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) with the door open and the setting key ON.

In the same state, since the front door 102 has changed from the open state to the closed state, the door sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, but the set value display means continues to display and the external centralized terminal board The LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. By displaying the character string "Please change the settings", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please use the door key to open the door before changing settings." By doing so, the second audio notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are fully lit to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white. The light emission notification IF2c is being executed.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/door closing, setting key ON, lever operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b) (6) is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed while the door is closed, the setting key is turned on, and the second notification is performed as shown in FIG. 15(b)(5). .

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and opened/closed) is in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. When the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the operation to confirm the set value using the start lever 135) is performed, so the second notification is continued. At the same time, the set value is confirmed to setting 2, and a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the set value is confirmed is displayed on the set value display means.

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the setting value is determined by the start lever 135). is executed, the operation is accepted, and the first operation means is operated (in this example, the start lever is 135) is executed, the operation is accepted.

According to this example, since the operation by the first operating means is accepted in either the first state or the second state, it is possible to improve convenience for the clerk at the game parlor.

In addition, in this example, the first notification is sent before and after the operation of the first operating means is executed in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). (in this example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) is executed, and the second notification (in this example Now, the second notification IF2) shown in FIG. 14(c) is executed.

According to this example, since the same notification is performed before and after the operation of the first operation means is performed, the game store clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the settings.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/door close, second notification → door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15B (7) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15B (6).

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and enters the second state (main state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In this example, the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and then the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 3 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing example 3 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that (a) (3), (a) (10) to (a) (11) in the same figure are the same as those in (b) (3), (8) to (8) in the same figure. (b) Since this is the same state as (9), its explanation will be omitted.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/door open, door sensor ON → door sensor OFF, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(4) is the state in which the front door 102 is left open and the door sensor is forcibly turned OFF in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(3) with the door open and the setting key ON. It is.

In the same state, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the door sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the door sensor, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the door sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (door pseudo-closed). Although the sensor detects the door closing and changes from ON to OFF, the set value display means continues to display and the external common terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, the first state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor is in an open state) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of a setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The state changes from the state in which the open state of the front door 102 is detected) to the second state (in this example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). , executes the second notification in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. By displaying the character string "Please change the settings", the second display notification IF 2a is executed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Please use the door key to open the door before changing settings." By doing so, the second audio notification IF 2b is executed, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are fully lit to emit white light, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white. The light emission notification IF2c is being executed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closing, setting change operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(5) is a state in which the setting change operation is performed during the door pseudo-closing and second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(4).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and can be opened/closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. Since the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) was operated (setting change operation) in the state in which the sensor detected the closed state of the front door 102, the second notification is continued. , the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and a numerical value indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closing, lever operation during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16A (6) is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 16A (5).

In this state, a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in an open state and can be opened/closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. When the sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is operated (operation to confirm the setting change), so the second notification is issued. While continuing, the set value is determined to setting 2, and a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the set value is determined is displayed on the set value display means.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closing, setting key OFF during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(6).

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means is operated (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) was executed after the operation of the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting change), the The operation of the second operating means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification is continued (the setting change mode cannot be ended).

In this example, in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102), the first operating means is operated (in this example, the setting value is determined by the start lever 135). When the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed after , the operation of the second operation means is accepted, while the operation of the second operation means is state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), after the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the operation to confirm the set value using the start lever 135), the second operation means is executed. When the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operation means is not accepted.

According to this example, since the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state, the clerk at the game store understands that the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be grasped based on whether or not the operation of the second operation means is accepted.

Note that even if the second operation means is operated (turning the setting key from ON to OFF) while the second notification is being executed, the notification means continues to execute the second notification. good. According to this example, even if an unauthorized person operates the setting key while the game parlor is open, the second notification is issued, so the clerk at the gaming parlor may become aware of the fraudulent act of the unauthorized person.

Further, the notification means may continue to execute the second notification even if the second operation unit is operated (even if the setting key is pulled out) during the execution of the second notification. According to this example, even if the setting key is removed by an unauthorized person while the game parlor is open, the second notification is issued, so that the clerk at the gaming parlor may become aware of the fraudulent activity of the unauthorized person.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-closing, setting key OFF → setting key ON during second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned on in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) in which the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the first operation means is operated (in this example, Since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key from OFF to ON) was executed after the operation of the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting change), the The operation of the second operation means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification continues.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, second notification in progress → Door open, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(9) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened during the door pseudo-closing and second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(8).

In the same state, the front door 102 changes from the closed state to the open state, and enters the second state (main state) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. In the example, the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102). Since the open state of the door 102 has been detected, the first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described with reference to FIG. By executing the first display notification IF1a and outputting the voice "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272 and 277, the first voice notification IF1b is executed and the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are fully lit. The first light emission notification IF1c is executed by emitting white light and lighting the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 4 of setting change operation>
FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing example 4 of the setting change operation in chronological order. Note that FIG. 15(b)(1) to FIG. 15(b)(7) are in the same state as FIG. 15(a)(1) to FIG. 15(a)(7), so their explanation will be omitted. .

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurrence>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(0) is a state in which an error (first error) has occurred.

In this state, since an error has occurred while the power is on, the door is open, and the setting key is OFF, an error notification indicating that an error has occurred is executed.

Specifically, an error display indicating that the first error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a display including the character string "first error occurred"), and the speaker is 272 and 277, an error sound indicating that the first error has occurred (in this example, a sound saying "first error has occurred") is output, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are switched to the first error. The error notification is executed by lighting up in an error notification mode (flashing in red in this example) indicating that the error has occurred, and displaying an error code on the payout number display 127.

Here, errors (first errors) that may occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, and the like.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are stuck, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E1. Medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E2. The medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (or clearing the RAM, clearing the RWM, or initializing the RWM).

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E3. The medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medals do not pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 normally, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. The medal insertion abnormality 3 and the medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E4. Medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. All of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 are resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E7. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E8. A RAM failure is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E9. The winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted.

Note that the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors (first errors) that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, excessive dispensing error, incorrect dispensing error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormal error, frame Examples include an open error, a RAM clear error, and an impact sensor error. These errors are also resolved when the error release switch is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurred, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(b)(7).

In the same state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation by the setting key has been canceled), the operation related to the setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) ) is completed (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the open state of the front door 102), and the state returns to the normal game state where normal games can be played. At the same time, the first notification is ended and the error notification that was suspended in the setting change mode is restarted.

Specifically, an error display indicating that the first error has occurred is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, a display including the character string "first error occurred"), and the speaker is 272 and 277, an error sound indicating that the first error has occurred (in this example, a sound saying "first error has occurred") is output, and the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are switched to the first error. The error notification is executed by lighting up in an error notification mode (flashing in red in this example) indicating that the error has occurred, and displaying an error code on the payout number display 127.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurred, setting key OFF → error resolved>
The state shown in FIG. 16B (9) is a state in which the error has been resolved and the reset SW has been turned ON in the state shown in FIG. 16B (8) where the error has occurred and the setting key is OFF.

In the same state, since the error has been resolved and the reset SW has changed from OFF to ON, the first (in this example, the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) is ended, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state where normal gaming is possible, and an error notification is issued. The process has been completed, and a setting change completion notification and demonstration performance have begun.

Specifically, the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Settings have been changed" to notify that the settings change mode has ended, and a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demonstration pattern, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps). ), the notification means is in a first state (for example, when the front door 102 is in an open state and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102). The notification means indicates a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (for example, a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the closed state of the front door 102, or a state in which the front door 102 is in a closed state). means for executing a second notification (for example, the second notification IF2 shown in FIG. The game machine may be characterized in that the second notification is different from the first notification.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the clerk at the game parlor can grasp the state of the game machine at the time of changing the settings based on the notification mode by the notification means, and can appropriately change the settings. can.

Further, a first operating means (for example, a start lever 135) is provided, and when an operation of the first operating means (for example, an operation for determining a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, The operation may be accepted when the operation is accepted and the operation of the first operation means is executed in the second state.

With such a configuration, the operation by the first operating means is accepted in either the first state or the second state, so it is possible to improve the convenience of the clerk at the game parlor.

Further, a second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, an operation to confirm a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, the second operation means (for example, a setting key) is provided. When an operation of the second operating means (for example, an operation of turning a setting key from ON to OFF) is executed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, and the operation of the first operating means is performed in the second state. If the operation of the second operation means is executed after the operation is executed, the operation of the second operation means may not be accepted.

With such a configuration, since the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state, the clerk at the game parlor can understand that the operation of the second operation means is not accepted in the second state. In addition, the current state can be determined based on whether or not the operation of the second operating means is accepted.

Further, the notification means performs the first notification before and after the operation of the first operation means (for example, the operation to confirm the set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state. The notification means may be a means for performing the second notification before and after the operation of the first operation means is performed in the first state.

With such a configuration, since the same notification is performed before and after the operation of the first operating means is performed, the game store clerk can grasp the state of the game machine and appropriately change the settings.

Further, the first state is a state in which the detection means detects the open state of the door, and the first state is a state where the detection means detects the open state of the door. The second state may be a state in which the detection means detects a closed state of the door.

With such a configuration, since the notification is different depending on whether the door is open or closed, the clerk at the game parlor can appropriately change the settings. Furthermore, since notifications are made differently depending on whether the door is open or closed during operation of the game parlor, the clerk of the game parlor may become aware of fraudulent activity by an unauthorized person.

Further, in the second state, the door may be closed, and in the second state, the door may be open.

With this configuration, even if the door is pseudo-closed by an unauthorized person while the gaming parlor is open, a second notification will be issued, so if the gaming parlor clerk notices the fraudulent activity of the unauthorized person, the second notification will be issued. There is.

Additionally, the first notification is not limited to notifications suggesting that settings are being changed; for example, a display suggesting that operations related to setting changes are possible (for example, ``Settings can be changed.'' ” or a display including a character string such as “Setting switch operation is valid.”).

In addition to (or in place of) the notification that suggests that settings are being changed, the first notification is a notification that suggests that the opening/closing sensor is detecting the open state of the door (for example, , a display including a character string such as ``The door is being opened'', an audio message such as ``The door is being opened'', various lamps blinking, etc.).

In addition, the second notification is not limited to notifications that call attention to settings changes, but may also include, for example, a display indicating that operations related to setting changes are not possible (e.g., "settings cannot be changed"). It may be a display that includes a character string or a display that includes a character string such as "Setting switch operation is invalid"), or a notification that prompts an operation that allows setting changes (for example, "Please close the door"). It may be a display including a character string such as

In addition to (or instead of) the notification that calls attention to the setting change, the second notification is a notification that suggests that the opening/closing sensor is detecting the closed state of the door (for example, " (The display includes character strings such as "The door is closing" and "The door is pseudo-closing," the output of sounds such as "The door is closing" and "The door is pseudo-closing," and the blinking of various lamps.) You can.

Further, the first operating means is not limited to the start lever 135 and the setting switch, but may be other operating means such as a production button, and the second operating means is not limited to the setting key. , reset SW, or other operating means may be used.

Further, even if a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means , a first state (e.g., the front door 102 is in an open state, and the opening/closing sensor indicates that the front door 102 is open The first notification (for example, the first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) may be executed without executing the error notification in the state in which the error notification is detected.

With such a configuration, the first notification can be executed with priority over the error notification, and convenience for the clerk at the game parlor can be improved.

Further, even if a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 to 4, medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means , the notification means is in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (for example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor has detected the closed state of the front door 102, or a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state). 102 is in an open state and the open/close sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102), the second notification (for example, the second notification IF 2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) is executed. You can.

With such a configuration, the first notification can be executed with priority over the error notification, and convenience for the clerk at the game parlor can be improved.

Further, in the state where the certain error has occurred, the first state (for example, the state where the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor has detected the open state of the front door 102), or the state where the front door 102 is in the open state (For example, the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102.) If the certain error continues in the state where the first state or the second state has been completed, the notifying means may cause the first notifying or the second state to be detected. In place of the second notification, an error notification that suggests that a certain error has occurred (e.g., an error display that suggests that a certain error has occurred, an error message that suggests that a certain error has occurred) It is also possible to output an error sound or turn on a lamp in an error notification mode indicating that a certain error has occurred.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably deal with errors after performing a setting change operation.

<<Other embodiments>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 32. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 17 to 32 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 17 to 32, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 32, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 17 to 32.

FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain specifically using FIG. 18, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the diagram). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 20) A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed (described later in FIG. 17) (the line on which winning determination is made). When the symbol corresponding to stops, it is determined that the prize has been won. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

FIG. 18 shows a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is. Note that among the lines shown in FIG. 18, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The active line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, line L4 becomes valid. (becomes used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-rightward line L3, may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines depending on the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific prize winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state that will be described later. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 19(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 19(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board storage case 210. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 25) inside is arranged. be. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the right side plate 260, which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value adjusts the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing games for a predetermined period of time. It is a value called a "payout rate", and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6".

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detects OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power control board 252B (see FIG. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 19(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display numerically the game modes (setting values) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292.

In addition, the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed as a number, which can be used to check the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value confirmation process that allows checking the setting value is started, and the setting key switch 281 When the setting key is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value changing process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired gaming mode can be selected. can. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation is also referred to as the setting value change mode. The period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the start conditions and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, the conditions for starting the set value change mode are (1) that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the ON state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. , is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the starting condition for the set value confirmation mode is that the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the power is turned on, and (2) the front door 102 is left open. This is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in this embodiment, the start condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state, while the end condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change process (set value confirmation process) while the front door 102 is in the closed state, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change process (set value confirmation process) is not started based on an illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudster cannot terminate the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process). Therefore, it becomes easier to apprehend fraudsters on the spot.

In addition, in the setting value change mode, the effecting devices such as the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to indicate that the setting value is being changed. In the setting value confirmation mode, the above production device is used to make a notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as setting value confirmation notification). )I do.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel unit 700R inside a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. At the top of this reel case 702, connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 are provided for connection to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 25). A left reel 110 is arranged in the left reel unit 700L, a middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m, and 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m to 112m is a stepping motor. The following will explain the left reel unit 700L as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. The left reel unit 700L includes a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reel 110. It is attached to a mounting base 732.

Note that replacement work can be performed for each reel unit 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L breaks down, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 21B is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 includes a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. In the reflector 742, three openings BK1 to BK3 communicating from the front side to the back side are formed in a row in the vertical direction. Furthermore, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LEDs 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the LED 745 is configured so that when irradiating light, it does not interfere with light irradiated to other positions. Thereby, light can be irradiated to each of the positions No. 1 to No. 9 shown in FIG. 18. For example, by lighting all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate some of the symbols from behind among the symbols that are visible to the player. Note that the number and position of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 3.

FIG. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) includes a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a circular rotating part 190a that is formed to protrude outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. and an instruction section 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are placed, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number from among 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values representing settings (setting values). That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output information on the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. If it points to "B", it means that the hexadecimal value of "B" has been selected, and information on that value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, selects the numerical value (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) selected by the first selection switch 190. The first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value indicated by the instruction unit 190b as the selected setting value.

Note that instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 22(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may also be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 22(b) has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a notch window 191b formed in this rotating part 191a. . Further, on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

This rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value visible through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(b), if the numerical value visible from the notch 191b is "F", it means that the hexadecimal numerical value F has been selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into 4 binary bits. It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, selects a selected numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal 0 to The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any one of the numerical values of F.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 22(c) includes a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b that has 16 contacts and is slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

This slide switch 192 selects the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the location of the number "0", it means that the number 0 in hexadecimal notation is selected, and the information of that number is converted into binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, selects a selected value (a value from 0 to F in hexadecimal) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any of the following.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 22(a) to 22(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when the power is not supplied. Even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be maintained. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the value to the value intended by the game parlor, for example. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow you to confirm the selected numerical value, it is easy to confirm the set value, and it is highly convenient.

FIG. 22(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d) is composed of a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166, which functions as a confirmation button, shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a) is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by the player, this second selection switch 194 is an operation means that cannot be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided in a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. For example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined period of time, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. Good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 when any one of the buttons is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, detects which of the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is such that this is possible.

Note that instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and either one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, it cannot operate when it is not energized and cannot hold the selected value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set values. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 is configured so that the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, it may be configured so that it is backed up.

FIG. 22(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 17. A left button 167 and a right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 22(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display can be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons can be used for a continuous hit effect, and the other chance button can be used as a hidden button. You can. Here, a hidden button is one that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, a button that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, an operation suggestion display or an operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a built-in effect lamp does not illuminate). (at least one or both), when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 include the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error This is the volume value of the sound (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by a player, and is a switch used by a clerk at a game parlor when selecting a setting value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration performance is being performed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration performance is a performance that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the game being restarted after one game ended. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when a demonstration performance is started with the power saving mode selected, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . Furthermore, by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 22, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be reduced. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. Additionally, in the non-power saving mode, you can also select mute.

FIG. 23(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays that the selection value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the words "mute". Furthermore, none of the seven levels of horizontal level display are lit. When muting is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

FIG. 23(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(B) displays the words "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 23(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(C) displays the characters "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 23(D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(D) displays characters indicating that the selected volume value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for presenting the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, a special volume may be selected that cannot be selected using the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected using the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined period of time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 22(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. Further, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the words "power saving mode", seven volume level selection values, and seven horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. There is. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 22(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(b) displays the text "Power saving mode" and the text "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. There is. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 22(a), the slot machine 100 is Setting to power saving mode is selected. Note that even if it is selected to set the power saving mode, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, in order to be set to the power saving mode, it is necessary to be in the demo state. becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even if the demo state is entered. Further, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to a non-power saving mode (normal mode).

Note that the volumes output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(C) is the same. The volume output with the selected value is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 23(a).

FIG. 23A is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 displays a third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays the words "Volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. Further, in the five level display, only the first level at the bottom is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). When the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once, the level increases by one level, and when the left button 167 is pressed once, the level decreases by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(A), the level will not drop any further. That is, muting cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. Note that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 23(a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the words "Volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 5. Furthermore, in the five-stage vertical level display, all of the first to fifth levels are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 is in seven levels, while the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 is in five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values for each of the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the fifth row is 91, the sixth row is 109, and the seventh row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, excluding the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage, the remaining stages are the 2nd to 6th stages. That is, the second stage (36) of seven stages is the first stage of five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of seven stages is the fifth stage of five stages. Therefore, only the clerk at the game parlor can select the setting value (18) for the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) for the seventh stage. In addition, the first stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the first stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage of the 7th stage (54) ) may be the first stage of five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of seven stages may be the fifth stage of five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be set to 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

While the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect image display device 157, press the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that had been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, in the same state, if you press the right button 167 instead of the left button 167 once, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then will be replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, A display appears indicating that the selected volume value is at the fourth level. These displays are displayed no matter what selection value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the left button 167 is pressed once, the selected value of 2/5 will be displayed. Further, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value of 4/5 will be displayed. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the previous selection value is discarded, the initial value of the volume level of 3/5 of the third volume selection icon SI3 is reselected, and the left button 167 or the right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and when the second selection switch 194 is operated, the value changed from the initial value is set as the first value. 3 Displayed as volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intentions can be prioritized. On the other hand, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed on the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection By operating the switch 190, a value that has been changed from the previously selected value is displayed as the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 24. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Regarding the RAM 308, the description of RAM (Random Access Memory) is used as an example to indicate that it is a readable/writable storage medium, but the description of RWM (Read/Write Memory) or "RAM" is not acceptable. May be used. Furthermore, the name of the process related to RAM may also be written as RWM (read/write memory) or a name that uses the word "RAM". In this specification, the term "RAM" will be mainly used. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 controls a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and a solenoid provided to the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 that drives, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor 180m (see FIG. 25) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal input possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a drive circuit 328 that drives the game start lamp 121, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Each component of the main control unit 300 described above is mounted on the main control unit board 300B (see FIG. 25).

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel A lamp 164, a bet button lamp 200, a backlight module 740, a first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor 163m of the shutter 163 (see FIG. 25). The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-control unit 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-control unit board 400B (see FIG. 25).

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-controller 500.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit, hopper unit, and production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 25 shows a power control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and a production movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, and DC1 are also shown in each of the reel unit 700, hopper unit 180, and production movable body unit 160U.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 25 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a hopper motor drive IC 326i and a reel motor drive IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 24 is configured on the main control board 300B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 328, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that had been supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are each supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, so that the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B, which is connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 700 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 700. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 24 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that were supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are each supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U is driven. It becomes possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 24, and although not shown in FIG. 25, the second sub-control board is also separated from the power supply control board 252B. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are also electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may also be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 (power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up in the energized state shown in FIG. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, as shown in FIG. 26, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 25 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the harness MR1 or that the connectors RC1 and MC2 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. Can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is suspected that there is an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. Can be done.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, there are LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs, such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL. For example, even if it is an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in a power outage state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a different purpose than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 viewed diagonally from above.

The hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 27(a) also includes a connector HC1 shown in FIG. 25. This hopper unit 180 includes a storage tank 181 for storing medals, and a disk-shaped hopper disk 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181. In FIG. 27(a), a portion of this hopper disk 182 is visible. The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passing holes 1821 at intervals in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole large enough to allow a medal, which is a game medium, to pass through. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by a motor 180m (see FIG. 25), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passing hole 1821.

FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passing holes 1821 can be seen. Even in a power outage state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction by inserting a finger into the medal passing hole 1821.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the hopper disk 182. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 180m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MH, and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. On the other hand, if harness MH is disconnected or not properly connected to connector HC1 and/or connector MC1, no matter how much you manually rotate hopper disk 182, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up. First, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible that there is an abnormality in the harness MH or that the connectors HC1 and MC1 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

The induced current generated in the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B, similar to the induced current generated in the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above, and normalizes. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the respective boards 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, in the same way as when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is also possible to check for electrical connection failures on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

Note that when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated in a power outage state, the monitor LED lights up brightly due to the increased number of manually rotated movable bodies. Become.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 17 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied to the 24V power line and 5V power line from the movable motor drive IC 424i. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, it may be due to an abnormality in the harness SD or the connection between the connectors DC1 and SC3. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

Furthermore, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. Hereinafter, points different from the connection example explained using FIG. 25 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In FIG. 28, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 28, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700. has been done.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example shown in FIG. 28, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Furthermore, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in a power outage state, if it is normal, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the monitors such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML The LED does not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 28, by providing the hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that a connection failure will occur. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

Note that the hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. A defective electrical connection can be confirmed by generating an induced current by manual operation in a power-off state, and by lighting up these monitor LEDs if normal.

In the explanation here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182, and the shutter 163 are used as movable bodies, but the explanation is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, points different from the internal configuration explained using FIG. 3 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted. Furthermore, the same reference numerals used up to now may be used for components having the same names as those described above.

FIG. 29(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is opened to 180 degrees with respect to the main body 101. As a result, both the inside of the main body 101 and the inside of the front door 102 face forward (towards the front in the paper of FIG. 29).

A reel unit 700 is attached to the vertical center portion of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 29(a). A main control board storage case 210 is arranged above the reel unit 700. The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has light-transmitting properties. The main control board 300B is housed in the main control board storage case 210. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25, and the main control board 300B shown in FIG. LED5ML is shown. Furthermore, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) is also equipped with an LED 3ML for error monitoring and a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292, which are operation means. That is, these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML), which are light emitting means, and the setting key switch 281 and setting change button 292, which are operation means, are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). Further, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. Further, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with an opening or a notch so that these operating means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has identification marks for each circuit component (board component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, etc. is displayed. Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED1" is displayed below the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and "LED2" is displayed below the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML. "LED3" is displayed under the error monitoring LED3ML, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. Displayed. These displays are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210. Note that instead of displaying "LED1", "24V monitor LED" may be displayed, and instead of "setting key SW", "SW1" may be displayed. That is, the name or abbreviation of each component may be displayed, or an identification number or identification symbol may be displayed. Furthermore, a sticker 210S on which the management number of the stored board is printed is affixed to the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210. Although this seal 210S is non-transparent, it may be transparent or translucent. Alternatively, it may be a sticker with a stamped seal or handwritten sign. Alternatively, the display may be printed directly on the main control board storage case 210 instead of a sticker.

A power supply device 252 and a hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700. The power supply device 252 includes a power control board 252B having the same configuration as the power control board 252B shown in FIG. 25. The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) is housed in a transparent or semi-transparent resin case. In FIG. 29(a), a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and a power switch 244 are shown. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) which are light emitting means and the power switch 244 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (power control board 252B). Further, the light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power supply control board 252B also passes through the transparent or semi-transparent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. Further, the case of the power supply device 252 is also provided with an opening or a notch so that the power switch 244 can be accessed. Further, the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) also displays an identification display for each circuit component (board component), similarly to the main control board 300B. Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in Figure 29(a), "LED7" is displayed below the power control 24V monitor LED24PL, and "LED8" is displayed below the power control 5V monitor LED5PL. "Power SW" is displayed below the power switch 244. These displays are visible through the transparent or translucent case. Note that the case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LED as the light emitting means and the switch as the operating means are provided on the surface of the metal case, and the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the operating means can be operated. An identification mark is also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B', and power supply device 252 may be located above or below movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 is arranged on the left side plate 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control board storage case 220 is 220' is arranged at the top of the front door 102. That is, it is arranged on the back side of the production device 160. The sub-control unit storage case 220' is also a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has translucency. A sub-control board 400B' is housed in this sub-control board storage case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is an effect control board that combines the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 24, but it has a configuration of only the first sub-control board 400B. Alternatively, the configuration may include only the control board of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 29(a) shows a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) also includes a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL that monitors the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 and a first selection switch 190 that is an operating means. Implemented. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) which are light emitting means and the first selection switch 190 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (sub control board 400B'). In addition, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs is confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. be able to. Further, the sub-control board storage case 220' is also provided with an opening or a notch so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) also displays an identification display for each circuit component (board component) in the same way as the main control board 300B. Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED4" is displayed below the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, and "LED5" is displayed below the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL. "LED6" is displayed below the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed below the first selection switch 190. Further, in the lower right corner of the sub-control board 400B', an indication 4001 of "board management number 0002" printed in two stages on the resist layer of the board is displayed. The identification display for each circuit component and the "board management number 0002" display 4001 are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220'.

FIG. 29(b) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H1 in a standing position, and FIG. 29(c) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in a sitting position. be.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views has the front door 102 opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101; 102 shows the front side. In addition, the people H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors and gaming parlors who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700. The person is a clerk at the store, and is located directly in front of the main body 101.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the field of vision V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees is from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the LEDs such as LED 3ML for error monitoring mounted on the main control board 300B that emit light as a result can be seen at the same time, or the line of sight can be moved slightly upwards. It is only visible.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the visual range V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees is the range from the reel unit 700 to the power supply device 252 located below. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the LEDs, such as the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the power supply device 252, which emit light as a result, can be seen at the same time, or can be seen by simply moving the line of sight up and down a little. It is. In addition, the power supply device 252 and the hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 29(a)) placed next to it also enter the viewing range V2, and the hopper disk 182 (see FIG. 27) that is operated by hand and the power source that emits light as a result. Each LED such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the device 252 can be visually recognized at the same time, or by simply moving the line of sight slightly from side to side.

Note that in FIGS. 29(b) and 29(c), the main control board 300B is schematically shown for easy understanding, so the front surface 300f (the surface on the person H1, H2 side) of the main control board 300B is the same as the reel unit 700. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 14(a) described later, the front surface 300f of the main control board 300B is located on the rear side (inner side) of the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. be. That is, the movable body unit protrudes more toward the person who operates the movable body by hand than the light emitting means. Therefore, from below the main control board 300B, the reel unit 700 becomes an obstacle and it is difficult to see the main control board 300B.

FIG. 30 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. That is, FIG. 30 is a view of the slot machine of the second embodiment viewed from above, with the lower side of the figure being the front side and the upper side being the rear side.

FIG. 30(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is completely closed, and FIG. The door 102 is shown opened 90 degrees.

The main control board storage case 210 housing the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are shown in the main body 101 in FIG. 30(a). Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281 are shown on the main control board 300B. Also shown is a sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board storage case 210.

The front door 102 in FIG. 30(a) shows a sub-control board storage case 220' in which a sub-control board 400B' is housed. Three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190 are shown on the sub-control board 400B'.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, there is no light-emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emits light by manually operating movable bodies such as the reels 110 to 112 and the hopper disk 182. It is not visible from the exterior of 100.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 30(b) with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees, the range where light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches is schematically shown in gray. Note that the way in which the range of light reaches here is shown with emphasis on the directivity of the LED, and in reality, the closer the light is to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range will be illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 that is opened 90 degrees. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', and the first selection switch 190 can be operated even in a dark place. In addition, the light reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 30(b)), making it possible to visually recognize the circuit components even in a dark place. . Furthermore, it becomes possible to visually recognize the identification display displayed for each circuit component. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is transmitted to the display 400 of "board management number 0002" printed on the sub control board 400B'.
1, making it possible to check the board management number even in a dark place. Further, although the seal 210S described using FIG. 292(a) is non-transparent, in a dark place the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the area around the seal 210S. You can now check what is displayed on the screen. Note that if the seal 210S is translucent, it will be easier to confirm. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and if a sticker is affixed to that part, the content displayed on the sticker is You can also check.

Although FIG. 30(b) schematically shows only the range where light reaches from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to back electromotive force, light due to back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, and the sub control board Most of the storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' can be seen even in a dark place.

As explained above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is emitted from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML). The sub-control board 400B', which is a board different from the board on which the 3ML) is mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that accommodates the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, but may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer the angle is to 180 degrees, the harder it is for light to reach. Conversely, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B' reaches the main control board storage case 210 and the main control board 300B.

Note that most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are exposed to light due to back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. , making it visible even in dark places. Furthermore, most of the main control board storage case 210 and most of the main control board 300B are illuminated by back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B, making it dark. It can be seen anywhere.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 25. Hereinafter, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 25 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals used up to now are used for components having the same names as those described above.

In a modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 31, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 that protect the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 that protect the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. Further, the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT10.

The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 using large-capacity capacitors can absorb the amount of charge of surge power, and can prevent circuit breakdown due to surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 also absorb the amount of charge of the back electromotive force, and no current due to the back electromotive force flows. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are operated manually, if these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are functioning, none of the LEDs will emit light. On the other hand, if some of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are damaged, the damaged protection circuit will not be able to absorb the charge of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force will flow. , a light-emitting LED will appear. Therefore, depending on which LED lights up when the disc 182 or reels 110 to 112 are operated by hand, it may be possible to locate the protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 that are suspected of being damaged.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. Further, the protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 32(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(b), the protection circuit PT21 is connected between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power line in parallel with another element (in this figure, it is a resistor, but it may also be a coil, etc.). with connected diodes. Furthermore, the protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 32(b) is connected in parallel with another element (in this figure, it is a resistor, but it may also be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. It has a diode.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, surge current that would otherwise flow in the opposite direction can be prevented from flowing through the rectification action of the diode.

The current caused by the back electromotive force generated when moving a movable body such as the reel 110 by hand also stops flowing due to the rectification effect of the diodes adopted in the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML does not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, they will be in an insulated state, so no current will flow in either direction, and no current due to back electromotive force will flow, so the reel Even if the movable body such as 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not emit light, but if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, they will be in an insulated state. A current flows through other elements connected in parallel, and a current due to the back electromotive force also flows, and when a movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML may emit light. be. Therefore, unless the capacitor is used together with the protection circuit PT3 with a large capacity (the main control board 300B shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b) has the same When the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML emits light by manually operating a movable body such as the control 24V capacitor 24MC), the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22 It is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12 are damaged or disconnected, and that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above description also applies to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22, and examples of the movable body include a sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under control from the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 22), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a power-off state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 22) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are lit by this induced current if normal. do. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, the induced current that has flowed into the main control board 156P flows through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 22) to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 22), so that it is not normal. If so, the LEDs provided on the respective boards 182P and 160P are turned on. Further, as movable bodies, there may be a production movable body (for example, a croon) driven by a motor whose rotation is controlled by the main control unit, and two movable parts driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-control unit. It may be a performance movable body or the like.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, Sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED
5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED24PL, power control 5V monitor LED5
PL, LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m , payout motor, etc.] and a movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] that can be operated by the drive of the motor. For example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.], and a detachable harness that relays the board and the movable unit [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness SD ], the motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the harness, and the board has an impedance adjusting means [ For example, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] are provided, and the impedance adjustment means manually operates the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor. The impedance is adjusted so that the light emitting means emits light by the induced current generated by the back electromotive force, and the impedance is adjusted so as to regulate the flow of the induced current in the energized state, and the light emitting means In a power-off state, the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the movable body, thereby emitting light.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness,
It is characterized by ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even in a power-off state.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, check whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light. This can be confirmed even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable unit is installed on the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the power outage state may be a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not supplied from the island equipment.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [for example, the reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [for example, the hopper unit 180], or a performance operation unit [for example, the performance movable body unit 160U] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, the game machine checks whether the harness is connected normally or whether the harness is disconnected. This can be confirmed even when the power is off.

Note that the board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control board 300B, 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control board 400B, 160P or second sub-control board 300B, 156P]. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, hopper relay board 901B, reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable body unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, and a plurality of harnesses MR11 and harness MR12 in series].

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the light emitting means is energized or not. That is, in a power-on state, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, signal monitor), and in a power-off state, it can be used for checking electrical connections.

Also,
``The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means emits light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as " In the first case, the light emission continues even if the motor stops driving [for example, the light emission is caused by the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC. There is a case where it continues], and
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see. In addition, the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force no longer flows in, and the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even if the current due to the back electromotive force ceases to flow in. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed after the operation.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness,
It is characterized by ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"); There are cases where the light continues to emit even if the motor stops driving [for example, the light continues to emit due to the charge stored in the capacitor],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, it is possible to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means even if you stop manually operating the movable body, and it becomes easier to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means. .

Also,
``A capacitor that can store the electric charge generated by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by being equipped with a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC. ”
Also explained.

By using a common electronic component called a capacitor, it is possible to easily confirm the light emission of the light emitting means.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 27) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected normally, and by manually operating the third movable body. When operated, it is possible to check whether the third harness is properly connected, and it is possible to check the connections of the two types of harnesses separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, one common harness including three harnesses MR1 to MR3]. ,
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness,
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, whether the first movable body is manually operated or the third movable body is operated, it is possible to confirm whether the harness is properly connected. Moreover, the connection of one common type of harness can be confirmed by operating the movable body that is easier to manually operate between the first movable body and the third movable body. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body and driving the first motor in a power-off state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body and driving the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

After installing the movable body unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally by checking whether or not the common light emitting means is emitting light. You can check even if the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the movable body unit may include a fourth movable body (for example, the middle reel 111) that can be operated by driving a fourth motor (for example, the motor 111m).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a removable harness [for example, harness MR1, harnesses MR1 to MR3, or harness MR11 and harness MR12, or harnesses MR11 to MR31 and harnesses MR12 to 32] that relays the board and the first motor. Game console. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether the first harness is connected normally or the second harness is also connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed whether the first harness is disconnected or whether the second harness is disconnected.

Note that a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11, and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor The embodiment may include a harness [for example, a harness MR3, a harness MR31, and a harness MR32].

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the first movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the third movable body.

Also,
``Constructed so that the light emitting means emits light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light-emitting means is configured to emit light even by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
a first movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [for example, hopper disk 182] operable by the drive of a second motor [for example, motor 180m];
A game machine comprising:
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [for example, motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [for example, harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the power-off state to drive the second motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the movable body of the first movable body unit (the first movable body), it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected normally. By operating the movable body of the second movable body unit (the second movable body), it is possible to check whether the second harness is properly connected. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The first harness includes a first motor side harness [for example, harness MR12] and a first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11],
The certain board is electrically connected to the first motor [for example, motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [for example, harness MR12],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor side harness [for example, harness MH2] and a second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1],
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1]. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
a first movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [for example, hopper disk 182] operable by the drive of a second motor [for example, motor 180m];
A game machine comprising:
The first movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via harness MH),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body and driving the first motor in a power-off state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body and driving the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emitting device is used to check whether each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emitted from the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when each movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As explained above, it has the special effect of making it easier to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is something that
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing each movable body unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether the first harness is connected normally or the second harness is also connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed whether the first harness is disconnected or whether the second harness is disconnected.

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the first movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the second movable body is stopped in the energized state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the second movable body.

Also,
``Constructed so that the light emitting means emits light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the second movable body is manually operated to drive the second motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means, and to check whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally. This makes it easier to check whether or not they are electrically connected properly.

According to the above description,
``First light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a signal monitoring LED, a 7-segment display, a set value display, etc.];
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] A movable body unit having a movable body [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. It is something that is
In the case where the second light emitting means also emits light by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state to drive the motor and receiving a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. There is a
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to check whether the common harness is connected normally by manually operating the common movable body using both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or malfunctioning, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), these light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32]. can be,
The certain board is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31]. and
The certain board is electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED5ML] and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``First light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a signal monitoring LED, a 7-segment display, a set value display, etc.];
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] A movable body unit having a movable body [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when the power is off.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally or not by checking whether or not the plurality of light emitting means emit light. You can check even if the game machine is out of power. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually check the gaming machine even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable unit is installed on the game machine at the factory, it is necessary to check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. Can be done. As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the first light emitting means is connected to a power line with a first voltage [e.g. 24V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line with a second voltage [e.g. 5V]. It may be connected to. Further, the first light emitting means is provided on a first board [for example, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B]. It may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp, and the second light emitting means may be a 7 segment display.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine characterized by comprising a removable harness (for example, a harness to which both 24V and 5V power is supplied) that relays the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this game machine, when the plurality of light emitting means emit light, the surroundings of the board can be easily visually confirmed without the use of a light projecting means.

Also,
“The first light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [e.g., main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a different substrate from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first board and the movable body unit;
a removable harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check whether the movable body unit and the first board, and the first board and the second board are electrically connected normally.

Also,
“The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, or emitting light when a condition is met];
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when a condition is met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether they are in the energized state or the power-off state. That is, in a power-on state, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, signal monitor), and in a power-off state, it can be used for checking electrical connections.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current (e.g., induced current) generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through each of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. becomes easier to do.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
A second light emitting means [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL] provided on the second board [for example, power control board 252B],
Motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and movable bodies that can be operated by driving the motors [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprocket, croon, etc.] [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.];
A game machine comprising:
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first board;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
Equipped with
The motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness,
The motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first board, and the second harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
The second light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] having a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m];
A game machine comprising:
A relay board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33] that relays the movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] and the relay board;
a detachable second harness that relays the relay board and the first board [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31];
Equipped with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board, and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit having a croon, etc.];
A door body [for example, front door 102],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
When the door body is closed, the light emitting means is not visible [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
When the door body is opened, the light emitting means and the movable body are visible [for example, FIGS. 30(b) and 30(c)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means and the operation means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29] is,
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is invisible from the exterior of the game machine [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since an unauthorized person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, he or she may use the light emitting means to confirm that power is not being properly supplied from the power source and attempt to attach an unauthorized device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)]. machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Furthermore, the movable body unit may protrude further toward a person who manually operates the movable body than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position where it can be seen by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing position.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit [for example, the reel unit 700] [for example, the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body by hand while sitting.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the performance of the game [for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a performance control board],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The sub-control board may perform control based on commands transmitted from the main control board (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from outside the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power-off state may be a state in which power cannot be received from outside the game machine (commercial power supply) (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain printed display [for example, "board number 0" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002” display 4001, a sticker 210S printed with “board number 0001” attached to the main control board storage case 210],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain print display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. 30(b) When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101 as shown in , light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches].
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

In other words, the position where the light from the light emitting means reaches may be a position illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or a position within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. However, it may also be a position that becomes visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light (the same applies hereinafter).

The certain printed display is, for example, a display (for example, a display by silk printing) regarding any of the board components such as a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (The same applies hereinafter).

Note that instead of a certain printed display, a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display) may be used.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LED5ML, etc., various IC322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] can reach [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The certain circuit component may be, for example, a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain board case [for example, main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, 220', case of power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] emits light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board that it houses, as shown in FIG. 30(b). , when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the LED 24ML provided on the main control board 300B housed in the main control board storage case 210 located at a 90-degree positional relationship reaches. A game machine characterized in that it is installed at a location [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The certain board case may display management information such as a management number of the board. For example, a sticker on which management information, etc. is printed, or a seal with management information written on it or a seal (for example, "board number 0001" affixed to the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 29) is displayed. (hereinafter the same applies).

The certain board case may be the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage case 220, the first sub board case 162P, or the second sub board case. It may be the case 165P, the payout board case 172P, the ejection board case 176P, or the power supply board case 184P (the same applies hereinafter).

The certain board case may be a light-transmitting case (for example, a transparent resin case) or a non-light-transmitting case (for example, a metal case (case of a power supply device)). Good (hereinafter the same).

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] [for example, harness PM supplied via ],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

That is, it includes a power supply device [for example, the power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage, and the current converted to the predetermined voltage in the power supply device is supplied to the harness [for example, the harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML]. According to this aspect, when the power is cut off, it is possible to manually drive the motor and check whether or not the harness is connected by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light, and when the power is on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the harness is connected by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light. It is possible to check whether the harness is being supplied normally or not, separately from whether or not the harness is connected.
Further, the movable unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] is removable from the game machine with the connector of the harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. Good too. When inspecting or cleaning the movable body unit, the harness connector is unplugged before removal, so it is easy to have a bad harness connection or forget to connect it. You can easily check to see if you have forgotten to make a connection.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m] is connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the first harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3]. electrically connected to the
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM],
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] does not disable the movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left The reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112] may be operated by hand to drive the motor, and a current (e.g., induced current) generated by the motor flows into the reel, causing light to emit light. ,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [for example, reel unit 700],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to the description so far,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an LED provided on a certain board (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML)],
The second light emitting means [for example, a different LED provided on a certain board (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) or an LED provided on a different board from a certain board (sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5ML) monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light-emitting means emits light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light-emitting means ( Hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
The second light emitting means also emits light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
Even if the drive of the motor is stopped in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [e.g. 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC may continue to emit light due to the charges stored in them.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The harness may be, for example, harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR1. Further, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR1, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5
V monitor LED5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, signal monitoring L
ED] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light emitting means,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means;
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, different boards such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
A second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light emitting means,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means;
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24V and 5V are different],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an LED provided on a certain board (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML)],
The second light emitting means [for example, a different LED provided on a certain board (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) or an LED provided on a different board from a certain board (sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5ML) monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. There is a case where light is emitted due to the inflow of light (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"),
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"),
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
Even if the first motor stops driving in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, there is a case where light emission is continued due to the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC.
Even if the third motor stops driving in the third case and the fourth case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, there are cases where light emission is continued due to the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The first harness may be, for example, a harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, a motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR1. Further, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1,
The motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via a harness MR1, a harness PM, and a harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

The third harness may be, for example, a harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, a motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR3. Further, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR3, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR3, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, here as well, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5
V monitor LED5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, signal monitoring L
ED] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, different boards such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
A second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24V and 5V are different],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A door body [for example, front door 102],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
When the door body is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
When the door body is opened, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body are visible [for example, FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
Operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operation means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29] is,
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is invisible from the exterior of the game machine [for example, FIG. 30(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since an unauthorized person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, he or she may use the light emitting means to confirm that power is not being properly supplied from the power source and attempt to attach an unauthorized device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)]. machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Furthermore, the movable body unit may protrude further toward a person who manually operates the movable body than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position where it can be seen by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing position.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit [for example, the reel unit 700] [for example, the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body by hand while sitting.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the performance of the game [for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a performance control board],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state, and receiving current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It is something that is
The light emitting means emits light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A certain printed display [for example, "board number 0" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG.
002” display 4001, a sticker 210S printed with “board number 0001” attached to the main control board storage case 210],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

Note that instead of a certain printed display, a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display) may be used.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LED5ML, etc., various IC322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] can reach [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A certain board case [for example, main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, 220', case of power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain board case receives light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board housed in the board case], as well as light from the front door 102 at 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, as shown in FIG. 30(b). When the main control board 300B is housed in the main control board storage case 210 which is in a 90 degree positional relationship when opened, the light from the LED 24ML provided on the main control board 300B can reach the
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the first harness [for example, harness MR1] [for example, through harness PM]. supplied],
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the third harness [e.g., harness MR3] [e.g., through harness PM]. supplied],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [for example, harness PM],
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] allows the first movable body to be manually operated even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [e.g., harness PM]. may emit light when the first motor is driven and a current (e.g., induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually to drive the third motor even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [for example, harness PM]. It may emit light due to the flow of current (e.g., induced current) due to the generated back electromotive force,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL
, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL,
LED 3ML for error monitoring, LED 6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7 segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [for example, reel unit 700],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 to 67. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 33 to 67 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 33 to 67, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 67, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 33 to 67.

FIG. 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain specifically using FIG. 34, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, in addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been displayed (the line on which the winning determination is made), and when the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination stops on this active line, It will be judged as a prize winner. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

In FIG. 34, a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special winning combinations 1 (BB1), special winning combinations 2 (BB2), replay winning combinations 1 to 3, and small winning combinations 1 to 7 (for example, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special gaming state to be described later. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 35(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 35(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. By operating the first selection switch 190, you can change the volume of the sound output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) or enter the power saving mode. Can be set. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing games for a predetermined period of time. , a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine ("payout rate"), etc. is included. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, in six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the on state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detect off state.

Like the first selection switch 190 described above, the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101, so that it can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket 181) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power control board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on a power control board. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a return path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. This medal selector 170 will be further described later. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 35(b). Like the setting key switch 281 and the like, the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset. Further, by pressing and holding down the reset switch 291 for a long time (long-term pressing), it is possible to clear the RAM (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) of the main control unit.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display representing the gaming mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

In addition, although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. Further, the setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 36, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 35 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in a medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in the protruding state and pass through the return passage 266. The medals are discharged from the medal payout port 155. On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is in a state where it is retracted from inside the medal passage 171, the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. Projection of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and retraction from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an activation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) so as to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, if the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b.

FIG. 37A is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, immediately after shipping from the factory, after clearing the RAM (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) including the storage area (RAM of the main control unit) that stores the setting values, or after continuing to store the storage area that stores the setting values. When the power is lost, setting 1 is displayed as the default setting value on the setting value display 293, and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits is higher in setting 2 than setting 1, higher in setting 4 than setting 2, higher in setting 5 than setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player to earn profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is a setting that is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's ability to earn profits. In other words, setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player to earn profits. This setting b has a difference of only one segment from setting 6 in the 7-segment LED display, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If an unauthorized person performs an unauthorized operation thinking that the last setting displayed is the most advantageous setting, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person mistakes the setting as setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the fraudster can be disadvantaged.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated in the order of 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2, etc. by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" that is displayed first may be in any order. For example, the display on the setting value display 293 is 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2... may be updated.

FIG. 37(b) is a table summarizing the differences in performance for each set value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called ball payout rate), performance B is the special winning (BB) first hit probability, performance C is the AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is the AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT acquisitions, performance F is the probability of small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications that suggest setting values (setting suggestion notifications), and performance H is setting suggestions as confirmed notifications. This is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications. Performances A to F correspond to performances that represent the degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits, and as described above, they have the relationship of setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. .

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, bass speaker 277, etc. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification mentioned here includes notifications such as simply turning off a lamp or outputting a warning sound, as well as setting suggestion effects such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. It will be done. Further, even if a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting-related presentation, setting-related notification). Furthermore, although a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification) is also included. When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of the demonstration animation (demo animation) on the effect image display device 157, and when setting values other than setting b are set, the demo animation is turned off. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light up at the start of the process. The demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any medal insertion (bet operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (power is turned on) with no bet operations being performed at the time of a power outage, the demo animation will start, but if a setting change is started, the demo animation will start after the setting change is finished. is started. Further, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in a state where setting b is set. On the other hand, in a state where a setting value other than setting b is set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where setting b is set, setting b confirmation notification may be performed once every predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). Note that in a state where setting b is set, setting suggestion notification indicating that setting b may be not performed may be performed, and only setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when setting b is set, the notification mode may include content that suggests that the player is at a disadvantage (for example, text display or audio output such as "A tough battle continues"). . The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) explained above is when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. The setting values other than setting b are almost the same.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is suggested as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmed notification that does not suggest settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and settings other than setting b are In a state where the setting value is set, a setting suggestion notification may also be made that suggests a setting value other than the set value. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd number confirmation notification is sent to notify that the odd setting value is confirmed, and when setting 2 is set, an even number setting value is set. An example of this is an even number confirmation notification that indicates that the current status is confirmed. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification that indicates that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, or a setting 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. There are also settings 2 or more confirmation notification that informs that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more has been set, and setting 5 or more confirmation notification that notifies that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more is set. Note that in a state where setting 6 is set, an effect of notifying only setting 6 as setting suggestion notification (setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) explained above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set. the next highest (e.g., 50%), and the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, and 5) have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%), which is lower than the state with setting 6. %).

FIGS. 37(c) to 37(f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157, which may be performed at the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle effect, the end of BB, or the end of AT. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting suggestion notification and setting confirmation notification. The setting-related notification here is a type of notification effect.

FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing an example of even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(c), the words "may be set to even number" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "may be even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting). Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may be performed even when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). You can. In this case, the setting value may be notified more easily when the setting value is an even number setting than when the setting value is an odd number setting.

FIG. 37(d) is a diagram showing an example of setting 5 or more suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(d), the words "I want to eat five or more pieces of sugar cane" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This text display, "I want to eat 5 or more pieces of sugar cane," suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is 5 or 6. Note that this setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may be performed also when the setting value is 4 or less. In this case, notification may be made easier when the setting value is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or less. Note that when the setting value is 4 or less, setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 37(e) is a diagram showing an example of setting 2 or more confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(e), first of all, the words "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The words ``Ah, business sorting'' itself corresponds to an announcement that suggests setting 2 or higher. Thereafter, the aunt's character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. For the old woman's character BBA, the words ``Does it have to be 1, or can it be 2 or more?'' are displayed as lines for sorting the business. The notification using this line denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the setting 2 or more confirmation notification may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed also when the setting is 1. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the aunt character BBA may not appear.

FIG. 37(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(f), first of all, the words "Ah, God's message" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The words ``Ah, God's announcement'' itself corresponds to an announcement that suggests setting b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and a message is issued. God's character KGG displays the words ``A tough battle will continue'' as a warning. This notification is a notification that confirms setting b. Note that setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed for other setting values. However, in the case of setting values other than setting b, the panda character PND and the words ``Ah, God's announcement'' may be displayed, and the God character KGG may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given on the assumption that setting suggestion notifications include setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting confirmation effects, but setting suggestion notifications may also be read as setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting suggestion effects. It may also be read as a confirmed performance.

In addition, the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed as a number, which can be used to check the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting confirmation process that allows checking the set value is executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value change process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes from 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ・. . , and the desired game mode can be selected. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

Note that the period of setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first turning of the setting key clockwise to the last turning of the setting key counterclockwise in the setting value changing operation is also called set value change mode, and is called setting value confirmation operation. The period , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the set value confirmation mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode, which were explained in detail using FIG. 3, may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 38. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section including the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the performance of the game.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Regarding the RAM 308, the description of RAM (Random Access Memory) is used as an example to indicate that it is a readable/writable storage medium, but the description of RWM (Read/Write Memory) or "RAM" is not acceptable. May be used. Furthermore, the name of the process related to RAM may also be written as RWM (read/write memory) or a name that uses the word "RAM". In this specification, the term "RAM" will be mainly used. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives a motor provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 that sorts inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121 , a storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 35) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418. An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed on this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected. There is.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 39 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 41.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

Next, details of the main control section initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process of FIG. 39 will be described using FIG. 41. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 39.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 35 is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and this main control unit initialization process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the value of the setting value is initialized.

In step S1011, RAM data write back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the power is momentarily cut off (temporarily lowering the voltage below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 40). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both judgments are normal, the recovery data in the RAM 308 is It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing immediately before the power is cut off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the state shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch 281 is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that details of this setting change process will be described later using FIG. 42.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 41 will be described using FIG. 42. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process advances to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparations are made to transmit a setting change command indicating that a setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 of FIG. 40), and the process advances to step S1105. As a result, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to changing settings, and the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. Through this process, a temporary setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293. After that, the process advances to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1111; otherwise, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1111, the temporary setting value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the temporary setting values are updated one by one according to the display order explained using FIG. When is operated, the temporary setting value is set to 1. After this, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1115; otherwise, the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of determining the temporary setting value as a setting value is executed, and the process advances to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135. When the set value is determined, a display indicating that the set value is determined (in this case, the number 0) is displayed on the set value display 293. Note that once the set value is determined, the set value display 293 may continue to display the determined set value, may be switched to a blinking display, or may be non-displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40) is executed. As a result, the display of the setting change in progress display on the effect image display device 157 ends. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before being changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Note that in the termination condition of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 42, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the termination condition is that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may also be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 43. Note that FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 43(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of input/output ports, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively. Note that the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Furthermore, if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in a performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 43(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 43(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 43(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 44. Note that FIG. 44(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 44(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 44(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initial settings, various variables stored in the RAM 508, etc. are initialized. Note that if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 44(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 44(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 44(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 44(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 44(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, a setting change in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be explained. The setting change process is started by inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

FIG. 45 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by setting change and the states of related components. In FIG. 45, each stage is numbered from (a) to (b), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 45.

In FIG. 45, the components are power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left The following items are shown: a side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R (top side lamp), an upper speaker 272, and a bass speaker 277 (speaker). Further, FIG. 46 schematically shows the setting value display 293, the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R, and the speakers (272, 277). has been done.

In FIG. 45(A), the power switch 244 is in an off state and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit, and the set values are not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Figure 46
In (A) and (B), the state in which the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are turned off is shown with no pattern and solid white (the same applies below).

In FIG. 45(a), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key is rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 45(c), the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. In FIG. 46(C), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by hatching downward to the left (the same applies below). Further, as described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. . When the setting change process is started, RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) is performed (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Is displayed. Furthermore, when the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice notification (“Settings are being changed”) will now be output.

In FIG. 45(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "2" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 45(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and "4" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 45(F), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "5" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 45 (g), the setting change button 292 is pressed one more time, and setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in the same figure (h), the setting change button 292 is pressed one more time. When pressed, "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 46 (g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. An unauthorized person attempting to change the number may mistake the display of "b" for the display of "6".

In FIG. 45(e), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, setting b is determined. Note that when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Further, the setting value may not be determined by operating the start lever 135, but may be determined by turning the setting key switch 281 into the OFF state.

In FIG. 45(C), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the OFF state by turning it counterclockwise. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and become non-displayed. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the display of the demo animation will start immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, the setting change process will be delayed. will start after it has finished. In this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. Alternatively, the demo animation display was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the settings changing display overlapped and could not be seen, and even if it became visible from the scene at the time the settings changing display disappeared. good. Furthermore, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 46(C), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a demo pattern is represented by square hatching (the same applies below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit while the settings are being changed, but turns off when the settings are changed, and remains off until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . Turning off the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player). Furthermore, since the title panel lamp 164 remains lit during normal times, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be interpreted as notification of an abnormality (notification regarding a set value abnormality).

In FIG. 45(sa), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 45(b), medals are inserted. That is, the medals are taken care of or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern). In FIG. 46(b), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a normal pattern is represented by cross hatching (the same applies below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also starts to turn on. The title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, it may continue to turn off when medals are inserted, and it may start to light up when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or the title panel lamp 164 may start to turn on when the front door 102 is closed, or may continue to turn off when a medal is inserted, and start turning on when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or when the first It may start to turn on at the third stop of the game, or it may start to turn on when the payout of the first game is completed.

FIG. 47(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 47(a), each stage is numbered from (ta) to (nu), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 48 schematically shows the state of the components at each stage from (ta) to (nu) in FIG. 47(a).

In FIG. 47(a), the same items as in FIG. 45 are shown as component items, and in FIG. 48(a), each component is schematically shown as in FIG. 46.

FIG. 47(T) may be a continuation from FIG. 45(C), and the game has already started with setting b set. That is, there is a case where the game is started while ignoring the notification due to the title panel lamp 164 being turned off. In FIG. 47(T), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 47(H), a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) elapses after the third stop is performed without medals being inserted. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the demonstration animation starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is restored. Note that the title panel lamp 164 may be turned off and setting-related notifications may be started not only when a demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 but also when a demonstration effect is started or when a demonstration state is entered. .

In FIG. 47(T), the front door 102 is opened and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 48(T), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a door opening pattern is represented by hatching downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross hatching in FIG. 46(b). With the front door 102 opened, there is a possibility that settings will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. The speakers (272, 277) begin to output the voice "The door is open." Note that although the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the characters "door opening" may be displayed together with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 47(TE), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed without any setting change after the front door 102 was opened. To change settings, the setting key switch 281 must be turned on while the power switch 244 is off, so the power switch 244 must be turned off before a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again, and setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the settings. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are changed from the door opening pattern lighting to match the demonstration animation display on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is ended, and the lighting pattern returns to the demo pattern.

In FIG. 47(G), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to be lit in a demo pattern. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be provided.

In FIG. 47(N), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG. 47(T) described above.

In FIG. 47(2), the front door 102 is closed again one second after the front door 102 is opened in FIG. 47(na). The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from the voice saying "The door is open" to the voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to illuminate in the door open pattern for the predetermined time period after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started until the predetermined time has elapsed after the front door 102 is opened. Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 47(N), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 in FIG. 47(N) was opened. As a result, a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any settings being changed, the title panel lamp 164 turns off, and setting-related notifications are started. . Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from door opening pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. It can be considered that the setting-related notification is started by turning off the lamp 164, and if the medal is inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a) described above, when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 turns off (FIG. 47(g)), but other The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off depending on the conditions, for example, if the player enters a non-recommended gaming state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, if the player does not follow a specific push order navigation The title panel lamp may also be turned off (after releasing the third stop button). In the non-recommended gaming state, no lottery including the AT lottery is held, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or decreases slightly, but the non-recommended gaming state continues until the predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state where you can increase the number of medals. When entering a non-recommended gaming state, a suggestive display indicating that the non-recommended gaming state is entered may be performed on the effect image display device 157. (from the time the penalty bonus ends) may be displayed continuously. Furthermore, in the non-recommended gaming state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during both playing and non-gaming. Note that it may be possible to enter the non-recommended gaming state regardless of the setting value (even other than setting b), or to enter the non-recommended gaming state only when the setting value is set to setting b. You can.

FIG. 47(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 47(b), the payment button 134 starts from (ta) in the same state as (ta) shown in FIG. . That is, the payment operation is performed before a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without medals being inserted after the third stop. When the payment operation is performed, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. Furthermore, a game media payout sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, Figure 207 (
FIG. 47(E) schematically shows the components in FIG. 47(N). In FIG. 48(N), horizontal hatching indicates that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a payment pattern (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern represented by cross hatching in FIG. 46(b).

In FIG. 47(J), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 48(J) schematically shows the components in FIG. 47(J). Even after the payout is completed, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from lighting in the payment pattern to lighting in the demo pattern in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for the title panel lamp 164 to turn off as explained above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while setting b is set (FIG. 45(c)), the setting b is set. If the demo animation is started in (Figure 47 (H), the result is the same in Figure 45 (C)), if the payout according to the payment operation is completed with setting b set ( Figure 47(F)) is an example.

FIG. 49(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting 1 being the default setting value. In FIG. 49(a), each stage is numbered from (c) to (f), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, in the upper part of FIG. 50, the state of the components at each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 49(a) is schematically shown.

(c) in FIG. 49(a) is the same as (te) shown in FIG. 47(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the difference from (te) is that the setting value Since this is not set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to be lit in white. Although demo pattern lighting is not executed in the title panel lamp 164, it may be executed, and in that case, the white lighting becomes demo pattern lighting. In FIG. 50(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by hatching downward to the left.

49(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and confirmation of set values is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1", which is the current setting value. In addition, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
277) also starts outputting a voice notifying that the settings are being checked ("Settings are being checked"). The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 50(H) displays "1", which is the current setting value. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 50(H) are all lit white.

(F) in FIG. 49(a) is the same as (C) shown in FIG. 47(A), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. This is the point at which the confirmation ends, and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 does not go out but continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In FIG. 50(F), the setting value display 293 is not displayed. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) display demo patterns represented by square hatching. It is switched on.

(F) in FIG. 49(a) is the same as (SA) shown in FIG. 47(A), with the front door 102 closed. It becomes a point that continues to be lit white.

FIG. 49(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in power saving mode with setting 1 set. In FIG. 49(b), each stage is numbered from (ka) to (ke), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (k) to (k) in FIG. 49(b).

(c) in FIG. 49(b) is the same as (c) shown in FIG. 49(a), which is the state 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (c) are as follows. That's right. First, as explained using FIG. 17(h), the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 remains lit in white without being extinguished, but its brightness is lowered (reduced). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 50(a) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 becomes dark and the title panel lamp 164 also becomes dark. It is also shown that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (ki) in FIG. 49(b), as in (hi) shown in FIG. 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and will be the same as in non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 50(B) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG.

At (x) in FIG. 49(b), like (f) shown in FIG. 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and the setting confirmation has been completed. By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 50(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started has become dark, and the title panel lamp 164 has also become dark. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are off.

49(b) is the same as (f) shown in FIG. 49(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishing from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

FIG. 51(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting b set. In FIG. 51(a), time passes in the order of (T), (B), (C), and (S).

(TE) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (TE) shown in FIG. 47(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and is exactly the same state as (TE). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and the demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (B) of FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. The only difference from (H) in FIG. 49A is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (B) in FIG. 51(a), the current setting value "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52(B) displays "b" which is the current setting value. In addition, in the same way as in FIG. 50 (H), in FIG. 52 (B), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "Settings confirmation is in progress" is output from the speakers (272, 277). has been done. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(C) in FIG. 51A is the same state as (C) shown in FIG. 45, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and is exactly the same state as (C). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 51(a) is the same state as (sa) shown in FIG. 45, with the front door 102 closed, and is exactly the same as (sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 51(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting b set. In FIG. 51(b), each stage is labeled with a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage from (g) to (g) in FIG. 51(b).

(Ga) in FIG. 51(b) is the same as (TE) shown in FIG. 51(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (TE) are as follows. That's right. First, the demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 52(g) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 has become dark. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), as in (b) shown in FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. , (B) is exactly the same state. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and will be the same as in the non-power saving mode. Note that the display of the setting value display 293 is different from (c) in FIG. 49(b). That is, "b" is displayed as in the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52(g).

At (g) in FIG. 51(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the setting confirmation has been completed, as in (c) shown in FIG. 51(a). By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is darkened, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (x) in FIG. 49(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is being executed, as shown in FIG. 52(g).

51(b) is the same as (sa) shown in FIG. 51(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishment from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modification of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 will be described.

<About the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, we will show examples of the winning probability and state transition of winning combination groups, as well as the relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all roles including replay, which is a replay role, and the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replay. A slot machine that can converge the payout rate to a suitable range by devising the following will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine in this modified example, the situations that can be controlled according to the progress of the game include the first situation (RT2, which will be described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as will be described later. By creating a second situation (RT1 described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate, the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range. can be done. Note that the slot machine according to this modification also includes the technical matters explained using FIGS. 33 to 52.

Here, the payout rate is the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the small role are stopped by the total number of medals set as the number of bets. . Also, the total payout rate that takes all the winning combinations into account is, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with a bet of 3 coins, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 3 medals are bet in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as follows. On the other hand, the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replay means that, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with 3 bets, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a bet has been made.

FIG. 53(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification. In the slot machine in this modified example, RT0 is the base gaming state (for example, a state in which most of the game is played, a state to be transitioned to due to a setting change, etc.), and a predetermined state in RT0. The gaming state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1, which is transferred by winning a transition combination A, and RT2, which is transferred by winning a predetermined transition combination B in RT0. In each of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to three. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game will be transitioned back to RT0 by playing the prescribed number of games 100 times. In RT0 in the slot machine in this modified example, in addition to the transition role A and the transition role B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to win a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc., and if the payout rate is less than 1, It is determined that it will become. In addition, in the slot machine in this modification, if a bonus winning combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the payout rate is transitioned to a bonus state of 1 or more. It is omitted from a). Note that the slot machine in this modification may be one in which the gaming state is changed between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT1 and the winning probabilities. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including 3-card roles with a payout of 3 cards, and push order roles that can pay out 15 cards, etc. will be subject to the lottery. It is determined. The 3-card combination always wins a prize in a winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, with the push order combination, when the presses are operated in a predetermined order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), a prize is won and 15 pieces are paid out, but when the push order is not operated in the predetermined order, no prize is won (other It may be possible to win a winning hand (for example, a one-card hand).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to be 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". It is determined that Therefore, the probability of winning the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages: when the set values are "b", "1", and "2", and when the set values are between "4" and "6". There is. In addition, the winning probability of replay b among the replay winning combinations is set to be a low probability (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the setting value, while the winning probability of the push winning combination among the small winning combinations is , is determined to have a high probability (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Note that even if the winning combination is won in RT1, the navigation effect that allows identification of an advantageous operation mode will not be executed (that is, it will not be controlled by AT). Therefore, even if the winning combination is won, the probability of winning is 1/6, and the probability of not winning is 5/6, for example.

On the other hand, regarding the winning probability of Replay a among the replayable roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the minor roles, the total winning probability is set to be uniform (for example, 50/200, etc.). , the ratio of winning probabilities of replay a and 3-card combination are determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "b" and "6", replay a has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.). It is determined that it will become. When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the three-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200, etc.). When the set values are "2" and "4", it is determined that replay a has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.). ing.

FIG. 53(c) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 and the winning probabilities. In RT2, similar to RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including a 3-card role with a payout of 3 cards, a push order role that can pay out 15 cards, etc. are subject to lottery winnings. It is determined that The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other roles is the same as that in RT1. It is determined that it will become. Moreover, when the push order combination is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when the winning combination is won in RT2, unless the operation mode is incorrect, the winning combination will be won and 15 medals will be paid out. Note that the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 are not limited to those determined in the same manner as in RT1, but may be determined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the total winning probability for Replay a and the 3-card combination (which is also the total winning probability because the player always wins when winning) is the same regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, they differ depending on the set value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the probability of winning/winning Replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the setting value is " When the set values are "1" and "5", the difference becomes relatively large, and when the set values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate becomes maximum. In addition, for both setting values 1 to 3, which affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, and setting values 4 to 6, the setting values that make the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate relatively small, and the total payout rate and It is determined to include a set value where the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is maximum.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. Note that the number of medals used to set the number of bets is three, and FIG. 54 illustrates a case where no bonus combination has been won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1 is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 10 times. Therefore, in FIG. 54(a), when the replay wins 10 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. In addition, the "total number of IN coins" and "actual number of IN coins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but the "total number of IN coins" is the number including the number of medals automatically set after replay winnings. On the other hand, the "actual number of IN coins" is different in that it is the number excluding the number of coins automatically set after a replay win (the number of coins with the bet number after a replay win as "0"). In addition, the "total number of OUT medals" and "real number of OUT medals" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a small role, but the "total number of OUT medals" is the number of medals paid out when winning a replay prize. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning, whereas the "actual number of IN coins" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), if Replay wins 10 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 270 (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" has become "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≈120÷270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

Next, FIG. 54(b) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1 is 20/100 (= (35 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 20 times. Therefore, in FIG. 54(b), when the replay wins 20 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 54(b), if the replay wins 20 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 240 (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "150" as in Fig. 54(a) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 53(b). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "90" (=150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (=90÷240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

As described above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, but as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate. Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 54(a) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). From this, it can be seen that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous for the player. It can be a state.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (no matter which setting value is used). The situation is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2 is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 30 times. In FIG. 54(c), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 30 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 54(c), if the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 210 (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" is "600" as a result of the navigation performance, and in this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "510" (=600-30 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.429 (≒510÷210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

Next, FIG. 54(d) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2 is 40/100 (= (35 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 40 times. In FIG. 54(d), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 40 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 54(d), if the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 180 (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "600" as in Fig. 54(c) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 53(c). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "480" (=600-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even if the set value is . Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and the "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 54(c) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and the 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 54(d). From this, it can be seen that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2. Become. In addition, during RT2, although the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. It can be a state.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine of this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, we focus on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 54(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, compared to a gaming machine where only one of the payout rates can be high, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range.

Note that the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but also when a specific losing symbol combination is stopped, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but also the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following.

In addition, the transitional combination A is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and the operation mode in which the transitional combination A is won according to the type of other combinations in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional combination B is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and an operation mode in which transitional combination B is won according to the type of other combinations in which transitional combination B is simultaneously won (e.g. The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional role A, transitional role B, and other roles a, b, etc. are won at the same time in the winning lottery, and the operation mode is such that transitional role A is won depending on the type of the other simultaneously won roles. , and the operation mode for winning the transition combination B may be determined to be different. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or transition winning combination B is won in RT0, a push order guessing game is generated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

For example, the transition winning combination A is the RT1 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the winning lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is won according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, the winning situations in RT0 include a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of a, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the RT1 transition replay win, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the normal replay a win. , when the winning situation b occurs, the reel control that causes the RT1 transition replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You may also do so.

In addition, transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is determined according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of c, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the normal replay a. , when winning situation d, the reel control that causes the RT2 transfer replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You may also do so.

In RT0 in this case, when one of the winning situations a to d occurs, it is announced that it is a press order guessing game. Messages such as ``This is your chance! Let them answer correctly on their own!'' are displayed when winning situations c and d are displayed, etc.) to provide fun that makes players think about the order in which they should press the stop button. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

In addition, although FIG. 53(a) illustrates the gaming state transition between RT0 and RT2, the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays. As shown in Figure 54(e), if there is a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, then this is the case. It is not limited to.

In addition, in FIGS. 53(b) and 53(c), when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, it can be seen that the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value. The difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate for any of the setting values ``b'', ``1'', ``2'', and setting values ``4'' to ``6'' that affect the winning probability of the bonus role. It has been explained that the set value includes a relatively small set value, a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the largest. However, as shown in Figure 54(e), the winning probability is such that there are situations where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and situations where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate. If it is a game where a lottery is held (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set at 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. 53(a) or the game state transition shown in FIG. 53(b) This is not limited to the winning combinations and winning probabilities as shown in FIG. 53(c) and the like.

To summarize the characteristics of the slot machine according to the modified example explained above,
``A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and that can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops,
Determine whether or not you have won any of a plurality of roles, including the awarding role that involves the provision of the gaming value and the replaying role that allows you to start the next game without using new gaming value. a prize lottery means for performing a prize lottery;
A stop control means that performs stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning combination lottery;
a setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of gaming values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the awarding combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of gaming values set as the number of bets, In a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the predetermined number of gaming values are given as a result of the game, and the number of bets in the next game is A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets in a game when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped. The relationship with the second payout rate, which counts the game value given as 0 in the next game and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game as 0, is higher than the first payout rate. a first situation in which the rate is higher; and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In the notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. In the non-notification state where the winning combination is high and the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. The payout rate will be higher,
The plurality of types of setting values include at least a first setting value having the most advantageous degree and a second setting value having the most disadvantageous degree, and the setting value is higher than when the second setting value is set. The rate of the first situation is higher when the first setting value is set, and the second setting value is set more often than when the first setting value is set. The game machine is characterized in that the rate at which the second situation occurs is higher when the game machine is occupied. ”
become.

Also, according to the description from FIG. 33 onwards,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by either a clerk at the game parlor or a player. If you are a clerk at a game parlor, this information will confirm changes to the settings before the store opens, and if you are a player, this information will be important information that will lead to your own profits (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to perform the setting-related notification during the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

The first period may be a period from when the setting change termination operation is executed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the setting-related notification may be a notification suggesting that a predetermined setting value is set (selected) as the setting value (the same applies hereinafter). The predetermined setting value may be a setting value that provides the lowest advantage to the player among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

The setting-related notification can be read as a setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as a presentation means (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of providing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means does not perform the setting-related notification if a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set in the first period. It may be something that does not.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of providing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means may be set to a certain setting value rather than a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6]. is one in which the setting-related notification is executed more frequently [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 37(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, and is executed only when the one setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the execution frequency is as described above.

In the first period, the notification means determines that the setting value is higher when the one setting value is set than when a setting value different from the one setting value is set. Related notifications may be executed frequently, or during a period different from the first period (for example, during a period after the game has started (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of battle performance, at the end of BB) , at the end of AT, etc.), the setting-related notification is more effective when a setting value is set than when a setting value different from the setting value is set. It may be something that is executed frequently.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 37(a)];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first set value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [for example, setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [for example, setting b] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Furthermore, since a second setting value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first setting value, a cheater who illegally changes the setting value may be able to change the setting value without knowing it. There are cases where the setting value is changed to the second setting value, resulting in a disadvantageous game being played.

The second setting value may be the one setting value, and the notification means may be configured to provide a setting value related to one of the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification. It may be one that can execute notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means may display the currently set setting value (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value (for example, setting b) that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first setting value [for example, setting 1],
The setting value display means is configured to display a default setting value that is displayed first [for example, a setting value that is displayed for the first time immediately after shipment from the factory, a RAM that includes a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) that stores the setting value, and Display the first setting value [for example, setting 1] as the setting value displayed on the screen or the setting value that will be displayed first when the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area that stores the setting value is lost. is a means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, even if the game clerk forgets to change the settings and leaves the default settings as they are, it is easy for the player to play the game.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the game machine is initialized. That is, when the game machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be a setting value located at the beginning of the predetermined order.

Also,
``The first period is a period in which no game has been started since the power was turned on to the game machine [for example, from FIG. It is a period of time during which
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player will not suffer any disadvantages due to the setting-related notification being executed during a period when no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never been started may mean that the start lever has never been operated with the number of bets set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when an operation related to the setting change is performed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation for terminating the setting change (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The certain operation is an operation that is executed after the setting value is determined [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 42].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, after the setting value is determined, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation to end the setting change process (after turning on the start lever) after confirming the setting value in the setting change process (setting change key is turned on). (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with an operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means in the on state to the off state [for example, FIG. 45(c)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (for example, a setting change key) that is turned on when starting the setting change to an off state, and the on state may be the starting state. Alternatively, the off state may be an end state (the same applies hereinafter). That is, the operating means may be a means for switching between starting and ending the setting change when operated (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification in the first period [for example, the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, the information regarding the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, so that the setting value display means does not display redundantly and the control burden is reduced. Ru.

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification while the door body is open in the first period [for example, FIG. 45(C)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is in an open state, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The operating means may be operable when the door body is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the set value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may be invisible when the door body is closed (the same applies hereinafter). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to the player (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may be configured to perform door open notification when the door body is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door open notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period when the door body is closed [for example, FIG. 45 (S)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is closed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

Note that even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, and when the door open notification ends, the setting related notification is sent. (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is open during the first period, and may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is closed during the first period. may be executed (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door body is opened or closed, and may be a notification that ends when a bet number of 1 or more is set (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The one setting value may be a setting value that gives the player the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

I will continue to explain further. As described above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

In this way, the normal gaming state of the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a 2-bet bet internal winning state, but if a player plays a game with a 2-bet bet and wins a 2-bet bonus, If the bet bonus game is played out, the gaming state becomes a 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, if the reset switch 291 is pressed, the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state also occurs. Furthermore, when the setting change processing is started, RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and initialization is automatically performed to Betting bonus becomes non-internal winning state.

Note that when the setting change process is started, instead of being initialized automatically, it may be possible to select whether or not to initialize. For example, it may be possible to initialize setting values and gaming states using a setting change procedure. More specifically, like when changing settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes setting 1 and the gaming state becomes a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state. You can do it like this. Furthermore, it may also be set to a non-advantageous section state. Although the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 42) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, while the 2-bet bonus game is being played, a display indicating that the 2-bet bonus game is being played is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (for example, a flower shape display). ) is displayed. The remaining number of coins to be paid out, which is a condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining coins being spent"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting that is extremely disadvantageous to the player, such as setting b, which is not originally set, is prepared from the perspective of countermeasures against fraudulent players, etc., and is set to setting b by performing the setting change process. This situation can be avoided. However, even though the setting change processing has been carried out to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged, if the 2-bet bet bonus is not internally won, the player will still be disadvantaged in the end. Therefore, a notification indicating that the 2-bet bonus is not internally won is made.

In the following explanation, the first gaming state refers to a 2-bet bet bonus non-internally winning state, and the second gaming state refers to a 2-bet betting bonus internally winning state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous period state, a non-internal winning state not limited to betting on two coins, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b. It is also possible to apply a state set to the second game state, and a state more advantageous than these can be applied to the second game state, for example, an advantageous section state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal game state, items and points. A state in which the setting is acquired or a state in which the setting is set to one of settings 1, 2, and 4 to 6 can be mentioned.

Further, the first voice is a warning alert of "Please check." The first display is a text display of "Please confirm", and this text display is also a warning alert.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a text display of "Completed".

Furthermore, when the game is started in the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state, a display indicating that a transition to the 2-bet bet bonus internal winning state is being attempted is displayed on the effect image display device 157; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the 2-piece bet bonus or a display prompting the player to shift to the 2-piece betting bonus internally winning state is displayed. Hereinafter, the notifications based on these displays will be collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As this fourth notification, for example, "Returning game" is displayed, and the number of games played in a state where the 2-bet bet bonus has not been won internally is displayed. A player who knows about this fourth notification can understand that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. Note that the fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played with two bets, or may be a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 55 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. In FIG. 55, each stage is numbered from (1) to (11), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 55 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Further, at the bottom, there is provided an item of gaming status.

In FIG. 55(1), the power switch 244 is in an off state and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit, and the set values are not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and monitor LED are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 55(2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 55(3), the setting key switch 281 is on, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as a default setting value. Note that in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if initialization is not performed, the set value at the time of power cutoff stored in the power cutoff processing in step S221 is displayed. A settings changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the settings are being changed, and the speakers (272, 277) also output a voice ("Settings are being changed") to notify that the settings are being changed. ) will now be output. Further, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts outputting a detection signal indicating open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts lighting up. Note that when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to the external device. Further, the gaming state is the first gaming state (two-bet bet bonus non-internally winning state) due to RAM clearing (or RAM clearing, RWM clearing, RWM initialization, step S1101 shown in FIG. 42). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the gaming state at the time of power cutoff stored in the power cutoff processing in step S221 is returned. Therefore, there may be a second gaming state (two bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated every time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 55(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 indicating the set value is determined is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed", a voice such as "Settings have been changed" may be output.

In FIG. 55(5), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the seven segments are turned off and not displayed on the setting value display 293. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The audio output of "The door is open" that has been switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. Note that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "setting change is complete" or "setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. When the setting change process is completed, if the gaming state is the first gaming state, a first notification command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) executes notification control (presentation control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays a first display of characters such as "Please confirm" as a warning alert.

In FIG. 55 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 55(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to a close detection signal at the L level, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output. Note that on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 55(7), the front door 102 is opened and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern. Furthermore, on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed and the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, so the first display such as "Please confirm" also continues to be displayed. But the speaker (272,2
The voice from 77) returns to the warning voice "The door is open." That is, the output of the first sound starts when the front door 102 is closed, and ends when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the clerk at the game parlor is already aware that the first gaming state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing shown in FIG. In order to avoid this, the output of the first audio is terminated. Note that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened two or more predetermined times. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during play to clear a hopper error or a ball jam, if the number of predetermined times is more than 2, it may become noisy to the surrounding players. There is.

In FIG. 55 (8), the front door 102 is closed again while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed," and the repeated warning notification is not executed. However, on the effect image display device 157, the first display such as "Please confirm" is continuously displayed along with the display of the demo animation. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting white again. .

In FIG. 55(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a game parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a warning notification that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).

In FIG. 55(10), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 55 (7), a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed instead of or in addition to the first display, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in a two-bet bet state and the two-bet bet bonus is won internally, a notification indicating that the player has won internally is issued. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to help you avoid winning the 2-bet bet bonus. In this navigation performance, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the performance image display device 157 displays information about the reel stop position where a bonus win can be avoided.

In FIG. 55 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, by operating the start lever 135 for the first time, a two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and by a stop operation that avoids winning the bonus, the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 56 summarizes the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. This is a table. In FIG. 56, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21) to (23), and (11), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

In FIG. 56, the same items as in FIG. 55 are shown as component items, and the gaming status item is provided at the bottom (same up to FIG. 61).

Figures 56 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 56 (21), after the setting change process is completed, the front door 102 remains open and medals are inserted, such as the maintenance of the medals or the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a game parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), confirming that it is in the first gaming state. The first display, which is a warning notification, is continuously displayed. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern.

In FIG. 56 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 56 (21), instead of or together with the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed. Note that since the front door 102 remains open, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 56 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal). (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the first voice "Please confirm" is output from the speaker (272, 277) as a warning alert. In the example shown in FIG. 56, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. A clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate can be alerted by voice that the first gaming state is in effect. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting in white. Note that in the effect image display device 157, the normal background display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 56 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 56 (11) is the same as FIG. 55 (11), and the two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display because the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 57 shows the relationship in the case where the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored. This is a table summarizing the status of the constituent elements. In FIG. 57, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), and (25) to (27), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Figures 57 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

57 (21) and 57 (22) are the same as FIG. Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 57 (25), the power is cut off while the game is being played with two bets (while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating), resulting in the same state as in FIG. 57 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in FIG. 57 (26), the power is restored and the reels 110 to 112 return to the state immediately before the power cut, with two bets still in place. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power is cut off, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power cut starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the door opening pattern lighting. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 57 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 ( (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. It turns out. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the first voice such as "Please confirm" will not be output from the speakers (272, 277). This is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is present due to this first display.

FIG. 58 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. In FIG. 58, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 58 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 58 (21) is the same as FIG. 55 (21), the explanation of FIG. 55 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 58 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of a two-bet bet, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the medals and credit medals bet on two coins.
In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after the start of payout. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the subsequent FIG. 58 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. 58, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, the speaker (272, 277) will emit a message saying "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 59 shows a related configuration in the case where a power outage is restored after the power is restored and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored, before the front door 102 is closed and the inserted medals are being settled and put out. This is a table summarizing the states of elements. In FIG. 59, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Figures 59 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 59 (21) is the same as FIG. 55 (21), the explanation of FIG. 55 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 59 (31) is the same as FIG. 58 (31), the explanation of FIG. 58 (31) will be used and the detailed explanation will be omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 59 (35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 59 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in FIG. 59 (36), the power is restored and the remaining medals that have not yet been paid out begin to be paid out. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the payment pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound from the speakers (272, 277) is resumed. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 59 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state during payout, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. Become. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the first voice such as "Please confirm" will not be output from the speakers (272, 277), and the output sound will not be output. continues. The reason why the first voice is not output is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on confirming payouts after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is present due to this first display. Note that part or all of the payout sound does not have to be output during the period of paying out the remaining medals after the return.

FIG. 60 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. In FIG. 60, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (41), and (42), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 60(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 55(1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 60 (41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 60 (5), is returned to the on state. The state shown in FIG. 60 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the off state to the on state. , the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. Furthermore, the monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 start lighting up. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. Also, speakers (272,
277) also starts to output a voice notifying that the settings are being checked ("Settings are being checked"). The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting.

In FIG. 60 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 60 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. In the example in FIG. 60, the front door 102 is closed while the effect image display device 157 is displaying the setting confirmation display. That means that. In this case, the speaker (272,
277), a first voice such as "Please confirm" is output instead of the voice such as "Settings are being confirmed." Note that on the effect image display device 157, the setting confirmation display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 60, the text display such as "Please confirm", which is a warning alert, is referred to as the first display, but the setting confirmation display is referred to as the first display, and the first voice is referred to as the first display. In the example of FIG. 60, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 61 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. In FIG. 61, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), (45), and (46), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 61 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since Fig. 61 (21) and Fig. 61 (22) are the same as Fig. 55 (21) and Fig. 55 (22), the explanations of Fig. 55 (21) and Fig. 55 (22) are used, and the explanation here is Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 61 (45), the third stop operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display due to the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state. Also, speakers (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed."

In FIG. 61 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 61 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second gaming state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L level close detection signal, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification ""Pleaseconfirm" is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and the advantage is that the control processing does not become complicated. In other words, the clerk is playing a game with two bets knowing the circumstances, and at the third stop stage (stage (45) in FIG. 61), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game that starts after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game has transitioned to the second game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 55 to 61 described above, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation after the setting change processing is performed. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization, step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the setting value is actually changed, if the setting change process is performed, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state as shown in the last example of FIG. 61. That is, the first sound is outputted regardless of whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or not, as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process being performed, the first sound is not output, but the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is held down. The first sound may be output when the user is asked to do so. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed.

FIG. 62 shows the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summarized table. In FIG. 62, each stage is numbered from (50) to (59), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 62 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). At the bottom, there is an item for a medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 36. Note that the gaming state is always the second gaming state (same up to FIG. 66).

In FIG. 62 (50), the power switch 244 is in the on state and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs a closed detection signal at L level. The setting key switch 281 is in an off state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are off. A demonstration animation is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a demo pattern is lit on the top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L and a right side lamp 144R, and a white color is lit on the title panel lamp 164. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted will be referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 62 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open." Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, with the front door 102 open and the power turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. The effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also start outputting a sound ("Settings are being checked") informing that settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protrusion thereof will be referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, the medals from the medal slot 141 cannot be maintained. In other words, medals cannot be inserted even if three medals, four or more medals, one or two medals are inserted. Further, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 are not accepted, or even if accepted, the operations become invalid. Further, the operation of the start lever 135 and the payment operation are not accepted, or are invalid even if accepted.

In FIG. 62 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The set value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The audio from the speakers (272, 277) changes to "The door is open." The performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 becomes inactive.

In FIG. 62 (54), the front door 102 is pseudo-closed by manually pushing down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect this opening/closing piece. As a result, although the front door 102 is open, the open sensor 294 outputs a close detection signal of L level. Audio output such as "The door is open" from the speakers (272, 277) disappears.

In FIG. 62 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is an ON operation in a state where the open sensor 294 outputs the close detection signal. In the previous explanations such as in FIG. 62 (51), the setting confirmation process was explained to be started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the power turned on. Strictly speaking, the process starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. Therefore, in this FIG. 62 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demo animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

In FIG. 62 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where it is possible to perform a bet operation, a start operation, and a settlement operation. The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 62 (57), the hand that was pushing down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, and the open sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece and outputs an open detection signal. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open." Figure 22
1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state. Further, the state shown in FIG. 62 (57) is also a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set. If the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and a bet number of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process will not start even if the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, and the production image On the display device 157, the normal background display continues. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (58), the settlement button 134 is pressed to start payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 62 (59), the payout is completed. In the state shown in FIG. 62 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the payout has been completed (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Additionally, the speakers (272, 277) begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked."
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 62 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the same figure, the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation in progress). When the payout process is completed ((58) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process starts (set in the effect image display device 157). This corresponds to the example (59) in the same figure) in which a confirmation message is displayed.

FIG. 63 summarizes the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and a game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 63, each stage is labeled with numerals (50) to (57), (61), and (62), and time elapses in the order in which the numerals are written.

The same items as in FIG. 64 are shown as component items in FIG. 63 as well (same up to FIG. 66).

Since Figures 63 (50) to (57) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (57), the explanations for Figures 62 (50) to (57) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 63 (61), the start lever 135 is operated and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 63 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. In the state shown in FIG. 63 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the game has ended (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Additionally, the speakers (272, 277) begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked." The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 63 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the figure), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation message). is not displayed), the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) Corresponds to example.

In addition, to summarize the example in FIG. 62 and the example in FIG. 63, when the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the number of bets is set. When the state is reached, a setting confirmation process is started, and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 64 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 64, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (3) and (71) to (78), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Figures 64 (1) to (3) are the same as Figures 55 (1) to (3), so the explanations for Figures 55 (1) to (3) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the settings change process has started.

In FIG. 64 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as that shown in FIG. 64(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 64 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also returned to the OFF state while the power switch 244 is turned off, and in the subsequent FIG. 64 (73), the power switch 244 is turned on. When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 41 is started, and first, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) returns the state to the state immediately before the power was cut off. In other words, even if the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, it is remembered that the setting key switch 281 was in the on state immediately before the power cut, and the setting value display 293 shows the setting immediately before the power cut. The value "1" is displayed. In addition, the information backed up at the time of power outage is returned on the sub-control unit side (400, 500), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says ``Setting confirmation in progress. ” is output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In addition, on the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in a game machine that does not store backup data at the time of a power outage, the initial setting at startup of the main control unit 300 (step S1001) indicates that the state immediately before the power outage is being changed. When the setting change command is recognized, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub control unit 400, and the sub control unit side (400, 500) displays the setting confirmation display based on the setting change command. is displayed and outputs a voice saying ``Checking the settings.''

As shown in the main control unit main process of FIG. 39, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) of FIG. 41 is executed only when the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, the determination in step S1005 is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, and then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 64 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 64 (75)). 64(76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 64 (76), the set value "1" is displayed on the set value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. In addition, a message indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says "Settings are being changed".
A sound like this will be output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 64 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed," a voice such as "Settings have been changed." may be output. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 64 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the setting value display 293 becomes hidden. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Note that instead of "The door is open," it may be possible to output a voice saying "Setting change has been completed" or "Setting change is finished." Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 65 shows a case where, after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the states of related components. In FIG. 65, each stage is labeled with the symbols (50) to (54), (81), (82), and (57) to (59), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 65 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 62 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 65 (81), with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on again in FIG. 65 (82). However, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on here, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the closed detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The display remains as it is, the normal background continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also,
Medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

Since Figures 65 (57) to (59) are the same as Figures 62 (57) to (59), the explanations for Figures 62 (57) to (59) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends, and the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal. Then, the payment operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process will not start if the number of bets of 1 or more is set. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure). When the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation is displayed. This corresponds to an example in which the process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59) in the figure).

FIG. 66 shows the related components in the case where, after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. This is a table summarizing the status of . In FIG. 66, each stage is labeled with the symbols (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62), and the time is shown in the order of the symbols. It passes.

Since Figures 66 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 62 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 62 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

Since Fig. 66 (81) and Fig. 66 (82) are the same as Fig. 65 (81) and Fig. 65 (82), the explanations of Fig. 65 (81) and Fig. 65 (82) will be used and detailed explanations will be given here. Although omitted, after the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set.

Since FIG. 66 (57) is the same as FIG. 62 (57), the explanation of FIG. 62 (57) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here. Become.

Since Figure 66 (61) and Figure 66 (62) are the same as Figure 63 (61) and Figure 63 (62), the explanations of Figure 63 (61) and Figure 63 (62) will be used and detailed explanations will be given here. Although omitted here, the start lever 135 is operated to start the game, and when the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, a setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 66 described above is an example in which when the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, it is possible to continue playing the game with the set number of bets. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are also accepted. Priority is given to the set number of bets, the game continues with the number of bets, and after the game ends, processing (setting confirmation processing) corresponding to the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 is started.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 66, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process will not start if the number of bets of 1 or more is set ((82)). The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157), the game with the set number of bets is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This also corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the figure).

Furthermore, to summarize the example in FIG. 65 and the example in FIG. 66, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the effect is The image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display, and the state is different from the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, the payout process) (completed state or game ended state), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In addition, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display 293, and the number of bets of 1 or more is set. When the state is different from the current state (a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically a state where the payout process is completed or a state where the game is finished), the setting value is set in the setting value display 293. The value is displayed.

Furthermore, whether the timing shown in FIG. 65 (57) or the timing shown in FIG. (82), corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIG. 65 (57) and FIG. 66 (57), the open sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened, such as by releasing the hand that was pressing down on the opening/closing piece while the bet number of 1 or more is still set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started and a setting confirmation in progress display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The matters described above using FIGS. 45 to 66 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper back side of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding balls falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the tank 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P. That is, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to a payout control section (not shown). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured so that they pass through the ball rail and reach the upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured so that the game ball passes through the ball rail and reaches the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. Based on this configuration, an amount of gaming value (game balls) corresponding to the awarding conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the figure, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158P that stores a main board 156P that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit to perform, a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit A second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that performs the processing, a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and includes an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels errors by operation of a gaming clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses a payout board case 172P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a launch board case 176P that accommodates a launch board 174P that constitutes a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. In addition, a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off according to the operation of a game store clerk, and a RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch 180P that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184P that accommodates a power supply board 182P, and a CR interface section 186P that transmits and receives signals between the payout control section and the card unit are provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. Even in this pachinko machine 100P, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, it is possible to set at least one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities. Setting change processing begins. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this. In addition, by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P. Is displayed. Note that when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change process may be started. The configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, are prepared, and in the display order explained using FIG. 37(a). are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order. Further, setting b is the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the setting value is to the player.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156P and placed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. Note that the accessory ratio/setting display 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, and the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, and the main body (not shown) that detects when the main body is opened corresponds to the front door 102. The main body opening sensor corresponds to the opening sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the accessory ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 293. Furthermore, a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on is provided on the main board 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67 and on each external centralized terminal board (not shown). Further, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are provided, and this liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speakers correspond to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game table frame is provided with a game table frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
``The first gaming state [for example, the 2-bet bonus non-internal winning state or the state in which setting b is set] and the second gaming state [for example, the 2-bet betting bonus internal winning state or the state in which setting 1 is set] a gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to shift to one of a plurality of gaming states including
A notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164] that can execute the first notification [for example, the first voice saying "Please confirm" or turning off the title panel lamp 164]; ,
A game machine comprising:
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first gaming state. It is a certain means,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first gaming state is a non-internal winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is a non-internally winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which the winning state has been won (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which a first number of coins is bet and a bonus is won, and the second gaming state is an internal winning state in which a player bets a first number of coins and wins a bonus. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which a person bets a number of coins and wins a bonus (the same applies below).

The second gaming state is a normal gaming state or an initial setting gaming state, and the first gaming state is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state [for example, a penalty bonus state, a setting b The first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a non-bonus winning state, a state where no points or items are acquired, etc. (The same applies below).

A door body may be provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or may be an operation to close the door body ( The same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification suggesting that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes him/her aware that the player is in the first gaming state [for example, a notification such as "This is the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Please confirm"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, speakers (272, 277)], a second notification means [for example, the title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [for example, the effect image display device]. 157] (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the gaming state when setting b is set may be the first gaming state, and in that case, the gaming mode may be changed during the gaming state with RT=gaming mode (the same applies below). ).

Furthermore, in place of the game state control means, a game control means that controls a game based on the setting of the first setting value and a game based on the setting of the second setting value. "The game executed based on the setting of the first setting value (first game) may be executed based on the setting of the second setting value. The game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game played (second game) (the same applies below). Furthermore, the first gaming state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second gaming state can be read as a state in which the second setting value is set (hereinafter (The same applies to

In addition, instead of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain combination is won internally as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of coins bet, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not the internal winning state" The non-internal winning state may be a state more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Further, the first gaming state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second gaming state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the reels are rotating [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted.

The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means issues the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating. It may be a means that may be executed.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 56 (22), FIG. 57 (22)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the rotation of the reels [for example, FIG. 56 (23)],
The notification means is configured to notify the reel when the reel is rotating and a power outage restoration occurs before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 57 (25) to FIG. 57 (26)]. Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the controller [for example, FIG. 57 (27)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The payout means is a means that is capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the certain operation when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means. It may be a means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a payment operation after inserting a medal, or may be a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation is performed after inserting a medal.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The payout means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 58 (31) or FIG. 59 (31)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 58 (32)],
When the power is restored during the payout processing period and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 59 (35) to FIG. 59 (36)], the notification means Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 59 (37)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, a character display of "Please confirm"] [for example, as shown in FIG. 55 ( 6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the display on the display means is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The display means is a means capable of starting displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notifying means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed. The first notification may be executed when the notification is performed.

Also,
"The gaming state control means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition [for example, a condition such as winning a bonus winnings with a predetermined number of coins bet and not winning the bonus winnings]" is satisfied. A means for executing control for transitioning to a gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first notification serves as a reminder to perform the initial settings.

Also,
“The above-mentioned condition is a condition that includes executing one or more games [for example, one or more games must be executed in order to win a bonus combination]”
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the clerk of the game parlor executes the game before the shop opens, the player can play the game from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is a condition including that a game is played one or more times with a predetermined number of coins bet, and that a certain combination is won. In other words, the above-mentioned certain condition may be a condition that may be satisfied by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain combination. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain role, but not winning the certain role. What has been explained here is also the same below.

Also,
"The notification means is a means that does not perform the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined time [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG. 55 (8)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the certain operation is performed after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), the store clerk is often already aware of the operation, and redundant notifications can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice of "Completed]] when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second notification allows the player to confirm that the disadvantageous gaming condition has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification indicating that the game has moved to the second gaming state or a notification indicating that the game is in the second gaming state [for example, a notification such as "It is the second gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returning"] (the same applies below).

Also,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change means for performing the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 42],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process (for example, a process that includes operating the power switch 244, setting key switch 281, etc. that cannot be operated without opening the front door 102) is an operation,
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started. There is a means [for example, Fig. 55 (6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even though the setting change process has started and the adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has started, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification. , it is possible to make the person making the setting change aware that the first gaming state is in effect.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door body is opened (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means is a means that can execute the third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 55 (3)] until the certain operation is performed [for example, Figure 55 (5)],
The third notification is a notification performed when the setting change process is completed [for example, a voice notification saying "the door is open" or "the settings have been changed"],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The notification unit may be a unit that executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change process has been completed or a notification indicating that the setting change process has been completed [for example, a notification such as "setting change has been completed"]. Alternatively, the notification may be a notification regarding the state of the game machine (for example, a notification such as "the door is open") (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 66 (81) in which medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 66 (81)] is 66 (61) to (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed.

Even if the game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game ends, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is completed. good.

If the operation means is operated while no medals have been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, if the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no bet operation is performed, the game may not be started.

The case where the operation means is operated means the case where the setting confirmation process is not executed.

The operation means includes a setting change means for performing a setting change process of changing a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player, and the operating means It may also be a means that is operated when changing settings (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 66 (81) where medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] is 66 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 66 (52)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened [for example, the open sensor 294], and the display means detects that the sensor detects that the door body is opened. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 62 (52)] when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected; The first display may not be displayed when the first display is performed [for example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 66 (81) in which medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 66 (81)] is 66 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 66 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 65 (82)], and the payment operation is performed in the first state [for example, 65 (58)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases. In addition, even if the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed, and even in this case, the first display may be displayed when the payment process is completed and the person leaves the seat, causing fraud. The act can be discovered and the wrongdoer may be exposed.

Note that the display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the display means detects that the door body is opened. means (for example, FIG. 62 (52)) for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is being detected; The first display may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in the detection state [for example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Also,
``A medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
the first passage,
a second passageway [e.g., storage passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, medal blocker 172] that distributes medals inserted from the medal slot into either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the first passage when the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (52)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

After operating the operating means, a clerk at the game parlor can check how the medals have passed. Furthermore, the game cannot be started after the operating means is operated, and the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake.

The medal return path is a path connected to a medal discharge port (eg, medal payout port 155).

The second passage is a medal storage passage (for example, the storage passage 173), and the medals that have passed through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) (for example, the bucket 181).

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The operation means is operated also in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means in which there are cases,
The medal blocker is for distributing medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The second state includes a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable by opening the door. It may also be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

Further, the medal blocker may be configured to distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 62 (55)].

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may be a means that does not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the operation means is operated. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the operation of the operating means is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operating means is operated, it is advantageous for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``Equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the operation means is operated. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. Particularly in the case where the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the set value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means performs a first operation in a first state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 65 (81) or FIG. This means does not display the first display when [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the method shown in FIG. 65 ( 82) or Figure 66 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. Can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a performance image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means displays a first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82) is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). )],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation to cause the open sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is maintained after the first case. It is a means of not displaying [for example, FIG. 65 (57) or FIG. 66 (57)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. Can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation message is displayed.

The second operation includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the second operation is performed when the sensor detects that the door body is opened. It may also be an operation to detect this.

Also, according to the above description,
A display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"];
a set value display means capable of displaying set values [for example, set value display 293];
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in a first state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82) is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). )],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state occurs [for example, completion of payout due to payment operation or end of game with the number of bets set in the first state] (hereinafter referred to as "second state") ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)],
The set value display means is a means capable of displaying the set value in the second case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. Can be done.

The setting value may be selected from a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

In addition,
“The display means is a means for not displaying the setting value in the first case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the set value is also not displayed, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with further priority.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in the open state [for example, FIG. 65 (52), FIG. 65 (82), FIG. 66 (52), FIG. 66 (82)]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 62 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

During maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the set value is not displayed due to the first operation, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and for example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special winning combination or jackpot, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may vary depending on the set value. Different (same below).

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the first operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the first operation is performed. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the first operation is being performed normally. Particularly when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
``An operation means that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation [for example, a setting key switch 281],
A game machine comprising a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may display a set value when there is an on operation [for example, FIG. 65 (52) or FIG. 66 (52)],
The on operation is an operation to switch the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the on operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the set value display means is a means that sometimes displays the set value and sometimes does not display the set value when there is an on operation.

Even if the ON operation is fraudulently performed by an unauthorized person during business hours, the unauthorized person can be prevented from checking the set value.

The device includes a door body and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened, and the set value display means is configured such that the on-operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door body is opened. The set value may be displayed when the sensor is not detected, and the set value may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected.

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
“The set value display means is a means that may display the set value when the operation means is in the off state [for example, FIG. 64 (73)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even when the operating means is in the OFF state, the set value can be confirmed, which may improve the workability of maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor.

If the power is restored after the operating means is in the on state and the operating means is switched to the off state, the display means will display the set value even if the operating means is in the off state. Display.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the turning-on operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is characterized by comprising a transmitting means [for example, external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the above-mentioned on operation is being performed normally. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely a list of the most preferred functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 167. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 68 to 167 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 68 to 167, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 167, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 68 to 167.

The slot machine described below uses a so-called medal-less configuration that uses information equivalent to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals), but in the following explanation, this information will be referred to as the "number of medals". We will use it.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends. This is a game machine that proceeds with a series of games that will end without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if the number of game medals has not been paid out.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be explained using FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 are the left reel upper symbols, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 are the left reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 are the left reel lower symbols, the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 are the middle reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the right reel 112 are the middle reel upper row symbols. The symbols displayed on the upper row are called the right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel lower row symbols, and each reel 110 Three symbols of each of the symbols 112 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of 9 symbols. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific prize winning combination (for example, a bonus prize, a special prize) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internally winning state has been carried over. This is a lamp to notify the player. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When it is pressed once, one sheet is inserted, when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 2 sheets) is inserted, and when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 3 sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112 is referred to as a "sequential push operation order" or simply The stop operation in which the first stop operation is a stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is a stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation of the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push". This is called ``order of operations'' or simply ``reverse push''. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display device for displaying information regarding the operation order (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a 7 segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, right stop button 139, middle stop button 139, When instructing to operate the stop buttons 138 in this order, "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (number of bets) to the number of medals control section 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 69.

The counting button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69 to the lending machine 700.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

Rental machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a gaming storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other type is a membership card, which is a gaming storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member at a gaming parlor. An IC card is used as the card.

A value is stored in the card. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The "number of game medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the number of bets and can be converted into the "number of medals held." The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "money balance" or "number of medals held" from the card. Furthermore, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning. This "number of game medals" is managed by the number of medals control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) stored electromagnetically. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)". This "number of medals held" is memorized so that it can be specified by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals held", which can be stored on the card. Note that the "number of medals held" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals installed in the gaming hall.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting a card below. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the banknote is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance."

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display for providing operation guidance for the lending machine 700, the status of the slot machine 100, etc. in the form of text or images. Note that the surface may be configured as a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two levels, upper and lower. The monetary balance display 705 displays the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is displayed on the medal number balance display 706 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation to obtain the "number of game medals" by withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Further, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Furthermore, even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" for the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing it from the "number of medals you have" stored on the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. It is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to "number of game medals" from the "number of medals you have" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are arranged in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held" It will be converted. In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". This may confuse players who are accustomed to traditional slot machines, where you are lent real medals, insert the real medals to secure credits, and use those credits to set the number of bets. It is possible to provide a game using a new slot machine (managed gaming machine) that does not use real medals, without giving away any coins.

Note that although the "number of stored medals" is not mentioned in this specification, the "number of stored medals" is the number of medals that are not stored in the card but deposited at the gaming parlor. At the gaming parlor, the number of medals a player has acquired through games is managed as "scores" during the day using the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. It may also be managed as a number. If both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of medals held" are stored, the "number of medals held" is preferentially debited. Further, both the "number of medals held" and the "number of stored medals" may be stored in a host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 72) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number. When storing the card number in correspondence with the card number in the host server, data that can identify the time stored in the host server may be written on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "monetary balance" is written directly on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing at which the "number of medals held" is stored in the card (membership card, visitor card) or host server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored in the hall management terminal 800 as stored medals. When the player inserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 again on the same day as the day on which the card was returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day, which was once stored as stored medals, will be transferred to the lending machine again. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the game can be played.

Furthermore, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by an attendant at the game parlor, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68, it was possible to lend out the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. The "number of medals held" may be debited and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", an LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. It lights up in a manner that represents. By operating the held medal button in this state, if the number of held medals is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces), a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces) of the "number of game medals" is added. In addition, the number of medals that the player has acquired through playing, as described above, can be stored on the card as "scores" during the day, or managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. If there is a "point", the LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 69. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

《Main control section》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control section 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal number control section 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel symbol arrangement, stop position, etc., and a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Regarding the RAM 308 (including the RAM 358 described later), the description of RAM (Random Access Memory) is used as an example to indicate that it is a readable and writable storage medium, but there are also descriptions of RWM (Read/Write Memory), The description "ram" may also be used. Furthermore, the name of the process related to RAM may also be written as RWM (read/write memory) or a name that uses the word "RAM". In this specification, the term "RAM" will be mainly used. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the medal number control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls the game when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. (Starts main control section main processing, which will be described later).

Further, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of each bet button 130, 132, start lever 135, each stop button 137 to 139, and settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process is executed in which the medals electronically stored in the medal number control unit 350 are electronically inserted into the game as medals. When it is detected that the start lever 135 has been turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used in the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, or right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stopable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. If it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal number control unit 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensor for the left reel 110, optical sensor for the middle reel 111, optical sensor for the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a drive circuit 322 that drives motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 70) provided on the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A drive circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, etc.). We are prepared.

Further, in the slot machine 100, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this setting value is connected to the game control section 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control section 302, and the main control section 300 inputs information to an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 72), etc. via this information output circuit 328. 650, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to each of the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with timer 362. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and RAM 308 but not the ROM 356 and RAM 358, and causes the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and RAM 358 but not the ROM 306 and RAM 308. Note that a WDT (watchdog timer), which is not shown, is also installed. Further, the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. The interrupt request is determined and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU 354 at each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control unit 350 executes an interrupt process (medal number control unit timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Furthermore, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also includes a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the circuit, control of the number of medals is started (starting the main processing of the number of medals control unit, which will be described later).

Connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 are a game medal number display device 170 composed of a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display, a counting button 171, and a game medal number clear switch 172.

Further, a lending machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 via a lending machine connecting terminal board 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs bidirectional communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302. Further, the game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the “number of game medals” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "number of game medals" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. The addition process includes a process based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, a process based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and a process based on a lending notice sent from the lending machine 700. can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control section 302.

Note that the game medal number clear switch 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player leaves the game with ``2'' remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to judge whether the player who left ``2'' intends to continue playing or not, and another player Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed early. Note that when the number of game medals clear switch 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared; for example, it is cleared when the number of game medals is 2 or less, and when it is 3 or more. , counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 is malfunctioning or the like and it cannot be recognized that the counting button 171 has been operated, it may not be possible to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of medals held", which may put the player at a disadvantage. However, if counting can be performed by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, there is no increase in costs. Note that clearing and counting may not be separated by determining the number of game medals, but may be separated into clearing and counting depending on the operating method of the number of game medal clear switch 172. For example, if the button is pressed for a short time, it is cleared, and if the button is pressed for a long time, it is counted. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Further, when only the number of game medal clear switch 172 is operated, the count is cleared, and when the number of game medal clear switch 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time, it is counted. The possibility of making a mistake in operation is low, and it is easy to select between clearing and counting.

《Sub-control unit》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (gaming control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, (reel backlight, etc.) is connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit and the production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 70 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control part board 300B, a first sub-control part board 400B, a reel unit 109, and a production movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are also shown on each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 70 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Also shown in the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 70 are a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Further, a reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 69. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes a game control section 302 and a medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 69, and also includes integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 326, etc. ing.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3 to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 109 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 109. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 70 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. 69. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 69 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that were supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are each supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U is driven. It becomes possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 69, and although not shown in FIG. 70, the second sub-control board is also separated from the power supply control board 252B. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up in the energized state shown in FIG. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 70) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 70 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the harness MR1 or that the connectors RC1 and MC2 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 does not light up, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. Can be done. Further, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. Can be done.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, there are LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs, such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL. For example, even if it is an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in a power outage state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a different purpose than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 68 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 70) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied to the 24V power line and 5V power line from the movable motor drive IC 424i, respectively. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if you manually open and close the shutter 163, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 70. Hereinafter, points different from the connection example explained using FIG. 70 will be mainly explained, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In this FIG. 71, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example shown in FIG. 71, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 71, since the reel relay board 902B is provided, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 70, so electrical connection failure may occur. It has become more sexual. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

Note that the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. A defective electrical connection can be confirmed by generating an induced current by manual operation in a power-off state, and by lighting up these monitor LEDs if normal.

In the description here, the left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 have been described as movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor may be used.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible. Note that these light emitting means do not move even when driven by the motor. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor, but is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted.

Note that the configuration described above is
A light emitting means;
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit having a movable body movable by driving a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows;
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 72 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68.

As shown in FIG. 72, the gaming system S includes a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, a lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. 68, a hall computer 600, a hall management terminal 800, an intermediate management terminal 810, and a management server 820. Note that the rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each gaming hall (hall) H1, H2, and is connected to the rental machine 700. Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information regarding the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (count information, lending information), the operating state of the slot machine 100, and other information are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided to comprehensively manage the gaming system 1, and provides information regarding the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Furthermore, the management server 820 is connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminal 810, and receives information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information regarding the number of medals and slot management terminals. Information such as the operating status of the machine 100 is also managed.

《Communication sequence and communication contents》
Commands are exchanged between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350. The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal number control unit 350 transmits a medal number control command (medal number control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control unit 350, a response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

In the communication between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 and the communication between the number of medals control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. Ru.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous state information includes information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB (RB information), information indicating whether the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It is composed of information (AT information) indicating whether or not the AT information is present. The setting status information includes information indicating whether the setting is being changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 69 (setting changing information), and information indicating whether the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation information). The front door status information is information indicating whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to help the player obtain advantageous results, such as notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notifying the symbols to be aimed at and stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of coins paid out for accessory objects, total number of consecutive prizes paid out, information on number of games played, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals information is information representing the number of inserted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out information is information representing the number of medals to be paid out that has been accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order for internally won winning combinations is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after entering this state. The information on the total number of tokens paid out for accessory objects is information representing the number of medals accumulated by the operation of the accessory object accumulated since the power was turned on. The total number of medals to be paid out for consecutive accessory items is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the RB, which has been accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The winning ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (accessory object ratio, continuous role object ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructional object ratio, and object condition ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling of a gaming machine. become.

The game machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c) includes two pieces of information: game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control unit information is composed of ID number information of the IC chip of the game control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control unit information includes ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

FIG. 74 shows, from the left, a first sub-control unit 400, a game control unit 302, a medal number control unit 350, and a lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained. A medal number control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal number control section 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 74, a gaming machine information notification and a count notification are transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. Further, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350, and in response to this lending notification, the medal number control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing a data structure of a message exchanged in communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number in the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number in the counting notification, and the lending serial number in the lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when it reaches 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various types of data, and the checksum stores the lower 1 byte of the sum obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of pachinko game machine, reel type game machine, arranged ball game machine, etc. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hole console/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using FIG. 73. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing details of the hole control/fraud monitoring information.

The game medal number information is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350.

The information on the number of inserted medals is the change in the number of inserted medals that has changed since the previous gaming machine information notification, depending on the number of inserted medals and the number of returned medals if there are returned medals when the payment button 134 (see FIG. 68) is operated. The information will be (-3 to 3 pieces). That is, the information is based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the information on the number of settled medals, which are included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350.

The number of paid out medals information is information representing the number of paid out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on the information on the medal payout number included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 73(a), which was explained using FIG. In addition to this, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 76(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b), the medal number control state command, various processing commands sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, and the game control priority command (error generated command).

Below, only errors that require special explanation will be explained. A medal number control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection in the medal number control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when detected. The game order abnormality is an error in which the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is outside the range of 0 to 15. That is, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out at one time is 15 coins. The mismatch in the number of coins to be paid is an error that occurs when the number of coins to be paid included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is greater than or equal to the number of inserted coins. The chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 73(c) is different from the previous information. The medal number control RAM error is an error indicating a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350. The rental machine communication abnormality is an error, which will be described in detail later, in which a rental notification has not been received even though the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is in an on state. Note that in any case where the various errors shown in FIG. 76(b) occur, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 68 are turned on, and the speaker 272 outputs an error notification sound. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

In addition to the setting state information and front door information shown in FIG. 73 (a) explained using FIG. 73, the gaming machine fraud information includes information when fraud is detected and information indicating that the number of game medals has been cleared. Contains information and security signals indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information includes information on the current number of bets and information on the number of payouts. These two types of information are distinguished by type information. The current number of bets is included in the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. Becomes the current bet value. Further, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 75(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms includes gaming machine information of the code specified in the gaming machine information type. Stored. In other words, if the value of the game machine information type is 0, the game machine performance information, if the value of the game machine information type is 1, the game machine installation information, and if the value of the game machine information type is 2, the hall console - Fraud monitoring information is stored. Gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall console/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time period (for example, 180 seconds). The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time (for example, 60 seconds), and the hall console/fraud monitoring information is notified every third time (for example, the notification period of 300 ms), which is the shortest. If the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hole control/fraud monitoring information that receives the most notifications.

FIG. 75(c) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the count notification is notified within a range of 90 ms or more and within 100 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a count notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 99, which will be described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the count button 171 shown in FIG. 68 is pressed once, the number of sheets to be counted increases by 1, and when the count button 171 is short pressed multiple times until a cycle of 300 ms arrives. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, if the count button 171 is held down for 500 ms or more and a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the number of sheets to be counted becomes 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet or 50 sheets at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information representing the number of medals counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The cumulative number of counted medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on.

FIG. 75(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal number control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the counting notification. The medal number control unit 350 monitors whether or not a lending notification is sent within 170 ms using a lending notification interval timer that is set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 101, which will be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (for example, 50 medals) is is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals in response to the operation of the loan button 707 in this manner. Note that the predetermined amount or the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount can be set in advance using the lending machine 700.

FIG. 75(e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described in detail later, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the number of lending medals notified by the lending notification is 50 or less, or the number of gaming medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than a lending threshold (for example, 15,000). It is determined whether the number of loaned medals received is normal or abnormal. In the lending receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

Next, a description will be given of the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

FIG. 77 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 77 also shows the command offset used during transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, transmits a command representing setting state information (setting changing information, setting checking information). After 2.98 ms has elapsed, a command representing front door status information (door open information) is sent. This completes the transmission of gaming machine status information.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted sheet number information) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 13H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 14H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of coins to be paid out in 3 bytes (total number of coins to be paid out information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 16H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 17H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 19H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1AH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Furthermore, after 2.98ms have elapsed, the information representing the total number of paid out tokens in 3 bytes (total number of paid out tokens information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each at an interval of 2.98ms. Send by. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects in 3 bytes (information on the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game number information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 23H.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, role ratio monitor information is transmitted over five commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. In other words, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits information representing the ratio of accessories, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information representing the continuous accessory ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 26H transmits the information representing the ratio of useful objects. The command type with the upper byte of 27H is used to send information representing the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and the upper byte of the command type is 28H to send information representing the state ratio of accessories. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has passed, game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is divided into 4 times of 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 8 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 77 are repeatedly transmitted one by one every 2.98 ms. In addition, if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command will be interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms will be explained.

FIG. 78 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control status command is also a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 78 also shows the command offset used during transmission.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an on state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into 1 byte each for upper and lower parts and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the lower 1 byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and after 5.96 ms, the upper 1 byte is transmitted with the command type in which the upper byte is 03H.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be counted (counted sheet number information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be lent (lending sheet number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained using FIG. 76(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 78 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, if there is a response command to the game control priority command, the transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command that is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms shown in FIG. 74 will be explained.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and information representing the number of sheets lent out. Note that the information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the counted number, and the information representing the number of lending medals are information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

Furthermore, various processing commands are also sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400. Various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to setting value changes, a setting change end command that includes changed setting values, an error occurrence command, an error cancellation command, and a command to change the number of sheets input. A bet command including a bet command, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed, a production information command including production information, a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, and a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed. Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, a game information command including game information, a payout start command indicating the start of payout, and the like. Note that errors in the error generation command and error cancellation command include errors expressed by the error codes explained using FIG. This includes an open error, a rental machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, etc.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. If there is a request for retransmission from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again. FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is sent to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and when this response command is not returned, the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued. There are two types: The former game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 2. FIG. 79 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command is a command type whose upper byte is 04H and transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0 to 15), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 05H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in transmitting the payout command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The input command is a command type whose upper byte is 07H and transmits the number of sheets to be input (0 to 3 sheets), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, even when transmitting the input command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The settlement command is a command type whose upper byte is 0AH and sends the number of sheets to be paid (0 to 3 pieces), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 0BH, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, even when sending a payment command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 79 receives the game control priority command 1, it transmits a response command.

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing details of the response command sent back from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302.

The response command is sent in response to a payout command (payout response), sent in response to an input command (input response), and sent in response to a settlement command (payment response). There is. In the response command, the value of the upper byte, which is the value of the command type, is 00H. The dispensing response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the dispensing command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold (for example, 16,383 pieces) due to payout.

The submission response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the submission command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of input, and abnormality corresponds to failure of input or invalid input.

The payment response is a response command that includes any one of normality, abnormality, and re-request for payment command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payment, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a threshold value for payment (for example, 16,383 coins) as a result of payment. Note that the settlement threshold has the same value as the above-mentioned payout threshold.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 76(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type whose upper byte is 02H, and is a command that includes the normality of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302 or the failure of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the number of bets is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information representing the determined number of bets (current number of bets: 1 to 3) is included. This is a command.

《Design arrangement》
A predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types are arranged on each reel 110 to 112. In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range from the position where the stop operation is performed.

《Type of winning role》
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in the game, it is possible to win a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that depending on the winning combination, the internal winning results may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of gaming conditions》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game.

《Processing overview》
Hereinafter, the processing of the game control section 302, the number of medals control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 which has received this start signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 82 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including MY counters described later) are initialized. , allows operation of the WDT 314, sets initial values, etc. Note that when the settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, if it is determined in the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data in the RAM 308, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been successfully completed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 84.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random numbers obtained from the random value generation circuit 316. , determine the internally elected role. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302.

In step S106, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S107, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S108.

In step S108, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, medal award processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 89.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process.

Next, details of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in the game control section main process of FIG. 82 will be explained using FIG. 83. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 82.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process advances to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process advances to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation is accepted. If the setting key operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006, and if the setting key operation is not accepted, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350. If this VL signal is in an on state, the process advances to step S1008, and if the VL signal is in an off state, the process advances to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, this medal insertion/start lever reception process is ended.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current number of bets) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number of coins). If the current number of bets is smaller than the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1011, and if the current bet number is greater than or equal to the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1012.

In step S1011, a process during medal insertion is executed, and the process returns to step S1001. Note that details of the process during medal insertion will be described later using FIG. 84.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 88.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is ended.

Next, details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 83 will be described using FIG. 84. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 83.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the payment button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1102, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1103.

In step S1102, a payment button process is executed, and this medal insertion process is ended. Note that details of the payment button process will be described later using FIG. 85.

In step S1103, it is determined whether the operation of any of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process is ended.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1106. Note that this requested number of medals is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350.

In step S1106, the current number of bets and the maximum number of bets (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current number of bets is not equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1107, and if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1110.
In step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current number of bets from the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet buttons 130, 132 that have been determined to have received an operation are the one-copy bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have received the operation is the one-copy bet button 130, the process advances to step S1109, otherwise the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 described above, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number of coins becomes 0. Also, if the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, if the current number of bets is 0 against the maximum number of bets of 3, the requested number is 3, and if the current number of bets is 1 The required number of coins is 2, and if the current number of bets is 2, the required number of coins is 1. Further, if the one bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1112. Note that details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 86.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1113; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, and the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is ended.

Next, details of the payment button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 84 will be described using FIG. 85. This figure is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 84.

First, in step S1201 that is executed first, a payment button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is ended.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet amount are set, and the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1206. Note that details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 86.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", the payment button process is ended.

In step S1207, the current number of bets is set to 0, and this settlement button process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 86, the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit in the process of inserting medals in FIG. ), details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (step S1605) in the medal awarding process of FIG. 89 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 84, 85, and 89.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the value of the remaining number of transmissions, and the process advances to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process advances to step S1303. Note that this response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal number control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates an "abnormality".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is any error status, this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended, and if there is no error status, the process advances to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 100 ms) is set to the value of the response standby timer, and the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, the value of the remaining number of transmissions is subtracted by 1, and the process advances to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, this process of transmitting the variation information to the medal number control unit is ended.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. Note that details of this three-command transmission process will be described later using FIG. 87.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal number control unit 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "re-request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the reception result is other than that, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is stored as a response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, using FIG. 87, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in FIG. 86 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 that is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 88.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a command serial number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 88.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 88.

Next, using FIG. 88, the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 83 (step S1014) and the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and S1409) will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 83 and 87.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, details of the medal granting process (step S109) in the game control section main process of FIG. 82 will be explained using FIG. 89. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be paid out is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1601.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1605. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 86) is executed, and the process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is ended.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process advances to step S1601.

《Game control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the game control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger to trigger the game control unit timer interrupt. start the loading process at a predetermined period.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing corresponding to various errors such as an abnormality in the communication state with the medal number control unit 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door is performed. Note that if there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, medal number control command reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 92.

In step S207, a game control command transmission process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 93.

In step S208, a performance command transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main process, timer interrupt process, etc. of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bit 11 is strobe information. -14 are command types (for example, basic commands, bet commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal winning commands, reel rotation start commands associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and commands associated with acceptance of operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands when the reels 110 to 112 stop, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), bits 0 to 112 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the game control unit 302. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Further, various lamps 336 and various seven segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the game control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal".

Next, using FIG. 91, details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 90, will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2001 that is executed first, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 0, the process advances to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 0, the process advances to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2003, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2004, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process advances to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process is ended.

In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2007, and if there is any error status, this disconnection determination process is ended.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is ended.

Next, details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be explained using FIG. 92. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2101 that is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process advances to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2102, information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal number control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal number control status commands (FIG. 78) and response commands (FIG. 80(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2104, and if there is any error status, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command that includes an error code (an error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. Note that if there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating normality will be set in the error status, but in this case, there will be no error status.

Next, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 will be explained using FIG. 93. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 90.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 77) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as explained using FIG. 77, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in order from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Among the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, the last command (41st transmitted command) is a check generated based on the transmitted contents of the previous commands. It's Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are output to the medal number control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). Note that the information output here is received by the medal number control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off, the process advances to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process advances to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal number control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

《Medal number control section main processing》
Next, the medal number control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control section.

As described above, the medal number control section 350 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 that has received this activation signal performs a reset start by the reset interrupt and executes the medal number control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, a power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt cycle is set. be done. Furthermore, communication circuit settings, etc. are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Note that details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later using FIG. 95.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Note that details of this preparation process will be described later using FIG. 98.

In step S304, a gaming machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S305. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 99.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S306. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 101.

In step S306, a rental notification reception confirmation process is executed, and the process advances to step S307. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 102.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a process for transmitting a loan receipt result response is executed, and the process returns to step S304. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 103.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 95. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 that is executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process advances to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358, and the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage, and if these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. , if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 96, the normal RAM clear processing has the least number of objects to be cleared. In addition to the area for storing information during gaming, the RAM 358 includes an area for storing hardware information such as chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and information received from the gaming control unit 302. There is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, but in normal RAM clearing processing, the area that stores information during the game is mainly cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3006. The all RAM clear process clears the most areas among the four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 96, the entire area is cleared.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM defective" is stored as RAM defect information, and the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process advances to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal count clear switch 172 is being operated, the process advances to step S3009, and if it is not being operated, the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process advances to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal number clear detection information, and the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal on from the game control section 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal on is detected, the process advances to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether the gaming control unit RAM clear command among the gaming control priority commands shown in FIG. 80(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process advances to step S3017, and if it has not been received, the process advances to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates clearing is "normal", the process advances to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate "normal", the process advances to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 96, the area excluding chip information etc. is cleared.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as RAM defect information, the process advances to step S3021; if information indicating "RAM defect" is not stored as RAM defect information, this RAM abnormality determination process is ended. do.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. Note that details of this error request setting process will be described later using FIG. 97.

Next, using FIG. 97, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process etc. of FIG. 95 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 and the like.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code has already been set, the error request setting process is ended.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process advances to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process is ended.

Next, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 98. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3201 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal number control unit 350 is updated. Note that this information is stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeatedly executed while the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 99. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3320.

In step S3302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine information notification interval timer.

In step S3303, the value of the count notification interval timer is set to a value equivalent to 90 ms.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 100.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, preparations are made to send the gaming machine performance information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, preparations are made to send the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine information type is prepared to be sent. If the value of the machine information type is 2, preparations are made to transmit hole control/fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process advances to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3308, the value of the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to zero.

In step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b)) are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification sending process of FIG. 99 will be described using FIG. 100. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 99.

First, in step S3401 that is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3404, 2 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is ended.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 101. This figure is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3501 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, the rental notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3508, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always in an on state and is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 if it is normal.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process advances to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process advances to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the number of coins to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3511, and if the number of coins to be counted is less than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set to the number of medals to be counted.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S3514, the value of the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to OFF.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number is added to the cumulative number of medals.

In step S3518, the total number of medals is transmitted to lending machine 700.

In step S3519, the checksum is transmitted to rental machine 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 102. This figure is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3601 that is executed first, if the rental notification reception flag is off, the process advances to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3603, and if the same value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the rental notification reception confirmation process is ended. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state.

In step S3604, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 103, details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 94 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S3701 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to OFF.

In step S3703, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the lending serial number is set in the checking lending serial number. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 106), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the length of the message, the command type, the normal lending serial number, the receipt result of the number of lending sheets, and the checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the previous transmission content.

In step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending reception result response transmission process is ended.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission from step S3707 to step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of lending medals is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process is ended.

《Medal number control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the medal number control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. 104. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the medal number control section timer interrupt processing.

The medal number control section 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the medal number control section timer to be activated. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S402, in order to prevent the count value of the WDT from exceeding the initial setting value and a WDT interrupt from occurring (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality), the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the medal count control unit timer is used). The restart is performed once every 0.745ms, which is the interrupt cycle.

In step S403, input port status update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input ports are stored in the signal status storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, rental notification reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 105.

In step S405, processing for updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 107.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 108.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 119.

In step S408, a medal number control command transmission process to the game control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 120.

In step S409, display processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 121.

In step S410, timer update processing is performed to update various timers in respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (a power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the medal number control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power recovery, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal". Note that when the gaming control unit 302 detects the power cutoff, similar processing (step S214 in FIG. 90) is executed, but the processing here ends before the processing on the gaming control unit 302 side ends. If this happens, commands from the game control section 302 cannot be received. In order to avoid such a problem, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the processing here ends after the processing on the game control section 302 side ends.

Next, using FIG. 105, details of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4001 that is executed first, the lending notification reception flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental machine 700, the process advances to step S4003, and if not received, this rental notification reception process is ended.

In step S4003, information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notification. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, a loan number determination process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 106.

In step S4005, the determination result in step S4004 is set as the result of receiving the number of lending sheets.

In step S4006, the rental notification reception flag is set to ON, and this rental notification reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 106, details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of FIG. 105 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105.

First, in step S4101 that is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the data of the received rental notification.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, the number of borrowed sheets is determined. Finish the process.

In step S4104, the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notification is compared with the value of the confirmation rental serial number stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process advances to step S4105, and if the two are different, this rental The number of sheets determination process ends. Note that if the previous lending notification was received normally, the confirmation lending serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103 (updated from the previously received lending serial number). .

In step S4105, if the received lending notification message length and command type information correspond to the lending notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, this lending number determination process ends. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 0, the process advances to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process advances to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process advances to step S4108, and if the same value is 15,000 or more, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information type of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification was 2, that is, whether the gaming machine information notification was about hole con/fraud monitoring information, and the value of the gaming machine information type is determined. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109, and if the same value is not 2, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4109, if the value of the counted number in the previously transmitted counting notification is 0, the process advances to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 50 or less, the process advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of rental sheets ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and this lending number determination process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 107, details of the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process (step S405) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4201 that is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S4213. In addition, this VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the rental machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state if it is normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process advances to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process advances to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4206, the value of the counting long press timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 500 ms), and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process advances to step S4208, and if the same value is not 1, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4210, if the counting button 171 was operated immediately before (the counting button 171 was released), the process advances to step S4211, and otherwise, this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4213, the counting long press flag is set to OFF.

In step S4214, the value of the count long press timer is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

Next, details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be explained using FIG. 108. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4301 that is executed first, if switching from OFF to ON of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, the process advances to step S4302, and in other cases, this game control unit command reception processing end.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a gaming control state command, the process advances to step S4304, and if the received command is not a gaming control state command (it is a gaming control priority command), the process advances to step S4305.

In step S4304, gaming control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 109.

In step S4305, a game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 110.

Next, details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 108 will be explained using FIG. 109. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 108.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process advances to step S4404, and if the received command is any other command, the process advances to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, and a check is made in which the last command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. This is a command to send a thumb. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process advances to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated according to the contents of the 1st to 40th commands in step S4403 is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the gaming control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is considered normal. It is determined, and the process advances to step S4405, and if the two are different, this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process advances to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquisition chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in the RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID obtained in step S4408 match, the process advances to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process advances to step S4414.

In step S4410, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358. Through steps S4411 and S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 108 will be explained using FIGS. 110 and 111. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 108.

First, in step S4501 that is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process advances to step S4502, and if the command is other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. 111. As mentioned above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to the step of FIG. 111. The process will proceed to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 and the contents thereof are stored in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process advances to step S4507. If they are different, this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag to be described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is equal to the value of the gaming control command serial number (gaming control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), step S4511 If the two are different, the process advances to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 111.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4514 in FIG. 111, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process advances to step S4515; otherwise, the process advances to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process advances to step S4517; otherwise, the process advances to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 112.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process advances to step S4519; otherwise, the process advances to step S4520.

In step S4519, payment command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 113.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process advances to step S4521; otherwise, the process advances to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 114.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process advances to step S4523; otherwise, the process advances to step S4524.

In step S4523, payout command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 116.

In step S4523, error command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 118.

Next, details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 112. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4601 that is executed first, information indicating "re-request" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process is ended.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands), the process advances to step S4605; otherwise, this input command Ends reception processing.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception processing is ended.

Next, details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 113. This figure is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4701 that is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4702, if the current value of the bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.
In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command reception process is ended.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "inconsistency in number of paid sheets" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and this settlement command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 114. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4801 that is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the game interval abnormality timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds).

In step S4804, the type information setting value is set to 11H (see FIG. 76(a)), and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the game control unit 302) is set as the count information setting value. Ru. Here, the set information is later included in gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception processing is ended. Note that details of the game information setting process will be described later using FIG. 115.

In step S4807, information indicating "gaming interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the gaming information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever acceptance command receiving process in FIG. 114 and the gaming information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command receiving process in FIG. 116 will be described using FIG. 115. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 114 and 116.

First, in step S4901 that is executed first, the number of game information is incremented by one.

In step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (it is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114 or step S4A14 in FIG. 116) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the value of the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is ended. Here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 114 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 116 is set as type information 1. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the value of the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 114) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process ends.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided in order to transmit information about both of them in case the game starts quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the lending machine 700). It is something that That is, when payout information (step S4A14, etc. in FIG. 116) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (step S4804, etc. in FIG. 114) is set in type information 2 and count information 2. may be set to . Note that from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be sent to the lending machine 700 (cleared), so the payout information is not the type information. 2 and count information 2 is never set.

Next, details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 116. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, the game medal number clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the player wins in the replay, the process advances to step S4A04, and if the player does not win in the replay, the process advances to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of payout coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the three commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands).

In step S4A09, information indicating "gaming order abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

In step S4A11, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 117.

In step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process advances to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command receiving process is ended.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set as the type information setting value.

In step S4A15, if the replay winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the game control section 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set in the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A17, the current bet amount is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process shown in FIG. 115 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 will be explained using FIG. 117. This figure is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4B01 that is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

Next, details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 110 and 111 will be explained using FIG. 118. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S4C01 that is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control section 302, the error on the medal number control section 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control section 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "gaming control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if information indicating "abnormality in the game order" (error code E2) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8) is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if information indicating "defective game control RAM" (error code rE) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08, otherwise, this error command reception process is ended.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is ended. By setting this flag on, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 110).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be explained using FIG. 119. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4D01 which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "gaming control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 97 is executed, and the process advances to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process advances to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this error monitoring process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 120, details of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 104 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, the information of the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-mentioned power-on flag is off, the process advances to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control unit is ended.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be sent to the game control unit 302 (response command set in any of the input command reception process in FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process in FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process in FIG. 116) is set. If no response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E05, and if some response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state command (six types of commands) explained using FIG. 78 is repeatedly sent in order from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into an upper byte and a lower byte and transmitted using two of six types of commands; The value of the number of game medals acquired when transmitting the first command is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in any of the input command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any of the input command reception process of FIG. 112, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 113, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 116 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the strobe counter value is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the same value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process advances to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. Note that this value is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are output to the game control section 302, and the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control section ends. Note that the information output here is received by the game control unit 302 side when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described using FIG. 121. This figure is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if they are the same value, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the value of the number of game medals for display.

In step S4F05, the value of the number of game medals for display is subtracted by 1.

In step S4F06, a value equivalent to 4 ms is set to the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display display process is ended.

《Modification 1》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 1) of the process related to inserting medals will be explained using FIGS. 122 to 124. 122 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 112. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 122, among the processes shown in FIG. 84, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 84 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In the modification shown in FIG. 123, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 87, and step S1421 is provided. This process will be explained below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In the modification shown in FIG. 124, step S4603 of the processing shown in FIG. 112 is deleted. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided beyond the route of No in the determination of step S4604, and furthermore, step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4621, information on the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is referred to, and if the flag is off, the process advances to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of medals included in the received command (the first command among the three commands), that value is set as the value of the number of game medals, and the process advances to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is set to 0, and the process advances to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this submitted command reception processing is ended.

《Modification 2》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 2) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 107.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 125, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. 107. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and further, step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the press time of the count button 171.

In step S4222, the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171.

《Modification 3》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the scheduled counting number update process will be described using FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 107.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 126, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. 107. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the route of No in the determination of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are further provided before step S4210. Furthermore, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process advances to step S4232, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process advances to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 127. Note that FIG. 127(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 127(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 127(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.
First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed. Note that details of this command processing will be described later using FIG. 127(d).

In step S509, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the effect data read in step S509, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 127(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 127(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 127(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, the device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S515, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 127(a) will be described using FIG. 127(d). This figure is a flowchart of command processing (step S507) in FIG. 127(a).

First, in step S541 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S543; otherwise, this command processing is ended.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 128. Note that FIG. 128(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 128(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S609, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes processing such as reading out other performance data from the ROM 506, and performing an update process on the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 128(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 128(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 128(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 128(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 128(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S625; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S625, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S631; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S631, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

《Operation explanation》
The operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained below.

[Operation when power is turned on]
In the medal number control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, the normal RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) process is performed, and the state returns to the state when the power was turned off (step S3003 in FIG. 95). (Determination of Yes). Note that when the power is turned on for the first time, it is in the initial state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) is executed (No determination in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM defect" in the RAM defect information, information indicating "RAM defect" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 95). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 97). This error information is transmitted to the game control section 302 (FIG. 120), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 92 and 83). Note that even if the game control section 302 receives an error from the medal number control section 350, the contents of the RAM are not cleared. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON, various information is updated (initialized) when receiving the game control unit status command (FIG. 95 (Yes in step S3007 and step S4407 in FIG. 109).

Further, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the gaming control unit 302 when the power is turned on (step S101 in FIG. 82). The medal number control unit 350 that has received this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95). At this time, the medal number control unit 350 once permits the interrupt process, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, disables the interrupt process and performs the subsequent process. The process upon reception can be reliably executed (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 95).

In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of game medals can be initialized by operating the number of game medal clear switch 172 when the power is turned on (determination of Yes in step S3008 in FIG. 95). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the gaming medal number clear detection information, but while this information is set, information regarding this clearing is included in the gaming machine information notification and the rental machine 700 (Figure 99). Note that the game medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 116).

[Transmission of game control status commands (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, game control status commands consisting of 41 types (see FIG. 77) are transmitted to the medal number control unit 350. . Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control status commands are sent one by one to the medal number control unit. It is set in the buffer (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 93). However, if the game control priority command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After the game control status command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set on (step S2208 in FIG. 93). ). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control unit 350 side receives a command. Note that the strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt processing and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), but the output from the I/O port remains unchanged. . This makes it possible to more stably receive commands on the medal number control unit 350 side. When the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 93). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time one interrupt process is executed. In addition, while the transmission state continues for 1.49ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98ms), the gaming control unit 302 has two reception timings (interrupt processing of 0.745ms is performed twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

[Transmission of game control priority command (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control status command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but the game control priority command gives priority to the medal number control unit 350 depending on the game status in the game control unit main process. It is transmitted to the number control section 350. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the gaming control command transmission processing (FIG. 93), the gaming control command transmission processing is executed in the next timer interrupt processing (the next gaming control status command is The game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing before the game control state command is set in the transmission buffer, so that the game control priority command is given priority to the medal number control unit 350. The game control priority commands include the input command associated with the operation of inserting game medals, the settlement command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets, the start lever reception command associated with acceptance of start lever operation, and the input command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets. There are payout commands associated with payout, error generation commands associated with error occurrence, and RAM clear commands associated with RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) (FIG. 80(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals, the second command is a command that includes the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals. This command includes a checksum based on the contents of two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the values of the upper bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

Note that if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information indicating “request”, the command is retransmitted. (No determination in step S1308 in FIG. 86, No determination in step S1310) exceeds the upper limit number of retransmissions, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal number control unit 350. (No determination in step S1302 and step S1306).

Furthermore, if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information other than “request”, this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command sequence number is incremented by 1 (see Figure 86 steps S1311, S1312).

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)]
When the game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals (requested number) requested by this operation is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 84). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, the 1 bet button and the MAX bet button, can be used to perform the placing operation. If the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required to set the maximum bet amount is set to the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 84), and if the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is set to the requested number of medals. is set (step S1109 in FIG. 84). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the insertion operation (No determination in step S1106 in FIG. 84).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the input command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 84, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and the upper byte data is added to 1. The command is added and updated to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands that make up the input command) is sent to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88). Then, in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93), the command of the transmission buffer is sent to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt process When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. At the same time, a command consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum (the third of the commands composing the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 87). ~S1411, Figure 88). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The input command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above-described flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 84).

Note that in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the process of the input command described above is not executed (No determination in step S1104 in FIG. 84).

In addition, even if the bet button is operated, the input command is not sent from the time the input command is sent until the response command is received from the medal number control unit 350 (step S1112 in FIG. 84 receives the response command). ).

Further, when the bet button is operated, the command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a response command to the input command is received or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350. (Step S1114 in FIG. 84). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payment operation (transmission of payment command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current number of bets is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current number of bets can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current number of bets is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 in FIG. 84, step S1203 in FIG. 85).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the payment command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 85, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as that for the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

A settlement command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the current value of the number of bets becomes 0. is set (Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 85).

In the above example, the current bet value becomes 0 after receiving the response command (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the current bet value is subtracted). Therefore, in the state before receiving the response command, the value of the current bet number has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added to the number of game medals in the medal number control unit 350 that has received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If a response command indicating "normality" is not received, the current bet value is not subtracted and an error occurs (No determination in step S1206 in FIG. 85), but this error can be avoided by some means. Then, since the value of the current number of bets is not subtracted, as a result, the number of medals increases by the amount that the number of game medals is added by the medal number control unit 350, and game medals are fraudulently acquired by the settlement operation. It turns out. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the value of the current number of bets is set to 0 before and after sending the settlement command, and a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command is not used). Note that in a configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication status may not be detected, but by using a configuration that uses response commands for input commands, errors in the communication status can be detected, so communication quality will not deteriorate. You can do it like this. Note that a command index may be managed between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350, and an error may be determined when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on incorrect information from being performed.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the payment and may treat it as an error. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

In addition, in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the processing of the above settlement command is not executed (No determination in step S1202 in FIG. 85).

Furthermore, when the payment button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not a payment command is sent or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 85). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the payment button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is greater than or equal to the startable number, the upper byte data indicating that it is a start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value. A command consisting of (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 83). Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 83). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a payout winning combination is won, the value of the payout number is set to the number of game medals (requested number) required for payout (step S1602 in FIG. 89). Next, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 93).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

The payout command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is “normal”, the payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. A command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 89). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and the payout cannot be accepted, so the command indicating this state is The information is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 89). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can perform an effect corresponding to the overflow. Note that if the overflow condition is not resolved, the retransmission of the payout command is repeated and the game becomes unable to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171. Once the overflow condition is resolved, the performance corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can be played. That is, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with the situation by himself without calling a store clerk.

[Operation when receiving medal number control command]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 92), it determines the type of this command (game control status command (FIG. 78) or response command (FIG. 80). (b)), and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the type of command (step S2102 in FIG. 92).The response commands for the input command, settlement command, and payout command are the contents updated here. In addition, if the command received here is a command that includes an error code, this error code indicates an error in the game control unit 302, provided that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set. The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 92).

[Transmission of medal number control command (from medal number control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal number control state commands (see FIG. 78) are transmitted to the game control section 302. Specifically, by the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of the medal number control unit 350 that sends a medal number control command to the game control unit (step S408 in FIG. 104, FIG. 120), one medal number control state command is sent. 120 (Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 120). However, if the response command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S4E04 of FIG. 120).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 120). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 120), the command will be received on the game control section 302 side. In addition, in managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that is incremented by 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, it is set to on. It is set to off between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 120). Note that the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 120). In other words, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. . In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98ms (0.745ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49ms interrupt processing), so the command It is possible to prevent omissions.

[Operation when receiving game control status command]
When the medal number control section 350 receives a command from the game control section 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control state command, the game control state command reception process (FIG. 108) is performed. Step S4304 (FIG. 109) is executed.

41 types of game control status commands (Fig. 77) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (if No in step S4401 of Fig. 109) judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 109, S4410-S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in RAM and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match. (Yes in step S4409 in FIG. 109). Note that if the IDs do not match, error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 109). Additionally, if all RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) is executed in the medal number control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM has been cleared, so this is an exception. The update process is executed without executing the above chip ID check (game control unit chip ID acquisition flag turned on in FIG. 95, No determination in step S4407 of FIG. 109).

[Operation when receiving game control priority command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if this command is a game control priority command, the game control priority command reception process (FIG. 108) is performed. Step S4305, FIG. 110, FIG. 111) is executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (input command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 110), and the third command is If so, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if it is abnormal, information indicating "request" is sent as a response command. (Steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 110).

Next, if the gaming control command serial number update flag is on, the gaming control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the gaming control command serial number updating flag is set to off (Fig. 110 (Yes determination in step S4507). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation where an error in the command serial number occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 118).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 110). Since both the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 increment the command serial number by 1 (step S1312 in FIG. 86, step S4511 in FIG. 110), these values will match if there is no abnormality. Note that if these values do not match, error code E3 is set to the error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 110).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 111).

[Operation when receiving input command]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, input command reception processing is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). In this process, if the value included in the input command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of coins) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of coins is added to the number of medals inserted, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, After the number of game medals requested to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 112). Note that if the requested number of coins to be inserted is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 112). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set on (step S3509 in FIG. 101), and when this flag is on, information indicating "re-request" is included in the response command. is set (No determination in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 112).

[Operation when receiving payment command]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 111, FIG. 113). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as the number of coins requested for settlement) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 113). If the current value of the number of bets is 0, the number of coins requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the number of coins requested for settlement is added to the number of gaming medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 113). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99). Note that if the current bet number is not 0, error code E6 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4702 of FIG. 113).

[Operation when receiving start lever reception command]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on (step S4801 in FIG. 114). If this flag is not set to on, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 114), the initial value is set in the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 114), and further, game information is set. The processing to do so is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 114). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates reception of the start lever. Further, the current bet amount is set in the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99). Note that if the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, error code E5 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4802 in FIG. 114). This game interval abnormal timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 82) in the game control unit 302, but by using this timer in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, Preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving a payout command]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, first the game medal number clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal count clear switch 172 when the power is turned on, but the configuration is such that this information is sent to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared upon receiving this payout command. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A02 of FIG. 116). This flag is set to ON when the start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used to prevent fraud.

Next, if the player has won a prize in the re-game, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 116). In cases other than replay winnings, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid out coins) is 15 or less, the value of the number of paid out coins is set to the number of paid out medals and the additional value of the number of game medals, respectively (Fig. 116 steps S4A07, S4A08). Note that the value of the number of payout medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 99). Note that if the number of coins to be paid out is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No determination in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 116).

Subsequently, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 116, FIG. 117). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is less than or equal to 16383, which is the upper limit for the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit for the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117). In addition, regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as described later (see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control unit 350)]), in actual operation, the number of game medals is equal to the actual threshold value. If it exceeds the actual threshold value, it cannot be increased by dispensing (response command ``abnormal''), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by dispensing (response command ``normal''). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment); for example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 116). Furthermore, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 116). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates that there has been a payout. Further, the number of coins to be paid out (the current number of bets in the case of replay winnings) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99).

[Game machine information notification (periodically transmitted from medal number control unit 350 to rental machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S304 in FIG. 94, FIG. 99). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 99). Further, 90 ms is set to the count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification (step S3303 in FIG. 99).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting and determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transferring the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set as the number of game medals for count determination (step S3304 in FIG. 99).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall console/fraud monitoring information (Figure 75 (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hole console/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 100). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at approximately 60-second intervals, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type at approximately 180-second intervals, and 2 is set to the gaming machine information type at other times. . In other words, in gaming machine information notifications with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly includes hole control and fraud monitoring information, but gaming machine installation information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and about 180 seconds. Gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information, including gaming machine information according to these gaming machine information types (FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b)), is set in the sending buffer to the rental machine (step S3306 in FIG. 99). ), are transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 99). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 99).

In addition, the hole console/fraud monitoring information corresponding to gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid out medals, and the number of gaming information, but this information is not sent to the lending machine. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 99).

[Count notification (regularly sent from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S305 in FIG. 94, FIG. 101). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 99, step S3501 in FIG. 101).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be notified of the counting (FIGS. 75(a) and 75(c)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 101). , S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 101).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 in FIG. 101, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the number of tokens to be counted is set to a value other than 0, the number of tokens to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101). step S3514). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 101). Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107).

[Setting of planned number of medals to be counted (number of medals control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, the scheduled number of medals to be counted is updated in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107). In this process, the number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and a count notification containing this information is transmitted to lending machine 700.

First, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms have passed since it was pressed), the count button 171 is The long press flag is not set to on (Yes is not determined in step S4207 in FIG. 107). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (Yes in step S4210 of FIG. 107, step S4212).

Next, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500ms have passed since the press was pressed), the count long press flag is set to ON and the count is started. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 107). After that, as long as the counting button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and each time a counting notification is sent, the number of sheets to be counted is based on this scheduled number of sheets. will be set. On the other hand, if you release the counting button 171 while the count long press flag is on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 107). Yes is determined in step S4211, and No is determined in step S4211).

[Rental notification (regularly sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 105). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification and the checksum included in the rental notification match (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 106). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation lending serial number of the medal number control unit 350 and the lending serial number included in the lending notification match (step S4104 in FIG. 106). Note that the confirmation lending serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 103), and is configured so that they match if communication is normal. has been done. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rental sheets included in the rental notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 106). On the other hand, if the number of lending sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (No determination in step S4106 in FIG. 106).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it is configured such that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is possible. It will behave the same. Further, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase the number by lending, and in other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the same operation as in this embodiment is performed. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending. , it is sufficient that there exists a value that is the actual threshold value, and any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment).For example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process. do not have.

Alternatively, the above determination may be made based on the added number of game medals instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a value that is an actual threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. That is, this configuration can also be said to be such that in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4108 in FIG. 106). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4109 in FIG. 106). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes do not coexist.

Finally, if the number of lending sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4110 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (Yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 106).

The determination result of the above process is set as the rental number receipt result, and the rental notification reception flag is set on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 105).

In addition to the above lending notification reception process, the medal number control section 350 executes a lending notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control section main processing (step S306 in FIG. 94, FIG. 102). In this rental notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the rental notification reception flag is on for 170ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 101, steps S3601, and step S3602 in FIG. 102). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 104, FIG. 105).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the rental notification reception flag is not turned on by the time 170ms elapses from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 102). The value of this rental machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when executing the rental machine reception result response transmission (step S3701 in FIG. 103), but if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter reaches 1, an error occurs (Fig. 119 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, after the lending notification reception confirmation process, if the lending notification reception flag is set to on, the lending reception result response transmission process is executed in the medal number control unit main processing (steps in FIG. 94). S308, FIG. 103).

In this rental reception result response transmission process, parameters related to rental machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 103).

Subsequently, if the lending number reception result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 103). Further, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the confirmation lending serial number, 1 is added to the value of the confirmation lending serial number (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103). That is, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notice.

Subsequently, the data to be the subject of the lending reception result response (FIGS. 10A and 10E) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 103). Through the above process, if the result of receiving the number of borrowed sheets is "normal", the currently received loan serial number will be sent; if the result of receiving the number of loaned sheets is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be sent. . Note that if the result of receiving the number of loaned medals is "normal", the value of the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 103).

[Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 90). For example, if a strobe signal during command transmission from the medal number control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 91). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350. If the error status is set, a process to notify that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 83, step S1603 in FIG. 89). Therefore, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal number control section 350 side. For example, if there is no error on the game control section 302 side, an error on the medal number control section 350 side is notified. will be done. Further, the error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 90).

[Operation in response to error (medal number control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, if it is determined that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 95, step S4414 in FIG. 109, step S4512 in FIG. 110, step S4706 in FIG. 113, step S4706 in FIG. 114). Step S4807, Step S4A05 in FIG. 116, Step S4A09 in FIG. 116, Step S4D02 in FIG. 119, Step S4D06 in FIG. 119, and FIG. 97). This error code information is transmitted to the game control section 302 by the medal number control state command. Note that when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 118). Thereby, the configuration is such that an error on the game control section 302 side is processed more preferentially than an error on the medal number control section 350 side.

[Modified example of input operation]
122 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 84, FIG. 123 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 112. be. The operations performed by these processes will be described below.

In the process of inserting medals in FIG. 84, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current number of bets, and an insert command including this information is sent to the medal number control unit 350. (Figure 87). On the other hand, in FIG. 122, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the number-of-insertion limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 122), and the 1 bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 122). Then, an input command including information on the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 (FIG. 123).

In the insertion command receiving process of FIG. 124, if there is a number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, and the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, so that the value of the requested number is The response command is returned to the game control unit 302 (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 124, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number, the input number limitation flag is referred to (No determination in step S4604 of FIG. 124). If the input number limited flag is on, no processing is performed on the requested number of coins, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No determination in step S4621 of FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 122), so the current number of bets is maintained without changing. It turns out.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 124, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number and the input number limitation flag is off, the same operation as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number will occur (see FIG. 124). (Yes is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to become zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by the response command. The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the above modified example, if the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested in the input command is not sufficient, if the input number limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number of tokens, and if the input number limit flag is off, then 0 is returned for the requested number of medals. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number. With this configuration, when the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302, the operation of not responding and the operation of responding as much as possible are used. A limited flag) is sent together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet number, it may be possible to prevent the current bet number from unintentionally becoming a disadvantageous value.

Note that in this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, the value required to set the maximum bet amount is set as the requested number of coins. A configuration may also be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets, as shown in FIG.

For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, if the 1 bet button 130 is operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. When an input command is transmitted with the maximum bet number as the requested number, the medal number control unit 350 does not accept this requested number (exceeds the maximum bet number). In this case as well, there will be a case where the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302. In such cases, by sending the information for proper usage and the requested number of sheets together, you can choose between an action that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an action that corresponds to the requested number of sheets as much as possible (for example, returning 0 as a response command). For example, it is possible to use a command that returns the maximum bet amount as a response command.

《Operation example》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation related to counting process]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 129(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), time passes from left to right. Note that the same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), arrows are marked with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 129(b). These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170.

Furthermore, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The number of coins counted (the number of gaming values transmitted to the rental machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Furthermore, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "counted number". Furthermore, below that, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 129, the operation of the counting button 171 is started when the "number of game medals" is 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 129(b), the number “250” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after starting the operation of the counting button 171, the counting button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171. Even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the counting button 171 continues to be operated, becomes a long-press operation, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets (step S4209 of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 107). ). In the following description, operating the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more will be referred to as a long press, and operating the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting the operation will be referred to as a short press. The scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 107 is executed at a 0.7 ms cycle, and while the counting button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is updated at a 0.7 ms period. It continues to be overwritten with the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "250" is subtracted by "1". In this change display, a number subtracted by "1" is displayed at approximately 4 ms intervals by the display display process shown in FIG. 121. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. Display (a display that is performed before displaying the number of game medals after the reduction of 50 medals, and a display that makes it clear that the number of game medals is changing) is performed. Then, when approximately 200 ms has elapsed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 129(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, the number of medals to be counted is set again based on the value of the scheduled number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 medals are sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The count notification will be sent again. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, after approximately 200 ms has elapsed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 129(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is the 50 medals. It will decrease to 100 pieces. It is assumed that the counting button 171 is subsequently released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-press operation of count button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of sheets to be counted (50 sheets here) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the "number of game medals" also remains at 100. Furthermore, since the change display is performed in a shorter time (approximately 200 ms) than the counting timing of 300 ms, after the player visually confirms the number after 50 medals have been reduced, if he/she wishes to keep that number of game medals, , by ending the operation of the counting button 171, that number of game medals can remain.

Also, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before the first counting timing arrives after you start operating the counting button 171 (if you release your hand at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 129(a)), , one sheet is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 107), and when the counting timing arrives, that one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249, and the number "249" is displayed on the number of game medals display device 170.

In addition, if the counting button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the counting button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, if the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times before the counting timing arrives. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by 1 each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the counting timing arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (corresponding to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short presses so far is transmitted as a count notification.

On the other hand, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since you started operating the counting button 171 and before the first counting timing arrives (see arrow B shown in FIG. 129(a)), (If you take your hand off at the right timing), even if 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 107, so a count notification of 50 sheets will not be sent. The value of "count" becomes 0 (a count notification with a count of 0 is sent). Similarly, if the display on the game medal number display device 170 changes from 250 to 200 over about 200 ms, and then the counting button 171 is released before the next counting timing arrives (FIG. 129(a) Even if you release your hand at the timing of arrow C shown in ), a counting notification of 50 sheets will not be sent, and the "count" value will be 0 sheets (a counting notification with a counted number of 0 sheets will be sent). ).

FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing a first example of the effect when counting is being performed.

FIG. 130 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the counting button 171 is pressed briefly and one coin is counted, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display notifying that counting is being performed. For example, if the game background display is displayed, , the display continues. Further, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272. For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, that output is continued. If a small number of counting sounds are output, they may mix in with other performance sounds and give the player a different sense of expectation than the expectation that the other performance sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If there is a large number of counting sounds, the output time will be longer, so there is less risk that the sound will mix with other performance sounds, and the effect on other performance sounds will be small. Note that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be outputted, as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is held down and 50 sheets are counted, a display notifying that counting is being performed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. . That is, as described above, the security command sent from the gaming control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound when information representing 50 sheets is transmitted as information representing the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the second sub-control unit 500 also receives information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the number of sheets to be counted, it displays a counting notification.

Furthermore, as the long press continues and 50 sheets are being counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound of "piyo piyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more. Since the length of the counting sound that is output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound that is output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds as if it is being output continuously. For example, if the counting sound is longer than 0.5 seconds, it will overlap with the counting sound that is output at the next 50 sheet counting timing, and continuity will be maintained, and the counting sound will not be output during consecutive counting periods. Continue without interruption. Continuous counting is recognized by the text display "Continuous counting" and continuous counting sounds.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing this, for example, if a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is pressed for a long time when less than 50 medals remain (for example, 10 medals remaining), 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is only a little time remaining from the change in the performance sound.

FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. In this embodiment, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the value of the current number of bets does not change, but in FIG. 131, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is executed. This is a modification example in which a settlement process (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrease to the number of game medals) is performed beforehand.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, the settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. be exposed.

In FIG. 131, the "current number of bets" is shown, and below that the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is three. In response to this bet operation, three medals are subtracted from the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and the number is reduced from 68 to 65. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the counting button 171 is operated, an up edge of a signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, the number of betted coins is first returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to 68. In other words, the state returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After this cancellation, counting processing is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, 50 coins are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 18 coins.

In this example, although the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" by operating the count button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 68, the number of game medals changes due to further counting processing. You end up doing it. In this configuration, if only the current number of bets is desired to be changed, the settlement button 134 may be operated. For example, if you want to change to a 1-coin bet after placing a 3-coin bet, operate the settlement button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals" and then make a 1-copy bet again. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Incidentally, since the settlement process can be performed by operating the count button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information representing the number of coins to be counted is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the game control unit 302 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets that are included in the security command and is sent until the number of sheets that is sent becomes 0, at which point it becomes 0 (when counting ends). Execute the counting end effect with . The counting end performance here is a performance according to the number of counts to be performed at one time.

FIG. 132(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). During counting, the effect image display device 157 displays a counting effect (for example, displays the text "Continuous counting" and outputs a counting sound, as explained using FIG. 130), and when counting is completed, a counting effect is performed. , a counting end effect 1 is performed in which characters "Counting End" are displayed on the effect image display device 157.

On the other hand, FIG. 132(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets) or more. When the counting of more than a predetermined number of coins is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the character display of ``Counting completed'', a warning display of ``Be careful not to save too much'' is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear. Therefore, it is desirable that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals." Therefore, it is preferable to provide notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. The alert display described using FIG. 132(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and urges the lending machine 700 to appropriately transfer gaming value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative number of sheets counted. For example, if the cumulative count is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative count exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect B is performed. shall be carried out. Further, counting performance A is a performance that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting performance B is a performance that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative number of coins may give an unfavorable impression to the player.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be explained.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such conventional slot machines, the subject of actual medal settlement processing includes not only the betted medals but also the stored medals (for example, the maximum number of medals that can be bet is 3 and the maximum number that can be stored is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be processed for settlement.) When this payment process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying a demo screen on the effect image display device 157. That is, there is a certain amount of time while the payment processing, which may involve the physical discharge of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, a demonstration is performed. Shift to demonstration performance based on commands.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the betted medals (currently the number of bets, maximum 3), and since physical medals are not ejected, The processing time involved in payment is very short. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time related to payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is such that the performance is executed based on the execution of the payment process, this performance will only be performed for a short period of time before the demonstration performance, and there is a risk that the performance will feel strange to the player. There is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 133, a payment button command indicating that the payment button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 performs a production based on this payment button command. (output of checkout sound, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 133, when the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed. As a result of this settlement operation, the number of betted medals (3 medals) is added to the "number of game medals" and becomes 68 medals from 65 medals.

FIG. 133 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. Even if the payment operation is performed, the payment sound is not output from the speaker 272. Further, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the payment display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 133 immediately switches to demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demo command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration more clear.

In addition, the specification may be such that the payment performance is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While this payment performance is being executed, the payment performance is continued even if the demonstration performance has been started, so that both performances are executed. Although it is expected that the frequency of checkout operations will be lower than with conventional slot machines, there is a non-zero possibility that checkout operations will be carried out due to fraud (so-called cheating), so it is possible that there are checkout operations in the surrounding area. Let everyone know what happened.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes depending on the length of time for which the counting button 171 is operated will be described.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 107, the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 125 is adopted.

FIG. 134(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. 125. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press step value. That is, until the value of the long press step value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press step value increases, the value of the counting long press timer decreases by a predetermined period of time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the counting long press timer is gradually becoming shorter. When the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 134(b) is a table showing specific values of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 125. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. That is, until the value of the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press stage value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30, etc., the result is a stepwise increase. When the long press step value is 4 or more, the number of sheets to be counted is a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 134(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long press timer shown in FIG. 134(a) and the scheduled number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 134(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 134(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as an ON state.

From the time the counting button 171 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a counting long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and the timer is When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Then, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.9 seconds) with a long press step value of 2 is set (steps shown in FIG. 125). S4221). If the counting button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the 10 sheets set as the number of sheets to be counted will be counted at 0.9 seconds. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

Eventually, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (as shown in FIG. 125). Step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the count timing of 20 sheets will be 0. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the counting button 171 is in the ON state, a counting long press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long press step value of 4 is set (steps shown in FIG. 125). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the counting timing will arrive at 30 sheets, which was set as the number of sheets to be counted. This will be counted.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set on the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, if the counting button 171 is maintained in the operated state, 50 sheets will be counted every time the counting timing arrives.

Note that in the example described here, as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, but the operation time of the count button 171 As the timer becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the value of the long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases. Alternatively, the value of the counting long press timer may become shorter, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, the value set in the counting long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. You can.

FIG. 135(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 134(c), after the long press step value reaches 4, the count long press timer value is constant at the shortest time of 0.3 seconds, and the number of sheets to be counted is constant at the maximum of 50 sheets. become. This state may continue until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300 pieces), the final stage process is executed. You may also do so. The final stage process here is a process in which, as the number of game medals decreases, the value of the count long press timer is lengthened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 135(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the "number of game medals" is set to 299 with the scheduled number of medals to be counted set to 50. The "number of game medals" is less than a certain value (300 medals).

When the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125) and becomes longer.

Eventually, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and becomes longer again.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), and becomes even longer.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted. Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is again set to the value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). Note that a value exceeding a value of 1.2 seconds (for example, a value of 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 135(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the player releases the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 becomes OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage process described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and furthermore, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer. The "number of game medals" becoming 0 is reduced. Note that if you want to set the "number of game medals" to 0, you can continue to operate the counting button 171 until the display on the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 135(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 134(c), a power outage occurs when 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(b), the counting button 171 remains operated after the power outage occurs and until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, the medal number control unit 350 selects the maximum number of medals (in this example, 50 medals) as the number of medals to be counted. ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Even if the control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the count button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets may be set slightly smaller than the maximum number (for example, 30 sheets). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Further, although the explanation here has been about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. That is, if the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, the medal number control unit 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the counting long press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 126.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the ON state remains ON, automatic counting will be performed even if you release your hand from the counting button 171, and the count will be counted for 0.3 seconds. Each time the timing comes, 50 pieces are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reduce the number of game medals to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

Note that when automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 described using FIG. go. On the 7-segment display that is the game medal number display device 170, the change display that subtracts 1 at approximately 4ms intervals is caused by afterimages, so that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking. It may look like this. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the currently displayed number may become difficult to understand. In addition, players who choose automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "Number of game medals" to 0, and there may be cases where there is little need to display changes and show how they are being subtracted by 1. be.

Further, since there is no operation by the player during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to use a lamp or the like to notify that automatic counting is being performed. Furthermore, if there is a payout based on the game result during automatic counting, that payout is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and will be included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and 50 sheets are counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 137(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also written under the "number of medals counted". In this example, the user releases the counting button 171 when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting will automatically end and you will have to operate the counting button 171. In this case, the "number of game medals" will no longer decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after automatic counting, you can start playing quickly because there are still numbers left. There are cases where it is desired to count all the game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if you press and hold for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Note that although the certain value is set to 50 coins, a certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50 coins. After counting, you can leave your desired number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0 coins, and in a bonus game state, such as during an AT game, a certain value is set to 50 coins. Since there is a low possibility of ending the game in the bonus game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, if less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and if 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started quickly. Moreover, the reverse is also possible. If a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by issuing a notification to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started promptly.

FIG. 137(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs during automatic counting and the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 137(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power outage occurs while 50 medals are being counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives due to automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is started during a power outage and the power is restored while it is being operated, After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if 2 seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not elapsed. That is, when the first counting timing arrives after power is restored, 50 sheets are counted. Therefore, even if the user takes his hand off the counting button 171 before 2 seconds have passed after the power is restored, automatic counting is started.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 138 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 138 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the manner in which the counting button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, characters "Counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. That is, the character display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, a segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower side of FIG. 138 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the medal number control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302 including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting, in the counted number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 sends the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information representing the number of coins to be counted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the text "Counting automatically" and a message 157m. Automatic counting status notification is performed while automatic counting is being performed. Note that while automatic counting is being performed, notification may be provided by sound or lamp. In FIG. 138, the words "Automatically counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. Further, below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as ``Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button.'' In a state where automatic counting status notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, an explanation such as ``you can play games'' is also given. In a state where automatic counting state notification is being performed, notification that game progress is possible is performed. It is reported that it is possible to proceed with the game, such as operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting. Note that during the counting process, operations on the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. In addition, since it is expected that there will be cases where you want to manually end automatic counting after automatic counting has started, if you operate the counting button 171 again after automatic counting has started, automatic counting will end. Good too. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the count button 171 is in the ON state, automatic counting is performed even if the count button 171 is released. In this example, after 2.0 seconds have elapsed and the first counting timing has arrived, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may be output from the time point when 2.0 seconds have elapsed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound is output continuously. The sound and the fourth counting sound that is output next are also output continuously. Note that in addition to the volume, rhythm, pitch, tone color, etc. may also be changed. That is, the counting sound only needs to change in stages. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Note that the volume may not increase at predetermined time intervals, and only the tone may change at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting only of instrument sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of a plurality of sounds including instrument sound A and instrument sound B, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of instrument sound A and instrument sound B. The sound is made up of a plurality of sounds, including instrument sound B and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, counting 5,000 coins earned through a game at once takes approximately 50 seconds. If the counting sound is continuously output during this period, it may be unpleasant to the user's ears, and may also be disliked by the player next to him. As a countermeasure for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and thereafter be silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, and after the counting sound has been output for a predetermined period of time, the sound may be set to a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that have a function that allows players to perform various customizations, the type of counting sound, the volume, and the way it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases), etc. The player may be able to make a selection. This can also make counting more interesting.

Furthermore, in addition to sound, a lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp or the image may be changed in stages.

FIG. 140 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171.

In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), a power outage occurs before the count button 171 is started to be operated and the count long press flag described using FIG. 107 (or FIGS. 125 and 126) is set to on. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. If the on signal is detected without an up edge being detected after the power is restored, the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has continued to be operated, and the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and restarts the process for 0.5 seconds from the time of power restoration. It is determined whether the counting button 171 remains operated until the elapsed time. Here, if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the count long press flag is set to on, and if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted at the counting timing. It is counted.

If a long press is performed after the power is restored, a long press notification may be performed. If the long press is continued at the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, the long press notification starts from this point. This means that if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the button will not be pressed for a long time, and the count will start after 0.5 seconds have elapsed and before the first counting timing arrives. If the button 171 is released, no sheets will be counted, so if the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed, the button 171 must be kept pressed for a long time. Pressing notification starts.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be due to an erroneous operation. For this reason, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be determined that the counting button 171 has been erroneously operated and no sheets are counted.

Note that FIG. 140(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 140(b), since the counting button 171 has been operated during the power outage, the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continued to be operated, a long-press determination is not made and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the long press is determined based on whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, so even if an up edge is not detected, Long press determination is executed.

FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 140.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 141(a), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation. , and then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if an on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, press and hold for the X seconds that had elapsed before the power was cut off. If the operation of the count button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the count button 171 will be operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long press flag is set to on, assuming that the count is still in the state of being pressed.

Also in the modification shown in FIG. 141(b), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long-press operation, and then Power will be restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 141(b), standby processing is provided for a certain period of time (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until an appropriate timing for performing counting processing. When the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 141(a). In other words, if an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, the X seconds that had elapsed before the power cut is determined as a long press operation. If the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button 171 remains in the operated state, the count long press flag is set to on.

FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 140.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 142(a), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), if an on signal is detected without an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 being detected, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that this has continued and starts a timer dedicated to when the power is turned on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for power-on to the count long press timer, which is set to 500 ms as an initial value in step S4206 in FIG. 107 . By doing this, when the long press operation is performed immediately after the power is turned on, the count long press flag is set to ON, and when the count timing comes while the count button 171 is being operated continuously, 50 The pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 142(b), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operator takes his hand off the count button 171 during the power outage, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in conjunction with power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Further, the timer setting value exclusively for power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value exclusively for power-on (for example, 2 seconds) in the third modification. If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated for power-on is counting time, and the operation of the counting button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the counting long press flag is set to on. Ru. That is, while this timer is counting time, at least one of the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 and the on signal is detected, and the on signal is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display, described using FIG. 129(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 143(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 121. FIG. 143(a) shows how "1" is subtracted in the order of "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the time required to display the change is approximately 4 ms x 50 = approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display for subtraction is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to display the change for subtracting 50 sheets.

FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 143(b). When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display during subtraction. FIG. 143(b) shows how "1" is added in the order of "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "106".

If 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of coins allowed to be paid out under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" will be displayed at approximately 4ms intervals. In order to display changes (addition and subtraction) in increments, the time required for displaying changes is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is also possible to perform a change display in which 65 sheets are added.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(a). In this example, the change is displayed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle, all segments of all 5 digits are lit (display "88888"), and all segments of all 5 digits are turned off. In this example, the display (display of "00000") is switched every 8 ms. Eventually, in this example, after 250 ms have passed, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all the digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a failure has occurred in all the digit segments of the game medal number display device 170 that causes the display to stop. If it is recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change is displayed.

Although all digits are used to display the change here, only some digits may be used to reduce processing load and data capacity. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. If all digits are not used and the rightmost single digit is not included, it may give the impression that the rightmost single digit segment has failed, so it is used to indicate that there is no failure. It is best to include the rightmost digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(b). In this example as well, the number changes from "100" to "85". That is, it changes from a 3-digit number to a 2-digit number. Therefore, changes are displayed using three-digit segments. The changing display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating around. According to this change display, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes starting from "100". In this example, when 250 ms has passed since the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Note that if the change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes with "85" as the end point.

It is also possible to display a stepwise change by a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value while sandwiching the two types of change display described above using FIG. 144. Specifically, when changing from "100" to the final value of "60" (target value), "100" → change display → "80" → change display → display "60". Become. Further, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal number display device 170, the emitted light color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example in which the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170.

The medal number control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "number of game medals" (displayed number of game medals shown in FIG. 78) to the game control section 302 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the “number of game medals” in the security command, and transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the "number of game medals" is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is displayed as is, according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 145 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. Further, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held to count 50 sheets. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 121, and the game medal number display device 170 starts displaying a change that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In addition, in FIG. 145, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that all seven segments are lit and some segments appear to be blinking slightly due to afterimages. In the game medal number display device 170, a change display that subtracts "1" is performed in about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when the count of 50 medals is performed, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is sent during the transmission period (100 ms) of the security command. Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command after approximately 20 ms have passed since the counting of 50 sheets, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process in which an image displaying "100" is replaced with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side that receives the information on the "number of game medals" does not display any change, and the main control unit 300 side that outputs the information, Displays changes. By doing this, the numerical value "50" finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be understood from the display on the effect image display device 157, and "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display is complete at the point when the change display is completed.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 145.

In the modification shown in FIG. 146, the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 also displays a change in which the number is subtracted by "1". Moreover, the change display takes more time than the change display on the game medal number display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This time of 280 ms is the time period for the game medal number display device 170 when 50 medals are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time required to display the addition change (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) and less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

The player usually looks at the performance image display device 157 in many cases, and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170. As mentioned above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals", and that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 should be increased. To do this, it is necessary for players to pay attention to the "number of game medals." The reason why the ``number of game medals'' is also displayed on the performance image display device 157 is to make the players pay as much attention to the ``number of game medals'' as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. It becomes difficult. Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the number of game medal display device 170, the player can It can be expected that the player will also pay attention to the speedy game medal number display device 170. If the player looks at the game medal number display device 170, no performance display is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.

In addition, in the change display on the performance image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also an animation display indicating that the change is in progress, it is easier to draw attention to the "number of game medals", and the counting is also performed here. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, it is possible to make the change display suitable for the period of change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same manner as the change display by the game medal number display device 170. You can easily recognize that a change display is being performed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145.

In another example shown in FIG. 147, the game medal number display device 170 does not display a change, but only the “number of game medals” on the effect image display device 157 displays a change. That is, in this other example, the display display process shown in FIG. 121 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal number display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. The following changes are displayed.

In this other example as well, as in the modified example shown in FIG. It can be expected that they will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which is quick to display. By looking at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 148(a) is a timing chart when the payout exceeds the payout threshold.

This FIG. 148(a) shows the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. Further, below that, the number of payout coins to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum stored number of coins.

In a state where the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373 medals, a further payout of 15 medals corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals (corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals allowed under the rules) occurs. The payout number of 15 coins is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. When the number of payout medals of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum stored number of medals and exceeds the payout threshold in step S4B03 of FIG. 117. Therefore, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is transmitted from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 transmits a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 89). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), an upper limit exceeded error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and the count is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. A text display prompting the user to operate the button 171 is displayed. That is, the upper limit exceedance error notification is executed even during the game.

Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be lit as an upper limit exceedance error notification.

FIG. 148(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification.

A blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the character display of upper limit error notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The upper limit exceedance error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives the payout response command including “normal” from the medal number control unit 350, it transmits the payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 89). On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), when receiving the payout command while the upper limit exceedance error notification is being executed, the execution of the upper limit exceedance error notification is terminated. Note that if the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceedance error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceedance error notification can be ended early.

Further, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the information representing the "number of game medals" that has been sent is the number of medals for the payout threshold (16383 medals), even if the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an error notification that the upper limit has been reached. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a text message that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be ended early.

Further, other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added include when there is payment and when there is lending from lending machine 700. Although this embodiment does not determine whether the upper limit has been reached for settlement, it may be determined whether the upper limit has been reached in the same way as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored medals and the settlement threshold is exceeded, the settlement response command will include "abnormality" and the medal number control unit 350 will send it to the game control unit 302. Allow it to be sent. Even if the payment response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the number of displayed game medals exceeds the upper limit. , the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number than the maximum memory number (for example, 15,000), and if the "number of game medals" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an error exceeding the upper limit lending will occur. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 103 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. The notification of the lending error exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the fact that the upper limit lending error has occurred from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302 and further from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, the production image display device 157 Notification can be made on the slot machine 100 side, such as the speaker 272 or the lamp.

FIG. 149(a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be made exceeding the second payout threshold.

In FIG. 149(a) as well, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and below that the number of payout medals to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

A command including the display number of game medals (number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. A second payout threshold (for example, 15,000 pieces) is set in the game control unit 302, which is smaller than 16,383 pieces (payout threshold), which is the maximum number of pieces stored in the RAM 358. In the game control unit 302, if the number of game medals to be displayed that has been sent a command is equal to or higher than this second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified that an error indicating that the number of game medals to be displayed is close to the upper limit has occurred. Sends an error occurrence command indicating this. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, an upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 149(a), on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, a character display prompting the operation of the counting button 171 is displayed as an upper limit notification so as to overlap the game background display. Displayed. That is, in this example as well, the upper limit approaching notification is executed during the game. FIG. 148(a) shows the effect image display device 157 that has switched from displaying this upper limit nearing notification to displaying upper limit exceeding error notification.

Note that as the upper limit approaching notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit. In addition, it was decided that the near-limit notification will continue from the start of the near-limit notification until the start of the upper limit exceeded error notification, but considering the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals, the near-limit notification will continue during one game. The notification may be carried out only during a part of the time. For example, the notification may be performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceedance error notification is a notification carried out during one game. For example, if it is known that there are only a few bonus periods left for AT games etc. even if the upper limit approaching notification is started, it is possible to easily give priority to the remaining AT games etc. Furthermore, when switching from upper limit nearing notification to upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 149(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification.

Even when the upper limit is near, a blinking display may be performed on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 149(b), the character display of the near upper limit notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The near upper limit notification is also displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives a command including the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit 302 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to notify the first sub-control unit 400 that the number of game medals to be displayed is about to error. Sends an error clearing command indicating that the error has been cleared. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), the execution of the near-upper limit notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Further, a second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit approaching notification. This near-limit notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second threshold for payout may be set in the medal number control unit 350. In this case, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, and if the number is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, A command for notification is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a command for notification to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to perform the upper limit impending notification. Then, when it becomes less than the second threshold for payout, a notification end command is transmitted through the route of medal number control section 350→game control section 302→sub control section (400, 500). Note that the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification is preferably longer than the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the upper limit approach notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking cycle is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the upper limit nearing notification is displayed in a blinking manner, the upper limit exceeded error notification may be displayed constantly. You will be able to easily recognize the high level of urgency of notification.

FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 150(a), a display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed, overlapping with the game background display. Note that the upper limit approaching notification display may be displayed constantly, but it is a blinking display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit nearing notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control section 302 transmits an error occurrence command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit (400, 500) side performs error notification based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is an increased possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting counting. Note that even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 150(a) displays an error notification of a door opening error overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for the door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) is always displayed as the words "Door is open." This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the near-limit notification display, but it may also be displayed on a layer before the near-limit notification display so that it overlaps with the near-limit notification display. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on a layer deeper than the blinking upper limit notification, and the blinking upper limit nearing notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You can do it like this.

FIG. 150(b) shows that in contrast to the door open error display which is always displayed, a character display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed every second. The right side of FIG. 150(b) shows how the character display of the upper limit nearing notification disappears due to the blinking display, and the door open error display that remains constantly displayed is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, the highly urgent door open error display is easy to see. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but a notification sound of an upper limit approaching notification is not output.

Although the error is not as urgent as the door open error, there are errors such as ``Please stop the spinning reel'' and ``A communication error has occurred, which may be caused by a disconnected wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700.'' ” may be displayed to request improvements, and in addition to these displays, notifications urging counting may also be provided.

FIG. 151(a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if there is no payout, all reels 110 to 112 stop, and if there is a payout, the bet is placed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the payout is completed. If no operation is performed, the state shifts to a demonstration state (demonstrating). Further, when the payment button 134 is operated, the process also shifts to the demonstration mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), during a game (during a bet, while the reels are rotating 110 to 112, or during a payout), the display of text indicating that the upper limit is near is started, and the transition to the demo begins without the counting button 171 being operated. . The effect image display device 157 displays a game background display during the game, but switches to the demo display when the demo is in progress. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even in the case of transitioning to the demonstration, the text display of the upper limit nearing notification continues to be displayed as long as the "number of game medals" does not become less than the second threshold for payout. If the transition is made during the demonstration, there is a high possibility that the players will leave their seats. By prompting the player to operate the count button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100. Note that the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be constantly displayed to ensure visibility of the near upper limit notification.

FIG. 151(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demonstration image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 151(b). The notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since we want the user to operate the counting button 171 with priority, the notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size. Further, below that, a warning message is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away, such as ``Be careful not to forget or steal your card.'' Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second threshold for payout, is displayed. Note that "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 151(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a number less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting counting disappears (is not displayed), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. Note that the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the performance image display device 157 has decreased to "14,950".

FIG. 152(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 152(a), the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X pieces correspond to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. On the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed prompting the player to count the number of game medals because the number has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting this counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number, the notification to encourage counting continues. That is, the notification that prompts counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50 x 100 for two times). The arrow indicating the notification period in the figure represents the period during which notification prompting for counting, such as "Please operate the counting button", is being made.

If you set the specification to start the notification when the specified number is reached, and immediately end the notification when the number falls below the specified number, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted.In this example, the specified number to start the notification is The notification will continue until the number is less than . By doing so, repetition of notification and counting operations can be reduced. Incidentally, the notification prompting the counting may be made always at a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. You can encourage children to count in large numbers.

Note that the prescribed number may be a threshold for payment, a threshold for lending, or another threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a bet operation, the number of "game medals" will be reduced by the predetermined number above, although it will only be reduced by a maximum of 3 medals in the first place. Regardless of the value, the notification prompting counting may be continued.

FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout (15,000 in this example) in a certain game, a notification to prompt counting is started. The notification prompting counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting counting is started, the player does not operate the counting button 171 and continues playing the game. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout, a notification prompting the player to count is performed once every multiple games (four games in this example). Therefore, for three games after the notification prompting counting is given, no notification prompting counting is made. During the three games in which no notification is given to encourage counting, the performance display such as the game background display displayed on the performance image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may improve the interest of the game. Note that, when the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout, the notification prompting counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during three games in which no notification to prompt counting is made, the notification to prompt counting will not be made until the second threshold for payout is exceeded. It won't happen. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game in which a notification prompting counting is being made, the notification prompting counting that has been in progress will disappear (become invisible). ).

Next, notification regarding counting will be further explained.

FIG. 153(a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which notification is issued to prompt counting every time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. Note that each of the figures ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 153 shows the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the user to count is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 1,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the next change in the "number of game medals" (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 2,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 3,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 3,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches the second payout threshold of 15,000 pieces, the display prompting for counting continues until the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 pieces, as shown in FIG. 149(a). It will be displayed. In addition, if the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the message "You have reached 15,000 or more" and a display prompting you to count may continue to be displayed, or if the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than the second payout threshold. If it is below the payout threshold, the actual value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (eg, 15,015 medals are now displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the user can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170. Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, it is easy to know how much has been lost. It should be noted that a display prompting for counting may be displayed in accordance with the time that has passed since the start of a bonus game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a bonus game such as an AT game, a display prompting for counting will be displayed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting will be displayed when 20 minutes have passed, and a display will be displayed when 30 minutes have passed. A display will be displayed to encourage the following. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 153(b) is a diagram showing an example when the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) suggesting or representing that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 pieces during the AT state, as shown in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. A message will appear prompting you to do so. In this example, the count button 171 continues to be pressed and operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

The state advantageous to the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the "number of game medals" by paying out. Therefore, the state is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to continue to increase, and it can be said that the entire number of game medals can be counted (outputted to the lending machine 700). However, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and the next game will not be possible unless they are lent out from the lending machine 700. I end up. Further, even if the situation is advantageous, there may be cases where the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the situation is advantageous, a notification is made to the effect that it is advisable to keep a small number of game medals. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 153(b) is in a state where the “number of game medals” has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has a message “Stop counting. Please proceed with the game.'' A notification (counting completion guidance notification) is made to the effect that it is advisable to leave a small number of game medals. That is, before the counting of all the game medals is finished, the counting completion guide notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting completion guidance notification shown here, a notification such as ``It is better to leave the gaming value aside'' or ``If you count all the games, you will not be able to play the game'' may be used. In other words, before the counting of all the game medals is completed, a drawback in the case where all the game medals are counted may be notified.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 153(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of game medals, he releases his hand from the counting button 171, and the counting ends when he leaves 50 as the number of game medals. are doing.

FIG. 153(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player.

Here, the disadvantageous situation for the player refers to a situation in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is played repeatedly without being lent out. An example is the normal state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 153(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(c), the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued when the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). has decreased beyond that. If the situation is disadvantageous to the player, there is a lower possibility that the player will continue playing the game after the counting ends, so no notification will be made to the effect that it is better to keep a small number of "game medals". In this example, the long-press operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes 0. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

FIG. 154(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 153(b). Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 153(b) will be mainly explained.

In the example shown in FIG. 154(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 154(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting has ended once." ing. To restart counting once it has been forcibly ended, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

FIG. 154(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 154 (b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. Since the number has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), counting is forcibly terminated once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous situation, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the count button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" falls below a predetermined value, counting in increments of "50" by pressing and holding the count button 171 does not work, and even if the button 171 is pressed and holding, it only counts in increments of "1". That is, each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" decreases by "1". This is because, for the same reason as mentioned above, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and if you do not lend them out from the lending machine 700, Since the next game will not be possible, in order to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, only "1" is counted.

Eventually, when the number of game medals reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the words "Counting has ended".

Note that if the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting in increments of "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 154(c) is an example of the modification described using FIGS. 154(a) and 154(b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). In the modified example, if the player is in a disadvantageous situation, it is effective to press and hold the counting button 171 until the "number of game medals" reaches 0, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, the normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing, the same process as in the case of the player's advantageous state (FIG. 154(a) and The process shown in FIG. 153(b) or the process shown in FIG. 153(b) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state. If this VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 using a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 78 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 83 is No, and the process proceeds to the previous process until the VL signal is turned on. I can't proceed. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. That is, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, some operations are operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal turns off after the first half of the game starts (the reels start rotating), the second half of the operation (operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) will not be valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it is possible to proceed with the game. If the operation becomes invalid while timing the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the operation becomes valid and it is necessary to judge the timing from scratch, which may give an annoying impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though it is not possible to count, if the game progress operation up to determining the validity of the internal winning by lottery is enabled, for example, if a result advantageous to the player is obtained and the game suddenly becomes great. If the presentation is started, there is a risk that the player's desire to proceed with the game may increase. As a result, there was a possibility that there would be a delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal was turned off, but the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be disabled. It is possible to promptly notify the player that the VL signal has been turned off. Note that even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is performed. Furthermore, if it is treated as an error, an error clearing operation is required, but since the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the rental machine 700 side is suspected, so an error clearing operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). I don't even ask for it. Note that, as in the example below, a configuration may be adopted in which error notification is performed while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 155(a) shows whether the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 (throwing) and the operation of the start lever 135 (lever) (throwing/lever operation) are treated as valid or invalid. There is. Further, below that, the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, below that, the state of the VL signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), when the VL signal is on, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Further, error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operations of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Furthermore, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 155(a) displays text such as "Communication with rental machine not established." Note that the error notification may be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal turns off, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In the modified example described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are performed in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout). As shown in FIG. 155(a), if the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player could end the game at any time. Therefore, the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk should promptly Promote repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 155(b) shows a first modification example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550 coins, which is 15,000 or more, which is the second threshold for payout.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the input operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) becomes invalid, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 155(b), if the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game cannot be played. Until this happens, we do not intentionally stop the progress of the game so that players can enjoy it. Furthermore, the fact that the game continues even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout means that the player is often in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and in this state, the player cannot continue playing the game. Stopping the game is highly likely to reduce the interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the player does not intentionally stop the progress of the game.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 155(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but in this modification as well, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157. is displayed.

FIG. 156 shows a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value.

The state shown in FIG. 156(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 156(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is more than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Additionally, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The second modification shown in FIG. 156 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the game may have just started, so it does not interfere with the progress of the game that has just started. There is a purpose. In addition, in the slot machine 100, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear no matter what kind of trouble occurs, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will be great. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout), the progress of the game is stopped and prompt repair by the clerk is encouraged. Furthermore, if there is a large number of game medals, it can be assumed that the player can perform counting operations at any time, so the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. The aim is to encourage store staff to make repairs as soon as possible.

From what has been explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the situation is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the number of game medals by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state. is a state (for example, a normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed as shown in FIG. 155(a). At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 155(b). All operations in the operation are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 156(a). All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed, as shown in FIG. 156(b). The operations of at least some of them may be disabled.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, in order to make the player aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store staff to repair the situation at an early stage, at least one of the multiple types of game progress operations can be performed. operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, there is a possibility that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, there is a possibility that counting is not necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to hinder the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the ``number of game medals'' is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the player is made to notice early and the store staff In order to encourage early recovery, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled when the VL signal is turned off.

FIG. 157 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), it is treated as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error cancellation operation is also requested to the main control section 300 (slot machine 100). As explained above, there is a high possibility that the VL signal is turned off because the lending machine 700 is not powered on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by indicating an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the count button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. The fact that the VL signal is turned off means that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the rental machine 700 side can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If an error notification is made on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without the need for the notification on the slot machine 100 side immediately. Furthermore, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, a counting notification may not be sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the count button 171 is operated. By doing this, the slot machine 100 can make notifications with the minimum number of opportunities, and by suppressing excessive notifications, the player can play the game comfortably.

Note that after the operation of the counting button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal is turned back on.

[About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus state, is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In this situation, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. If counting is performed while the player is playing the AT game, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, when a performance associated with counting is performed while proceeding with the AT game, the execution period of this performance becomes long, making it difficult to perform a performance with an ending scene that anticipates the end of counting, for example. Further, when a counting effect (FIG. 130, etc.) is executed in connection with the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, reducing the interest of the game. On the other hand, by designing the game so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such problems can be made less likely to occur. Can be done. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. When counting is performed while playing the AT game, the number of game medals continues to decrease. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is held down, it is expected that the number of sheets will decrease by approximately 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when performing an effect associated with counting while proceeding with the AT game, it is possible to estimate the end of the execution period of this effect. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) depending on the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the above-mentioned counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance is ended in accordance with the counting process, but may be configured such that the counting performance may be ended even when the counting process continues. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is performed uniformly according to the execution period of the counting process, the counting effect may be executed for a long time, reducing the interest of the game, or the counting effect may interfere with other effects. There is a possibility that problems may occur. This problem can be prevented in some cases by terminating the counting performance even when the counting process continues. Note that such a configuration includes, for example, a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated depending on the gaming situation or the passage of time, or a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . Note that if the counting process ends before these counting performance termination conditions are satisfied, the counting performance may be ended or the counting performance may be continued.

Furthermore, the content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of game medals that have been counted. In this case, the performance content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the performance content may be set based on the cumulative number of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. You may also do so. Further, for example, when the amount of game medals that have been counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased). After the player acquires a large number of game medals, the player starts counting and can select a game move. In addition, regarding such a counting performance according to the amount of game medals, if the counting process and counting performance are terminated midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, even after a counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, one second), It is also possible to restart the lost counting performance from the middle. In addition, the counting effect continues to be executed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is not started while this counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect that is currently being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined time may be the same as, for example, the determination time of long press of the counting button 171.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If a performance that requests an operation on such an operating means is performed while the counting performance is being performed, there is a possibility that an erroneous operation may be induced. For this reason, while the counting performance is being performed, the performance that requires operation of some kind of operating means may not be performed (or the probability of execution may be reduced). Furthermore, effects that become extremely difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effects may be similarly restricted. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a performance is limited during execution of the counting performance. Note that the performance does not have to require operation of the operating means; for example, it is recommended not to execute a performance that involves a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or a performance that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until the end. You can.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamps are on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect changes to a counting effect. may be replaced with a counting performance. Furthermore, when starting some kind of performance while the counting performance is being executed, the counting performance may be replaced by a performance that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes depending on the degree of game progress while the counting process is being executed, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses while the counting process is being executed. You may also do so.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting effect are finished, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if a new number of game medals is acquired and the counting process starts, it will be possible to The counting performance that has ended may be restarted from where it left off.

Furthermore, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being executed, such as not being able to start the next game while the counting process is being executed.

[About the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of up to 50 game medals. FIG. 158(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is held down from a state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and then the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow from when all the game medal numbers are transferred to the lending machine 700 until the game medal number becomes 0 is shown.

In the above counting process, the value of the current number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting judgment. (Figure 101). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (by payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 158(b) shows a change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow shown in FIG. 158(a). has been done. In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 game medals remaining, and the 8 payout amount is added to the remaining 28 game medals. After that, all remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example shown in FIG. As a result, the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 in Figure 158(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 in Figure 158(b)) no longer match, and the counting process This may result in a workload when the data needs to be checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing is not reflected immediately; for example, the increase in the number of game medals is This increase may be reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0 or after the counting process that was being continued is finished by releasing the counting button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if you continue to press and hold the count button 171, count the 120 sheets that were stored when you started pressing and holding the count button 171, and then count the 8 sheets that increased while pressing and holding the count button 171. do. For example, if you release the long press on the count button 171 midway, the long press on the count button 171 will be resumed after counting 60 of the 120 sheets that were stored when you started holding the count button 171. I counted 68 pieces that I had memorized at the time. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 → 18. In FIG. 158(c), while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out, but until the number of game medals reaches 0. does not reflect this increase (same flow as in FIG. 158(a)), but this increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals at the time the counting process starts (120 in FIG. 158(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals reaches 0 (FIG. 158(c)) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 158(e), while the number of 70 game medals is being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 coins that were stored when the game started, the 8 coins that were paid out were counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

Note that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these increases may be reflected later, or the count process may continue. If there are, the number of game medals may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes 0.

Note that the display on the game medal number display device 170 when the above configuration is adopted may also be a display that matches the change in the number of game medals. Further, an increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the display of a decrease in the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in value due to the counting process in this case, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is a deviation by the amount of increase). FIG. 158(d) shows the flow when a configuration is adopted in which the increase in the number of game medals (payout and settlement operations) is immediately reflected on the display, compared to the flow of FIG. 158(c). There is. In this configuration, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display will be in a state where there is a deviation by the above-mentioned increase, but they will be in a state where they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the counting button 171 to end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the value of the actual number of game medals will differ. The values of the number of game medals on the display match.

Note that the timing to reflect the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 anew, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing when the number of game medals reaches 0 while the counting process continues, and in this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again. It may also be possible to move it (the counting process continues, FIG. 158(e)).

Incidentally, the increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operations, but either one of these may be the target of the configuration described in FIG. 158(c), or both may be the target.

[About the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button]
In the embodiment described above, if you want to change the number of game medals to 1 bet after placing a bet of 3, operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals", and then By operating the bet button 130 for one bet again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one bet. In this case, it is necessary to operate the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130, but it may be configured such that this operation can be performed by operating the bet button 130 once. An example of such a configuration is a configuration in which when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is at the maximum value, the settlement button process (FIG. 85) is executed and then the process for the bet button operation is executed. Can be mentioned. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is at the maximum value, the amount of change in the number of bets from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is set as the number of coins to be settled. In addition to transmitting the settlement command (FIG. 80), the value of the current bet amount may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a part of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and no separate deposit processing or deposit command is required. Note that these configurations are an example of a configuration in which the current number of bets is set to the minimum value based on the operating means that can set the minimum value of the number of bets when the current number of bets is the maximum value. Equivalent to.

Note that when the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2, etc. by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, and only by operating the bet button 130. You can now change the settings for the number of bets.

Note that if there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and an input sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For this operation, the checkout sound and the input sound may be output continuously. However, since there is a risk of confusion for the player if two types of sounds are output for a single operation, the current number of bets will change from the maximum value to the minimum value when the bet button 130 is operated. , the input sound may be output without outputting the payment sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters etc. indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters indicating that payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he or she has operated the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the production according to the number of game medals]
Hereinafter, a configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be described using FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal performance is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special performance is executed when the number reaches the predetermined number.

First, FIG. 159(a1) shows the situation at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 159(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 159(a3) shows what happens when medals are acquired in the AT state, and FIG. 159(a4) shows what happens when the AT state ends. In addition, in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right corner of the screen. Displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 159(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special performance is not performed and the normal performance (FIG. 159(a2)) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 159(b1) to (b3) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, from a state where the normal performance is being executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 159 (b1)), to a state where medals have been acquired and the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number ( 159 (b2)), and then a state in which special effects are being executed (FIG. 159 (b3)). In this special performance, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM will be different from the normal performance. In other words, the performance changes when a large number of game medals have been obtained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the different effects are not limited to the above example of special effects, and various effects can be used. These different productions are not limited to configurations that use different productions, for example, while a base production is being executed, another production can be inserted into a part of it, resulting in a different production as a whole. Good too. For example, when displaying the number of game medals or the number of medals earned, the color of each digit may be changed to a rainbow color, or the color of each digit may be changed periodically. The numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Further, the state in which the performance is made different is not limited to the AT state, but may be any state in which the performance is different when the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance is switched immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but it is sufficient that the performance executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number. The presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and further satisfies some condition (for example, playing the number of games, winning a switching lottery), or whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number or not. It is also possible to have a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 159(c1), when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to a configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach a predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting the setting value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which is a trigger for making the values different, may be provided separately.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the number of game medals is used to determine whether or not to execute a different effect or display. A similar effect may be achieved even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is used as the determination target. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of held medals, but a portion thereof (for example, when the number of held medals is 5000, 1000 of them) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information regarding the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or by the host server, the above number of medals can be calculated using the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals. A configuration similar to that using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 and the information regarding the gaming value managed by the host server may be used to determine whether or not to perform a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, a different effect is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one) satisfy some condition. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are performed depending on the case. Note that the value of the above judgment target may not be displayed, but if the value to be judged is displayed as in the example above, the relationship between the judgment target and the performance cannot be grasped. It is expected that the game will become easier and more interesting.

Furthermore, in the above example, a configuration has been described in which the number of game medals and the number of held medals are used as the determination target for whether or not to perform different effects or displays, but the number of acquired medals in the AT state may be used as the determination target. FIGS. 160(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). Of this flow, Figures 160 (d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000, similar to the case explained using Figures 159 (b1) to (b3). However, in this example, whether or not to execute the special performance is determined based on the number of acquired medals, so unlike FIGS. 159 (b1) to (b3), no special performance is performed at this point. Thereafter, the state becomes such that the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (FIG. 160 (d5)), and then the state enters a state where a special performance is being executed (FIG. 160 (d6)). In this example as well, the presentation changes as the number of acquired medals increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG. 159 (c1) are displayed because the number of acquired medals has reached 2000.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was explained in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, and the number of acquired medals reach a predetermined number. The configuration may be such that the number of medals is used, and the number of acquired medals is used to perform other parts of the performance, as appropriate. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-described performances can be executed in parallel, such as a performance using the number of held medals and a performance using the number of acquired medals. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not performed in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of medals held, but when such a situation occurs, a different effect is executed. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operations when errors overlap]
Error-related operations will be described below with reference to FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 161(a1) to (a3), from a state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 161(a1)), the counting button 171 is operated (FIG. 161(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. 161(a3) until the value on the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 as a result of the transmission to the slot machine 700. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit of the number of game medals, and when a winning combination with a payout is won and the sum of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 117). In this overflow state, the payout-based addition process is not executed and the overflow state is in a waiting state for resolution, which can be said to be a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to transfer the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. In FIGS. 161(b1) to (b4), the number of game medals changes from the upper limit value (FIG. 161(b1)) to an overflow state (FIG. 161(b2)) after winning a combination with a payout. After that, press and hold the count button 171 (FIG. 161(b3), move 50 as the number of game medals to the lending machine 700, and decrease the value of the number of game medals display device 170 by 1), and the overflow state will be resolved (FIG. 161(b3). The series of steps up to b4)) is shown. Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 161(b4) indicates that the overflow condition has been cleared, and is displayed for about a few seconds and then erased. Furthermore, when the overflow condition is resolved, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed for a long time, but if the count button 171 is not pressed for a long time, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly pressing the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the game control unit 302 can detect various errors (for example, the error shown in FIG. 76(b)) that hinder the progress of the game. Since these errors require countermeasures on the part of the store, the system is configured to disable the player from proceeding with the game and to notify them of these errors. Figures 162 (c1) to (c3) show a state in which no error has occurred (Figure 162 (c1)), a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (Figure 162 (c2)), and then the 162(c3) shows a series of steps from when the user takes action and when the reset button R is operated, the error is resolved (FIG. 162(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in Figure 162 (c3) indicates that the error that occurred (in this example, the disconnection error in the medal number control section) has been resolved, and after being displayed for a few seconds, will be deleted. Note that the reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control section, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As explained above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be canceled by the shop's operation (for example, the abnormal game order error shown in FIG. 76(b), the chip ID number mismatch, etc.) There are two types of errors: a game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control unit 350 that can be canceled by a player's operation (for example, an overflow state, hereinafter referred to as a medal number control error). A medal number control error is an error that does not have a serious effect on game progress compared to a game control error. For this reason, if these errors occur overlappingly, it is conceivable to give priority to the game control error with high importance and eliminate it. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. In addition, in the following explanation, examples of a medal number control section disconnection error and an overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control section 302 and errors related to the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. A similar cancellation method can be applied to errors.

FIG. 163 (d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a winning combination with a payout is entered from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 163(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the counting button 171 in order to release the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal number control section disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (the game control error and the medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 163(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 163(d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal number control section disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating an overflow state (Fig. 163 (d2)) is cleared when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control section. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred over the message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred, or display a message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section. Messages related to both errors may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying messages related to both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from a display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where a game control error and a medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the overflow state is not canceled because the counting process is not executed. At this time, a message indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid is displayed. In addition to the message shown in FIG. 163 (d3), when the count button 171 is operated, the operation of the count button 171 is invalid, and the disconnection error in the medal number control section has been resolved first. A message is displayed prompting you to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to process the medal number control unit disconnection error with priority.

It is assumed that the store then takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 163 (d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the medal number control unit disconnection error has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 163 (d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that shown in FIG. 163 (d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the counting button 171 as described with reference to FIG. 161, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released. FIGS. 163(d7) and (d8) show that the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the counting button 171 in the same way as FIGS. 161(b3) and (b4). In this case, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals after the overflow condition is resolved.

In order to realize the above operation, the process corresponding to the operation of the operation means (counting button 171 in the above example) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed while the game control error is occurring. Good too. 164(e1) to (e3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 164(e1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 164(e2)), and this error Although the counting button 171 (operating means for canceling the overflow state) was operated during the occurrence of the overflow, a message is displayed indicating that the operation is invalid (the counting process is not executed) (Fig. 164 ( e3)) has been shown.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the operating means for canceling the game control error and the operating means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such as allowing both errors to be canceled by the reset button R. Note that the error canceling operation means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, an operation means installed inside the game machine). In this configuration, if a game control error occurs while a medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the error cancellation operation means (the medal number control error is not canceled, and the game control error is canceled). Control errors are prioritized and canceled), so that highly important game control errors can be prioritized and canceled.

[About notification of counting process (1)]
In a situation advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below is such that the volume of this performance is reduced while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). This provides a case where the sound is lowered (or muted). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the performance, and to allow the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of count notification. Note that, hereinafter, the count notification based on the change in the performance sound volume will be referred to as count notification A. Note that here we will mainly explain a configuration that changes the volume of the performance by counting processing, but a configuration that changes the performance in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in display) (a part of the lamp may change, the color of the lamp, the lighting mode may change).

In some cases, the so-called demonstration performance is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), but in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), the demonstration performance is executed. In this case, the performance in a state advantageous to the player is continuously executed. The above-mentioned counting notification A can make it possible to grasp the execution of the counting process even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification A is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effects caused by the last stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect). It may also be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the performance is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation was performed on the reels (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption). In this case, the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in the performance volume due to the count notification A. Further, in the case where performance volume reduction due to passage of time and execution of count notification A overlap, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to volume reduction due to count notification A.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A that is being executed is terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed is returned) in response to an operation on some operation means.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is determined whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, as shown in FIG. 130), and that the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, 130), but when the above-mentioned count notification A is executed, a count sound corresponding to such a count process may be output. Also, for example, while the above counting notification A is executed only when all reels have stopped rotating, the counting sound can be output at any time in response to the counting process. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here can be changed while changing the volume depending on the situation, for example, set the volume to 50% while the reels are rotating, and set the volume to 100% while the reels are stopped. You may also add Further, it is also possible to combine not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, a count display related to the counting process, and a combination thereof) with the counting notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and allowing the counting display to be performed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). (while the reels are spinning, only the counting sound is output). In addition, as another example, the counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting sound is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). After that, execution is allowed (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[About notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, FIG. 130), and the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 130). , a configuration that outputs a counting sound according to the counting process was mentioned.

In a situation that is advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). At the same time, a case is provided in which the effect sound is maintained in an advantageous state. With this configuration, the effect sound in an advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Furthermore, the counting sound allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the counting notification by this counting sound will be called counting notification B.

Although the count notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification B is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the final stop operation for the reels has been performed and all reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo performance). It may also be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after any operation is performed on any operating means.

In addition, in the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed were explained, but for example, when there is a counting sound of the first aspect and a counting sound of the second aspect as the counting sound ( For example, the melody may be different, the tone color, the number of notes, the volume, etc. may be different). In other words, the case where the count notification B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output, and the case where the count notification B is not executed is read as the case where the count sound of the second aspect is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second aspect is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the production of an advantageous state, the counting process can be executed without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the game is inside.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, when the counting effect of the first mode is executed, when the counting sound of the second mode is output, when the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , respectively. Since there are various types of performances, not just audio, for example, if the counting performance of the second aspect is a type of performance that does not interfere much with the production of an advantageous state, it can be done without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the configuration of the count notifications (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described using FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when an output permission period for the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(a), and FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 165(b).

165(a) and 165(b) both show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. This is an example of operation. FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. It is assumed that in the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output, except when the counting sound is output.

The example in FIG. 165(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 166(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 166 (a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 166(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game is performed. FIG. 165(a) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 165(a) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 166 (a3) shows that, at this timing (a3), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed.

The following timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a4), and the AT performance sound also continues. There is. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (a5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 166(a5), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (a6) is the timing when the count button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display in FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the text "Counting" in the frame at the top left of the screen has been erased.

The following timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display in FIG. 166(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 166(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 165(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 167(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 167 (b2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. In addition, as shown in Figures 167 (b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the next game start operation. FIG. 165(b) shows the operation period of this count button 171. The timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 165(b) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and as shown in FIG. 167(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 167(b2) continues. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the count button 171 is continuously pressed. FIG. 167 (b4) shows that, at this timing (b4), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed. Note that at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the AT effect sound is output. Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (b5), as shown in Fig. 167 (b5), the display of Fig. 167 (b4) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the count button 171 is being held down for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b6). In addition, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT performance sound resumes. Note that when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 167 (b7), and the AT effect sound is output. Note that when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 167(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b8). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the text "Counting" in the upper frame on the left side of the screen has been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

[About display and presentation based on information from the medal number control unit]
In this embodiment, the game control unit 302 controls the game medals by the medal number control status command (see FIGS. 74 and 78) that is sent periodically (every 5.9 m8 ms in FIG. 74) from the medal number control unit 350. Information such as numbers can be grasped (Fig. 92). Then, some of this information is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (FIG. 74) sent periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 74) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can control various displays and effects based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and effects.

In the above configuration, the time it takes to establish communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the same as the time required for establishing communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the time until establishment, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the game control unit 302 has not yet received the medal number control status command from the medal number control unit 350. will be sent. The security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal number control unit 350, so if various displays and performance controls are performed based on the information included in this security command, the actual state may differ. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the first security command after the power is turned on after receiving the medal number control state command. Further, the security command may be sent after providing a sufficient waiting time.

Further, until communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established, even if the first sub-control section 400 receives a security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time elapses. good.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the number of medals control status command (the number of medals control unit 350 and the number of medals control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating that the communication is normal is included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and performance controls on the condition that this information is included. It may be possible to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent information different from the actual state from being provided to the player.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation from the time the security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals between security commands, if this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and performance controls. Put it away. The game control unit 302 sends various processing commands to the first sub-control unit 400 (FIG. 74) in order to control the game.The latest information is included in these various processing commands, and this information is used to By controlling various displays and effects, it is possible to reflect the latest information.

<others>
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Correspondence between the structure of the invention and the embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The insertion operation means includes a first insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130) and a second insertion operation means different from the first insertion operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first input operation means has been operated, the first input operation information (for example, an input command with a requested input number of 1 coin) is inputted to the game value number control means as the input operation information. and send it to
Based on the fact that the second loading operation means has been operated, second loading operation information that is different from the first loading operation information (for example, if the requested number of sheets to be loaded is 3) is determined as the loading operation information. means for transmitting an input command) to the game value number control means;
The gaming value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the requested number of coins to be inserted, 1);
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, a second game value update process different from the first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, the number of game medals for the requested number of inputs is 3). subtraction).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the response information is received within a predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the production control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 84). ),
The means outputs the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the elapse of the predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 84, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (description of [operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101);
In the counting process, when the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer and the input operation information is received while the game value update process is being performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In one counting process, the gaming value number control means stores a part of the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means in the transmission buffer, and extracts a part from the gaming value number. This means may subtract the part of the number of game medals (for example, since the maximum number of medals counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 107), it may become a part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the gaming value number control means receives the input operation information between the end of one counting process and the start of the next counting process, the gaming value number control means receives the first response information. to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 86),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, No determination in step S1306 of FIG. 86), and the operation on the input operation means is performed. (For example, step S1113 in FIG. 84 is not executed because the response result is abnormal.)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. ) is a viable means of
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 122 to 124, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 124 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the operation of the maximum number insertion operation means, generates maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command in which the maximum number of bets is the requested number of coins), which is the insertion operation information. Means capable of transmitting to the gaming value number control means,
The number of game values control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([Modifications to the input operation example)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on turning on a limited number of inputs flag),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information includes the predetermined information. In this case, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , a modification example of FIGS. 122 to 124, No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information. In this case, the game value update process is executed to set the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means to 0, and the response information includes information indicating the number of game values before it becomes 0. to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, No determination is made in step S4604 of FIG. 124, Yes determination is made in S4621, and the number of game medals is all subtracted. (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the number of gaming values before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inserting the gaming value of the number of gaming values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
As the insertion operation means, there is a minimum number insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means converts minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested number of coins of 1), which is the insertion operation information, into the game value based on the operation performed on the minimum number insertion operation means. means capable of transmitting to a number control means;
The gaming value number control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of gaming values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs, based on the reception of the minimum number inputting operation information,
The minimum number insertion operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 122);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 122 to 124, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 124 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When receiving the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted, performs an input process to input the gaming value of the requested input number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 84). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 122 to 124, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 124 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 122);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means controls the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information and the game value number storage. The means may total the number of game values stored in the means and subject it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 113),
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 86);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next time onward). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the gaming value number storage means. means for summing up the stored number of game values and subjecting it to the second counting process;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 117),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been successfully completed. For example, step S1607 in FIG. 89),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A game machine comprising: a game value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage unit,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onward). ,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next time onward). ,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. It is a means that can perform processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a second value. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of payouts to (for example, Yes determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the second value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117),
The second value is a value larger than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 117, step S4107 in FIG. 106),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer, and transmits the response information. After the transmission buffer is cleared with the transmission of the number to the external processing device, it is possible to execute the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. means (for example, a Yes determination in step S3712 in FIG. 103),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , Yes determination in step S3703 of FIG. 103, step S3706), means for transmitting the response information including first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the first value, the number of game values control means (without updating the communication number with the external processing device) For example, if the determination in step S3703 in FIG. 103 is No, step S3706 is not executed), and the response information including second information (for example, the loan serial number received last time) is transmitted to the external processing device ([ Loan receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. It is a means that can perform processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 103);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer that temporarily stores the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is a means for storing the gaming value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and also performing the gaming value updating process (for example, the gaming value number control means shown in FIG. 101 Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value number control means controls the external processing. In addition to updating the communication number with the device (for example, a Yes determination in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 103);
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, a determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the number of game value control means controls the external The response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is sent without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, the determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 103, step S3706 is not executed). means for transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and maintaining the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, if the determination is No in step S3712 in FIG. 103, S3714 is not executed);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the gaming media management device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the gaming media management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game media management device, the means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 103);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 102),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 103);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted as the number of gaming values to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with presentation means (for example, presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined presentation (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. It is a means that can set a promotion state (for example, FIG. 135(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number of gaming values control means is a means for not transmitting the number of gaming values to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The degree of increase in the second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operation state (FIG. 134);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. This is a means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (FIG. 135(b)).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value. is means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where the second value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 135(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 of FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 126) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for making a predetermined notification when the automatic counting state is set (FIGS. 138 and 139);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means controls the automatic counting state. It is a means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 137(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 137(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 in FIG. 126) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 126) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 of FIG. 126) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 126) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 126),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 126, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of game values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step 107 in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
If the operating means has been in the predetermined operating state since a power outage occurred and the power was restored, the gaming value number control means is configured to be in the predetermined operating state before the power outage. means for determining the number of gaming values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time in which the predetermined operation state is in the predetermined operation state after power restoration, regardless of the time (FIG. 140(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of game values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step 107 in FIG. 107). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The game value number control means is a means that can set the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and the power is restored. 140(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 130),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 140(a)),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the displayed value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 143 to 147),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms),
The display means is means for displaying the change in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 143 and 144);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation on the operation means,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period as the number of game values;
The gaming value number control means is a means for not transmitting the gaming value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the displayed value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 143 to 147),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the displayed value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 143 to 147),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined period (for example, transmitting one command with 8 interruptions (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, in FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When determining that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 95, step S4407 in FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a portion of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 95),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 95),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 95),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91),
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 95, step S4407 in FIG. 109, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means that is capable of disabling the game from proceeding when the predetermined information is received (for example, a No determination is made in step S1606 in FIG. 89 and the process is repeated, [game control by payout)] Operation of the unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A gaming value number control means (e.g., , medal number control unit 350),
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the rental information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of causing the performance means to perform a demonstration performance when a game is not being executed,
The predetermined performance is a performance that is performed even when the demo performance is being performed (for example, FIG. 151(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming media management device and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit; ,
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur when lending beyond the upper limit).
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process that bidirectionally communicates with the external processing device and updates the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with an external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a host server) and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the gaming value based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 83);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, does not perform error notification for VL signal abnormality);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. is a possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 148(b));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the game media management device and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the gaming value based on receiving lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value update process based on the loan number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the gaming media management device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the gaming media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 83);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the external processing device and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the gaming value based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 83);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., including a process of transmitting the gaming value number to an external processing device and a gaming value updating process of subtracting the gaming value number) based on the operation of the counting operation unit. , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) in which auxiliary functions that are advantageous to the player can be operated;
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 130) in conjunction with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first gaming state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process. Small (In the description of [About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing], the amount of increase in the number of gaming medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of gaming medals per unit game due to counting processing) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The above-mentioned counting effect is an effect that has an end condition that is different from the end of the above-mentioned counting process. (see configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance while the counting performance is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The specific performance is a performance that requires an operation from the player;
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration that does not perform a performance that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The counting performance is a performance whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the number of gaming values by the counting process,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the amount of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described. There is.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the immediately preceding counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting process is terminated halfway due to the completion of the counting process. is,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), even after the counting performance ends midway, the immediately preceding counting performance (counting performance that ended midway) ) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means continues the counting performance within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and if a new counting process is started while the counting process continues, the performance control means controls the counting performance to continue. It is a means of continuous execution,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), the counting effect continues even after the counting process ends, and when a new counting process starts, the counting effect that is being executed (see the configuration to keep it as is), is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding payment (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of settled gaming values based on the reception of the first information, performs the gaming value update process based on the settled number, and then controls the number of gaming values for the first information. Means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means that can set the number of bets to 0 based on the operation of the payment operation means.
A game machine (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a payment command (response command not used)) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding the input (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the second information, performs the gaming value update process based on the input request number, and then Means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on reception of response information to the second information.
A game machine (for input commands, refer to a configuration using response commands) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the number of gaming values becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device (during the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]), (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the gaming value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at periodically visited transmission timings (for example, transmitting the number of gaming medals by counting process (count notification). ) is every 300ms, Figure 72),
When the gaming value number control means ends the transmission of the gaming value number excluding the increased number of gaming values at the current transmission timing of the transmission timing, the control means controls the number of gaming values at the next transmission timing of the transmission timing. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of game values at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 158(c) and 158(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals during the counting process is first completed, the increased number of game values is transmitted at the transmission timing. will be sent),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the number of gaming values becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, effect image display device 157, number of game medals display device 170);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is a means capable of performing a subtraction display that subtracts the number of game values in accordance with the number of game values subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means that can execute the subtraction display that reflects the increase when there is an increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues (FIG. 158(d)) f)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 85). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 113),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 116, step S4B04 in FIG. 117),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the settlement operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means calculates a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the payment information to the game value number control means;
A gaming machine is described (see description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]), which is characterized by the following.

Further, the game machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((refer to the description of [Regarding the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button])) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment information to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is means that does not output the settlement sound when the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the bet number is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A gaming machine is described (see description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]), which is characterized by the following.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the gaming value number;
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Also,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of game values acquired in the game stored (for example, the number of medals held is the number of game values acquired in the game stored),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means executes a first performance when the number of judgment targets has not reached the predetermined number, and executes a second performance based on the fact that the number of judgment targets has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration that executes different effects depending on the number of game medals in the description of [About effects according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the judgment target at least in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be judged is displayed. (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, a performance according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], (See the configuration that executes a performance using the number of medals you have and a performance using the number of acquired medals in parallel),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the above-mentioned certain gaming state, there is a case where the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state exceeds the number included in the above-mentioned external information. If the counting process is not carried out under favorable conditions, the number of medals earned may exceed the number of medals held).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a setting suggestion performance according to the determination target ("When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number," in [About the performance according to the number of game medals]) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The performance control means is means that can display the number of game values in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possession" in FIG. 160),
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance in the certain gaming state according to the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state.
A game machine characterized by this (in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], a configuration in which the number of acquired medals in the AT state is the subject of determination, see FIG. 160) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired gaming values in the certain gaming state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 160),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquired numbers and the display of the number of gaming values when a gaming value is obtained in the certain gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 160 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a performance according to the number of game values in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], it is possible to execute performances in parallel). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes reversible and the second error becomes unresolvable.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 163) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 161),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
(Refer to the configuration in which the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [Regarding the operation when errors overlap]), which is characterized by the following: There is.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes the first state which is reversible and the second error is not reversible. ,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 163) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 163 (d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification regarding the second error (see FIG. 163(d2));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 163 (d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is a means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 163 (d4) to (d6));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [About operations when errors overlap]), (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means,
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 161(b2) to (b4)) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 163);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed with all of the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. is a means,
A gaming machine characterized by this (in the description of [About notification of counting process (1)], refer to the configuration in which counting notification A is executed in a state where all reels are stopped) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The voice output means is configured to output the voice output means when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after all the stop operations for the plurality of rotating reels have been performed in the first gaming state. It is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)], a predetermined period of time has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all reels have stopped rotating) (Refer to the configuration for executing count notification A under the condition of .) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second performance sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The audio output means is a means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is decreased.
There is described a game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which the counting notification A that is being executed is terminated when an operation on some operating means is triggered in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means,
Equipped with
The game control means is a means that can set a second game state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of performing demonstration production,
The presentation means is a means for not performing a demonstration presentation when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state;
A game machine characterized by the following (in the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]), a so-called demonstration performance is not performed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demonstration performance is performed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description below).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second effect sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The audio output means is a means that may maintain a state in which the first performance sound is output when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A game machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means may output the second effect sound when the counting process is executed with all the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. be,
A game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is executed in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second effect sound when any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
A game machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which the count notification B is not executed when any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second performance sound from the time the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a first mode when the counting process is executed while all the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. It is a means in which there are cases,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a second manner when the counting process is executed while any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. It is a means of outputting
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is configured to output the second sound output when the counting process is being executed after the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating. means for outputting the performance sound in a second mode,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) containing information on the number of game values received from the number of game value control means to the production control means,
The performance control means is means for executing first control regarding the number of gaming values based on receiving the command;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The performance control means is a means that does not execute the first control even if it receives the command until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is means that does not execute the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is means for executing the first control based on the fact that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the production control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is sent at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, the various processing commands in FIG. 72) including the information on the number of game values received from the game value number control means to the performance control means in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a means to
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter>
Next, using FIG. 168 and FIG. 169, the number of differential sheets provided by the game machine (pinball game machine (pachinko machine), reel-type game machine (slot machine), enclosed game machine, or medalless slot machine) according to the present invention The counter and the virtual difference number counter will be explained.

The difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) calculate the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game. It is a counter that can count, and is composed of, for example, a software counter provided in a RAM or the like, a hardware counter provided in a control unit, or the like.

For example, when the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) is the value of the number of medals paid out (the amount of gaming value given as a result of the game) in the advantageous section (second section). It is possible to calculate the value (obtained difference number) obtained by subtracting the value of the number of inserted medals (the amount of gaming value used in the game) from the amount.

In addition, if the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) calculates the out (number of fired game balls) from the safe (number of paid out game balls) value (amount of gaming value given as a result of the game). ) (the amount of gaming value used in the game) can be subtracted and the value (obtained difference number) can be calculated.

On the other hand, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is a counter that can count the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value given as a result of the game. The difference number counter (first counting means) is the same as the difference number counter (first counting means), but the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) have different update conditions (conditions for performing counting). It's different.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/update conditions>
FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing an example of update conditions for the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means).

In the slot machine 100 described using FIG. 1 etc., when the first operation is performed in a certain game, both the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means are updated. It is composed of

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (1) the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is performed a first stop operation (first stop left operation) in a 3 bet game (3BET game), or (3) If an operation different from the push order navigation is performed in a 3 bet game (3BET game), in the game, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) means) are both updated.

In addition, (3) If an operation different from the push order navigation is performed in a 3 bet game (3BET game), the difference number counter (first counting means) is changed to the actual difference number in the game (=actual While updating the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) based on the number of payouts - actual number of bets), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference number (= Updated based on the specified number of payouts for winning combinations - actual number of bets).

In addition, in the slot machine 100, there are cases where the AT state (first state) is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section (second section), and in the state before the AT state (first state), When the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated. When the value of the number of sheets counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated, and after the AT state (first state) ends In this state, when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and during the advantageous state, and the second counting means can maintain the same value as the first counting means. It is possible to provide a game machine with a wide range of functions.

Additionally, the amount of update when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated is the same as the amount of update when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated. is preferred.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

On the other hand, the slot machine 100 is configured such that when a second operation is performed in a certain game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), in (2) a 3-bet game (3BET game), the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 other than the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is (4) when a 2-bet bet (2BET game) is made; or (5) when a 3-bet bet game (3BET game) is made in the ED state. In the game, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated.

Note that the update conditions for the first counting means and the second counting means are not limited to this example, and for example, the conditions for updating the first counting means and the second counting means are not limited to this example. When the operation (recommended operation in the first game, for example, the first stop operation of the left stop button 137) is performed, the value of the first counting means (for example, the difference number counter) is updated, and the value of the second counting means (for example, the difference number counter) is updated. The value of the counting means (for example, virtual difference number counter) is updated, and the second operation in the first game (non-recommended operation in the first game, for example, the first stop of the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139) The configuration may be such that when the operation (operation) is performed, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

According to this example, when the first operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated in the first game. If the above operation is performed, the value of the first counting means is updated, but the value of the second counting means is not updated, so the value does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game. The second counting means can hold the value, the second counting means can grasp the value of the first operation, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, when the recommended operation in the first game is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the value of the first counting means is updated in the first game. When a non-recommended operation is performed in a game, the value of the first counting means is updated, but the value of the second counting means is not updated, so it does not reflect that the non-recommended operation was performed in the first game. The value can be held by the second counting means, the value obtained by the recommended operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having an A+AT function, the value of the second counting means (for example, virtual difference number counter) is not updated in a two-coin bet game during a bonus win or in a first stop other than the left. You may.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/advantageous section>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the advantageous section will be explained. FIG. 168(b) is a diagram showing an example of a difference number counter (first counting means), a virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means.

As explained using FIG. 7 and the like, the slot machine 100 manages the game status by dividing it into a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). Among these, in the advantageous section, it is possible to notify (operation navigation, operation instruction notification) of the advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation means), but in the non-advantageous section, this advantageous operation mode is not notified. .

Then, if the transition conditions are met in the non-advantageous section (first section) (for example, if a lottery is executed to transfer to the advantageous section based on the internally won winning combination and this lottery is won), then the second section).

In addition, if the end condition is met in the advantageous section (second section) (for example, when the advantageous section (second section) continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the advantageous section (second section) If the number of coins acquired in the second section exceeds a predetermined net increase (for example, 2400 or 3000 coins), the advantageous section (second section) ends and the non-advantageous section (first section).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the reset determination process (second process) for the advantageous area (second area), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referred to and this difference is calculated. When the value of the number of sheets counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the advantageous section (second section) is started. (Second section) to the non-advantageous section (First section).

On the other hand, the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means), and the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means). 2), (4), and (5)) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (the second (2) counting means) is not referenced, but it is updated when the first operation (for example, operations (1) and (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, so the virtual difference number The counter (second counting means) may be updated when the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated.

According to this example, by holding the number of earned differences in the second section (for example, advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition for the second section can be determined by two counts. It is possible to provide a fair game machine that can be grasped by means.

Further, before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. There is a case (first case) in which the advantageous section (second section) does not end.

According to this example, when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, the second section can be completed, and a fair game machine can be created that takes the second operation into account. can be provided.

Further, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value. In this second case, the advantageous section (second section) ends.

According to this example, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it is possible to understand that the second section has ended without the second operation being performed. .

Also, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal notation) is the value obtained by adding the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal notation) to the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation) , and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than zero.

According to this example, even if the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming state, there is still room for the player to recover.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/ED status>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and the ED state will be explained.

As explained using FIG. 7 and the like, the slot machine 100 manages the game status by dividing it into a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). When the number of remaining games in the second section (second section) becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the state shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) indicating the end of the advantageous section (second section) is entered. The performance is executed.

Note that the condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the fact that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (second section) is less than or equal to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games); However, it may be less than that, or it may be a case where the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the ED transition processing (first processing) of the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referred to and this difference is calculated. When the value of the sheet number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (for example, 2000), it is determined that the conditions for transition to the ED state are satisfied, and the ED state is set in the advantageous section (second section). transition to the state.

On the other hand, the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means), and the update condition for the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition for the difference number counter (first counting means). 2), (4), and (5)) are performed, the virtual difference number counter ( (second counting means) is not referred to.

Note that this counting means is different from the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and it is a counting means that is different from the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). A third counting means capable of counting the acquisition difference obtained by subtracting the amount of value is further provided, and the ED transition processing (first processing) of the advantageous section (second section) and the advantageous section (second section) are performed. In the reset determination process (second process), the third counting means may be referred to and each determination may be executed.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter/freeze effect>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means), the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the freeze effect will be explained.

As described above, the slot machine 100 is capable of performing an effect accompanied by a freeze that prevents the game from proceeding (freeze effect), and is capable of performing an AT lottery process (first lottery means) that allows an AT lottery (first lottery) to be executed. ), a freeze lottery process (second lottery means) capable of executing a freeze lottery (second lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect is provided. Note that the freeze lottery (second lottery) is a lottery with a higher gaming value than the AT lottery (first lottery).

The AT lottery process (first lottery means) is a first game (for example, in an advantageous section) in which a first operation (for example, operations (1) and (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed. Although it is possible to perform the AT lottery (first lottery) in the 3-coin betting game/non-navigation notification game, the second operation (for example, (2), (4), (5) shown in FIG. 168(a)) The AT lottery (first lottery) is configured not to be executed in the first game in which the operation )) is performed.

According to this example, the second operation does not execute the first lottery and puts the player at a disadvantage, so the player is prompted to perform the first operation and the first lottery is executed to play the game. You can get it.

On the other hand, in the freeze lottery process (second lottery means), as shown in FIG. The freeze lottery (second lottery) is executed by referring to the value of the means).

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), thereby providing a fair gaming machine. can do. In addition, since the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means that reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, it does not affect the second lottery, so a fair gaming machine can be maintained. can be provided.

<Example of counting>
Next, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) will be described using FIG. 169.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). Prior to explaining the counting example, the items shown in the top row of FIG. 169 will be explained.

The "section" is information for managing the state of the game, and in this example, there are a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). The "performance state" is information for managing the performance state, and in this example, there is a normal state (normal state A) as the performance state of the non-advantageous section (first section), and the production state of the non-advantageous section (the second section) is The performance states of the section) include a normal state (normal state B), a chance state, an AT state, and an ED state.

"Navi of display means" indicates the display mode of the operation navigation on the liquid crystal display device 157, and "3-1-2" indicates stops in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137 Indicates that an operation navigation is displayed that prompts you to perform an operation (operation during the first stop), and "3-2-1" indicates that the stop operation is performed in the order of right stop button 139 → middle stop button 138 → left stop button 137. "1-2-3" indicates that an operation navigation prompting you to perform the (first stop right operation) is displayed, and "1-2-3" means that the stop operation (first stop right operation) is performed in the order of the left stop button 137 → middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139. This indicates that an operation navigation prompting the driver to perform the first stop left operation is to be displayed.

Note that hereinafter, the first stop left operation may be referred to as "L first stop", and stop operations other than the first stop left operation, that is, the first stop operation and the first stop right operation, are collectively referred to as It may also be referred to as "operation other than L first stop."

"Number of bets" indicates the number of bets on medals in the game (amount of gaming value used in the game), and "3" indicates that a 3-bet bet game (3BET game) was performed; 2'' indicates that a two bet game (2BET game) has been performed. Note that hereinafter, a two bet game (2BET game) may be referred to as a "bet number other than 3".

The winning combination indicates the winning combination (including losing) and chance winnings in the game, the "common bell" indicates the small winning combination 4 (common bell), and the "push order bell" indicates the small winning combination 5. (Push order bell), "Replay" indicates a replayed winning combination, "2BETBB" indicates a bonus in a two-bet bet game, and "Loss" indicates that no winning combination was won. ing.

"Stop order" indicates the actual order of stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139. For example, "LCR" indicates the order of stop operations (left stop button 137 → middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139). "CRL" indicates that the stop operation (operation during the first stop) was performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137. , and "RCL" indicates that the stop operations (first stop right operation) were performed in the order of right stop button 139 → middle stop button 138 → left stop button 137. The "number of acquired medals" indicates the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game (the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game).

The "first counting means" and the "decimal notation" on the right are the values (count values) of the difference number counter (first counting means) expressed in hexadecimal and decimal numbers, respectively. The difference from the initial value in decimal notation is the difference between the initial value of the difference number counter (first counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal) and the difference number counter (first counting means). It is a numerical value expressed in decimal notation as the difference from the value of (means).

The "second counting means" and the "decimal notation" on the right are the values (count values) of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) expressed in hexadecimal and decimal numbers, respectively. "Difference from the initial value in decimal notation" is the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). This is a numerical value expressed in decimal notation as the difference from the value of the second counting means).

"Player's credit" is a numerical value indicating the number of medals (game value amount) electronically stored in the slot machine 100, and in this example, 50 medals are credited at the start of the game. .

<Example of counting/(1) Power OFF → (2) Power ON>
The "(2) Power ON (setting change)" state shown in FIG. 169 (2) is the "Power OFF" state shown in FIG. In this state, the power is turned on and settings have been changed.

In the same state, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (first counting means) and virtual difference number counter The values of (second counting means) are respectively set to initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal) as initial settings when the power is turned on.

According to this example, since the initial value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is a value larger than 0 (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation), the Even if the value of one counting means is less than the initial value, the value can be counted without considering the negative value, and the control burden can be reduced.

In this example, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to the same value, but they may be set to different numbers. In this case, the initial value of one counter may be larger than the initial value of the other counter, or may be smaller than that of the other counter. For example, the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is It may be 32879 or the like in decimal. Further, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be 0 or a value smaller than 0.

In addition, the timing for setting the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values (the trigger for resetting them) is not limited to when the power is turned on; If the end conditions for the section (section) are met, if the slot machine is reset, if the settings are changed, if the RAM is cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization), an error occurs. may occur in one, more than one, or all of the cases. Furthermore, the timing for setting the initial value for one counter and the timing for setting the initial value for the other counter may be the same or different.

<Example of counting/(2) Power ON → (3) Transition to advantageous section>
In the state of "(3) Transition to advantageous section" shown in FIG. 169 (3), in the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section), a 3-coin bet game is played, and a loss (number of payouts is 0) in the stop order LCR. ) has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 50 to 47 (=50-3). However, since the difference number counter (first counting means) and virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous interval (first interval), their respective values are , is maintained at the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal).

In addition, in this game, since the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transfer lottery was won), from the next game, the transfer condition to the advantageous section (second section) will be changed to the normal period of the advantageous section (second section). transition to state.

<Example of counting/(3) Advantageous section transition → (4) L first stop>
The state of "(4) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (4) is when a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the player loses in the stop order LCR. The number of payouts is 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), so each value is the initial value (in this example, in hexadecimal). f59f (62879 in decimal) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal (62876 (=62879-3) in decimal).

<Example of counting/(4) L first stop → (5) L first stop>
In the state of "(5) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (5), a 3-coin bet game is performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a replay (replay game combination) is performed in the stop order LCR. ) has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 3 - number of bets 3). , the credit is maintained at 44, and the values of both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are also maintained at f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal. .

<Example of counting/(5) L first stop → (6) L first stop>
In the state of "(6) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (6), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the common bell (number of payouts) is played in the stop order LCR. 15) is in a state where it has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 44 to 56 (=44+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Since both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), each value is calculated from f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal. f5ab is updated to 62891 (=62879+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(6) L first stop → (7) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(7) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (7), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a loss (number of payouts) is made in the stop order CRL. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 56 to 53 (=56-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal, f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 in decimal (=62891-3 ), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In the subsequent game period from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game in the advantageous section (second section) - When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the non-navigation notification game), the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, and the second operation is performed. Since the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game, and The value obtained by the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the subsequent game period from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", the first game (in this example, the three pieces in the advantageous section (second section) When a non-recommended operation in the first game (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the betting game/non-navigation notification game), the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) The value is updated, and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, so the second counting means uses a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game. The value of the recommended operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)), a second operation (in this example, a first game other than L) is performed. If a stop operation) is performed, the AT lottery (first lottery) will not be executed, so subsequent games from "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L" During this period, AT lottery will not be executed.

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed with the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), and the player is at a disadvantage. In this example, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the L first stop operation and have the player execute the first operation and play the game.

<Example of counting/(7) First stop other than L → (8) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(8) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (8), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a loss (number of payouts) is made in the stop order RCL. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 53 to 50 (=53-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), When the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 in decimal, f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 in decimal (=62888-3 ), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(8) L first stop → (9), (10) First stop other than L>
The states “(9) L first stop” and “(10) L first stop” shown in FIG. 169 (9) and FIG. 169 (10) are 3 This is a state in which a bet game is played and a replay (replay combination) is won in the stop order CRL and the stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 3 - number of bets 3). , the credit is maintained at 50, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5a5 in hexadecimal, 62885 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained as f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(10) First stop other than L → (11) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(11) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (11), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the common bell (payout This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 50 to 62 (=50+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), the second When an operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is Since it is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 in decimal to f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 in decimal (=62885+12). However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

In addition, the first winning combination (in this example, the common bell) that will result in a larger number of payouts than the number of bets when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, is in the normal state. Since the probability of winning is lower than that of losing, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in the number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in the number of coins, and the player will not have an advantage, so it will be fair. It is possible to provide a game machine with a wide range of functions.

Note that the first hand is not limited to the "common bell" in which 15 pieces are paid out regardless of the stop order; for example, 1 piece is paid out at the first stop on the left, and 15 pieces are paid out at the first stop other than the left. It may also be a "biased bell" with a payout of .

<Example of counting/(11) First stop other than L → (12) First stop other than L>
In the state of "(12) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (12), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the common bell (payout This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 62 to 74 (=62+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), the second When an operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is Since it is not counted (updated), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 in decimal to f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 in decimal (=62897+12). However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(12) First stop other than L → (13) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(13) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 74 to 72 (=74-2). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), if a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. f5bd, 62909 in decimal is updated to f5bb in hexadecimal, 62907 (=62909-2) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab, 10 in hexadecimal. It is maintained at 62891 in base number.

In the subsequent game period from "(13) Number of bets other than 3" to (23) 2 BETBB consumption", if the first number of bets game (in this example, 2 bets game) is played, the first count Since the value of the counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, the second operation is not performed in the first game. The second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect the fact that the first operation has been performed, and the second counting means can grasp the value at which the first operation has been performed, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed. AT lottery is not executed during the gaming period from ``number of bets'' to (23) 2BETBB consumption''.

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed in the first bet number game (in this example, a two-bet bet game), and the player is at a disadvantage. It is possible to encourage the player to play a game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game) and have them play the first game.

<Example of counting/(13) Number of bets other than 3 → (14) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(14) Number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 72 to 70 (=72-2). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), if a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. f5bb, 62907 in decimal notation is updated to f5b9 in hexadecimal, 62905 (=62907-2) in decimal notation, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab, 10 in hexadecimal. It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Example of counting/(14) Number of bets other than 3 → (15) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(15) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 70 to 68 (=70-2). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), if a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. f5b9, 62905 in decimal is updated to f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 (=62905-2) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab, 10 in hexadecimal. It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Example of counting/(15) Number of bets other than 3 → (16) Number of bets other than 3>
"(16) Number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (16) is a 2-coin bet game performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) and replayed (replayed combination) in the stopping order LCR. It is in a state where it has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained as f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(16) Number of bets other than 3 → (17) Number of bets other than 3>
"(17) Number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (17) is a 2-coin bet game performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) and replayed (replayed combination) in the stopping order CRL. It is in a state where it has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained as f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(17) Number of bets other than 3 → (18) Number of bets other than 3>
"(18) Bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (18) is a two-coin bet game performed in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and replayed (replayed combination) in the stopping order RCL. It is in a state where it has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but the replay (replay combination) is won and the difference in the number of coins in the game is 0 (= number of wins 2 - number of bets 2). , the credit is maintained at 68, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal, 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained as f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(18) Number of bets other than 3 → (19) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(19) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 68 to 81 (=68+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5b7, 10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62903 in hexadecimal to f5c4 in hexadecimal and 62916 (=62903+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Example of counting/(19) Number of bets other than 3 → (20) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(20) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 81 to 94 (=81+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5c4,10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62916 in hexadecimal to f5d1 in hexadecimal and 62929 (=62916+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Example of counting/(20) Number of bets other than 3 → (21) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(21) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 94 to 107 (=94+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5d1, 10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62929 in hexadecimal to f5de in hexadecimal and 62942 (=62929+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Example of counting/(21) Number of bets other than 3 → (22) 2 BETBB winnings>
The state of "(22) 2 BETBB won" shown in FIG. 169 (22) is a 2 bet game played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and 2 BETBB (number of payouts 0) in the stop order LCR. It is in a winning state.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 107 to 105 (=107-2). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), if a two-coin bet game is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter ( Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. f5de, 62942 in decimal is updated to f5dc in hexadecimal, 62940 (=62942-2) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab, 10 in hexadecimal. It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Example of counting/(22) 2BETBB winning → (23) 2BETBB consumption>
The state of "(23) 2 BET BB consumption" shown in FIG. 169 (23) means that a prize is won in a BB game in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), a 2 bet game is performed in the BB game, and the stop order is This is a state in which a common bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 105 to 118 (=105+13). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5dc, 10 in hexadecimal. It is updated from 62940 in hexadecimal to f5e9 in hexadecimal and 62953 (=62940+13) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. be done.

<Example of counting/(23) 2 BETBB consumption → (24) Chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(24) Chance (AT winning)" shown in FIG. In addition to winning the payout number 15), he also won the AT lottery.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 118 to 130 (=118+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Since both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), the value of the difference sheet number counter (first counting means) is f5e9 in hexadecimal. , is updated from 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 (=62953+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is changed from f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. It is updated to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 (=62891+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(24) Chance (AT winning) → (25) AT>
The state “(25) AT” shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 130 to 142 (=130 + 12). , the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and in the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)). Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. It is updated from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 (=62965+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal. 62903 is updated to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 (=62903+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(26) AT>
The state "(26) AT" shown in FIG. )→Left (3)", the player won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) with the stop order CRL according to "Left (3)".

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are updated to 442 (=previous credit 430 + 12). In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)) Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is It is updated to f72d in hexadecimal and 63277 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6d7 in hexadecimal and 63191 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(26) AT→(27) Normal state>
The state "(27) Normal state" shown in FIG. 169 (27) is a normal state that has transitioned from the AT state of the advantageous section (second section), in which a 3-coin bet game is performed and the common bell is reached in the stopping order LCR. (The number of payouts is 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 312 to 324 (=312+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference sheet number counter (first counting means) is f739, 10 in hexadecimal. The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6e3 in hexadecimal and 63203 (=63191+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(28) First stop other than L>
The state of "(28) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 68 (=previous credit 71-3). In addition to being subtracted, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the 3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)) , when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated). Since the counter (counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to edcf in hexadecimal and 60879 in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is set to a predetermined value (in this example 2000 in decimal notation), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal notation and 62891 in decimal notation.

In addition, in the same state, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) (in this example, 60879 in decimal notation) is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation). The difference is negative), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, 62891 in decimal notation) is larger (initial value) than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation). (the difference between the two is positive).

According to this example, one of the values of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is larger than the initial value. , the other may be smaller than the initial value, so the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means that are referenced (or not referenced) in performances, lottery, etc. may not match. The gameplay can be improved.

<Counting example/(28) Stops other than L → (29) L first stop>
The state of "(29) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (29) is when a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the player loses (loss) in the stop order LCR. The number of payouts is 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in hexadecimal. edcc is updated to 60876 (=60879-3) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f5a8 in hexadecimal, 62888 (=62891-2) in decimal. .

As explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means) performs the virtual difference number of winnings without referring to the value of the difference number counter (first counting means). Since the configuration is such that the freeze lottery (second lottery) is executed by referring to the value of the counter (second counting means), the player intentionally performs the second operation (in this example, a value other than L). Even if you perform the first stop operation), it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), so it is a fair game. A table can be provided. Furthermore, since the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) that reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, the second lottery ( Since this does not affect the freeze lottery), it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

<Example of counting/(30) Number of bets other than 3>
The state of "(30) number of bets other than 3" shown in FIG. This is the state in which the player won a prize in number 15).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added to 118 (=previous credit 105 + 13). In addition, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is performed in an advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5e9 in hexadecimal. The value is updated to 62953 in decimal notation, and the difference from the initial value has turned positive, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal notation and 62891 in decimal notation.

In addition, in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), if a two-coin bet game is performed and the common bell (number of payouts 15) continues to be won in the stopping order LCR, the difference number counter will be displayed as in this example. The difference from the initial value (first counting means) may turn positive.

<Example of counting/(30) Number of bets other than 3 → (31) Chance (AT winning)>
The state of "(31) Chance (AT winning)" shown in FIG. In addition to winning the payout number 15), he also won the AT lottery.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 118 to 130 (=118+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference Since both the sheet number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference sheet number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), the value of the difference sheet number counter (first counting means) is f5e9 in hexadecimal. , is updated from 62953 in decimal to f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 (=62953+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is changed from f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal. It is updated to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 (=62891+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(31) Chance (AT winning) → (32) AT>
The state of "(32) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 130 to 142 (=130 + 12). , the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and in the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)). Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. It is updated from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 (=62965+12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal. 62903 is updated to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 (=62903+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(32) AT) → (33) AT>
The state "(33) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'' and won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 142 to 139 (=142-3). In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section) As explained using FIG. 168(a)(3), even if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated based on the actual difference number in the game (in this example, -3 (=actual number of payouts 0 - actual number of bets 3)), while the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference number of coins in the game (in this example, 12 (=prescribed number of payouts of winning combinations 15 - actual number of bets 3)) assuming that the stop operation has been performed according to the operation navigation.

In a specific example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal to f5fe in hexadecimal and 62974 (=62977-3) in decimal, and The value of the difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5c3 in hexadecimal and 62915 in decimal to f5cf in hexadecimal and 62927 (=62915+12) in decimal.

<Example of counting/(34) AT>
The state of "(34) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added to 4043 (=previous credit 4031 + 12) In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)) Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is It is updated to fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(34) AT→(35) AT>
The state "(35) AT" shown in FIG. 169 (35) is the AT state of the advantageous section (second section) when a 3-coin bet game is performed, and the operation navigation "Right (1) → Middle (2)" →Left (3)”, the player won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) in the stop order RCL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4043 to 4045 (=4043+12). , the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and in the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)). Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is 16. The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 (=64878+12) in decimal. 64831 is updated to fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 (=64831+12) in decimal.

Further, as explained using FIG. 168(b), the slot machine 100 uses a difference number counter (first counting means) in the ED transition process (first process) of the advantageous area (second area). When the value of this difference counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (in this example, 2000 in decimal and fd6f in hexadecimal), the condition for transition to the ED state is satisfied. It is determined that the state is shifted to the ED state in the advantageous section (second section).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 (=64878+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value becomes 2011 in decimal, reaching 2000. As a result, the state shifts to ED.

<Example of counting/(35) AT→(36) ED>
The state "(36) ED" shown in FIG. →Middle (2) →Right (3)”, the push order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4055 to 4067 (=4055+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated). ), and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is from fd7a in hexadecimal and 64890 in decimal, to hexadecimal. is updated to fd86 in decimal notation and 64902 (=64890+12), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal notation and 64843 in decimal notation.

<Example of counting/(37) ED, (38) ED>
The states "(37) ED" and "(38) ED" shown in FIG. 169 (37) and FIG. , the player won the push order bell (number of payouts 15) in the stop order CRL according to the operation navigation "Middle (1) → Right (2) → Left (3)".

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), the credits are updated from 4427 to 4439, and the number of credits shown in FIG. 168 ( a) As explained using (5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual Since the difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from feee to fefa in hexadecimal and from 65262 to 65274 in decimal. However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

<Example of counting/(38) ED → (39) ED>
The state of "(39) ED" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 4439 to 4461 (=4439+12). , as explained using FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3 bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated). ), and since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 in decimal (=65274+12). However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

Furthermore, as explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the difference number counter (first counting means) is used in the reset determination process (second process) for the advantageous area (second area). When the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal notation), the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. It is determined that this is the case, and the advantageous section (second section) is shifted to the non-advantageous section (first section).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 (=65274+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is 2407, which means that it has reached 2400. , the ED state in the advantageous section (second section) shifts to the normal state in the non-advantageous section (first section). In addition, if it is determined whether the upper byte becomes ff or not and it is determined that the upper byte is ff, the ED state of the advantageous section (second section) is changed from the ED state of the non-advantageous section (first section). A transition may be made to the normal state, and in this case, the capacity for determination processing associated with the transition can be reduced.

According to this example, by holding the number of gains in the second section (in this example, advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section is set to 2. It is possible to provide a fair gaming machine by using two counting means.

Also, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal notation) is the value obtained by adding the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal notation) to the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal notation) Since the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than 0, it is assumed that the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming state. However, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover.

<Example of counting/(39) ED → (40) Unfavorable section>
The state of "(40) Non-advantageous section" shown in FIG. 169 (40) is a state where the state has transitioned from the advantageous section (second section) to the non-advantageous section (first section).

In the same state, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as when the power is turned on, and the differential sheet number counter (first counting means) and virtual differential sheet number counter ( The values of the second counting means) are initialized as initial settings at the time of transition from the advantageous section (second section) to the non-advantageous section (first section). (62879 in decimal).

<Example of counting/(40) Non-advantageous section → (41) Advantageous section transition>
The state of "(41) Transition to advantageous section" shown in FIG. ) has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 4461 to 4458 (=4461-3). However, since the difference number counter (first counting means) and virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous interval (first interval), their respective values are , is maintained at the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal).

In addition, in this game, since the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transfer lottery was won), from the next game, the transfer condition to the advantageous section (second section) will be changed to the normal period of the advantageous section (second section). transition to state.

<Example of counting/(41) Advantageous section transition → (42) L first stop>
The state of "(42) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (42) is when a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section) after the transition, and the player loses in the stop order LCR. The number of payouts is 0).

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 4458 to 4455 (=4458-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous section (second section), counts (updates) both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), so each value is the initial value (in this example, in hexadecimal). f59f (62879 in decimal) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal (62876 (=62879-3) in decimal).

<Example of counting/(43) L first stop>
In the state of "(43) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (43), a 3-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and a loss (number of payouts is 0) in the stop order LCR. ) has won a prize.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 2458 (=previous credits 2461-3). At the same time, as explained using FIG. 168(a)(1), if the first operation is performed in the advantageous section (second section), the difference number counter (first count Since both the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), each value is f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 (=62879-3) in decimal from the previous value. The difference from the initial value exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal notation).

As explained using FIG. 168(b), the slot machine 100 is configured to execute the freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). In this example, when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal notation), the (second lottery) is executed.

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) will not change. Since this is not reflected and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in this example, the winning probability of the freeze lottery in the state of "(28) First stop other than L" shown in FIG. 169 (28) and the advantage after winning the freeze effect are higher than those shown in FIG. 169 (43). It is configured such that the probability of winning the freeze lottery in the state of "(43) L first stop" and the advantage after winning the freeze effect are high.

That is, in this example, the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) regarding the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is the second value (in this example, 12 in decimal). The second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery) in which the value related to the second counting means is the third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) is more likely to be played than the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery). (for example, it is easier to win the second lottery, or the gaming value (size of AT) is larger when winning the second lottery), and the third value is more advantageous than the second value. small.

According to this example, the worse the player's gaming situation excluding intentional second operations, the more advantageous the second lottery will be to the player, so even if the player's gaming situation is bad, the player's Motivation to play can be improved.

In addition, the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) regarding the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) has become the third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal). Since it may later become the second value (in this example, 12 in decimal), it is possible to execute the second lottery according to the player's gaming status, and it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine. can.

<Example of counting/(44) AT>
The state "(44) AT" shown in FIG. →Left (3)'', the winning order bell (number of payouts: 15) was won in the stop order CRL.

In the game in the same state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added to 6638 (=previous credit 6626 + 12) In addition, the game is a 3-piece bet game/navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section), and the first game (3-piece bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)) Therefore, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is It is updated to fe9b in hexadecimal and 65179 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal.

In this example, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is 2420 in decimal, reaching 2400. As explained using FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 65279), the virtual difference number There is a case (first case) in which the value of the counter (second counting means) reaches the first value, and in this first case, the advantageous section (second section) does not end. The second section can be completed when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, and a fair game machine can be provided that takes the second operation into account.

Although not shown, in the slot machine 100, when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 2400), the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value (for example, 2400). There is a case (second case) in which the value of reaches the first value, and in this second case, the advantageous interval (second interval) ends, so the first counting means and the second Since both of the counting means reach the first value, it can be understood that the second section has ended without the second operation being performed.

<About the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>
In the examples shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the advantageous section is ended by updating the difference number counter and determining that the value has reached a predetermined value. In this configuration, depending on the bit pattern when a predetermined value is reached, the load of the determination process can be reduced in some cases. Therefore, by determining a predetermined value that will result in such a bit pattern, and then determining the initial value by calculating backwards from the amount of change required to reach this value, the load on the processing for determining the end of an advantageous section is reduced. be able to. Such an example will be explained below.

First, in the first example, when the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter increases by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is added), the initial value is set to "0xf59fh (62879)". This is an example. In this example, the predetermined value is "0xff00h (65280)" and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "ff". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain as "ff" until 255 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". That is, when the upper two digits are "ff", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "ff".

In the second example, the initial value is set to "0xe69fh (59039)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter increases by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is added). It is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0xf000h (61440)", and the high-order digit (4 bits) of the 4 hexadecimal digits is "f". Until 4095 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)", the upper digit of the four hexadecimal digits remains "f". That is, when the first digit is "f", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 6496. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the first digit is "f".

In the third example, the initial value is set to "0x769fh (30367)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference counter increases by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is added). It is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0x8000h (32768)" and the upper 1 bit is "1". The upper 1 bit remains "1" until 32767 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". That is, when the upper 1 bit is "1", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 35168. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the upper 1 bit is "1".

In the fourth example, the initial value is set to "0x0a60h (2656)" when the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter is decremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous section continues until 2400 is subtracted). It is. In this example, the predetermined value is "0x00ffh (255)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "00". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "00" until 255 is further subtracted from this value to become "0x0000h(0)". That is, if the upper two digits are "00", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since updates exceeding this range are not performed at once in a game, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "00".

In addition, in the above example, we explained the case where all the upper digits up to a specific digit have the same bit pattern, but for example, in the first example, if the predetermined value is "0xee00h (60928)", the upper digit It may be determined that the two digits are "ee" or that the upper seven bits are "1110111". In this configuration, if the advantageous section ends when the difference counter increases by 2401 or more, the initial value may be set to "0xe49f00h (58527)."

As in the four examples above, by determining a predetermined value that allows only the upper few digits of the corresponding bit pattern to be considered for judgment, and then calculating the amount of change in the difference number counter from there. , the initial value can be derived. Note that the above bit pattern is carried up (or carried down) when a predetermined value is reached, and the same value (0 or 1) continues from the lower digit, and the value of a specific digit is reversed. state. For example, in the first example "0xff00h (65280)", the 8th digit (8th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. It has become. In the second example, "0xf000h (61440)", the fourth digit (4th bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, and these values are inverted. There is. In the third example, "0x8000h (32768)", the first digit (1st bit) from the top is 1, and the lower digits are all 0, so these values are inverted. There is. In the fourth example, "0x00ffh (255)", the 8th digit (8th bit) from the top is 0, and all the lower digits are 1, so these values are inverted. There is.

With the above configuration, it is sufficient to handle only the upper digits including a specific digit in the program, and the register capacity for reading this can also be reduced. That is, it is possible to determine whether a predetermined value has been reached using only the upper digits including a specific digit, and the processing load and capacity load can be reduced.

Further, in the above example, the above determination process can be performed even if the difference number counter changes within a certain range after reaching a predetermined value. Therefore, after reaching a predetermined value, it becomes possible to play the game a certain number of times or perform some kind of performance.

Furthermore, in the above example, regarding the value range of the difference number counter, the first range in the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai is the opposite of the direction of the predetermined value with the initial value as Sakai. It is narrower than the second range of directions. For example, in the first example, the initial value is "0xf59fh (62879)" and the first range is 62879 to 65535, while the second range is 0 to 62879, and the first range is 62879 to 65535. This range is narrower than the second range. Depending on the content of the game, the difference number counter may be updated in a direction opposite to the predetermined value, but even in such a case, there is room for the difference number counter to recover, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. ), and a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), the first one does not notify an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139). It has a section (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section ( For example, if a lottery is executed to move to an advantageous section based on an internally won winning combination, and if the lottery is won), the transition to the second section is performed, and if the end condition is met in the second section (for example, if the end condition is met in the second section) If a predetermined net increase in the number of coins (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded, the second section can be ended and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means is configured to control the amount of game play in the second section. by a means capable of counting the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value granted as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) If the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The game machine is characterized in that the value of the counting means may also be updated.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by holding the number of earned differences in the second section (for example, advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end of the second section The conditions can be grasped by two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, when the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed in the first game (for example, 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous section (second section)), the When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and a second operation (for example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the second counting means is updated. The value of one counting means may be updated and the value of the second counting means may not be updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect the fact that the second operation was performed in the first game, and the second counting means can hold the value that does not reflect the fact that the second operation has been performed. This allows us to provide fair gaming machines.

Further, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game, and the second counting means cannot grasp the value that a recommended operation has been performed. , can provide a fair gaming machine.

The first lottery means (e.g., AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (e.g., AT lottery) is provided, and the first lottery means is configured to perform the first lottery on which the first operation is performed. The first lottery means is a means capable of executing the first lottery in one game, and the first lottery means is a means that does not execute the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first lottery will not be executed with the second operation and the player will be at a disadvantage. You can have them play games.

Further, the amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, one of the values of the first counting means and the second counting means may be larger than the initial value, and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means that are referred to (or not referred to) in production, lottery, etc. may not match, thereby increasing the gameplay. Can be done.

Further, the initial value (for example, 62879) of the first counting means may be a value larger than 0.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value depending on the player's playing situation, the value can be counted without considering the negative value, and the control burden can be reduced. .

Further, the first value (e.g., 65279) is a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (e.g., 2400) to the initial value (e.g., 62879), and from the initial value to the first absolute value. The value obtained by subtracting may be a value greater than zero.

With this configuration, even if the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming state, there is still room for the player to recover.

Further, in the second period, the player may be in a first state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous, and in the state before reaching the first state, the value of the first counting means is When the value of the second counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in the first state, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means The value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated in a state after the first state ends. You can.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (for example, an AT state), and during the advantageous state. , it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first winning combination (for example, a common bell) that results in a payout number greater than the number of bets when the second operation is performed may have a lower winning probability than a loss in the normal state. .

With such a configuration, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in the number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in the number of coins, and the player will not have an advantage, so it will not be fair. A game machine can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. A gaming machine comprising a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) and a second lottery means (for example, a freeze lottery process) capable of executing a second lottery (for example, a freeze lottery process). , a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is not reported, and a second section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified. section (for example, an advantageous section), and if the transfer condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, when a lottery is executed to transfer to the advantageous section based on the internally won winning combination and this lottery is won) When the second section is reached, and the end condition is met in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of sheets (for example, 2,400 sheets) is exceeded), the second section is ended and the end condition is satisfied in the second section. The first counting means calculates the game value used for the game from the amount of game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) given as a result of the game in the second period. It is a means that can count the number of acquisition differences obtained by subtracting the amount of value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and when the value of the first counting means reaches the first value (for example, 65279), When the end condition is satisfied and the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the first game (for example, advantageous section (second When the first operation (for example, L first stop operation) is performed in the 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game) in the section), the value of the first counting means is updated, and the second counting means is updated. When the value of the means is updated and a second operation (for example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the second counting means is updated. The gaming machine is characterized in that the value of the means is not updated and the second lottery means is a means for executing the second lottery by referring to the value of the second counting means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery, so that a fair game machine can be achieved. can be provided.

Further, the second lottery means may be a means for executing the second lottery without referring to the value of the first counting means.

With such a configuration, the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means that reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, so that the second lottery is not affected. , can provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the value related to the second counting means is a third value (in this example, the value related to the second counting means is a third value (in this example, The second lottery at decimal number -2000) may be more advantageous to the player, and the third value may be smaller than the second value.

With such a configuration, the worse the player's gaming situation excluding intentional second operations, the more advantageous the second lottery will be to the player. It is possible to improve the player's desire to play.

Further, the value related to the second counting means may become the second value after reaching the third value.

With such a configuration, the second lottery can be executed according to the gaming state of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. The game machine is equipped with a second counting means (e.g., virtual difference number counter), and a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an internal winning If you execute a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on the winning combination and win this lottery), move to the second section, and if the ending conditions are met in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (For example, if the number of coins exceeds 2,400) The second section can be ended and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means will be awarded as a result of the game in the second section. means capable of calculating the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value played (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out); When the value of one counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279), the termination condition is satisfied, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the second counting means The value may also be updated, and when a first operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated. When a second operation is performed in one game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the value of the first counting means is There is a case where the value of the second counting means reaches the first value before reaching the first value (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and in the first case, , the gaming machine is characterized in that the second section does not end.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the second section can be ended when the value of the second counting means that is not updated by the second operation reaches the first value, and the second section can be completed by taking the second operation into consideration. A fair gaming machine can be provided.

Further, when the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the value of the second counting means reaches the first value (hereinafter referred to as "second case"). In the second case, the second section may end.

With such a configuration, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it is possible to know that the second section has ended without the second operation being performed. Can be done.

Further, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game, and the second counting means cannot grasp the value that a recommended operation has been performed. , can provide a fair gaming machine.

The first lottery means (e.g., AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (e.g., AT lottery) is provided, and the first lottery means is configured to perform the first lottery on which the first operation is performed. The first lottery means is a means capable of executing the first lottery in one game, and the first lottery means is a means that does not execute the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first lottery will not be executed with the second operation and the player will be at a disadvantage. You can have them play games.

Further, the amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as the amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, one of the values of the first counting means and the second counting means may be larger than the initial value, and the other may be smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means that are referred to (or not referred to) in production, lottery, etc. may not match, thereby increasing the gameplay. Can be done.

Further, the initial value (for example, 62879) of the first counting means may be a value larger than 0.

With such a configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value depending on the player's playing situation, the value can be counted without considering the negative value, and the control burden can be reduced. .

Further, the first value (e.g., 65279) is a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (e.g., 2400) to the initial value (e.g., 62879), and from the initial value to the first absolute value. The value obtained by subtracting may be a value greater than zero.

With this configuration, even if the number of acquired coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming state, there is still room for the player to recover.

Further, in the second period, the player may be in a first state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous, and in the state before reaching the first state, the value of the first counting means is When the value of the second counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in the first state, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means The value of the second counting means may also be updated when the value of the first counting means is updated in a state after the first state ends. You can.

With such a configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (for example, an AT state), and during the advantageous state. , it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first winning combination (for example, a common bell) that results in a payout number greater than the number of bets when the second operation is performed may have a lower winning probability than a loss in the normal state. .

With such a configuration, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in the number of coins will be larger than the actual difference in the number of coins, and the player will not have an advantage, so it will not be fair. A game machine can be provided.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (for example, main control unit 300, first counting means),
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A game machine comprising:
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means calculates the number of winnings (for example, a difference number counter) using the result of subtracting the number of gaming values used in the game from the number of gaming values awarded as a result of the game in the second period. ) is an updateable means,
The determining means is means for determining that the end condition is satisfied when the amount of change from the initial value of the number of acquisition differences reaches a first value (for example, 2400 pieces),
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the number of acquired differences (for example, <to reduce the load of the arrival determination process). Regarding the initial value of the counter),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all digits of the first counting means are determined.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the bit pattern corresponding to the total value of the initial value and the first value, all values of digits lower than the specific digit are inverted values of the specific digit (for example, < Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting means is a means that can update the number of obtained differences even in a game after the amount of change in the number of obtained differences from the initial value reaches the first value (for example, if Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of the judgment process>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, accurate counting is possible even after the amount of change in the number of earned differences from the initial value reaches the first value.

Further, the game machine described above,
The initial value is a value greater than 0 (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value depending on the player's gaming situation, counting can be continued.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the number of acquired differences within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, the player can still have some room to recover.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) that may update the value when the first counting means updates the obtained difference number;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the number of earned differences in the second section can be held by the first counting means and the second counting means, and the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, so that a fair gaming machine can be achieved. can be provided.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a firing device that fires a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a prize opening that is configured to allow the ball fired from the firing device to enter, and a prize opening that allows the ball that enters the prize opening to be received. A game ball is provided with a detection means for detecting a ball, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device changes the symbols and then stops displaying them to notify the transition of the gaming state.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

<Production based on the difference number counter>
Next, the effect based on the difference number counter will be explained using FIGS. 170 to 175.

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 170 is a graph showing an example of the change in the number of difference sheets in a certain game period, and FIGS. 171 and 172 are diagrams showing examples of various performances in a certain game period shown in FIG. 171.

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter/Power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 170(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in the on state, and the settings are changed.

At the same timing, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (the first section) that counts the difference number of sheets (obtained difference number) is set. The value of the first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) described above are each set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the power is turned on.

Note that the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be a value larger than 0 (positive value) or a value smaller than 0. (a negative value). In addition, the timing for setting the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values (the trigger for resetting them) is not limited to when the power is turned on; If the end conditions for the section (section) are met, if the slot machine is reset, if the settings are changed, if the RAM is cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization), an error occurs. may occur in one, more than one, or all of the cases. Furthermore, the timing for setting the initial value for one counter and the timing for setting the initial value for the other counter may be the same or different.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT1 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT1 in FIGS. 170 (1) and (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of sheets is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT1 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT1 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference is reduced from the number of sheets to the difference number CT2 (for example, -1500, second point).

In addition, in the game period PT1 (normal state) in FIGS. 170 (1) and (2), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the difference in the number of sheets is smaller than the value (the value of the difference), and hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "minus area of the difference in the number of sheets" or a "minus area".

On the other hand, for example, during the gaming period PT8, etc., the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is in a state (first Hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "plus area of the difference in the number of sheets" or a "plus area".

During the gaming period PT1 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

Here, certain effects include a reel effect (freeze effect) performed using the reels 110 to 112, a display effect (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears, and an existing This includes a performance that has a high appearance rate and a performance that suggests a negative region (second state) (demonstration performance, etc.).

These certain effects may appear (execute) with a predetermined probability even in areas where the number of differential sheets is positive, but in this example, the probability of a certain effect appearing in areas where the number of differential sheets is positive is , the probability that a certain effect appears is higher in the negative area of the difference in the number of sheets, and a certain effect appears more in the negative area (second state) than in the positive area of the difference in the number of sheets (second state). It is configured to be easy (easy to execute).

Note that it is sufficient that a certain effect is more likely to appear in the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of sheets than in the positive area (first state). The probability that a certain effect will appear may be 0%, and the probability that a certain effect will appear in a negative area of the number of difference sheets may be greater than 0%. That is, a certain effect may appear only in a negative area of the number of difference sheets.

Furthermore, the probability of a certain effect appearing in a positive area of the difference in the number of sheets may be less than 100%, and the probability of the certain effect appearing in a negative area of the difference in the number of sheets may be 100%. That is, a certain effect may always appear in a negative area of the number of difference sheets.

Furthermore, the probability of a certain effect appearing increases as the number of games remaining in the advantageous section decreases (nearly the end of the advantageous section). A state where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small is a state in which the difference number counter has not reached a predetermined value, and in the normal state, the difference number counter basically decreases, so the value of the difference number counter is low. It can be said that it is a state. That is, even with the above configuration, it is possible to make a certain effect more likely to appear in a negative area of the difference in number of sheets than in a positive area. In addition, the probability of appearance of a certain effect may increase as the number of games in which the AT state is not set increases, or the probability of a certain effect increasing as the number of times an advantageous result is not obtained in CZ (CZ through) increases. The appearance probability may be increased. In other words, it is only necessary to increase the probability of a certain effect appearing in a situation where the player is disadvantaged overall, and the indicators for determining this can be the above example (difference number counter, number of remaining games in an advantageous section). , the number of games in which the AT state is not set, and the number of CZ throughs).

FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the effects.

The tutorial display is one type of effect, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a princess character image and the appearance of a freeze effect, which will be described later, is suggested using FIG. 171(e). A display (in this example, a display of the character string "If you pull the freeze, it's super hot") is displayed.

FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing an example of a specific character performance, which is one of certain performances.

The specific character performance is one type of performance, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a character image of a vassal and provide advantageous benefits to the player (for example, a freeze performance). (in this example, a display of the character string "Chance!") is displayed.

Note that the appearance of these effects shown in FIGS. 171(a) and 171(b) allows the player to recognize that there is a possibility of acquiring a large amount of gaming value in the AT state, which will be described later. The desire to continue playing the game may improve. Specifically, from the point where the AT state start is negative (for example, the point CT2 in FIG. 170) to the point where the AT state is completed and the advantageous section is reset (for example, the point CT6 in FIG. 170). We can expect to get it in the AT state in the 2nd inning.

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT1 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT2 (AT state)>
The game period PT2 in FIGS. 170 (2) to (3) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT2 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT2 (for example, -1500). ) to the difference number CT3 (for example, -697 (=-1500+803). First point).

In addition, in the game period PT2 (AT state) in FIGS. 170 (2) and (3), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT2 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 171(c) is a diagram showing an example of AT performance.

The AT performance is a performance that suggests an AT state, and in this example, the number of acquired game media in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "255 GET" is displayed), and the character image of the bancho is displayed. This is an effect that includes a display of , and a display notifying that the AT state is present (in this example, a display of the character string "AT in progress").

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT2 (AT state), since the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and In the final game of the game period PT2 (AT state), an AT end effect is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 171(d) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 803 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT3>
The game period PT3 in FIGS. 170(3) and 170(4) is a normal state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT3 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT3 (in this example, -300.The first point ) to the difference number CT4 (for example, -1700, second point).

In addition, in the game period PT3 (normal state) in FIGS. 170 (3) and (4), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT3 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT3 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT4 (AT state)>
The game period PT4 in FIGS. 170 (4) to (6) is an AT state, and a state in which the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT4 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT4 (for example, -1700). ) through the difference number CT5 (for example, 0) to the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

In addition, in the game period PT4 (AT state) shown in FIG. 170 (4) to (6), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets has decreased from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (5) to ( 6) The gaming period is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT4 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (in this example, the AT state), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 171(e) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the character image of the bancho and to provide an advantageous effect to the player. In this example, it is possible to obtain gaming value until the difference in the number of coins moves from the negative area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state). (In this example, a display of the character string "Breaking the limit!") is displayed.

In this example, in the gaming period PT4 (AT state), the difference number (virtual difference number counter) shifts from the negative area (second state) to the difference number (virtual difference number counter) positive area (first state). If it is determined that the game value can be earned until A performance lottery is performed using numerical values, and if the performance lottery is won, a freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability of executing the freeze effect (second probability) in the negative area of the difference number (second state) is 1/20. The probability that the freeze effect will be executed is 1/6000 (=1/300×1/20). Note that the probability (second probability) of executing the freeze effect in the negative region (second state) of the difference in number of sheets may be 100%.

According to this example, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player It is possible to improve the player's motivation to continue playing the game. In addition, immediately after the morning game starts, if a certain effect appears, there is a possibility that the settings remain unchanged (it is possible to assume that the settings are staying in the second state because the settings have not been changed). Since the player can recognize this, it may be possible to make a certain effect function as a factor in setting change determination. In addition, if a certain effect appears after the AT ends, even though the AT ends and a certain amount of gaming value has been acquired, the player is still in the second state where he can still acquire the gaming value up to the first value. Since the possibility is suggested, it may be possible to increase the motivation to continue playing the game after the AT ends.

In addition, when a certain effect (in this example, a freeze effect) appears, a large amount of gaming value is generated until the transition from the second state (negative area of the number of difference sheets) to the first state (positive area of the number of difference sheets). Since it is suggested that there is a possibility that the player will be able to obtain the following, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, when a certain effect occurs, gaming value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state, so if the player has not acquired AT, etc., the gaming value is reduced as a difference in the number of sheets. It is possible to prevent the player from losing his desire to continue playing the game even when he is playing the game.

Also, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a two-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a three-bet bet game (3-BET game) is carried out in the ED state, By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter) which is not updated in the case of 1), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

In this example, the freeze effect (a certain effect) is configured to be executed based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter), but the freeze effect (a certain effect) is executed based on the value of the first counting means (the virtual difference number counter). ) may be configured to be executed based on.

FIG. 171(f) is a diagram showing an example of an ending confirmation effect (completion confirmed), which is one of certain effects.

The ending confirmation effect (completion confirmation) is one of the effects, and uses the liquid crystal display device 157 to display the character image of the bancho, the character images of the three pandas, and a display that is advantageous to the player. Profit is granted (in this example, the difference number reaches the first value (in this example, 2400) from the negative area (second state) of the difference number and the advantageous section (second section) ends A display (in this example, a display of three pandas appearing in a V-shape) suggesting that the game value can be acquired until the condition is met is displayed.

In addition, the ending confirmation effect in this example is one in which it is confirmed that the first counting counter reaches 2400 (point CT6 in FIG. 170), and the display of "1400 GET" in FIG. 171(f) changes to "4100 GET". ”(1700+2400), the ending confirmation effect continues.

In this example, in the gaming period PT4 (AT state), the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) from the negative region (second state) of the difference number and enters the advantageous section (second section). When it is determined that a game value can be acquired until the termination condition is satisfied, and when the performance lottery of the freeze performance is won, the ending confirmation performance is executed after the freeze performance is executed.

According to this example, when a certain effect (in this example, the ending confirmation effect (completion guaranteed)) appears, a large amount of game value is earned until the end condition of the advantageous section is met (until the advantageous section is reset). Since it is suggested that there is a possibility that the player will be able to obtain the following, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue playing the game. Moreover, in this example, since the ending confirmation effect (completion confirmed) appears after the freeze effect, the player's expectations can be immediately increased.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which the ending confirmation effect is executed after the execution of the freeze effect, but only the execution condition of the freeze effect is satisfied, and the execution condition of the ending confirmation effect (in this example, the negative area of the number of difference sheets) It is confirmed that it is possible to acquire gaming value from (second state) until the difference in the number of coins reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met ( If completion of the race is confirmed)), only the freeze effect may be performed.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6), the difference number of sheets reaches the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400, the first value), and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. Therefore, at the same timing, the section and production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the difference in the number of sheets is The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are determined at the end of the advantageous section (second section). As an initial setting when the condition is satisfied, each is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0).

Note that the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is not limited to the case where the difference in the number of sheets reaches 2400, but for example, a value larger than 2400, which is the maximum value at which completion is confirmed in the positive region of the difference in the number of sheets, For example, it may be 4000 or the like.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6), the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied), so the gaming period PT4 In the final game (AT state), an AT end effect is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 172(a) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect (ending effect).

The AT end performance (ending performance) is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 5104 GET" is displayed) This is an effect that includes displaying a character image of a bancho, and character images of three pandas. In addition, in the case of CT4 to CT6 in FIG. 170, the total number of acquired coins is displayed as "4100 GET".

<Example 1 of production based on the difference number counter/Game period PT5 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT5 in FIGS. 170 (6) and (7) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of sheets is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT5 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT1 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference has decreased from the number of sheets to the difference number CT7 (for example, -150, second point).

In addition, in the game period PT5 (normal state) in FIGS. 170 (6) and (7), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

Furthermore, in this example, during the gaming period PT5 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery was won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT6 (AT state)>
The gaming period PT7 in FIGS. 170 (7) to (8) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT7 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT7 (for example, -150). ) to the difference number CT8 (for example, 1000 at the first point).

Further, in this example, in the game period PT7 (AT state), the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state shifts to the normal state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT7 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT7 in FIGS. 170 (8) to (9) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of sheets is decreasing. state.

The gaming period PT7 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT8 (in this example, 1000. First point) The difference number CT9 (for example, 700 at the second point) decreases from

In addition, in the game period PT7 (normal state) of FIGS. 170 (8) to (9), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is the state (first state) in which the number of sheets is increased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets (the first state), and is in the positive region of the difference in the number of sheets.

Furthermore, in this example, during the gaming period PT7 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 1 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT8 (AT state)>
The game period PT8 in FIGS. 170 (9) and (10) is an AT state, and the difference number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT8 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT9 (for example, 700. Second point) The difference number of sheets increases from CT10 (for example, 2400 at the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

In addition, the gaming period PT4 (AT state) and the gaming period PT8 (AT state) are both gaming periods in which gaming values can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section (second section) are met. The difference number CT4 (-1700 in this example) at the start of PT4 (AT state) is in the negative region, whereas the difference number CT9 (in this example, 700) is in the plus area, so the number of increases in the number of differential coins in the gaming period PT8 (AT state) (in this example, 1400 (=2400-700) is the increase in the number of differential coins in the gaming period PT4 (AT state) (In this example, it is less than 4100 (=2400+1700).

In addition, in the game period PT8 (AT state) of FIGS. 170 (9) and (10), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is the state (first state) in which the number of sheets is increased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets (the first state), and is in the positive region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT8 (AT state), in addition to executing AT performance etc. corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 172(b) is a diagram showing an example of a no-freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The no-freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 is not executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the princess character image and the player's (In this example, the game value is earned until the difference number reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met. (In this example, a display of the character string "Hot!") is displayed to suggest that it is possible.

In this example, in a certain game during the game period PT8 (AT state), the game is played until the difference in the number of coins reaches the first value (2400 in this example) and the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. If it is determined that it is possible to acquire value, and a certain internal winning role (in this example, middle-tier cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery is performed using random numbers, and the player wins this performance lottery. Then, a no-freeze effect (a certain effect) is executed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability of executing the freeze-free effect (first probability) in the positive area of the difference number (first state) is 1/200. , the probability that the no-freeze effect will be executed is 1/60000 (=1/300×1/200). Note that the probability (first probability) of executing the no-freezing effect in the positive area (first state) of the difference in number of sheets may be zero.

According to this example, even for the same internal winning combination (middle-tier cherry), by making at least a portion of the freeze effect and non-freeze effect different, the player is made to guess whether it is in the first state or the second state. It is possible to improve the gameplay.

Furthermore, the combination of the effect (second effect) performed in the negative area of the difference number (second state) and the effect (first effect) performed in the positive area (first state) of the difference number is a freeze effect. For example, the second effect may be freeze + display effect A, the first effect may be display effect A without freeze, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A. , the first effect may be display effect B without freezing, the second effect may be freeze + display effect A, and the first effect may be no effect.

<Example 2 of production based on the difference number counter>
FIG. 173 is a graph showing an example of a change in the number of differential sheets in a certain game period, and FIGS. 174 and 175 are diagrams showing examples of various effects in a certain game period shown in FIG. 173.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/Power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 173 (11) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in the on state, and the settings are changed. ” is in the same state.

In order to avoid redundant explanations, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but at the same timing, the section and production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on. The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are initialized when the power is turned on. , each is set to an initial value CT11 (for example, 0).

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT11 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT1 in FIGS. 173 (11) and (12) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT11 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT11 (in this example, 0.First point) The number of sheets is decreased from the difference number CT12 (for example, -1500 at the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT11 (normal state) shown in FIGS. 173 (11) and (12), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT11 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (displaying a normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the effects.

The tutorial display is one type of effect, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a princess character image and the appearance of a freeze effect, which will be described later, is suggested using FIG. 174(f). A display (in this example, a display of the character string "If you pull the freeze, it's super hot") is displayed.

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT11 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT12 (AT state)>
The game period PT12 in FIGS. 173 (12) and (13) is an AT state, and a state in which the difference in the number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT12 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT12 (for example, -1500). ) to the difference number CT13 (for example, -950, first point).

In addition, in the game period PT2 (AT state) in FIGS. 173 (12) and (13), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT12 (AT state), in addition to executing an AT performance etc. corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing an example of AT performance.

The AT performance is a performance that suggests the AT state, and in this example, the number of acquired game media in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "255 GET" is displayed), and the character image of the bancho is displayed. This is an effect that includes a display of , and a display notifying that the AT state is present (in this example, a display of the character string "AT in progress").

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (13), the condition for ending the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state is shifted to the normal state, and , In the final game of the game period PT12 (AT state), an AT end effect is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 174(c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 550 GET" is displayed) and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

In addition, in this example, since the difference in number of sheets CT13 at the time when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied is in the negative region (-300 in this example), the difference in the number of sheets at the time when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied is in the plus region. In this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is not satisfied, and the section is not satisfied with the end condition of the advantageous section (second section). ), and the difference number of sheets is maintained without being initialized.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT13>
The game period PT13 shown in FIGS. 173 (13) and (14) is a normal state in which the number of difference sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT13 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT13 (in this example, -950). ) to the difference number CT14 (for example, -1700, second point).

In addition, in the game period PT13 (normal state) shown in FIGS. 173 (13) and (14), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT13 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform a normal effect (displaying a normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). There are cases where a certain effect appears (is executed) with a probability of .

Further, in this example, during the gaming period PT13 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so the normal state is transitioned to the AT state.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT14 (AT state)>
The game period PT14 in FIGS. 173 (14) to (16) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT14 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases. ) to the difference number CT16 (for example, 1077, the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

In addition, in the game period PT4 (AT state) shown in FIG. 173 (4) to (6), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets has decreased from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (5) to ( 6) The gaming period is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing from the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT14 (AT state), in addition to executing an AT performance etc. corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain Although there are cases where a performance appears (is executed), it does not appear in this example.

FIG. 174(d) is a diagram showing an example of AT performance.

The AT performance is a performance that suggests an AT state, and in this example, the number of acquired game media in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "255 GET" is displayed), and the character image of the bancho is displayed. This is an effect that includes a display of , and a display notifying that the AT state is present (in this example, a display of the character string "AT in progress").

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (16), the number of medals acquired in the AT state (=CT16-CT14) reaches a certain number (for example, 2000), and the advantageous section (second section) Since the end condition of , at the same timing, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is met, the section and performance state are the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively. The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to As an initial setting when the end condition for the second section) is satisfied, the respective initial values CT11 (for example, 0) are set.

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT14 (AT state), the end condition of the AT state was satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) was satisfied), so the gaming period PT14 (AT state) was satisfied. In the final game in the AT state), an AT end performance is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 173(e) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 2777 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes the display of character images.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT15 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT15 in FIGS. 173 (16) and (17) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT15 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT11 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference in number of sheets has decreased from CT17 (for example, -811 at the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT15 (normal state) shown in FIGS. 173 (16) and (17), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets, and is in the negative region of the difference in the number of sheets.

In addition, in this example, in the gaming period PT15 (normal state), the conditions for transition to the AT state were satisfied (in this example, the AT lottery was won), so at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (17), the normal state to the AT state.

<Production example 2 based on the difference number counter/gaming period PT16 (AT state)>
The game period PT16 in FIGS. 173 (17) to (19) is an AT state, and the difference number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT16 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference in number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins is CT17 (for example, -811).The second point ) to the difference number CT19 (for example, 2400 at the first point), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied.

In addition, in the game period PT17 (AT state) shown in FIG. 173 (17) to (19), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets, whereas in the second half (18) to ( 19) is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increasing than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and the difference is This is a positive area for the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT16 (AT state), in addition to using the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an AT effect corresponding to the current gaming state (AT state in this example), a certain There are cases where a performance appears (is executed).

FIG. 174(f) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect, which is one of certain effects.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the character image of the bancho and to provide an advantageous effect to the player. In this example, it is possible to obtain gaming value until the difference in the number of coins moves from the negative area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state). (In this example, a display of the character string "Breaking the limit!") is displayed.

In this example, during the gaming period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that it is possible to acquire gaming value until the difference in number of coins moves from the negative area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state). In addition, in a certain game during the game period PT16 (AT state), if a certain internal winning combination (in this example, middle-tier cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery using random numbers is performed, and this performance lottery is performed. If you win, a freeze effect (a certain effect) is performed.

In this example, the probability of internally winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability of executing the freeze effect (second probability) in the negative area of the difference number (second state) is 1/20. The probability that the freeze effect will be executed is 1/6000 (=1/300×1/20).

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the difference number of sheets reaches the difference number CT6 (for example, 2400, the first value), and the condition for ending the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied. Therefore, at the same timing, the section and production state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied, and the difference in the number of sheets is The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are determined at the end of the advantageous section (second section). As an initial setting when the condition is satisfied, each is set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0).

Furthermore, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous section (second section) is satisfied), so the gaming period PT16 In the final game (AT state), an AT end effect is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end effect.

The AT end performance is a performance that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, the character string "TOTAL 3211 GET" is displayed), and the bancho's number is displayed. This is a performance that includes displaying character images and displaying character images of three pandas.

Note that the AT end effect is not limited to this example, and may be an AT end effect as shown in FIG. 175(b), for example.

In addition to the display of the AT end effect shown in FIG. This is an effect that includes a display containing the character string "Section Reset!".

Furthermore, the effects executed when the end conditions of the advantageous section (second section) are satisfied are not limited to the AT end effects shown in FIGS. 174(e), 175(a), and (b), and include , it may be an AT end effect as shown in FIG. 175(c).

The AT end performance of this example is a performance that includes the display of a specific character image in addition to the display of the AT end performance shown in FIG. 174(e). This AT end effect is one of the effects that is more likely to appear in the negative area of the difference number than in the positive area of the difference number, and when the difference number of sheets is in the negative area at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met. may be executed.

In this example, the advantageous period (first The end condition of the second section) is difficult to satisfy, the section is maintained as an advantageous section (second section), and the difference number of sheets is maintained without being initialized. When the AT end effect including the display of the character image is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the advantageous section may not end, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, if the AT end effect that does not include the display of a specific character image is executed, as shown in FIG. Since the value is high, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing even if the advantageous period ends.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. ), a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect (for example, a tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), a specific character appearing as shown in FIG. 171(b) A production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, 3, speakers 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means is configured to calculate the value of the gaming value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out). ) is a means capable of counting the winning difference obtained by subtracting the value of the gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the value of the first counting means (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means is , 2400), the gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined gaming state") has ended, and the value of the first counting means has increased beyond a certain value. There is a state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), The game machine is characterized in that the certain effect is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 171 (e.g., freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), display effect (e.g., tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), A production means (e.g. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which no information is given and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and in the first section, When the transition conditions are met (for example, if a lottery is executed to transition to an advantageous zone based on the internally won winning combination and the lottery is won), the game transitions to the second zone, and the end condition is met in the second zone. When the number of coins is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded), the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means Means capable of counting the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value There is a state in which the value of the counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), and the certain performance is such that the value of the counting means is lower than the certain value. This game machine is characterized by the fact that it is more likely to appear.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a large amount of gaming value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (until the advantageous section is reset). Therefore, the player's motivation to continue playing can be improved. In addition, immediately after the morning game starts, if a certain effect appears, there is a possibility that the settings remain unchanged (it is possible to assume that the settings are staying in the second state because the settings have not been changed). Since the player can recognize this, it may be possible to make a certain effect function as a factor in setting change determination. In addition, if a certain effect appears after the AT ends, even though the AT ends and a certain amount of gaming value has been acquired, the player is still in the second state where he can still acquire the gaming value up to the first value. Since the possibility is suggested, it may be possible to increase the motivation to continue playing the game after the AT ends.

Furthermore, when the certain performance is executed in the second state, the gaming value may be obtainable until the transition from the second state to the first state. Furthermore, the certain performance may be a performance in which the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state occurs in connection with the appearance of the certain performance. .

With such a configuration, when a certain performance occurs, gaming value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state. It is possible to reduce the game value in terms of the number of coins, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the player's desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

Further, the predetermined gaming state is a state that is started after the appearance of the certain effect, and the predetermined gaming state is continued until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined gaming state ends. It may also be possible to realize a performance in which the game value can be acquired. In addition, the certain production is performed when, in connection with the appearance of the certain production, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value from the second state and the end condition is satisfied. It may be an effect in which the game value can be acquired until the game is played.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

Further, it is provided with an internally-winning role determining means (for example, an internally-winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internally-winning role; is a performance that may be executed when the internal winning combination is determined, and when the internal winning combination determination means determines the certain internal winning combination in the second state, the performance means executes the certain performance. The probability of winning is a second probability (for example, 1/6000), and when the internal winning combination determining means determines the certain internal winning combination in the first state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") ), the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the second probability is higher than the first probability. It may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the execution probability of a certain performance depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and if the player has not acquired AT etc. , even if the user is staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase expectations for staying in the second state.

Furthermore, in the first case, the performance means may be capable of performing a performance that differs in at least some aspects from the certain performance.

With such a configuration, even if the internal winning combination is the same, by varying at least part of the performance mode to be executed, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, and the game You can increase your sexuality.

In some cases, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) is provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated; The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means.

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. (for example, the freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), the display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), the specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), the existing A production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, a speaker shown in FIG. 3 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means calculates the value of the game value from the value of the game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) given as a result of the game. The means is capable of counting the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the value of the used gaming value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means is equal to the first value (for example, 2400). When the game state reaches a certain value, the gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming state") ends and the value of the first counting means increases more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming state"). (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"). The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined gaming state can be continued until the first state is reached in relation to the execution of the certain performance in the state.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 171 (e.g., freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), display effect (e.g., tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), A production means (e.g. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which no information is given and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and in the first section, When the transition conditions are met (for example, if a lottery is executed to transition to an advantageous zone based on the internally won winning combination and the lottery is won), the game transitions to the second zone, and the end condition is met in the second zone. When the number of coins is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded), the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means Means capable of counting the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and the state in which the value of the first counting means has increased by more than a certain value There is a state in which the value of the counting means is smaller than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and there is a state in which the certain effect is executed in the second state. When the player moves to a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), the gaming value can be acquired in the advantageous gaming state, and at least the first state is reached by the advantageous gaming state. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a large amount of gaming value can be acquired until reaching the first state due to an advantageous gaming state. It is possible to improve the player's motivation to continue playing the game.

Further, when the certain performance is executed in the second state and the predetermined gaming state is entered, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value. The gaming value may be obtainable until the predetermined gaming state ends.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

In addition, there is also a point where the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point"), and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "first point"). , referred to as a "second point."), and the second value is larger than the third value, and is greater than the probability that the presentation means will execute the certain presentation at the first point. The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the second point may be higher.

With this configuration, the player who is losing money (addicted to the game) has a higher appearance rate of a certain performance and the reward is large, so that the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved.

Further, it is provided with an internally-winning role determining means (for example, an internally-winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internally-winning role; This is a performance that may be executed when the internal winning combination determining means determines the certain internal winning combination in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (for example, 1/6000), and the internal winning combination determining means executes the certain internal winning combination in the first state. In the determined case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the production means executes the certain production is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the first probability The second probability may be higher than the second probability.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the execution probability of a certain performance depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and if the player has not acquired AT etc. , even if the user is staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase expectations for staying in the second state.

Further, in the first case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the first mode, and in the second case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode. The second aspect may be at least partially different.

With such a configuration, even if the internal winning combination is the same, by varying at least part of the performance mode to be executed, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, and the game You can increase your sexuality.

In some cases, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) is provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated; The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. (for example, the freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), the display effect (for example, tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), the specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), the existing A production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, a speaker shown in FIG. 3 272, 277, various lamps), and the first counting means calculates the value of the game value from the value of the game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) given as a result of the game. The means is capable of counting the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the value of the used gaming value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the first counting means is equal to the first value (for example, 2400). When the player reaches the point where the gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined gaming state") ends and the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first ) and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as the "second point"), and the second value is the third point. the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the second point is higher than the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance at the first point. It is a game machine that is characterized by certain things.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 171 (e.g., freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), display effect (e.g., tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), A production means (e.g. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which no information is given and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and in the first section, When the transition conditions are met (for example, if a lottery is executed to transition to an advantageous zone based on the internally won winning combination and the lottery is won), the game transitions to the second zone, and the end condition is met in the second zone. When the number of coins is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400 coins) is exceeded), the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means Means capable of counting the number of earned differences obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and the value of the first counting means is updated. The value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first point"), and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value, There is a point where the value of is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is the certain value from the third value. is greater than the value obtained by subtracting . This game machine is characterized by a high probability.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the appearance rate of a certain effect is higher for players who are losing money (those who are addicted to it), so even if the player is addicted to it, it is possible to maintain the desire to continue playing the game. There are cases.

Furthermore, a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value. There is a decreasing state (hereinafter referred to as a "second state"), the first point is a certain point in the first state, and the second point is a certain point in the second state. It may be a certain point in the state.

With such a configuration, a certain effect is more likely to appear when the difference in the number of sheets is negative, so even if the player is addicted to the game, he or she can maintain the desire to continue playing the game.

Further, when the predetermined gaming state is entered in connection with the execution of the certain performance, the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state. The game value may be obtainable until the game ends.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired.

Further, it is provided with an internally-winning role determining means (for example, an internally-winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internally-winning role; This is a performance that may be executed when the internal winning combination determining means determines the certain internal winning combination in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (for example, 1/6000), and the internal winning combination determining means executes the certain internal winning combination in the first state. In the determined case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the production means executes the certain production is a first probability (for example, 1/60000), and the first probability The second probability may be higher than the second probability.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the execution probability of a certain performance depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state, and if the player has not acquired AT etc. , even if the user is staying in the second state, it may be possible to increase expectations for staying in the second state.

Further, in the first case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the first mode, and in the second case, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode, and the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode. The second aspect may be at least partially different.

With such a configuration, even if the internal winning combination is the same, by varying at least part of the performance mode to be executed, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, and the game You can increase your sexuality.

In some cases, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) is provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated; The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine, the enclosed game machine, the medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter). The first counting means calculates the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) from the value of the game value given as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out). The means is capable of counting the number of winnings obtained by subtracting the number of medals (value of the number of inserted medals), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), an advantage is given to the player. A point where a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined gaming state") ends and the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as a "first point"); There is a point where the value of one counting means is a third value (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the second value is greater than the third value, and the second value is greater than the third value, and The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is more difficult to end at the second point than at the second point.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. The game machine is equipped with a second counting means (e.g., virtual difference number counter), and a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when the transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an internal winning If you execute a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on the winning combination and win this lottery), move to the second section, and if the ending conditions are met in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase number (For example, if the amount exceeds 2,400 pieces), the second section can be ended and the transition can be made to the first section, and the first counting means is configured to calculate the amount of gaming value given as a result of the game ( For example, the first counting means is a means capable of counting the winning difference obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) from the value of the number of medals paid out. When the value reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is satisfied, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated. In some cases, a point where the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as "first point") and a point where the value of the first counting means is a third value. (hereinafter referred to as "second point"), and the value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value, and the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value. The game machine is characterized in that the termination condition is more difficult to satisfy at the second point than at the first point.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the second point where there is a grace period up to the upper limit of the difference number of coins will have a greater benefit if the race is completed in the next AT, so it is difficult to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous section. This may make it possible to maintain the player's desire to continue playing the game after the AT ends.

Also, a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect (for example, a tutorial display, etc.) shown in FIG. 171(a), a specific character in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b)) A presentation means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 3 (speakers 272, 277, various lamps) shown in FIG. The game value may be obtainable until the value is reached and the predetermined game state ends.

With such a configuration, when a certain effect occurs, a lot of gaming value can be acquired until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met (until the advantageous section is reset), so the player can use AT, etc. It is possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins that have not been acquired, so that even if the player remains in the second state, the desire to continue playing the game is not impaired. Further, by keeping the execution probability of a certain performance at a relatively high state after the AT ends, it is possible to maintain the desire to continue the performance.

Furthermore, a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is greater than the certain value. There is a state (hereinafter referred to as a "second state") in which the number of players is decreasing, and the first point at the end of the predetermined gaming state is a certain point in the first state, The second point at the end of the predetermined gaming state may be a certain point in the second state.

With such a configuration, it is relatively easy for the advantageous section and the difference number of sheets to be reset at the first point at the end of AT, so if it is reset, it will be easier to enter the negative area and a certain effect will be more likely to occur. There is a tendency. Therefore, when resetting at the end of the AT, the appearance rate of freezes is increased and the player is placed in a state where it is easier to benefit from freezes, thereby increasing the motivation to continue playing the game. On the other hand, at the second point at the end of AT, the appearance rate of Freeze may be lower than at the start of AT, but in any case, the benefit is greater when Freeze is drawn than when it is reset. You can maintain your desire to continue playing.

Further, when the certain effect is executed, the value of the first counting means may always reach the first value.

Further, it is provided with an internally-winning role determining means (for example, an internally-winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internally-winning role, and the certain performance is executed when the internally-winning role determining means determines a certain internally-winning role. At the first point, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the first mode, and at the second point, the certain effect is likely to be executed in the second mode. , the first aspect and the second aspect may be at least partially different aspects.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to estimate whether the end condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied (whether the advantageous section will be reset or not) after the end of AT.

In some cases, a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter) is provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is also updated; The effect may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter).

With such a configuration, under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), (4) when a 2-bet bet (2-BET game) is made, or (5) when a 3-bet bet game is made in the ED state) By executing a certain effect based on the value of the second counting means that is not updated (when a 3 BET game is played), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be created. can be provided.

<Complete function and game value display>
Next, the complete function and game value display will be explained using FIGS. 176 to 182.

<Complete function>
The complete function means that the difference between the maximum number of differences obtained and the minimum value of the number of differences obtained (the maximum number of differences, so-called MY value, or the value of the MY counter) is the second value (in this example, 19000). This is a function that notifies the user of the completion limit (notification of reaching the upper limit of completion) and stops the game when the completion function is activated.

Note that if the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state ends immediately and the state shifts to the normal state. Furthermore, if the complete function is activated during the bonus game, the bonus game may be immediately ended and the normal state may be entered, or the normal state may be entered after the bonus game is completed. When the complete function is activated, it is possible to cancel the complete function by changing the settings, but it is not possible to cancel the complete function simply by turning the power off and on or performing a reset operation.

<Complete function/Complete upper limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 executes a notification (complete upper limit reached notification) suggesting execution of game stop when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (19000 in this example). There are cases.

FIG. 176(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of completion upper limit reaching notification.

The completion upper limit notification is a notification that suggests the execution of a gaming stop, and the complete upper limit reaching notification in this example is a display that suggests the execution of a gaming stop (in this example, the text "Cancelled. Game will be stopped") This notification includes a display prompting the user to pay for medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Please press the counting button"). In this example, the effect image display device 157 is used to notify the completion upper limit. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which notification is executed.

In this example, when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the complete upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b). Execute.

<Complete function/Complete function advance notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 determines that the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (in this example, 19000) before the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (in this example, 19000). 19000) may be notified (complete function advance notification).

FIG. 176(a) is a diagram showing an example of complete function advance notification.

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (19000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is the execution of the game stop. This is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance (in this example, a display of the character string "Discontinued after 500 copies left").

In this example, when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a certain value (18500 in this example) that is smaller than the second value, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the image shown in FIG. 176(a). Execute the complete function advance notification shown in .

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is near), it is possible to urge the player to make a payment in advance.

Note that the threshold value (second value) for starting the completion upper limit notification is not limited to 19000, and may be any other numerical value. Further, the threshold value for starting the complete function preliminary notification is not limited to 18500, but may be a numerical value smaller than the threshold value (second value) for executing the completion upper limit notification.

Furthermore, although we have shown an example in which the completion upper limit notification is executed when the "MY value" reaches the second value, the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) ), when the "obtained difference" obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals) reaches a second value, execute the completion upper limit notification. Good too.

Further, the completion upper limit reaching notification and the complete function advance notification are not limited to being executed in the positive area of the number of difference sheets, but may be performed in the negative area of the number of difference sheets.

<Game value display>
The slot machine 100 has a gaming value display means (medal display) that can display the difference in acquisition (the difference in medal acquisition) obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used in the game from the value of the game value given as a result of the game. It is equipped with a device (MD).

For example, when executing the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. When executing the completion upper limit notification shown in FIG. 176(b), the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the number of medals obtained (number display). In this example, the number "14000" is displayed.

<Medal display device/gaming value display upper limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 executes a notification (play value display upper limit reached notification) prompting the player to settle the medals when the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches a third value (16383 in this example).

FIG. 176(d) is a diagram illustrating an example of notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit.

The gaming value display upper limit reaching notification is a notification that prompts the settlement of medals, and the gaming value display upper limit reaching notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). This is a notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the text string "No more displays are possible") and a display prompting for medal settlement (in this example, the text string "Please press the counting button"). be.

In this example, when the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches the third value (16383 in this example), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to notify the player of reaching the gaming value display upper limit as shown in FIG. 176(d). Execute.

<Medal display device/advance notification of reaching upper limit of gaming value display>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 determines whether the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches the third value (16383 in this example) before the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches the third value (16383 in this example). In some cases, a notification indicating the possibility of the game being played (advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit) may be made.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram showing an example of advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit.

The advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that suggests the possibility that the number of medal acquisition differences will reach the third value (16383 in this example), and the advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached in this example is A display that suggests the possibility that the difference in the number of medals earned will reach the third value (16383 in this example) (in this example, the text string "Near the upper limit of counting") and a prompt to settle the medals This is a notification that includes a display (in this example, a display of the character string "Please press the counting button").

In this example, when the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches a certain value (15369 in this example) that is smaller than the third value, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the information as shown in FIG. 176(c). Execute advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit.

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the playing value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the playing value display means is near), the game It is possible to encourage people to pay in advance.

Note that the threshold value (third value) for starting the notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached is not limited to 16383, and may be any other numerical value. Further, the threshold value for starting the advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is not limited to 15369, but may be a numerical value smaller than the threshold (third value) for executing the notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached.

Further, the notification of reaching the upper limit of gaming value display and the prior notification of reaching the upper limit of gaming value display are not limited to the case where the difference is in the positive area of the number of coins, but may be executed in the negative area of the difference in the number of coins. In addition, it is possible to add (rent) the amount of gaming value earned on other gaming machines to the gaming machine where you play the game, so if you add (rent) the amount of gaming value you have acquired on the gaming machine to the gaming machine where you play the game. In some cases, the number of medal acquisition differences reaches a third value (in this example, 16383) before the MY value (maximum acquisition difference number) reaches the second value (in this example, 19000). be.

Further, the completion upper limit reaching notification and the gaming value display upper limit reaching notification are not limited to this example. For example, when the MY value (maximum gain difference) reaches the second value (19000 in this example), and When the difference in the number of medals obtained reaches the third value (16383 in this example), the both-function upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(d) may be executed.

In this example, the notification that the upper limit of both functions has been reached is a display that suggests the execution of a game stop (in this example, a display of the character string "Stopped, the game will be stopped"), and a third value that indicates the difference in the number of medals earned. A display suggesting that the number has been reached (in this example, the text string ``No more can be displayed'') and a display prompting you to settle the medals (in this example, the text string ``Please press the counting button'') ).

<Specific example 1 of complete function and gaming value display>
Next, specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using FIGS. 177 to 180.

FIG. 177 is a graph showing an example of the change in the number of differential sheets in a certain gaming period, and FIGS. 178 to 180 are diagrams showing examples of various performances and various notifications in a certain gaming period shown in FIG. be.

<Specific example of complete function and game value display 1/Power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 177(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in an on state, and the settings are changed.

At the same timing, the section and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous section (first section) and the normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the difference number counter (the first section) that counts the difference number of sheets (obtained difference number) is set. The value of the first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) described above are each set to an initial value CT21 (for example, 0) as an initial setting when the power is turned on.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT21 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT21 in FIGS. 177 (1) and (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) or the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and the difference in the number of coins is decreasing. state.

In this example, in a certain game of the normal game in the non-advantageous section (first section), the conditions for transition to the advantageous section (second section) were met (in this example, the transition lottery was won). , the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is transitioning to the normal state of the advantageous section (second section).

The gaming period PT21 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT21 (in this example, 0.First point) The difference number CT22 (for example, -1500, second point) decreases from the number CT22.

In addition, in the game period PT21 (normal state) in FIGS. 177(1) and (2), all the game periods are such that the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (in this example, 0. This is a state (second state) in which the number of sheets is decreased compared to the value of the difference in number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT21 (normal state), as shown in FIG. 178(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display normal effects (such as normal background display) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). ), and also uses the gaming value display means (medal display device MD) to display the number of medals obtained (in this example, the number "00050" corresponding to 50 medals lent) is displayed. indicate.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT22 (AT state)>
The game period PT22 shown in FIGS. 177(2) and 177(3) is an AT state, and is a state in which the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT22 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT22 (for example, 31. Second point) The difference number CT23 (for example, 7033, the first point) increases from

Furthermore, the gaming period PT22 (AT state) in FIGS. 177(2) to (3) is the gaming period from when the difference number of coins reaches CT22 (-1500 in this example) to CT21 (0 in this example). , is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value), and is in the negative region of the difference number. On the other hand, during the gaming period from when the difference number reaches CT21 (in this example, 0) to CT23 (in this example, 7033), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value ( In this example, it is a state (first state) in which the number of sheets is increased from 0 (a certain value), and is in a positive region of the difference in the number of sheets.

During the gaming period PT22 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 is is used to display the character image of the bancho and to give an advantageous profit to the player (in this example, from the negative area of the difference number (second state) to the positive area of the difference number (first state) A display (in this example, a display of a character string "Breaking the limit!") indicating that the game value can be acquired until the game moves to the limit is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 178(c), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "00031" indicating that there are 31 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and the gaming period PT22 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(d), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 7002), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "07033" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 7033 is displayed.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT23 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT23 in FIGS. 177(3) and 177(4) is the normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of difference sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT23 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases. The number of sheets has decreased to CT24 (for example, 6832, second point).

During the gaming period PT23 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT24 (AT state)>
The game period PT24 shown in FIGS. 177(4) and 177(5) is an AT state, and is a state in which the number of difference sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT24 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT24 (for example, 6832. Second point) to the difference number CT25 (for example, 8882, the first point).

During the gaming period PT24 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), the current gaming state (in this example, AT AT performance etc. corresponding to the state) is executed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 178(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "06832" indicating that there are 6832 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT24 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT24 In the final game (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(f), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 2050 (displaying the number and character string "2050 GET"), and using the gaming value display means (medal display device MD) to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example , the number "08882" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 8882 is displayed.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT25 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT25 shown in FIGS. 177(5) and 177(6) is a normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of difference sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT25 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases. The number of sheets has decreased to CT26 (for example, 7365 at the second point).

During the gaming period PT25 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) to 177(7) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT26 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT26 (for example, 7365. Second point) The number of different sheets increases from CT27 (for example, 15706, the first point).

During the gaming period PT26 (AT state), in addition to the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 in the first game of the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 is is used to display the character image of the bancho and to give an advantageous profit to the player (in this example, from the negative area of the difference number (second state) to the positive area of the difference number (first state) A display (in this example, a display of a character string "Breaking the limit!") indicating that the game value can be acquired until the game moves to the limit is displayed.

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 179(b), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "07365" indicating that there are 7365 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT26 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(c), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "15706" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 15706 is displayed.

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT27 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT27 in FIGS. 177 (7) to (8) is a normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT27 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases. The number of sheets has decreased to CT28 (for example, 15128 at the second point).

During the gaming period PT27 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Specific example of complete function and gaming value display 1/Game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in FIGS. 177(8) to 177(9) is an AT state, and a state in which the difference number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT28 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT28 (for example, 15128. Second point) The number of difference sheets increases from CT30 (for example, 19,000 at the first point).

During the gaming period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the gaming period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(d), the current gaming state (in this example, AT AT performance etc. corresponding to the state) is executed.

In addition, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 179(d), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "15128" indicating that there are 15128 sheets is displayed.

In addition, in this example, in the game before the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the number of medal acquisition differences is smaller than the third value (16383 in this example). Since a certain value (in this example, 16369) has been reached, advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 179(e).

The advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that suggests the possibility that the number of medal acquisition differences will reach the third value (16383 in this example), and the advance notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached in this example is A display that suggests the possibility that the difference in the number of medals earned will reach the third value (16383 in this example) (in this example, the text string "Near the upper limit of counting") and a prompt to settle the medals This is a notification that includes a display (in this example, a display of the character string "Please press the counting button").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the playing value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the playing value display means is near), the game It is possible to encourage people to pay in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals obtained has reached the third value (16383 in this example). Using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 179(f), notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is executed.

The gaming value display upper limit reaching notification is a notification that prompts the settlement of medals, and the gaming value display upper limit reaching notification in this example indicates that the number of medal acquisition differences has reached a third value (16383 in this example). A notification that includes a suggestive display (in this example, the string ``No more displays are possible'') and a display prompting the user to pay for medals (in this example, the string ``please press the counting button'') be.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game after the timing shown in FIG. 177(9) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the settlement button 134 (counting button) is pressed and the medals are settled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 179(f), the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (in this example, the medal acquisition difference is The number "10,000" indicating that there are 10,000 sheets is displayed.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game before the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the second value (19000 in this example). Since a certain value (in this example, 18500) smaller than the above value has been reached, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 180(b) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (19000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is the execution of the game stop. This is a notice that includes a display that suggests in advance (in this example, a display of a character string "Discontinued after 500 copies left").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is near), it is possible to urge the player to make a payment in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the gaming period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example). Therefore, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 180(c) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The completion upper limit notification is a notification that suggests the execution of a gaming stop, and the complete upper limit reaching notification in this example is a display that suggests the execution of a gaming stop (in this example, the text "Cancelled. Game will be stopped") This notification includes a display prompting the user to pay for medals (in this example, a display of a character string "Please press the counting button").

<Specific example 2 of complete function and gaming value display>
Next, specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using FIG. 177 and FIGS. 181 to 182.

181 and 182 are diagrams showing modified examples of various performances and various notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177.

In the first specific example explained using FIGS. 177 to 179, an example was shown in which the complete upper limit reached notification is executed after the gaming value display upper limit reached notification is executed, but in the second specific example, the complete upper limit reached notification is executed. The difference is that after that, notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit is executed. It should be noted that various performances and various notifications during the game periods PT21 to PT25 are the same in specific examples 1 and 2, so their explanations will be omitted.

<Specific example 2 of complete function and gaming value display/gaming section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in FIGS. 177(6) to 177(7) is an AT state, and the difference in the number of coins is increasing.

The gaming period PT26 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT26 (for example, 7365. Second point) The number of different sheets increases from CT27 (for example, 15706, the first point).

In the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum number of differences) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum number of differences) At the same time, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is displayed. ''), and also displays the current difference in the number of medals obtained using the gaming value display means (medal display device MD) (in this example, the difference in the number of medals obtained is 7365 pieces). The number "07365" is displayed.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game after the timing shown in FIG. 177 (6) during the game period PT26 (AT state), the settlement button 134 (counting button) is pressed, and the medal settlement (main) is performed. In the example, since a payment of 5,000 coins has been made, as shown in FIGS. 181(b) to (c), the difference in medals obtained before payment is displayed using the gaming value display means (medal display device MD). After displaying the number (in this example, the number "10165" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 10165), the display showing the difference in the number of medals obtained after settlement (in this example, the number 10165) is displayed. , the number "05165" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 05165 is displayed.

In addition, in the gaming period PT26 (AT state), if the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state shifts to the normal state, and the gaming period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 181(d), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference number). ) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current medal acquisition difference (this example). , the number "10706" indicating that the difference in the number of medals obtained is 10706 is displayed.

<Specific example 3 of complete function and game value display/Game section PT27 (normal state)>
The gaming period PT27 in FIGS. 177 (7) to (8) is a normal state of the advantageous section (second section), and is a state in which the number of differential sheets is decreasing.

The gaming period PT27 (normal state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) decreases. The number of sheets has decreased to CT28 (for example, 10128 at the second point).

During the gaming period PT27 (normal state), although not shown, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform normal effects (display of normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state in this example). At the same time, a display indicating the difference in the number of medals obtained is displayed using the game value display means (medal display device MD).

<Specific example 2 of complete function and gaming value display/gaming section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in FIGS. 177(8) to 177(19) is an AT state and a state where the difference number of sheets is increasing.

The gaming period PT28 (AT state) is a gaming state in which the difference number of coins (=number of payouts - number of bets) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference number of coins is the difference number CT28 (for example, 10128. Second point) to CT30 (for example, 14,000 at the first point).

During the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the current game state (in this example, AT AT performance etc. corresponding to the state) is executed.

In addition, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (in this example, 0), and the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 181(e), a display indicating the current MY value (maximum number of differences) (in this example, indicating that the MY value (maximum number of differences) is 0) is started. At the same time, the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current number of medals obtained (in this example, the number of medals obtained is The number "10128" indicating that there are 10128 sheets is displayed.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game before the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the second value (19000 in this example). Since a certain value (in this example, 18500) smaller than that has been reached, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 181(f) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The complete function advance notification is a notification that suggests the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (19000 in this example), and the complete function advance notification in this example is the execution of the game stop. This is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance (in this example, a display of the character string "Discontinued after 500 copies left").

According to this example, by notifying in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is near), it is possible to urge the player to make a payment in advance.

Subsequently, in this example, in the game at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10) during the gaming period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19000 in this example). Therefore, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 182(a) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The completion upper limit notification is a notification that suggests the execution of a gaming stop, and the complete upper limit reaching notification in this example is a display that suggests the execution of a gaming stop (in this example, the text "Cancelled. Game will be stopped") column display), a display prompting you to settle the medals (in this example, the text string "Please press the counting button"), and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the MY This notification includes the number and character string "3872GET" indicating that the value (maximum difference number) is 3872.

According to this example, before reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the game value display means, a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop may be executed, so that the game value The game can be progressed without giving the player the trouble of reaching the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of acquired differences by the display means, and the player's desire to play can be maintained. can.

In addition, if the maximum difference number reaches the second value (reaches the upper limit of the complete function) after reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the gaming value display means, You will be prompted to pay twice, but if the maximum difference reaches the second value first (the upper limit of the complete function is reached), you will only be prompted to pay once, which will be inconvenient for the player. There are times when you can enjoy the game without thinking about it.

Further, at the time when the player completes settlement of at least a part of the earned difference number (in this example, a certain game in the game period shown in FIG. 177 (6)), the second value (in this example, 19000) If the value obtained by subtracting the number of obtained differences from the third value (in this example, 16383) is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum number of differences from In some cases, the maximum difference number reaches the second value, so if the player frequently settles (counts) the gaming value, the gaming value can reach the second value (the upper limit of the complete function). The number of gaming values up to the upper limit (third value) displayed by the gaming value display means can be larger than the number of gaming values, so when a large amount of gaming value is acquired, settlement ( In some cases, counting) can be completed in one go.

Note that the manner of notification of completion upper limit reaching is not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. 182(b), even when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value, It is not necessary to display a display indicating the current MY value (maximum difference number).

Furthermore, in this example, during the game period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals earned has not reached a certain value (15369 in this example) that is smaller than the third value (16383 in this example). Therefore, unlike the first specific example, advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit and notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit are not performed.

<Example of movement of movable body in response to completion upper limit notification and complete function advance notification>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body accompanying the complete upper limit reaching notification and the complete function advance notification will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

In FIG. 176 and the like, a configuration has been described in which completion upper limit reaching notification and complete function advance notification are provided regarding the operation of the complete function. Here, in the case of a configuration in which a movable body that can move in front of the effect image display device 157 is provided, the above-mentioned notification may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of the movable body. In FIG. 183(a), when these notifications are not being executed, the contents of the effect image display device 157 are difficult to visually recognize due to the execution of an effect in which the shutter 163, which is a movable body, is in a closed state. It is shown.

In view of the above problems, when these notifications are being executed, it is recommended that the movable object be placed in a position that does not block the display area of the effect image display device 157 so that the notification contents will not become invisible. You may also do so. In this example, detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are provided for each of the right shutter 163a and left shutter 163b constituting the shutter 163, and sensors 1632a and 1632b for detecting the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are further provided. There is. Then, by moving the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b to positions where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect them, the shutter 163 becomes open and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is not blocked. Note that the positions where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are the initial positions of the shutter 163. FIG. 183(b) shows that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) during execution of complete function advance notification. Further, FIG. 183(c) shows that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) while the complete upper limit reaching notification is being executed.

The shutter 163 of this example is configured such that the initial position is the position where the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, and positional information from there is derived based on drive information. In this configuration, if the shutter 163 is moved by an external force, there will be a discrepancy between the position information grasped by the control unit and the actual position, so the position correction is performed to return the shutter 163 to its initial position. A configuration that performs operations may be adopted. For example, when the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b (open state), the shutter 163 is moved once to a position where the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are not detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, and then again. An example is an operation of moving to the initial position (hereinafter referred to as position correction 1). In addition, when the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are not detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, the shutter 163 is moved to the position where the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b (hereinafter referred to as position correction 2). ). Note that after position correction 2, position correction 1 may be executed again. By completing these series of operations, it can be determined that there is no abnormality in the drive system and sensor of the shutter 163, and the position information can be made correct while moving the shutter 163 to its initial position. Note that the timing for performing the position correction is not particularly limited, and for example, in addition to opening and closing the front door 102, which will be described below, and turning on the power, the timing when the shutter 163 in the initial position is shifted and the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are It may also be the timing when the sensors 1632a and 1632b no longer detect it.

Here, if a complete upper limit reaching notification or a complete function advance notification is executed when performing the position correction 1, the above notification may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of the shutter 163. Therefore, when performing position correction 1, the shutter 163 may be operated within a range of positions that do not block the display area of the effect image display device 157 as much as possible.

FIGS. 184(a) to 184(c) show an example in which position correction 1 is performed during execution of complete function advance notification. First, in FIG. 184(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) during execution of complete function advance notification, and the front door 102 is opened from there. At this time, since the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to vibration, the position correction is executed when the front door 102 is closed. FIG. 184(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the shutter 163 is moved so that the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are not detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is not blocked as much as possible. There is. FIG. 184(c) shows that position correction 1 has been completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. Note that the same operation will occur even if the complete upper limit reaching notification is not the complete function advance notification.

FIGS. 185(a) to 185(c) show an example in which position correction 1 is performed during execution of complete upper limit reaching notification. First, in FIG. 185(a), it is assumed that the shutter 163 is in the open state (initial position) during execution of the complete upper limit reaching notification, and then a power outage recovery occurs (the setting key is in the OFF state). Before the power is turned on, there is a possibility that the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to maintenance work or the like, so the position correction is executed when the power is turned on. FIG. 185(b) shows the situation when position correction 1 is executed because the shutter 163 is at the initial position. This figure shows that the shutter 163 is moved so that the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are not detected by the sensors 1632a and 1632b, and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is not blocked as much as possible. There is. FIG. 185(c) shows that position correction 1 has been completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. In addition, as in the example above, even if the power is restored after a power outage while the completion upper limit reaching notification is being executed, the complete function is not canceled, but in the case of advance notification of the complete function, when the power is restored after a power outage, the MY counter is cleared. Complete function advance notification will not be executed due to this. In this case, position correction 1 will be executed on the normal screen, but since complete function advance notification has not been executed, for example, even if position correction 1, which temporarily closes the shutter 163, is executed, good.

Note that the examples in FIGS. 184 and 185 are when position correction 1 is executed, and when position correction 2 is executed (in a state where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b), the shutter 163 is The action is to move to the initial position. The position correction during execution of these completion upper limit notification or complete function advance notification is such that the amount of movement is smaller than the maximum amount of movement of the shutter 163 during normal gaming. Furthermore, the examples shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 are examples in which position correction 1 is executed while completion upper limit reaching notification or complete function advance notification is being executed, and position correction 1 when these notifications are not being executed. The operation is not limited to the above-mentioned operation, but may be such that, for example, the shutter 163 is once closed and then opened.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which various notifications during the game are executed using the effect image display device 157, shutter 163, etc., the above-mentioned complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in duplicate. In this case, during the completion function advance notification, among the various notification operations, the shutter 163 may be restricted from operating while remaining at the initial position, or while the complete function advance notification is being executed, the various notification operations may be restricted to normal operation. It may be configured such that the values are different. In addition, during the execution of complete function advance notification, after the shutter 163 of various notification operations is restricted from operating while remaining stopped at the initial position, the value of the MY counter moves away from the upper limit, and the execution condition of complete function advance notification is changed. If the value is not satisfied, the restriction of the shutter 163 may be canceled and various notifications may be executed.

<Main control unit processing related to complete function>
Next, an example of the processing of the main control unit regarding the complete function will be described using FIGS. 186 to 188. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 186. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 186 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 187.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

In step S119, complete function activation processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 188.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

Next, details of the main control section initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process of FIG. 186 will be explained using FIG. 187. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281, which is located inside the slot machine 100 and cannot be operated by the player, is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1006.

In step S1006, it is determined whether the complete function is in operation. If the complete function is in operation, the process advances to step S1011; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 (RAM clear switch) is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized (RAM cleared), and this main control unit initialization process is ended. Note that the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process (for example, RAM cleared, reset, (display and audio output) are executed.

In step S1011, RAM (or RWM, RAM) data write back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or due to a momentary power outage (temporary voltage drop below the operating voltage). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both judgments are normal, the recovery data in the RAM 308 is It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the state shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch or setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch 281 is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that the complete function activation flag is set to OFF by the RAM clear process (or RAM clear process, RWM clear process, RWM initialization process) executed in this process.

Next, details of the complete function activation process (step S119) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 186 will be described using FIG. 188. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1701 that is executed first, the complete function activation flag is referred to. This complete function activation flag is turned on when the difference between the maximum number of differences obtained and the minimum number of differences obtained (maximum number of differences, so-called MY value) reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example). Set. For example, if a big bonus (accessory item) is installed, the complete function activation flag may not be referenced while this big bonus is activated, or when a predetermined value is reached and the big bonus is not activated. It may be set to on in some cases.

In step S1703, it is determined whether the complete function activation flag is on, and if the complete function activation flag is on, the process advances to step S1705, and if the flag is off, this complete function activation process is ended. .

In step S1705, completion function activation notification is executed. Specifically, various notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) are used to send notifications indicating that the game has been stopped (stopped state). Processing (including sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400) is executed using the sub-control unit 400.

In step S1707, a process for transmitting a security command including information on the complete function activation flag to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms is executed, and thereafter the process shifts to an infinite loop state.

After step S1707, no new processing is executed and the game cannot proceed. On the other hand, in addition to sending the security command set in step S1707, the main control unit 300 transmits the security command set in step S1707 by main control unit timer interrupt processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Detection processing (for example, disconnection detection), error notification processing, error release switch reception processing, and error release processing are executed. Note that if the security command includes information indicating that the complete function activation flag is on, the completion upper limit notification is executed. Further, if an error is detected, notification regarding the error is executed. In this case, in the effect image display device 157, the error notification may be performed in an area that does not interfere with the complete upper limit reaching notification, or the complete upper limit reaching notification may be executed in addition to the error notification.

Hereinafter, the operation when the complete function is activated will be explained based on the flowchart explained above.

The complete function is a function that sets the slot machine 100 to a discontinued state when the above-mentioned number of acquisition differences reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) based on the time when the number of acquisition differences is the lowest. It is. In this embodiment, this function is activated by setting the complete function activation flag to ON when this condition is satisfied. Specifically, if the complete function activation flag is set to on at the end of the game, a notification indicating a discontinued state is executed in the complete function activation process (step S119 in FIG. 186), and the game is stopped. (Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 187, and then an infinite loop is entered). Note that while this complete function is in operation, processing based on the operation of the count button 171, lending button 707, and medal count clear switch 172 inside the game machine can be executed, but processing based on other operation means can also be executed. (For example, displaying various information (such as a two-dimensional code according to the progress of the game) using menu operation buttons) may be adopted. Additionally, the process of determining whether or not a setting key switch operation to confirm settings, a bet operation, a lever operation, a payment operation, and various performance settings (volume settings using the volume adjustment switch, etc.) have been performed will not be executed. Various processes based on some operations, such as , may not be executed while the complete function is in operation. That is, while the complete function is in operation, there may be processes that can be executed by an operation, and there may also be processes that are not executed even if an operation is performed.

When the complete function is not operating (including during advance notification of the complete function), the RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) process can be executed by turning the power back on while holding down the reset switch 291. (Step S1009 in FIG. 187). Further, for example, by opening the front door 102 and turning on the setting key, it is possible to shift to the setting value confirmation mode. However, once the complete function activation flag is set to ON, if the power is turned on again while holding down the reset switch 291, the MY value is cleared, but the complete function activation flag is not cleared. When the complete function activation flag is on, even if the power is turned on again while holding down the reset switch 291, the operation will be stopped again and the complete function operation state will not be resolved (Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187). Furthermore, while the complete function is in operation, even if the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are powered on again, the security command containing the information for which the complete function activation flag is set to ON will not be sent to the main control unit 300. Complete upper limit reaching notification will be executed as long as the notification is sent from . On the other hand, when a setting change operation is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 218 turned on), the setting change process (transition to setting change mode) is executed, the complete function activation flag is set to OFF, and the aborted state is canceled. be done.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine, the enclosed game machine, the medalless slot machine) includes a counting means (for example, a difference number counter), Notification means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps) and the amount of gaming value (e.g., game medals, game balls, virtual credits, virtual medals) can be displayed. a gaming value display means (for example, a medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181), and the counting means calculates the amount of the gaming value used for the game based on the amount of the gaming value given as a result of the game. means that can count the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value (for example, the value of the number of inserted medals), and when the value of the counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400); , a gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming state") has ended, and the notification means determines the difference between the maximum value of the number of earned differences and the minimum value of the number of earned differences (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming state"). When the "maximum difference number" (for example, MY value) reaches a second value (for example, 19000), a notification indicating the execution of a game stop (for example, the complete upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b) ), and the game value display means is a means capable of displaying the number of earned differences up to a third value (for example, 16383), and the number of earned differences reaches the third value. The game machine is characterized in that there is a case in which the maximum difference number reaches the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. , the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps shown in FIG. means (for example, medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181), and a first section (for example, , a non-advantageous section) and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an internal If a lottery is executed to move to an advantageous section based on the winning combination, and if the lottery is won, the lottery will proceed to the second section, and if the end conditions are met in the second section (for example, a predetermined net increase If the number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins) is exceeded, the second section can be completed and the transition can be made to the first section, and the counting means calculates the game value from the amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the game. means capable of counting the number of earned points obtained by subtracting the amount of the gaming value used for the game (e.g., the value of the number of inserted medals), and the value of the counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400). In this case, the termination condition is satisfied, and the notification means determines that the difference between the maximum value of the number of acquired differences and the minimum value of the number of acquired differences (hereinafter referred to as "maximum number of differences"; for example, MY value) is When the second value (for example, 19000) is reached, a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop (for example, the completion upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b)) may be executed, and the gaming value display means is means capable of displaying the number of acquired differences up to a third value (for example, 16383), and before the number of acquired differences reaches the third value, the maximum difference number reaches the second value. This gaming machine is characterized in that there is a case in which the first case is reached (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, a notification suggesting that the game should be stopped may be executed before the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means is reached. Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving the player the trouble of reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means, and the player's motivation to play can be increased. can be sustained.

Further, when the value of the counting means reaches the first value, the value of the counting means is set to an initial value (for example, 0) in connection with the end of the predetermined gaming state, and the maximum difference When the number reaches the second value, the game is stopped, and the notification means causes the game value to be settled (for example, paid out using a settlement button, credit is returned to one's own card, chips, etc.). etc.) The notification means executes a notification (for example, the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176(a)) to encourage players to play, and when the number of earned differences reaches the third value, the notification means It may also be possible to issue a notification prompting payment (for example, a notification that the gaming value display upper limit has been reached as shown in FIG. 176(d)).

If the maximum difference number reaches the second value (reaches the upper limit of the complete function) after reaching the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the number of earned differences by the gaming value display means, payment will be made. You will be prompted twice, but if the maximum difference number reaches the second value first (reaching the upper limit of the complete function), you will only be prompted to pay once, which may be annoying to players. There are cases where you can enjoy the game without any problems.

Further, at the time when the player completes settlement of at least a portion of the earned difference number, the earned difference number is subtracted from the third value by less than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference number from the second value. If the above value is larger, the first case may occur.

With such a configuration, if the player frequently settles (counts) the gaming value, the number of gaming values up to the second value (upper limit of the complete function) will be higher than the number of gaming values displayed by the gaming value display means. Since the number of gaming values up to the upper limit (third value) of the display of the number of acquired differences can be increased, settlement (counting) can be done only once when a large amount of gaming value has been acquired. There are cases.

In addition, the notification means may provide notification indicating the possibility that the maximum difference number will reach the second value before the maximum difference number reaches the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 176(a) Complete function advance notification shown in Figure 1) may be executed.

With such a configuration, by notifying in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is near), it is possible to urge the player to make a payment in advance.

In addition, the notification means may provide a notification (for example, as shown in FIG. (Advance notification of reaching the gaming value display upper limit) may be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the gaming value display means will be reached (that the display upper limit of the gaming value display means is near). , players can be prompted to pay in advance.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a movable body (for example, shutter 163);
A game machine comprising:
The game is stopped based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000) (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
The movable body may move to an initial position based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, FIG. 183(c));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to make the user understand that the game is in a stopped state by the movement of the movable body.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the game stop state, the movable body may perform a predetermined operation including an operation of temporarily moving away from the initial position (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the game machine, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and the player can recognize that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a detection means for detecting a detection piece of the movable body,
The predetermined operation is an operation in which the detection piece moves away from the detection means and then moves toward the detection means (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the game machine, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and the player can recognize that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A door body (for example, a front door 102) is provided,
The movable body is provided on the door body (for example, FIG. 184),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if the movable body moves due to vibrations when the door is opened and closed, the movable body can be moved to the initial position and it can be recognized that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means includes a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157),
The display means is a means capable of executing the first notification using a display,
The movable body does not overlap the display area of the first notification on the display means when the predetermined operation is executed from the initial position (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the movable body and the first notification do not overlap, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the power is cut off in the game stopped state and then the power is restored, the game stopped state is maintained,
The predetermined operation is executed when the power is restored (for example, FIG. 185);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, even when the power is turned on, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
The movable body may move to the initial position based on the count value reaching the second value (for example, FIG. 183(b));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to recognize that the game is about to be stopped by the movement of the movable body.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification (for example, various notifications) during the operation of the movable body,
The notification means is a means that can execute the third notification while the second notification is being executed and the movable body is located at the initial position (for example, when the (Refer to the statement, "Notifications and various notifications may be executed in duplicate.")
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to let the player know that the game is about to stop by the third notification that does not involve the movement of the movable body.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the movable body, after the count value reaches the second value, the count value reaches a third value closer to the initial value than the second value, and the third notification is executed. (For example, if the value does not satisfy the execution conditions of the complete function advance notification, the shutter 163 is restricted. (Refer to the statement "You may cancel the notification and perform various notifications.")
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to make the user aware of the fact that the game is no longer in a stopped state through the movement of the movable body and the third notification.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a first operating means (e.g. a reset button);
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on with the first operation means being operated, a first process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed;
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the first operation means being operated, the first process is not executed (for example, if Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is executed) ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the fact that the first process is not executed allows the player to understand that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a RAM clear switch,
The first process is a RAM clear process,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, by not executing RAM clearing, it is possible to prevent the gaming stop state from being canceled by an operation other than the administrator.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stopped state and the power is turned on while the first operation means is being operated, the notifying means will issue a second notification (for example, a display or audio output of "Reset has been made"). is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the first operating means being operated, the second notification is not executed (for example, if Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187 and step S1009 is executed) ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the second notification is not executed, so that the player can know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operating means (for example, a setting key switch) that cannot be operated by the player is provided,
When the power is cut off in the non-game stop state and the power is turned on with the second operation means being operated, a second process (for example, step S1013 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the second operation means being operated, the second process is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine accepts the second operation by the game clerk even when the game is in a stopped state, so that the maintainability of the game machine can be improved.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the third notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
If the power is cut off while the third notification is being executed and the power is turned on with the first operation means being operated, the first process is executed (for example, if No in step S1006 in FIG. 187 , Yes in step S1007, step S1009 is executed),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the third notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
a first operating means (e.g., setting key, volume adjustment switch);
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the first operation means is operated in the non-gaming stopped state, a first process (for example, display of setting values by operating a setting key switch (setting value confirmation mode), various performance settings, etc.) is executed,
If the first operating means is operated in the game stop state, the first process is not executed (for example, ``various processes based on some operations are not executed while the complete function is activated''). ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process is not executed, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a display means (for example, a setpoint display device);
The first process is a process of performing a first display on the display means,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first display is not executed, it is possible to ensure that the game is stopped.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with second operation means (for example, counting button 171, lending button 707, menu operation button) that can be operated by the player,
When the second operation means is operated in the non-gaming stopped state, a second process (for example, counting process, etc.) is executed,
When the second operation means is operated in the game stop state, the second process (for example, see the description that "while the complete function is in operation, there may be a process that can be executed by operation") is executed,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine accepts a second operation by the player even when the game is stopped, so it may be possible to deal with the problem without calling a store clerk.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second display means (for example, a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
The second display means is a means for performing a second display (for example, a display by operating the count button 171 or the lending button 707) when the second operation means is operated in the game stop state. ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, during the first notification, it is possible to execute the second display while executing the first notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
If the first operating means is operated during execution of the second notification, the first processing is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the operation of the first operation means is accepted during the second notification, the maintainability of the game machine is improved.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Main control means (for example, main control section 300),
A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the notification unit (for example, the effect image display device 157);
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
A game machine comprising:
The game is stopped based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000) (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a first command (for example, a security command) including information indicating whether or not the game is in a stopped state to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means is means for causing the notification means to execute a first notification (for example, completion upper limit notification) for notifying the gaming stop state based on information of the received first command.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by executing the first notification, it is possible to make the player understand that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the game stop state, the first notification is executed even if only the sub-control means is restored from a power outage (for example, when the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 Even if the power is turned on again, the completion upper limit notification will be executed.'')
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if the sub-control means loses power, it can execute the first notification after the power is restored to let the user know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first notification is executed based on the information of the first command regardless of the value of the count value (for example, when the complete function is activated, even if the MY value is cleared by turning the power off and on again, the complete function is not activated. The activation flag remains on, and the completion upper limit notification is executed again).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if the value of the counting means is cleared, the first notification can be executed to let the player know that the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The main control means is a means capable of executing error-related processing (for example, error detection processing) even in the game stop state;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, processing related to errors can be executed even when the game is in a stopped state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is configured to notify in advance that the game will be stopped based on the count value reaching a second value (for example, 18500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value. It is a means for executing the second notification (for example, complete function advance notification),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (for example, shutter 163),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

<About operations when the harness connection status changes>
Next, an example of the operation when the connection state of the harness changes will be described using FIGS. 189 to 195. Note that in the following description, descriptions of structures already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 66 to 167) will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

Various boards are arranged inside a game machine, but since space is limited, a plurality of boards and each operation unit are connected with appropriate harnesses. FIG. 189 shows an example of the connection of the boards inside the game machine. For example, the main control board 300B provided with the main control unit 300 is connected to the relay board RB1 by a harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to a lever unit 135U (with a start lever 135) and a stop lever unit 135U (equipped with a start lever 135) by harnesses HA1 to HA5. It is connected to a button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137 to 139), a bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130 and 132, and a settlement button 134), and the like.

By using such a harness, boards and components can be efficiently arranged in a limited space, but another problem arises: poor harness connection. Checking for the presence or absence of such poor connections requires a considerable amount of work.

In view of this, by making some action occur depending on the connection state of the harness, it is possible to easily check the connection state based on the presence or absence of this action. Examples of these operations will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that each operation example can be employed in combination as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example of operation when the harness connection status is normal]
FIG. 190(a) is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness connection state is normal. In this figure, it is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that in FIG. 190(a), the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED provided on the main control board 300B is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the second mode described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second mode when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. Note that the lever monitor LED may be provided not only on the main control board 300B but also on the relay board RB1.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a game is started (the reels start rotating) upon receiving a signal of this change. At this time, the first display (for example, operation instruction display (press order navigation, aim for 〇〇), small role suggestion display, preview display, etc.) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the first display starts from the speakers 272 and 277. The output of the first sound (effect corresponding to the first display) starts, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode (effect corresponding to the first display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in a second mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the first mode).

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel becomes stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display (stop result display (stop small role display, XX pieces obtained display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)) etc.) is being displayed, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emitting mode (corresponding to the second display). It is a performance that will be performed). Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 190(b). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 190(b), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is pulled out after the bet operation, and then the left stop operation, the middle stop operation, and the right stop operation are performed in this order. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 sends the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the not pressed state to the pressed state. Since this is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the first display starts on the effect image display device 157, the first sound output starts from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is of the second aspect.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel becomes stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state. At this time, the second display is being displayed on the effect image display device 157, the second sound is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the player may start the game even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice this fault. Furthermore, the state of the lever monitor LED may be changed to the second mode even when the start lever 135 is not operated, thereby making it easier to notice this failure.

Note that, for example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is pulled out in a state where the chance button 190 is not operated, a process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, the present invention is not limited to the configuration related to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation regarding the lever monitor LED may be interpreted as replacing it with a monitor for monitoring other devices.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation is to start reel rotation when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected, but for example, if the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected. The action in this case may be an action executed during a game. Further, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation section is disconnected is an operation that can be visually recognized inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 190(c). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Further, the main control unit 300 is configured not to accept a stop operation while receiving a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 190(c), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is drawn out after the bet operation, and then the left stop operation, the middle stop operation, and the right stop operation are performed in this order. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(c), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 sends the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the not pressed state to the pressed state. Since this is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the first display starts on the effect image display device 157, the first sound output starts from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is of the second aspect.

Subsequently, the stop operations are performed in the order of left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation, but while the start lever 135 is receiving a depressed signal due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected. The stop operation is not accepted, and the corresponding reel remains in a rotating state. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being disconnected.

In the above example, for example, if a failure such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the game may start even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the stop operation may not be possible in subsequent games, resulting in this failure. may become easier to notice. Furthermore, the state of the lever monitor LED may be changed to the second mode even when the start lever 135 is not operated, thereby making it easier to notice this failure.

Note that, for example, when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is pulled out in a state where the chance button 190 is not operated, a process corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 190 is executed. As such, the present invention is not limited to the configuration related to the start lever 135 described above, and can be applied to other devices. In this case, the explanation regarding the lever monitor LED may be interpreted as replacing it with a monitor for monitoring other devices.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation is to start reel rotation when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected, but for example, if the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected. The action in this case may be an action executed during a game. Further, if the operation when the harness connected to the operation section is disconnected is an operation that can be visually recognized inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (3)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 191(a). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 191(a), it is assumed that the start lever 135 is pressed down, a bet operation is performed in that state, and then the lever unit harness HA1 is pulled out. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 191(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when the lever is pressed, the number of bets necessary to start the game has not yet been placed, so the game has not yet started (the reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Subsequently, at the timing when the bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this time, since the start lever 135 remains in the pressed state, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Furthermore, since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode.

Subsequently, at the timing when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (4)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 191(b). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 191(b), it is assumed that the left stop button is pressed down after the bet operation, and then the left stop button is brought to a non-depressed state after the lever is pressed down, and finally, the lever unit harness HA1 is drawn out. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 191(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, the left stop button is pressed down, but since the game has not yet started, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues.

Subsequently, the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, and the main control unit 300 receives a signal of this change. However, in this example, the signal indicating that the left stop button is pressed (in operation) is also received, so the game does not start (the reels start rotating) and the state before the game starts (reels stopped) continues. It is configured to do this. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Subsequently, the left stop button becomes unpressed. At this time, although the number of bets necessary to start the game has been placed, the start lever 135 remains pressed down, so the start lever 135 is not pressed down from its unpressed state. The main control unit 300 does not receive the signal that has changed to the current state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

Subsequently, at the timing when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of the game (reels stopped state) continues. Further, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode since the start lever 135 is in the depressed state.

[Example of operation when the harness of the main control board and relay board is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(a). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 192(a), operations before and after the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 are disconnected will be described. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, before the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the number of bets required to start the game is placed, and the game is not started by operating the lever (the reels are stopped). A normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277. At the start, the various lamps 420 assume the third light emitting mode (effect corresponding to the third display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode, similar to when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In addition, in the above example, the operation was explained when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 was disconnected, but for example, the harness HD1 connecting the sub control board 400B and the relay board RB4 was disconnected. When this happens, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (the effect corresponding to the third display) starts from the speakers 272 and 277. The output may start, and the various lamps 420 may take on a third light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the third display). Further, for example, if a monitor LED for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or the menu button is provided, the situation may be the same as when the harness HC1 or the harness HC2 is disconnected.

[Example of operation when the main control board and relay board harnesses are disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 192(b). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 192(b), it is assumed that the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected after the bet operation, and then the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (the reels are stopped), the effect image display device 157 normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and the various lamps 420 normally It is a light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 sends the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the not pressed state to the pressed state. Since this is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the first display starts on the effect image display device 157, the first sound output starts from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is of the second aspect.

Subsequently, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300 and the relay board RB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (effect corresponding to the third display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277. At the start, the various lamps 420 assume the third light emitting mode (effect corresponding to the third display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in the second mode, similar to when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is disconnected.

In addition, in the above example, the operation was explained when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 was disconnected, but for example, the harness HD1 connecting the sub control board 400B and the relay board RB4 was disconnected. When this happens, the third display (error display (board connection error display)) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the third sound (the effect corresponding to the third display) starts from the speakers 272 and 277. The output may start, and the various lamps 420 may take on a third light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the third display). Further, for example, if a monitor LED for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or the menu button is provided, the situation may be the same as when the harness HC1 or the harness HC2 is disconnected.

[Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, stop button unit harness HA2, and bet button unit harness HA3 are each drawn out will be described below with reference to FIG. 193(a). The game machine of this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control section 300 receives the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 193(a), from a state where the menu display (screen for customizing production settings) is being executed, bet button unit harness HA3 is drawn out, bet button 132 is pressed, bet button unit harness HA3 is connected, and lever unit harness is HA1 drawn, stop button unit harness HA2 drawn, stop buttons 137 to 139 fully pressed, stop button unit harness HA2 connected, stop button unit harness HA2 drawn, stop button unit harness HA2 connected, stop button unit harness HA2 drawn, It is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 193(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu BGM, and various lamps are displayed. 420 is a menu lighting mode.

Subsequently, the bet button unit harness HA3 is pulled out, but the state does not change as a result of this. Furthermore, if the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected while the bet button 132 is held down, the operation of the bet button 132 becomes valid, and the necessary number of bets is placed to start the game. Further, by operating this bet button 132, the menu display etc. are canceled, the normal background is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode.

Subsequently, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed down, the main control unit 300 sends the same signal as when the start lever 135 changes from the not pressed state to the pressed state. Since this is received, the game starts (the reels start rotating). At this time, the first display starts on the effect image display device 157, the first sound output starts from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode.

Subsequently, the stop button unit harness HA2 is removed, but the state does not change due to this. Further, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down. In this case, one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (all stop buttons 137 to 139 at this stage) is accepted in accordance with the priority order. In this example, the priority is left-center-right, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is effective as the first stop operation, and the corresponding reel is brought to a stop state. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. . Note that here, multiple stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed down when connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, but only one stop button that can perform an effective stop operation is pressed down. If so, the operation of that stop button is accepted, and if no stop button is pressed, no operation is performed.

Next, while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, the operation of the middle stop button 138, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (at this stage, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139) is accepted and the corresponding reel becomes stopped. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. .

Next, while keeping all the stop buttons 137 to 139 pressed down, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, the operation of the right stop button 139, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 that can perform an effective stop operation (at this stage, only the right stop button 139) is accepted. The corresponding reel becomes stopped. In addition, since all the reels are in a stopped state, the second display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the second sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 turn on the second light emission. It becomes a mode.

Furthermore, if the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected after being disconnected while all stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed down, and there is a reel that is out of step, the stop button corresponding to that reel will be disabled. Do not treat it as something that can be stopped. FIG. 193(b) shows an example of the operation when the left reel 110 is out of step when the disconnected stop button unit harness HA2 in FIG. 193(a) is connected for the first time. There is. In this case, among the stop buttons 137 to 139, those that can be effectively stopped are the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, and the operation of one of them, the middle stop button 138, is accepted, and the corresponding reel is is shown to be in a stopped state.

In the above example, when replacing the stop button unit 136U, for example, by connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 while pressing the stop button, the replaced stop button unit 136U will be able to function normally depending on whether or not there is a corresponding operation. You can confirm that it is working.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is to stop the rotation of the reels during the game, but for example, this operation is not limited to the operation performed during the game; Various actions can be applied. Further, especially regarding this operation, if the operation is visible inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

Furthermore, an operation example related to the above operation will be explained.

In this example, an example will be described in which one harness in which the signal lines of the MAX bet button, start lever, settlement button, and 1 bet button are bundled is connected to a relay board, and the relay board is connected to the main board. The order of the signal lines is from terminal number 1, max bet sensor signal line, power line, ground line, 1 bet sensor signal line, power line, ground line, payment button signal line, ground line, power line, start lever sensor signal line. , place it like a ground wire.

In this case, when the harness is in the non-bet state and the harness is not connected, if the harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while operating the MAX bet button and 1 bet button, the MAX bet button operation becomes effective and the number of bets is The process to set 3 is executed and becomes a 3 bet state, and after this, when the harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same process as when the lever was operated is executed, and the reels rotate and the monitor LED indicates that the lever is The mode will be the same as when it was operated.

In addition, when the harness is in the non-bet state and the harness is not connected, if the harness changes from the non-connected state to the connected state while operating the MAX bet button and settlement button, the MAX bet button operation will be effective first and the number of bets will be The process of setting the number of bets 3 is executed to enter a 3-bet state, and then the operation of the settlement button becomes valid and the gaming value of the set bet number 3 is returned to the player, resulting in a non-bet state. In addition, if the harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state before the payment button operation becomes effective, the same process as when the lever is operated will be executed, and the reels will rotate and the monitor LED will be displayed when the lever is operated. It will be the same mode.

In addition, when the harness is in the non-bet state and the harness is not connected, if the harness changes from the non-connected state to the connected state while operating the 1 bet button and settlement button, the 1 bet button operation will be effective first and the number of bets will be The process of setting the number of bets to 1 is executed, and then the operation of the settlement button becomes valid, and the gaming value of the set bet number of 1 is returned to the player, and the player enters a non-bet state.

In addition, when the harness is in the non-bet state and the harness is not connected, if the harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while operating the MAX bet button, 1 bet button, and settlement button, the MAX bet button operation will be effective first. Then, the process to set the bet number 3 is executed and the state becomes 3 bets, after which the operation of the settlement button becomes valid and the gaming value of the set bet number 3 is returned to the player and the state becomes a non-bet state. 1 bet button operation is never valid.

In addition, when connecting a single harness that bundles the signal lines of the MAX bet button, settlement button, and 1 bet button to the relay board, from terminal number 1 of the harness, the MAX bet sensor signal line, power line, ground line, start line, The arrangement may be as follows: lever sensor signal line, power supply line, ground line, settlement button signal line, ground line, power supply line, 1 bet sensor signal line, ground line, or as a modified example, from terminal number 1 to the settlement button. They may be arranged as a signal line, a ground line, a power supply line, an LED signal line, a max bet sensor signal line, a ground line, a 1 bet sensor signal line, or a ground line.

In addition, when connecting one harness that bundles the signal lines of the MAX bet button and 1 bet button to the relay board, from terminal number 1 of the harness, the ground wire, max bet sensor signal line, power line, 1 bet sensor signal It may be arranged like a line or ground line.

Also, although the example in which the MAX bet button has a higher priority than the 1 bet button is shown, the 1 bet button may have a higher priority than the MAX bet button, and in this case, the MAX bet button is in a non-bet state and the harness is not connected. When the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while operating the MAX bet button and 1 bet button, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes valid, the process to set the bet number 1 is executed, and the state becomes 1 bet. When the harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the reel does not rotate, but the monitor LED changes to the same state as when the lever was operated, and the same process as when the lever was operated is not executed, and the harness is disconnected again. When the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes valid and the process of setting the number of bets to 1 is executed, resulting in a 2 bet state.After this, when the harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the reel does not rotate, but the monitor LED changes to the same state as when the lever was operated, and when the harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state again, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes valid and the process of setting the bet number of 1 is executed. When the harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, and the reels rotate and the monitor LED changes in the same manner as when the lever was operated. Become.

[Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 194(a).

In FIG. 194(a), from a state where the menu display (screen for customizing production settings) is being executed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is drawn out, the menu button is fully pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected, and the menu button unit It is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of disconnecting the harness HC1, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, disconnecting the menu button unit harness HC1, and connecting the menu button unit harness HC1. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 194(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to confirm the operation of the game machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided at a visible position inside the game machine with the door open.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu BGM, and various lamps are displayed. 420 is a menu lighting mode.

Subsequently, the menu button unit harness HC1 is removed, but the state does not change as a result of this. Furthermore, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while keeping all the menu buttons (in this case, the up, down, left, right, and OK buttons) pressed. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to the priority order. In this example, the operation of the left button with the highest priority is effective. By this operation, the fourth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the fourth sound (the effect corresponding to the fourth display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277. , the various lamps 420 have a fourth light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the fourth display). Note that here, multiple menu buttons are pressed down when connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, but if one menu button is pressed down, the operation of that button is accepted, and the If the menu button is not pressed, no operation will be performed.

Next, while keeping all the menu buttons pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and then connected. In this case as well, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted in accordance with the priority order. In this example, the operation of the left button with the highest priority is effective. With this operation, the effect image display device 157 displays a fifth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves further to the left, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a fifth sound (effect corresponding to the fifth display). Then, the various lamps 420 take on a fifth light emission mode (an effect corresponding to the fifth display).

In the above example, each time you repeat the operation of disconnecting and then connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while all menu buttons are pressed down, the operation of the left button with the highest priority becomes effective, and the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and then connected. The screen cursor moves to the left. Regarding the movement of the cursor by this operation, there are two cases: cyclic movement, where the cursor moves to the edge and appears from the opposite edge, and non-cyclic movement, where the cursor moves to the edge and does not move any further. be. At the right end of FIG. 194(a), it is shown that the fourth display and the effects related thereto are executed again due to the cursor being moved around by the above operation. On the other hand, FIG. 194(b) shows an example in which the cursor is moved acyclically by the above operation. In this example, the only difference from FIG. 194(a) is the state at the right end, which shows that the fifth display and its related effects are maintained because the cursor no longer moves due to the above operation. ing.

Further, an operation example related to the above operation will be explained.

For example, assume that the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while the left direction button and right direction button are being operated from a state where the normal background is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected. Here, since the left button has a higher priority than the right button, only the operation of the left button is valid. Here, if the left direction button corresponds to the operation to decrease the volume by one level and the right direction button corresponds to the operation to increase the volume by one level, the process to decrease the volume by one level is executed as a result, and the volume display is Go down one level. If the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected in this state (both the left button and the right button are operated), the volume will be lowered by one level each time it is connected. When the lowest volume is reached, the volume is maintained at the same level and the same volume display is performed. In addition, in the above example, we explained the case where the left direction button corresponds to the operation to lower the volume by one level, but if it corresponds to the operation to increase the volume by one level, the connection of the menu button unit harness HC1, the disconnection, etc. As the connection is repeated, the volume increases one step at a time until it reaches the maximum volume. Also, in the above example, the case where the process corresponding to the left button with a high priority is executed is explained, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right button has a higher priority. Alternatively, the up and down direction buttons may have higher (or lower) priority.

Also, for example, when the operation history screen (displayed by operating the OK button while in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) is displayed, operating the right button will switch to the next page. , operating the left direction button switches to the previous page. Further, if the left button is operated while the first page is displayed, the last page will be displayed, and if the right button is operated while the last page is displayed, the screen will return to the first page. In such a configuration, assume that the operation history screen is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected from a state in which the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected, while the left direction button and right direction button are being operated. Here, since the left direction button has a higher priority than the right direction button, only the operation of the left direction button is valid, and as a result, the displayed page is switched to the previous page. At this time, if the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while the first page is being displayed, the last page will be displayed. In addition, in the above example, we explained the case where the left direction button corresponds to the operation of switching to the previous page, but if the left direction button corresponds to the operation of switching to the next page, the menu button unit harness HC1 should be connected and disconnected. By repeating the connection, the pages change in order, and eventually the last page returns to the first page. Also, in the above example, the case where the process corresponding to the left button with a high priority is executed is explained, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right button has a higher priority. Alternatively, the up and down direction buttons may have higher (or lower) priority.

Here, an example of the wiring of the menu button unit and the relationship of priorities will be explained. FIG. 194-1 is a diagram showing an example of wiring of the menu button unit.

FIG. 194-1 shows an example of wiring from the menu button unit harness HC1 to the menu button unit 900U. In this figure, five switches SW1 to SW5 and an LED element SW3L are shown in the menu button unit 900U. The first switch SW1 is a left direction button, the second switch SW2 is an up direction button, the third switch SW3 is a decision button, the fourth switch SW4 is a down direction button, and the fifth switch SW5 is a right direction button. assigned to each. Further, the LED element SW3L emits light when the third switch SW3 is turned on.

In this wiring example, the priority of operations is determined in the order of wiring numbers. In this example, the order of priority is the left button, up button, enter button, down button, and right button. For example, the wiring number for the left direction button (first switch SW1) is 2, and the wiring number for the up direction button (second switch SW2) is 3, so when these buttons are operated, the menu button unit When the harness HC1 is connected, processing corresponding to the operation of the left direction button will be executed.

Furthermore, in this wiring example, the ground line is configured to run along the outer periphery in order to prevent noise. Further, the configuration is such that a high potential wiring (for example, 12V with wiring number 5) is located on the innermost side. This example is just an example; for example, the signal line corresponding to the button operation may be arranged inside the power supply line and the ground line (one set of three lines), and if there is a corresponding light emitting element, , the wiring may be included within this box, or may be provided outside the box.

In the above example, when replacing the menu button unit 900U, for example, by connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while holding down the menu button, the replaced menu button unit 900U will be able to function normally depending on whether or not there is a corresponding operation. You can confirm that it is working.

Note that in the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is the operation on the menu screen, but this operation is not limited to the operation on the menu screen, but may be an operation during a game. , various operations can be applied. Further, especially regarding this operation, if the operation is visible inside the game machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Further, such an operation may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation confirmation can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and sub-control board is disconnected]
An example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected will be described below with reference to FIG. 195(a).

In this embodiment, power to the sub-control board 400B is supplied from the power supply PS via the main control board 300B and the harness HE1. When the harness HE1 is disconnected, power is no longer supplied to the sub-control board 400B. At this time, the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is supplied, and during this time, the operating state of the sub-control board 400B is maintained. When this power supply stops, the sub-control board 400B enters a power-off state. FIG. 195(a) shows changes from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected to when the sub control board 400B becomes a power-off state in the period from timing T1 to T2. Note that the main control board 300B is provided with a monitor LED to check the power supply status, but since the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, this The monitor LED remains lit.

After the sub-control board 400B is turned off in the above-described flow, when the harness HE1 is reconnected, power is supplied from the power supply PS via the harness HE1. At this time, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores power again, so power consumption temporarily increases by that amount. Additionally, the voltage on the main control board 300B side will drop temporarily due to this, but if it falls below the operating voltage of the main control board 300B, the main control board 300B will perform a reset process (same as turning the power back on). . When this reset process is executed, the main control board 300B shifts to a setting confirmation mode in which the current setting values can be confirmed. Further, if the setting key provided inside the game machine is in the on state when the reset process is executed, the game machine shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. In FIG. 195(a), these changes are shown after timing T2. Note that regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained, so the monitor LED remains lit.

Here, the period from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected to when it becomes connected again is short, and while the electric power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied, , it is assumed that the harness HE1 becomes connected again. In this case, the sub-control board 400B does not go into a power-off state (operation continues without restarting). Furthermore, if the power consumed while the harness HE1 is not connected is small, the amount of power stored in the electrolytic capacitor will be small when the harness HE1 is connected again, and the voltage drop at the main control board 300B will be small. There are cases where operation continues without dropping below the operating voltage (reset processing is not executed). In FIG. 195(b), after the harness is disconnected at timing T3, the harness HE1 is reconnected at timing T4 while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied. An example is shown in which both the main control board 300B and the sub control board 400B continue to operate. In this example, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores power again, so the power consumption temporarily increases by that amount, and the voltage on the main control board 300B side temporarily decreases accordingly. However, the amount of change is small compared to the example of FIG. 195(a). Further, unlike the example in FIG. 195(a), it is shown that the main control board 300B is not reset after timing T4.

In the above configuration, the main control board 300B can be reset by disconnecting the harness HE1, waiting for a while, and then reconnecting it. On the other hand, if the harness HE1 is disconnected when the harness HE1 is not desired to be reset, it is possible to prevent the harness from being reset by immediately reconnecting the harness HE1.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment regarding harness]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 189 to 195 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected] Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

The first process is executed when the first harness of the first operating part becomes disconnected during a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or during replacement, cleaning, or maintenance of the first operating part at an amusement arcade. By doing so, it is possible to confirm that the first operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)])
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. In addition, if the first operating section is in the operating state, the first notification will not be executed even if the first harness becomes disconnected, so if the first operating section is in the operating state and the first operating section is in contact with some member, the first notification will not be executed. You may notice that

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED);
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the unconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operation section is operated and when it is not operated,
[ Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. It is also possible to check the operation of the light emitting means.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A movable body (for example, reels 110 to 112),
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process may be executed;
The first process is a process of operating the movable body ([Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2) ]reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. It is also possible to check the operation of the movable body.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([If the lever unit harness is disconnected] Operation example (1)] [Refer to operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]), the manner in which the first process is executed can be confirmed inside the game machine with the door open. and
The first harness is provided at a position where it can be checked inside the game machine with the door open ([Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Lever unit harness (Refer to example (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation section at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation section becomes disconnected. It can be confirmed that one operation section is operating normally. Moreover, it is possible to understand that the first harness is disconnected by executing the first process. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the operator to operate the first harness and confirm the operation of the first process with the door open.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation section can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operating section without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state with the first operation unit not being operated, the first process is performed. is executed,
If the certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is satisfied when the first harness is in a disconnected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operation part is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is also possible to check whether or not the second operating section is operated when the first harness is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A third operating unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. can confirm that the operating unit is operating normally. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the first operation unit is disconnected.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation unit can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from error processing (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation] [Example of operation when the menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation] [Example of operation when the menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation section (for example, a right stop button 139, a right direction button),
A third process (for example, stopping the right reel 112, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the second operating section and the third operating section are being operated, one of the second processing and the third processing is performed. Only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when replacing the first operation unit, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state when a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is satisfied and both the first operating section and the second operating section are operated. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first operating section and the second operating section are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating section (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating section belonging to the first operating unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the first harness is in the connected state, it is also possible to check whether or not a predetermined operating section is operated.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, lever unit 135U) having an operation section and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases where only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
In a situation where the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state after the first case, and the first case returns, the output result of the first process in the first case , the output result of the first process in the first case may be different (see [Example of operation when menu button harness is drawn out], FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. can confirm that the operating unit is operating normally. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the first operation unit is disconnected. Furthermore, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by the fact that the output results of the first processing are different.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation unit can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from error processing (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation section (for example, a right direction button),
A third process (for example, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the second operating section and the third operating section are being operated, one of the second processing and the third processing is performed. Only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when replacing the first operation unit, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). , only the first process of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]);
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, and the first case is returned, and the first process is executed in the first case. , in the first case described later, the first process may not be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is drawn out], FIG. 194(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operation unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the first operation unit is connected. can confirm that the operating unit is working properly. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the first operation unit is disconnected. Further, the operation of the first operation unit can also be confirmed by the operation when the first process is executed and when the first process is not executed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the first operation unit can be checked based on whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from error processing (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the first operation unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If the menu button harness is disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation section (for example, a right direction button),
A third process (for example, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the second operating section and the third operating section are being operated, one of the second processing and the third processing is performed. Only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when replacing the first operation unit, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (for example, left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (for example, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
A stop button unit (for example, a stop button) that has the first stop button and the second stop button and is connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2). unit 136U) and
A game machine comprising:
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, one of the first process and the second process is performed. There are cases where only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
After the first case, when the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are being operated, the first process is performed. In some cases, only the second process of the second process is executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, ensuring that the stop button unit operates normally. You can confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the stop button unit is disconnected. Furthermore, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by stopping the reels.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is met and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is in the connected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating section (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating section belonging to the stop button unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the first harness is in the connected state, it is also possible to check whether or not a predetermined operating section is operated.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, lever unit 135U) having an operation section and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (for example, the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111) that are rotationally driven;
a first stop button (for example, left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (for example, middle stop button 138) for stopping rotation of the second reel;
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
A stop button unit (for example, a stop button) that has the first stop button and the second stop button and is connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2). unit 136U) and
A game machine comprising:
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is being operated, the second process may be executed;
The first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is not out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In this case, only the first process of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are being operated, Of the first process and the second process, only the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], FIG. 193(b)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During a pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, ensuring that the stop button unit operates normally. You can confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, the user may notice that the wiring of the stop button unit is disconnected. Furthermore, by stopping the reels, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit and the state of the reels.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed during the game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not the first process is executed, which may be executed during the game.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process is different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit without using dedicated error processing.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed;
If the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed ([If multiple harnesses are disconnected] operation example]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the first process may not be executed when the first harness becomes disconnected, it is possible to make it easier to check the first operation unit.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a certain condition (for example, a reel rotation state) is satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state. Then, only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state when a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. One process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is also possible to check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is in the connected state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain condition may be satisfied when a predetermined operating section (for example, the start lever 135) different from the operating section belonging to the stop button unit is operated.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the first harness is in the connected state, it is also possible to check whether or not a predetermined operating section is operated.

Further, the game machine described above,
a second board (for example, relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, harness HB1);
Notifying means (for example, effect image display device 157),
The notification means is a means that may issue a connection error notification (for example, a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state ([Main control board and relay board harness Example of operation when is omitted (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence or absence of a connection state between the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by the notification from the notification means.

Further, the game machine described above,
A second operation unit (for example, lever unit 135U) having an operation section and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second control board (for example, sub-control board 400B);
A game machine comprising:
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (for example, harness HE1),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset ( (See [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and sub-control board is disconnected])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when parts are replaced at an amusement arcade, the first control board is reset when the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, thereby ensuring that the first control board operates normally. can be operated.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first control board includes a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED),
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it can be confirmed that the first control board is in the activated state.

Further, the game machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs when the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues emitting light ([Operation example when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected) ]reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is energized even after being reset.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first harness is connected to the first harness before a first time (for example, a time when the amount of stored electricity in the electrolytic capacitor falls below an amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) after the first case occurs. changes from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (for example, main control board 300B) that has a predetermined operation means (for example, a setting key) and controls the progress of the game;
a second control board (for example, sub-control board 400B);
A game machine comprising:
The first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (for example, harness HE1),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains the activated state,
If the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset ( (See [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and sub-control board is disconnected])
If the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while the predetermined operating means is operated after the first case, the first control board controls the operation of the predetermined operating means. (For example, setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and sub-control board is disconnected])
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

During pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when parts are replaced at an amusement arcade, the first control board is reset when the first harness changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, thereby ensuring that the first control board operates normally. can be operated. Further, the game machine can be shifted to a state based on the operation of a predetermined operation means while the game machine is in the energized state.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first control board includes a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED),
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it can be confirmed that the first control board is in the activated state.

Further, the game machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs when the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues emitting light ([Operation example when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected) ]reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is energized even after being reset.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first harness is connected to the first harness before a first time (for example, a time when the amount of stored electricity in the electrolytic capacitor falls below an amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) after the first case occurs. changes from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
a second operation unit (for example, bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, bet button unit harness HA3);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A second process (for example, a process for setting the number of bets) can be executed based on the operation of the second operation unit,
If the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] ], see FIGS. 193(a)(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game store clerk can easily recognize the behavior of the two operation parts, and the game store clerk may be able to notice if the harness is incorrectly connected.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state where the second process is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if a problem occurs in the first harness after a problem occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
The light emitting means changes the first harness from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operation unit is operated and the first process based on the operation is not executed. Then, the light emitting mode becomes the same as when operating the first operation part when the first harness is in the connected state ([Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Lever unit Example of operation when the harness is disconnected (see (4)))
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to infer a malfunction in the harness or the first operating section based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and whether or not the first process is executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
an operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, bet button unit 132U) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, bet button unit harness HA3);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
The operation unit has a second operation section and a third operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, or bet buttons 130 and 132),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A second process (for example, stopping rotation of the reels in response to a stop button, setting the number of bets) can be executed based on the operation of the second operation unit,
It is possible to execute a third process (for example, stop rotation of the reels in response to a stop button, set the number of bets) based on the operation of the third operation unit,
If the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] example], see FIGS. 193(a)(b)),
If the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the third operation unit is not operated, the third process is not executed ([Operation example when multiple harnesses are disconnected] ], see FIGS. 193(a)(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game store clerk can easily recognize the behavior of the two operation parts, and the game store clerk may be able to notice if the harness is incorrectly connected.

Further, the game machine described above,
In a state where the first process (for example, start rotation of the reels) is executed, the second process (for example, stop rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed,
In a state where the first process (for example, starting rotation of the reels) is executed, the third process (for example, stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if a problem occurs in the second harness after a problem occurs in the first harness, the second process and the third process are not executed, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
The light emitting means causes the first harness to change from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operation unit is operated and the first process based on the operation is not executed. Then, the light emitting mode becomes the same as when operating the first operation part when the first harness is in the connected state ([Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Lever unit Example of operation when the harness is disconnected (see (4)))
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to infer a malfunction in the harness or the first operating section based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and whether or not the first process is executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
a second operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process is executed ([When the lever unit harness is disconnected]) Refer to Operation Example (2)], hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
A second process (for example, stopping rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on the operation of the second operation unit,
If the second operation section is operated in the first case, the second process is not executed (for example, [Operation example (2) when lever unit harness is disconnected], FIG. 190 ( c)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the gaming clerk may notice the disconnected state of the first harness through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second process may be executed in a state where the first process is executed has been described.

In this game machine, even if a problem occurs in the second harness after a problem occurs in the first harness, the second process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
The light emitting means changes the first harness from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operation unit is operated and the first process based on the operation is not executed. Then, the light emitting mode becomes the same as when operating the first operation part when the first harness is in the connected state ([Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Lever unit Example of operation when the harness is disconnected (see (4)))
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to infer a malfunction in the harness or the first operating section based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and whether or not the first process is executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
a second operation unit (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process is executed ([When the lever unit harness is disconnected]) Refer to Operation Example (1)], hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
A second process (for example, stopping rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on the operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operation unit is operated in the first case, the second process may be executed (for example, [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]) , see FIG. 190(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk can check the operation of a plurality of operation sections in stages.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
The light emitting means changes the first harness from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operation unit is operated and the first process based on the operation is not executed. Then, the light emitting mode becomes the same as when operating the first operation part when the first harness is in the connected state ([Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Lever unit Example of operation when the harness is disconnected (see (4)))
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to infer a malfunction in the harness or the first operating section based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and whether or not the first process is executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
a second operation unit (for example, bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (for example, bet button unit harness HA3);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A second process (for example, a process for setting the number of bets) can be executed based on the operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operation unit is operated while the first operation unit is operated, the second process is executed and the first process is not executed (for example, see FIG. 191(a) ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk can check the operation of a plurality of operation sections in stages.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state where the second process is executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, even if a problem occurs in the first harness after a problem occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
When the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state while the first operation unit is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first The process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (3)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is pulled out (4)]),
The light emitting means causes the first harness to change from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operation unit is operated and the first process based on the operation is not executed. Then, the light emitting mode becomes the same as when operating the first operation part when the first harness is in the connected state ([Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (3)] [Lever unit Example of operation when the harness is disconnected (see (4)))
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to infer a malfunction in the harness or the first operating section based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and whether or not the first process is executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases in which only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). (see example)
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operation part,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the second operation part,
the first wiring has a smaller terminal number than the second wiring;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if the first process is not executed, the game store clerk can easily identify a problem with the wiring.

Further, the game machine described above,
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state without any operation other than the first operating part and the second operating part, and then the first case returns. In some situations, the output result of the first process in the first case may be different from the output result of the first process in the first case ([Menu button harness is removed]) Example of operation when line is connected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the output results from the first process are different, it is easy for the game store clerk to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases in which only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). (see example)
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operation part,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the second operation part,
The first wiring is arranged inside the wiring at both ends of the first harness,
The second wiring is arranged inside the wiring at both ends of the first harness,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, if the first process is not executed, it is easy for the game store staff to identify wiring defects, and the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector can be inserted in a parallel state to confirm accurate operation. .

Further, the game machine described above,
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state without any operation other than the first operating part and the second operating part, and then the first case returns. In some situations, the output result of the first process in the first case may be different from the output result of the first process in the first case ([Menu button harness is removed]) Example of operation when line is connected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the output results from the first process are different, it is easy for the game store clerk to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases in which only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). (see example)
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operation part,
The first wiring is arranged inside the power supply line and the ground line of the first harness (for example, a modification in which the signal line is arranged inside the power supply line and the ground line). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, if the first process is not executed, it is easy for the game store staff to identify wiring defects, and the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector can be inserted in a parallel state to confirm accurate operation. .

Further, the game machine described above,
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state without any operation other than the first operating part and the second operating part, and then the first case returns. In some situations, the output result of the first process in the first case may be different from the output result of the first process in the first case ([If the menu button harness is removed] Example of operation when line is connected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the output results from the first process are different, it is easy for the game store clerk to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases in which only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). (see example)
The first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second direction button;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game clerk can easily confirm that the process is performed by operating the first direction button.

Further, the game machine described above,
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state without any operation other than the first operating part and the second operating part, and then the first case returns. In some situations, the output result of the first process in the first case may be different from the output result of the first process in the first case ([Menu button harness is removed]) Example of operation when line is connected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the output results from the first process are different, it is easy for the game store clerk to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1);
A game machine comprising:
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and a right direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. There are cases in which only the first process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). (see example)
The first operation unit is a first direction button,
The second operation unit is a second direction button,
When the second process is executed after the first process is executed, the state may return to the state before the first process was executed;
If the first process is executed after the second process is executed, the state may return to the state before the second process was executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game clerk can easily confirm that the process is performed by operating the first direction button.

Further, the game machine described above,
After the first case, the first harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state without any operation other than the first operating part and the second operating part, and then the first case returns. In some situations, the output result of the first process in the first case may be different from the output result of the first process in the first case ([Menu button harness is removed]) Example of operation when line is connected], see FIG. 194(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, since the output results from the first process are different, it is easy for the game store clerk to check the operation.

<Configuration related to cooling inside the game machine>
Next, an example of a configuration for discharging and cooling the heat inside the game machine to the outside will be described using FIGS. 196 to 201. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 196 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

In this figure, a cooling fan 950 is provided above the front door 102. Further, a plurality of through holes (hereinafter referred to as upper through hole 242H1 and lower through hole 242H2, respectively) are formed in the upper and lower parts of the back plate. The cooling fan 950 is used to cool the VDP 534 of the second sub-control unit 500 provided on the front door 102, and is also used to cool the main control unit 300 provided inside the main body 101. . The upper through hole 242H1 and the lower through hole 242H2 serve as an intake port and an exhaust port when the cooling fan 950 is in operation.

Hereinafter, the configuration regarding heat radiation of the cooling fan 950 will be described using FIGS. 197 and 198. FIG. 197 is a schematic sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the side, and FIG. 198 is an enlarged schematic sectional view of the sub board case 500a and the main board case 300a. In these figures, the air flow when the cooling fan 950 operates is shown by arrows.

To explain this air flow in order, first, air flows from the outside to the inside of the slot machine 100 through the lower through hole 242H2. The inflowing air then passes by the hopper unit 180 and the like, reaches the front door 102, and rises from there toward the cooling fan 950 above. At this time, it passes by the relay board RB1 on the way and further flows into the sub-board case 500a arranged above the reel unit 109.

The sub-board case 500a houses the boards 400B and 500B of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and these boards are fixed to the sub-board case 500a with screws 500b. There is. Note that a heat sink 950c for increasing the cooling efficiency of the VDP 534 is attached to the second sub-control board 500B. Further, the cooling fan 950 is fixed to the sub-board case 500a with screws 950b. This cooling fan 950 is provided at a position that does not face the VDP 534.

Inlet ports 500H2 are formed at the upper and lower parts of the sub-board case 500a, and an exhaust port 500H1 is formed in the direction facing the main board case 300a. Air that has flowed in through the lower through hole 242H2 flows into the sub-board case 500a through the intake port 500H2, and is discharged toward the main board case 300a through the exhaust port 500H1 by the operation of the cooling fan 950. This operation cools the sub-control boards 400B and 500B (including the VDP 534) inside the sub-board case 500a.

The air discharged from the sub-board case 500a by the cooling fan 950 further hits the main board case 300a housing the board 300B of the main control section 300, flows along its surface, and is discharged from the upper through-hole 242H1. That is, the operation of cooling fan 950 cools main control board 300B inside main board case 300a.

The above air flow cools each device inside the slot machine 100, such as the relay board RB1, the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B, which are provided along the way. In addition, in the above example, a configuration using the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B was explained, but the above-mentioned boards are not limited to the above-mentioned boards, and may include any board that requires cooling. If so, various substrates can be used. In addition, in the first board case (main controller number 300B in the above example) on the side that is directly exposed to the wind of the cooling fan 950, the dust attached to this first board case is blown away and inside the first board case. The visibility of the first substrate can be increased. Furthermore, since the first board can be cooled without providing the first board case, the configuration of the first board case may be simplified and visibility may be improved.

Note that if the air volume of the cooling fan 950 is small and the air is not discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 from the upper through hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 199, the air will convect inside and the cooling effect will not be exerted easily. Therefore, the air volume of the cooling fan 950 needs to be such that at least the air can be discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 from the upper through hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 200. Thereby, the interior can be cooled by generating the air flow as described above.

Note that the cooling fan 950 described above is provided on the front door 102, so when the front door 102 is opened for maintenance, for example, air from the cooling fan 950 is directed toward the worker SM as shown in FIG. 201. Since the air is blown, the worker SM can perform maintenance work comfortably.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment regarding cooling inside the game machine]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 196 to 201 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second board (for example, second sub-control board 500B);
a cooling fan (for example, cooling fan 950) for cooling the second board;
A game machine comprising:
The blowing direction of the cooling fan may be directed toward the first board (for example, see FIG. 197),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to improve the visibility of the first board by blowing away dust attached to the periphery of the first board, and to cool the first board without providing the first board case. Therefore, visibility may be improved by simplifying the configuration around the first substrate.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is provided on the main body side of the game machine,
The second board and the cooling fan are provided on the door body side of the game machine,
When the door body is closed, the air blowing direction of the cooling fan is directed toward the first board,
When the door body is opened to a certain position, the blowing direction of the cooling fan is not directed toward the first board (see, for example, FIGS. 197 and 201);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the door body is open, the air from the fan is not directed toward the first board but toward the operator who opened the door, making it possible to perform maintenance work comfortably.

Further, the game machine described above,
The second board has a processor (e.g., VDP534) that controls the operation of the second board,
The cooling fan is provided at a position different from a position facing the processor (see, for example, FIG. 198);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, visibility around the processor can be improved.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a reel unit (for example, reel unit 109),
The game machine has a first opening (e.g., upper through hole 242H1) formed above the reel unit, and a second opening (e.g., lower through hole 242H2) formed below the reel unit. It is
When the cooling fan operates with the door body closed, air taken into the gaming machine from the second opening is discharged from the first opening via the cooling fan. For example, see Figure 197),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, air is taken in through the second opening, passes around the reel unit, and is then discharged from the first opening after being directed to the first board. Internal heat can be discharged to the outside of the main body without causing convection inside the main body.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a reel unit (for example, reel unit 109),
The cooling fan is located above the reel unit when the door body is closed (see, for example, FIG. 197);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, heat generated by the operation of the reel unit can be discharged to the outside of the game machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a firing device that fires a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a prize opening that is configured to allow the ball fired from the firing device to enter, and a prize opening that allows the ball that enters the prize opening to be received. A game ball is provided with a detection means for detecting a ball, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening to win a prize. Taking this as an opportunity, it is also suitable for a pachinko machine or the like in which the variable display device changes the symbols and then stops displaying them to notify the transition of the gaming state.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

Next, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 to 260. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 202 to 260 are basically used only in the explanation using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 260, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 202 to 260.
<Overall configuration>
FIG. 202 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to one embodiment. In the slot machine 100, a game is started by inserting medals, and medals are paid out according to the result of the game.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 202 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown in FIG. 202), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is configured so that it can rotate internally. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display means that variably displays a plurality of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the relationship between the nine display areas 1 to 9 of the symbol display window 113 and the five winning lines described above. In this embodiment, an upper horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L2) constituted by display areas 1, 4, and 7, a middle horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L1) consisting of display areas 2, 5, and 8, A lower horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L3) consisting of areas 3, 6, and 9, a right-up winning line (diagonal winning line L4) consisting of display areas 3, 5, and 7, display areas 1, 5, There are five winning lines, each consisting of a right-sloping winning line (diagonal winning line L5).

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he is playing a bonus game. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the medal input button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are input when the medal input button 131 is pressed, and three coins are input when the medal input button 132 is pressed. It is now ready to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141, and the term ``insertion'' includes both. It is. The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or when the medal input buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. That is, the left stop button 137 is associated with the left reel 110, and when the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 stops, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 do not stop. The middle stop button 138 is associated with the middle reel 111, and when the middle stop button 138 is operated, the middle reel 111 stops, but the left reel 110 and right reel 112 do not stop. The right stop button 139 is associated with the right reel 112, and when the right stop button 139 is operated, the right reel 112 stops, but the left reel 110 and middle reel 111 do not stop. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Note that each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is provided with light emitters 137a to 139a inside, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a to 139a are lit to notify the player. . That is, the light emitters 137a to 139a notify each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 that a stop operation is accepted, or in other words, that the rotation of the reel can be stopped for each reel. It is something. Each light emitting body 137a to 139a is, for example, an LED, and has a plurality of light emission modes (for example, blinking, turning off, emitting light in a first color, emitting light in a second color, emitting light while continuously changing the color, etc.). ).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. (on the player's side).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.
<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 204. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a startup signal output circuit 332 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. is provided, and when the CPU 304 receives a start signal from this start signal output circuit 332, it starts game control (starts main control section main processing to be described later).

In addition, the basic circuit 302 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects signals from various sensors 318 (medal insertion button 130 sensor, medal insertion button 131 sensor, medal insertion button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for inserted medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a settlement button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a medal payout sensor for the reel 110. The status of the index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A medal insertion button 130 sensor, a medal insertion button 131 sensor, and a medal insertion button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects input operation when inputting as . The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It always goes to L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero, and becomes able to calculate the stop position of the reel.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 338 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display) 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.
<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) via an input/output interface. is connected.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157, the shutter 163, and the like. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls the shutter 163.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a drive circuit 530 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 530 via an output interface. This drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 504.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a sensor circuit 532, and a shutter sensor 538 is connected to the sensor circuit 532 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 at every interrupt time.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.
<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each reel 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 205(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

Each reel 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of symbols of multiple types (eight types in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, 21 frames with symbol number counter numbers 0 to 20. As for the number counters, only the number counters (details will be described later) are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, a BB symbol is placed on the number 0 piece of the left reel 110, a replay symbol is placed on the number 1 piece of the middle reel 111, and a bell symbol is placed on the number 2 piece of the right reel 112. ing.

When the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the active line becomes a symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has won. In this embodiment, the winning combinations include a small role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, an active role, that is, a big bonus that is a role that transitions to a bonus game, and a role that allows replaying without inserting new medals. It also includes replays, which are the role of Naru. In other words, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus or replay. Includes winnings. The winning combinations will be detailed below. <Type of winning role>
FIG. 205(b) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the Big Bonus (BB) is used as a combination that transitions to a bonus game, and the replays (Replay, Replay 2, and Replay 3) can be played again without inserting new medals. The winning combinations may be distinguished from winning combinations and are sometimes referred to as "actuation combinations," but in this embodiment, the "winning combinations" include the activation combinations of big bonuses and replays. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, for example, a win for a big bonus. Includes winnings and winnings in replays.

The winning combinations of this embodiment include a big bonus (BB), small winning combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted. For example, a regular bonus may be provided separately from the big bonus. Alternatively, AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) may be used without providing either a big bonus or a regular bonus.

“Big Bonus (BB)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “BB”) is a special winning combination (operating winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game) which is a special game upon winning. The corresponding symbol combination is "7-7-7" for BB. Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB. In other words, when a BB is internally won, a flag indicating this is set up (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if the BB is not won in that game, the internal winning is continued until the BB is won. The state in which the flag indicating ``7-7-7'' corresponding to BB is aligned is maintained (BB internal winning state), and even after the next game, BB is internally winning, and when the symbol combination "7-7-7" corresponding to BB is aligned, the BB is won. It is in.

"Small winning combination (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry") is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The symbol combinations are "Bell-Bell-Bell" for the bell, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the watermelon, and "Cherry-ANY-ANY" for the cherry. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is as shown in FIG. 205(b). In the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out.

In addition, the corresponding symbol combinations are "Replay-Replay-Replay (normal replay)" for re-gaming role 1 (replay), and "Replay-Replay-Bell (high probability replay entry replay)" for re-gaming role 2 (replay 2). )", and the replay combination 3 (replay 3) is "replay-bell-replay (high probability replay puncture replay)." If you win Replay 2 in the normal gaming state, you will move to a state where the internal winning probability of Replay (replay role) is high (replay high probability state), but if you win Replay 3 in the replay high probability state, If you put it away, you will return to the normal gaming state.
<Reel rotating device>
Next, the reel rotating device 10 for rotating the reels 110 to 112 of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is an external perspective view showing the reel rotating device 10 of the slot machine 100. The reel rotating device 10 is roughly composed of reel drive units 20 to 40 and a case member 12 that houses them. The reel drive units 20 to 40 differ only in the arrangement of the designs printed on the reel band 610 (see FIG. 207) (see FIG. 205(a)), but structurally, they are all composed of the same parts. There is. Each of the reel drive units 20 to 40 (hereinafter, the reel drive unit 20 will be explained because they have the same configuration) is individually and removably housed in the case member 12.

FIG. 207 is an exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 20. Further, FIG. 208(a) is a schematic side view showing the assembled state of the reel drive unit 20, and FIG. 208(b) is a schematic front view thereof. Note that in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b), illustration of some members is omitted for convenience of explanation. The reel drive unit 20 includes a reel 110, a drive device 604 that rotationally drives the reel 110, a rotation detection device 606 that detects the rotational position of the reel 110, and a rotation detection device 606 that detects the rotational position of the reel 110. and a reel illumination device 608 that illuminates the symbols placed on each reel 110.

The reel 110 includes a thin cylindrical reel band 610, a first reel frame 612 attached to the left side of the reel band 610, supporting the left side of the reel band 610, and a first reel frame 612 attached to the right side of the reel band 610. It is constituted by a second reel frame 614 that supports the right side surface of the reel band 610.

The first reel frame 612 includes an annular frame portion 612A, six support portions 612B extending from the frame portion 612A toward the center of the frame portion 612A, and the six support portions 612B. It is constituted by a cylindrical attachment portion 612C that projects toward the drive device 604 with the distal end of the portion 612B as the base end.

A plate-shaped light-shielding piece 612D is formed on one of the six support parts 612B to protrude toward the rotation detection device 606, and it connects between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the index sensor 606A, which will be described later. This light shielding piece 612D is configured to pass through. Further, the cylindrical attachment portion 612C has four engagement recesses formed at four locations in the circumferential direction at approximately equal intervals (in this example, approximately 90 degree intervals). The four engagement recesses are respectively fitted into the four engagement protrusions of the movable gear 620, whereby the first reel frame 612 is engaged and fixed to the movable gear 620.

The second reel frame 614 is made of an annular member having substantially the same diameter as the frame portion 612A of the first reel frame 612, and is disposed on the opposite side of the first reel frame 612 with the reel band 610 interposed therebetween.

The drive device 604 includes a drive motor 616, a drive gear 618 attached to a motor shaft 616A of the drive motor 616, a movable gear 620 that meshes with the drive gear 618, and a support member 623 and a washer. It is constituted by a pedestal 622 rotatably supported via a pedestal 621. Note that the drive motor 616 and the pedestal 622 are fixedly supported by a plate-shaped metal frame 626 with a plurality of mounting screws 624.

In this embodiment, the drive motor 616 is constituted by a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor 700 (details will be described later). The movable gear 620 is configured by a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 618, and the movable gear 620 and the drive gear 618 constitute a gear set. Further, as described above, after being engaged with the mounting portion 612C of the first reel frame 612, the movable gear 620 is fixed to the first reel frame 612 using the mounting screws 624 and washers 621, and is also mounted on the pedestal. It is rotatably supported by 622 and has a structure that can rotate together with the first reel frame 612.

The rotation detection device 606 is composed of an optical index sensor 606A consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver, and a mounting pedestal 606B to which the index sensor 606A is attached. is configured such that a light shielding piece 612D provided on the first reel frame 612 passes through (see FIG. 208(b)). Note that the mounting base 606B is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624. The slot machine 100 determines the position of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 in the rotational direction based on the detection results of the rotation detection device 606, and moves the reels 110 to 110 so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line 114. 112 is stopped. That is, when the light shielding piece 612D of the rotating reel 110 is detected by the index sensor 606A, the main control unit 300 resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero, and becomes able to control the stop position of the reel.

The reel lighting device 608 includes a lighting board 608B in which one cold cathode tube is arranged in the center, and a guide for guiding light emitted from the cold cathode tube in a predetermined direction with the lighting board 608B attached. The lighting case 608C includes a light plate, and the back cover 608A covers the back side of the lighting board 608B. Note that the lighting case 608C is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624 with the lighting board 608B and back cover 608A attached.
<Stepping motor>
FIG. 209 is an exploded perspective view of stepping motor 700. As shown in FIG. 209, the stepping motor 700 includes a motor shaft 710, a case member 720 that supports the motor shaft 710, and a first bearing 722 and a second bearing that are disposed on the case member 720 and support the motor shaft 710. , a stator 730 made of an electromagnet disposed inside the case member 720 and fixed, and a rotor 740 rotatably attached to the motor shaft 710. The stepping motor 700 of this embodiment is a PM (Permanent) motor.
This is a Magnet type stepping motor, and is configured so that the motor rotates once in 96 steps of 1-2 phase excitation type. In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the reel and the motor is 1:5.25, so the reel rotates once in 504 steps (=5.25×96).

The motor shaft 710 is a shaft to which a drive gear 618 shown in FIGS. 207 and 208 is attached and outputs power. Hereinafter, the end of the motor shaft 710 to which the drive gear 618 is attached will be referred to as the output end 710A, and the opposite end will be referred to as the rear end 710B.

The case member 720 is a hollow cylindrical body with a bottom, which includes a substantially cylindrical base portion 720A with an open end and a lid portion 720B disposed so as to close the opening of the base portion 720A. Case member 720 accommodates stator 730 and rotor 740 therein, and supports motor shaft 710, which penetrates from the bottom of base portion 720A to lid portion 720B, via first bearing 722 and second bearing 724. ing. Further, the base portion 720A is provided with a fixing member 720C having a hole through which a mounting screw 624 for fixing and supporting the metal frame 626 shown in FIG. 207 is inserted.

The first bearing 722 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately at the center of the lid portion 720B of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the output end 710A.

The second bearing 724 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately at the center of the bottom of the base portion 720A of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the rear end 710B.

The stator 730 is arranged so as to surround the rotor 740, and drive coils are wound in two stages (A phase, B phase). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the magnetic pole teeth form a triangle (the upward direction is referred to as A phase and B phase, and the downward direction is referred to as A-phase and B-phase. A phase and B phase are electrical angle 90 degree phase relationship, A phase and A-phase and B phase and B-phase have a phase relationship of 180 electrical degrees), each magnetic pole (A phase, A-phase, B phase, B-phase) has 12 times per rotation. It has become a tooth. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the arrangement of magnetic poles of stator 730. As shown in FIG. 210, the magnetic poles are circumferentially arranged in the clockwise order of A phase, B phase, A-phase, and B-phase.

In this embodiment, the rotor 740 is made of a permanent magnet and has 24 magnetic poles.

Here, the operating principle of stepping motor 700 will be explained. The stepping motor 700 rotates the rotor 740 by passing current through a coil wound around the stator 730 to sequentially magnetize each phase of the stator 730 based on an excitation pattern described below, and attracting the rotor 740 with magnetic force. It is configured as follows.

In the 1-2 phase excitation type, the four phases of the stator 730 described above are, for example, A phase (1 phase excitation) → A phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as AB phase. 2 phase excitation) → B phase (1 phase excitation). ) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B-phase. 2-phase By excitation in the order of (excitation) → B-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) →... The rotor 740 is rotated in a fixed direction.

More specifically, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal (for example, a high-level signal) to the phase that excites the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700 via the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. At the same time, a predetermined phase is excited by outputting an off-level pulse signal (for example, a low-level signal) to a phase that is not being excited. As a result, the rotor 740 of the stepping motor 700 is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step). For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal to the A phase of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700, and at the same time outputs an off-level pulse signal to the B phase, A-phase, and B-phase. By exciting only the A phase, the rotor is rotated by one pulse (one step), and thereafter, by switching the excitation in the above-mentioned order, the rotor is rotated by a predetermined pulse. In addition, A phase → AB phase → B phase → A-B phase → A- phase → A-B- phase → B- phase → AB- phase (or A phase → AB- phase → B- phase → A-B- The rotation of 8 pulses (8 steps) of phase→A-phase→AB phase→B phase→AB phase) is hereinafter referred to as one cycle.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is set to 504 pulses (504 pulses/8 pulses = 63 cycles). Therefore, the rotation angle of the rotor 740 per one pulse is approximately 0.71428 degrees (=360/504).

In addition, the number of steps (pulse number) required to rotate the reels once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and as explained using FIG. 205(a), there are 21 symbols on one reel. are arranged, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21=24 steps.
<Excitation table>
A drive signal output from the CPU 304 to the drive circuit 322 is stored on the ROM 306 as an excitation table. The CPU 304 outputs the designated drive signal by referring to this excitation table. FIG. 211 is a table showing the contents of the excitation table of this embodiment. The data of each excitation table (also called rotation control data because it is data for controlling the rotation of the reel) consists of six bit data (specifically, A-I0, A-I1, A-Phase, B-I0). , B-I1, B-Phase) to represent the excitation phase and excitation force. Specifically, the combination of A-I0 and A-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the A-phase or A-phase coil, and if A-I0 is 0 and A- 0% if I1 is 0, 20% if A-I0 is 1, 20% if A-I1 is 0, 60% if A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, 1, when A-I1 is 1, it indicates 100%, when A-Phase is 1, it indicates excitation of A-phase, and when it is 0, it indicates excitation of A-phase. Similarly, the combination of B-I0 and B-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the B-phase or B-phase coil, and B-I0 is 0, B-I1 0% if B-I0 is 0, 20% if B-I1 is 0, 60% if B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 1, B-I0 is 1 , BI1 indicates 100%, when B-Phase is 1, it indicates B-phase excitation, and when B-Phase is 0, it indicates B-phase excitation.

For example, in the excitation table "55H" whose table number is "B0", A-I0 is 1, AI1 is 0, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 1, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is 1, indicating that the AB phase is excited at 20%. In addition, in the excitation table "26H" with the table number "C2", A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 0, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 0, it indicates that the A phase is excited at 60% (the B-phase is 0% and therefore not excited). Therefore, when switching the table number as "C0" → "C1" → "C2" → "C3" → "C4" → "C5" → "C6" → "C7", AB phase → A phase → It is possible to rotate the rotor 740 by an angle equivalent to one cycle by energizing each phase by 60% in the order of AB-phase → B-phase → AB-phase → A-phase → AB-phase → B-phase. can. As described above, in this embodiment, the rotation of the reel is controlled by outputting the excitation table data (rotation control data) composed of 6 bits as a drive signal to the drive circuit 322. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 211, 0% excitation force is also expressed as no excitation, 20% excitation force is also expressed as weak excitation, 60% excitation force is also expressed as medium excitation, and 100% excitation force is also expressed as strong excitation.
<Rotation control table>
FIG. 212 is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of this embodiment. The rotation control table is stored on the ROM 306, and stores the contents of rotation control for each reel control status (specifically, it is composed of a general-purpose offset counter value, an excitation table, and a holding parameter). The reel control status is information regarding the control state of the reel that is stored independently for each reel 110 to 112, and is information indicating that each reel of the reels 110 to 112 is in a stopped state. "Stop control state (under stop control)", "Acceleration state (under acceleration control)" which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in an acceleration state, and "Acceleration state (under acceleration control)" which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in a constant speed state. ``Constant speed state (under constant speed control)'', which is information indicating that reels 110 to 112 are in a retracted state, ``retracted state (under retracting control)'', which is information indicating that each reel of reels 110 to 112 is in a retracted state, and reel 110 to 112. "Brake state (brake control in progress)" is information indicating that each reel 112 is in a brake state, and "brake state (brake control in progress)" is information indicating that each reel 110 to 112 is in reel production (details will be described later). "Reel performance control in progress" is stored. In this embodiment, the constant speed state is further classified into two states with different excitation forces: "constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)" which is set immediately after the acceleration state, and "constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)". There is a "constant speed 2 state (during constant speed 2 control)" which is set immediately after "constant speed 1 control in progress". The constant speed 1 state is provided to stably rotate the reels 110 to 112 and to save power, and the constant speed 2 state is provided to suppress the heat generation of the reels 110 to 112 by weakening the excitation force. It is set in. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment changes the reel control status as follows: Under stop control → Under acceleration control → Under constant speed 1 control → Under constant speed 2 control → Under pull-in control → Under brake control → Under stop control, The rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is controlled by selecting an excitation table (rotation control data) corresponding to each reel status.

For example, when the reel control status is "under acceleration control", as shown in FIG. , the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is held for "12", and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set to "12". 3" holding time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "30H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "3" is sequentially controlled from the top row of the table to the bottom row as follows: "3" holding time... Set the data. Then, the reels 110 to 112 are accelerated by gradually decreasing the retention time of the sequentially set rotation control data.

Note that the general-purpose offset counter value is a number indicating the order in which each rotation control data is executed in each reel control status (0 origin), and is a cyclic value that returns to 0 after 7. Further, the holding time (holding parameter) indicates the time for holding the set rotation control data, and one holding time indicates one interrupt time (for example, 1.49 ms). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212, during "acceleration control" of this embodiment, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed, which requires a time of 89.4 ms (=1.49 x 60). It is configured as follows.

In addition, when the reel control status is "constant speed 1 control in progress", as shown in FIG. 212, first, the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "0" is Then, the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set. The rotation control data is set sequentially from the top row to the bottom row of the table, and the rotation control data listed in the table is set as one set and repeated 16 times. In other words, the reels are stably rotated at a constant speed by executing 16 sets of sequentially set rotation control data by switching them at one holding time. As a result, "during constant speed 1 control" in this embodiment is configured to require 190.72 ms (=1.49 x 8 x 16 sets) for 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation). ing. During the constant speed 1 control described above, a control pattern such as one set of rotation control data is always repeated a predetermined number of times.

In addition, when the reel control status is "constant speed 2 control in progress", as shown in FIG. Then, the rotation control data of the excitation table "06H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "26H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set. The rotation control data is set sequentially from the top row to the bottom row of the table, such as "1" holding time, and so on. That is, the reels are rotated at a constant speed by switching sequentially set rotation control data every one holding time. As a result, during "constant speed 2 control" in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the state of 1-2 phase 60% excitation (medium excitation) continues until there is a stop operation in the stop possible state, which will be described in detail later. has been done. In the constant speed 2 control described above, a control pattern such as rotation control data with a general-purpose offset counter value of "0" to "7" is repeated an indefinite number of times, and when a stop operation is performed in a state where it is possible to stop, the control pattern is stopped in the middle of the control pattern. Even if there is, the constant speed 2 control is ended.

Further, when the reel control status is "under retraction control", the rotation control data used during "constant speed 2 control" is successively set. For example, in "constant speed 2 control", when the rotation control data of excitation table "42H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "5" is set to "1" holding time and then shifts to "retract control" , the rotation control data of the excitation table "62H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "6" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "64H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "7" is set. After setting the hold time to "1", set the rotation control data of each excitation table whose number of steps corresponds to the number of pull-in frames (number of pull-in frames x 24) and the general-purpose offset counter value corresponds to 0 to 7 to hold the "1" hold time. The setting is repeated one by one (in this embodiment, this is to stop at the AB phase).

In the following explanation, the process is performed separately into the second constant speed control process (FIG. 222) and the pull-in control process (FIG. 225), but "constant speed 2 control" and "during pull-in control" are combined as shown in FIG. 212. ``Second constant speed control'' shown in is now in progress.

Furthermore, when the reel control status is "brake control in progress", as shown in Figure 212, the rotating reel is braked by performing 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) for 74.5ms. , the reels are stopped.

Further, when the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", as shown in FIG. 212, the stopped state is maintained by continuing the 1-2 phase 20% excitation (weak excitation).
<Operation>
Next, the operation of the slot machine 100 including the above-mentioned stepping motor 700 will be explained.
<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main processing of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. 213. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section 300.

The basic control of the game is mainly performed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300, and unless a power outage or the like is detected, the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main processing of the main control section shown in the figure.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 shown in FIG. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 shown in FIG. 202 is turned on in response to the insertion of medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 204. Note that if the player wins a prize in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, it determines the number of inserted medals, determines a valid winning line, and generates it in the random number generation circuit 316. The random numbers (first random number and second random number) are obtained. Further, in this step S102, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S103, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. Details of this winning combination internal lottery process will be described later.

In step S104, reel stop preparation processing is performed. In the reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each reel 110 to 112 based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103.

In step S105, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation. Details of this reel rotation start processing will also be described later.

Steps S106 and S107 are performed for each reel, and are performed for three reels 110 to 112, so they are repeated three times. A stop button reception flag is prepared in the RAM 308 for each reel. Each reel is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one correspondence, and the stop button reception flag also corresponds to the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one relationship. This stop button reception flag is set to either allow reception or prohibition of reception. In step S106, since the reel rotation start process (step S105) has been started, the stop button acceptance flag is set to acceptable. The stop button acceptance flag is set to prohibit acceptance when the corresponding stop button is operated during the stop button acceptance process in the reel rotation control process executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later. In step S107, it is determined whether the stop button reception flag, which was set to allow reception in step S106, has returned to prohibition of reception. This step S107 is repeatedly executed until the stop button acceptance flag returns to prohibited acceptance. That is, in step S107, the process waits for operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 to be accepted. When the determination in step S107 becomes Yes regarding all three reels 110 to 112, all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the following step S108, a winning determination is made for the symbols stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139. Here, when a winning symbol combination corresponding to an internally won winning combination or a winning combination whose flag is being carried over is aligned (displayed) on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Replay-Replay-Replay" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a replay prize has been won. Further, in this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, medal payout processing is performed. In this medal payout process, if there is a winning combination that has a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control is performed to shift the gaming state, and for example, in the case of a BB (big bonus) win, preparations are made to start the BB (big bonus) game from the next time, and in those final games, , prepare to start the normal game next time. Further, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S209 shown in FIG. 216) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.
<Winning role internal lottery process>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 213.

In step S1031, the first random number obtained in step S102 and the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 are used to perform an internal lottery for winning combinations as shown in FIG. 205(b). As a result of this internal lottery, if any winning combination is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on internally.

Subsequently, in step S1032, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reel performance can be executed. The reel performance is a performance that makes the rotating reels appear to have stopped, and in the reel performance, strictly speaking, the reels are not stopped but are swaying. The reel performances in this embodiment include a first reel performance that does not require any operation by the player, and a second reel performance that requires the player to operate stop buttons 137 to 139. The first reel performance is a so-called reel action, and the second reel performance is a so-called pseudo game. The lottery here uses the second random number obtained in step S102 and the reel performance execution possibility lottery table stored in the ROM 306 to execute the first reel performance, the second reel performance, and the reel performance. One of the lottery results is derived from among the lottery results such that ``is not executed''.

In step S1033, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect (reel action) has been won, and if it has been won, the presence of the first reel effect is set in the reel effect information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1034); The process advances to step S1035. On the other hand, if the winner has not been selected, the process directly advances to step S1035.

In step S1035, it is determined whether or not the second reel performance (pseudo game) has been won, and if it has been won, the presence of the second reel performance is set in the reel performance information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1036); The process advances to step S1037. On the other hand, if the winner has not been selected, the process directly advances to step S1037.

In step S1037, preparations are made to transmit, to the first sub-control unit 400, an internal lottery result command indicating the results of the internal lottery for each winning combination and reel performance, and the winning combination internal lottery process ends.
<Reel rotation start process>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation start process in step S105 shown in FIG. 213.

In step S1050, a gaming time monitoring timer value is acquired. The gaming time monitoring timer is a timer stored in a specific storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is a timer that sets the time required for one game to a predetermined time (for example, the minimum playing time of 4.1 seconds). This timer is set for the purpose of limiting the number of game media gained or lost per unit time, and limiting the gambling nature of the game. The gaming time monitoring timer is set to a predetermined timer value (for example, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) in step S1052, which will be described later, and is activated every time the main control unit 300 executes timer interrupt processing (described later). is decremented.

In step S1051, it is determined whether the acquired gaming time monitoring timer value has exceeded 4.1 seconds. In other words, if the value of the gaming time monitoring timer is 0, it means that more than 4.1 seconds have elapsed, but if the value of the gaming time monitoring timer is greater than 0, 4.1 seconds have elapsed. There will be no. If the game time monitoring timer value has exceeded 4.1 seconds, the current game may be started, and the process advances to step S1052. On the other hand, if the gaming time monitoring timer value has not exceeded 4.1 seconds, the process returns to step S1050 and repeats the process. While the process is repeated, the timer value of the gaming time monitoring timer is decremented every time the main control unit 300 interrupts the timer, and when the gaming time monitoring timer reaches 0, the process advances to step S1052.

In step S1052, the gaming time monitoring timer value is reset. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds is stored in a specific area of RAM 308. In addition, in this embodiment, the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set is the start timing of one game. The end timing of one game is the next time the game time monitoring timer value is set. In other words, one game is the period from setting the gaming time monitoring timer value to setting the next gaming time monitoring timer value. In addition, since the gaming time monitoring timer value is set each time each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating, the time period from when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating to when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating next time is set. It can also be played in one game. Note that the end timing of one game may be when the game time monitoring timer value becomes 0 and the game state control process of S110 in FIG. 213 ends. In addition, the start timing of one game is when a valid start lever is accepted, the end timing of one game is when a valid bet button operation can be accepted, and the start lever is valid from the time when a bet button operation can be accepted. The period up to the time of reception may be used as a preparation period for the start of the next game.

In step S1053, a reel rotation start command to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is set and preparations for transmission are made. The reel rotation start command is a command that indicates the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

In step S1054, the status of the left reel 110 is set to "start rotation."

In step S1055, the status of the middle reel 111 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1056, the status of the right reel 112 is set to "start rotating."

In step S1057, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect or the second reel effect is set in the reel effect information set in step S1034 or step S1036 shown in FIG. , the reel control status is set to "reel performance control in progress" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start process is ended. If it has not been set, the reel control status is set to "acceleration state (under acceleration control)" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start process ends. As mentioned above, the reel control status is information regarding the reel control status that is stored independently for each reel 110 to 112 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. "Control state (during stop control)", "Acceleration state (during acceleration control)", "Constant speed 1 state (during constant speed 1 control)", "Constant speed 2 state (during constant speed 2 control)", "Retraction state (During retraction control),” “brake state (during brake control),” and “Reel performance control in progress” is stored. Further, in step S1059, the acceleration start request flag is turned on. The acceleration start request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is referenced in the acceleration control process described later.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. 216. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 1.5 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that no processing abnormality is detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area divided into two areas.

In step S204, various game processing is performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 204), and processing is performed according to this status. For example, if the interrupt status is in the process of inserting medals, a medal insertion acceptance process is performed, and if the interrupt status is in the process of dispensing, a process of dispensing medals is performed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. Update various timers by their respective time units. In this embodiment, specifically, the above-mentioned gaming time monitoring timer is updated by subtraction.

In step S206, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and when an error is detected, performs error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S207, stop button display control processing is performed. Details of the stop button display control process will be described later.

In step S208, if the status of each reel stored in the RAM 308 is "rotation start", reel rotation control processing (described in detail later) is performed. In this reel rotation control process, the rotation of the reels is controlled, and the actual reel rotation is controlled based on the stop order and stop situation of the reels 110 to 112 from among the plurality of reel stop data candidates selected in step S106 of the main control unit main process. After determining reel stop data to be used for reel stop control, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped based on the determined reel stop data.

In step S209, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, where bit 15 is strobe information (when turned on, it indicates that data is being set), and bit 11 is strobe information. -14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a start lever reception command, an internal lottery command, a rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and a stop button associated with acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139. reception command, stop position information command associated with stop processing of reels 110 to 112, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). It consists of

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine performance control in accordance with changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and also to Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the contents of the production control.

In step S210, external signal output processing is performed. In this external signal output processing, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

In step S211, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S213, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S212.

In step S212, various processes (timer interrupt termination process) for terminating the timer interrupt process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 213.

On the other hand, in step S213, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.
<Stop button display control processing>
Next, the stop button display control process will be described in detail using FIG. 217. Note that FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in FIG. 216.

In step S2071, it is determined whether at least one of the stop button acceptance flags corresponding to each of the three reels 110 to 112 is set to be acceptable. As described above, the stop button acceptance flag is set to be acceptable for each reel (for each stop button) in step S106 in the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 213. If all the stop button reception flags are set to prohibit reception, this stop button display control process ends, and if one or more stop button reception flags are set to reception, all stop button display control processing ends. It is determined whether or not the reels 110 to 112 have already shifted to the constant speed 2 state with reference to the reel control status of each reel (step S2702). In this step S2702, if the reel control status of each reel is one of "constant speed 2 state", "retraction state", and "brake state", the determination result is Yes, and the process advances to step S2703. On the other hand, if the reel control status of even one reel is "acceleration state" or "constant speed 1 state", this stop button display control process ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not a light shielding piece is detected by the index sensor for all the reels 110 to 112. The RAM 308 is provided with an index sensor detection storage area for storing detection information indicating whether the index sensor has detected a light shielding piece for each reel.In step S2703, the index sensor detection storage area for each reel is stored. Refers to the detected storage area and makes a determination. If undetected detection information is stored for even one reel, this stop button display control process ends. On the other hand, if detection information indicating that all the reels 110 to 112 have been detected is stored, the process advances to step S2704.

The RAM 308 also includes a light emission mode storage area that stores the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, a lighting mode storage area is prepared for each reel (stop button). The initial light emission mode of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, a non-emission mode (extinguished mode) or a first color light emission mode. Hereinafter, the initial light emission mode will be referred to as the first light emission mode. The first light emission mode is initially stored in the light emission mode storage area as light emission mode information. In the situation that has progressed to step S2704, all the reels 110 to 112 have not stopped (at least one reel is rotating), and all the reels 110 to 112 have already shifted to the constant speed 2 state, And the light shielding piece is detected. In this state, the light emitting mode of the light emitter provided inside the stop button for the reel that continues to rotate at constant speed 2 is changed from the first light emitting mode to the second light emitting mode. The second light emission mode is, for example, a blinking mode or a second color light emission mode. Further, when the first light emitting mode is a first color light emitting mode, it may be a non-light emitting mode (light-off mode). Furthermore, when the second light emission mode is a second color light emission mode, the first light emission mode may be a blinking mode. In this way, the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode may be different from each other, including the light-off mode and the blinking mode. The second light emission mode is a mode for notifying that the operation of the stop button in the second light emission mode is accepted. That is, this is a mode that notifies that the reel corresponding to the stop button in the second light emission mode is in a state where it can be stopped by operating the stop button. In step S2704, the light emitting body information in the light emitting mode storage area of the reel whose stop button acceptance flag is set to acceptable is updated to the second light emitting mode, and this stop button display control process ends. By executing this step S2704, for example, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped, all of those reels 110 to 112 have been shifted to the constant speed 2 state, and the light shielding piece is detected. In this case, the light emitting modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside all stop buttons 137 to 139 change to the second light emitting mode. In addition, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and the light shielding piece is detected, the remaining reels (rotating Only the light emitting mode of the light emitting body provided inside the stop button of the reel changes to the second light emitting mode.
<Reel rotation control processing>
Next, the reel rotation control process will be described in detail using FIG. 218. Note that FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation control process in step S208 shown in FIG. 216.

Steps S208a to S208c are performed for each reel and three reels 110 to 112, so step S208a is repeated at least three times. In this step S208a, it is determined whether the stop button acceptance flag is set to allow acceptance. That is, it is determined whether or not the target reel is rotating. If the stop button acceptance flag is set to prohibit acceptance, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a is executed for all reels, the process proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept, it is determined whether the light shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor (step S208b). The determination here is based on whether or not a detection signal from the index sensor has been received, and if it has not been received, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels or step S208a is executed for all reels. If so, the process advances to step S208d. On the other hand, if it has been received, the index sensor detection storage area of the target reel is updated to the detection information that has already been detected (step S208c), and the process proceeds to step S208d. In this way, in this embodiment, each time the reel rotation control process is executed, if the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept, it is determined whether the light shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor. Therefore, even if the reel control status is in the "acceleration state" or the "constant speed 1 state", the light shielding piece of the target reel can be detected. However, if the light shielding piece is detected only in a "certain state" (for example, "constant speed 1 state" or "constant speed 2 state", etc.), the reel control status is referred to between step S208a and step S208b. and performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a "certain state", and in the case of Yes, executes step S208b, and in the case of No, executes step S208a for the remaining reels, or executes step S208a for all reels. If S208a is being executed, the process may proceed to step S208d.

In step S208d, a stop button reception process is executed. This stop button acceptance process will be described later.

Steps S208f to S208k are performed for each reel, and are performed for three reels 110 to 112. In step S208f, reel control information is acquired. Here, the reel control information refers to the entire information regarding rotation control of the reels 110 to 112, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308. In this embodiment, the reel control information includes the values of the reel control status described above, the general-purpose offset counter, the reel control status transition counter described later, the holding counter, and the like.

In step S208g, reel control determination processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the acquired reel control information.

In step S208h, it is determined whether the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON. The reel drive signal switching request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and indicates whether or not the currently set rotation control data is to be switched. When the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, the currently set rotation control data is switched, and when the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, the currently set rotation control data is not switched. Note that the reel drive signal switching request flag is set in the acceleration control process. If the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, the process advances to step S208i, and if the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, the process advances to step S208k.

In step S208i, rotation control data is acquired based on the reel control status and general-purpose offset counter value included in the acquired reel control information. Specifically, the corresponding excitation table (rotation control data) is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 212 based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value. For example, if the reel control status is "under acceleration control" and the general-purpose offset counter value is "0", rotation control data of excitation table "77H" is acquired.

In step S208j, the rotation control data acquired in step S208i is set.

In step S208k, the reel control information is updated because the content of the reel control information has been changed in accordance with the above-described processing.
<Reel control judgment process>
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel control determination process in step S208g shown in FIG. 218. The reel control determination process is a process of sequentially switching reel rotation control according to the reel control status described above. Specifically, the processes are executed in the order of acceleration control process, reel effect control process, first constant speed control process, second constant speed control process, pull-in control process, and brake control process.

In step S301, the reel control status is acquired.

In step S302, it is determined whether the acquired reel control status is "under stop control", and when the acquired reel control status is "under stop control", the reel control determination process ends. On the other hand, if the acquired reel control state is not "stop control in progress", the process advances to S303.

In step S303, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "reel effect control in progress". When the reel control state is "reel performance control in progress", the process advances to step S304 and reel performance control processing is performed. As mentioned above, the reel performances include the first reel performance that does not require player operation (so-called reel action), and the reel performance that requires the player to operate the left, middle, and right stop buttons 137 to 139 (so-called pseudo game). There is. In controlling the first reel performance, at least one of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, and brake control of this game may be used, or the first reel performance control Each dedicated control process may be prepared. Furthermore, in the first reel performance, the reels may be accelerated and then decelerated (brake control may be executed) before maintaining a constant speed state. In the control of the second reel performance, at least one of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, brake control, and pull-in control of this game may be used, or the reel performance Each control process dedicated to control may be prepared. Furthermore, pull-in control may be performed based on the number of sliding pieces of 5 or more, which is not possible in this game. After the reel performance is finished, the rotation start timing of each reel is delayed and a random delay process is performed to prevent a plurality of reels from starting rotation at the same time, and then the reel control status is set to acceleration control. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "reel performance control in progress", the process advances to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "under acceleration control". When the reel control state is "under acceleration control", the process advances to step S306, and acceleration control processing (control processing for accelerating the rotation of the reels; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "under acceleration control", the process advances to step S307.

In step S307, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress". When the reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress", the process advances to step S308, and a first constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 1 control in progress", the process advances to step S309.

In step S309, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress". When the reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress", the process proceeds to step S310, and a second constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 2 control in progress", the process advances to step S311.

In step S311, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "brake control in progress". When the reel control state is "brake control in progress", the process advances to step S312, and brake control processing (control processing for stopping the rotation of the reels; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "brake control in progress", the process advances to step S313.

In step S313, since the reel control state is "under retraction control", retraction control processing (processing for controlling reel retraction to the stop position; details will be described later) is performed.
<Acceleration control processing>
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the acceleration control process in step S306 shown in FIG. 219.

In step S306a, it is determined whether there is an acceleration start request based on the acceleration start request flag. Note that since the acceleration start request flag is set to ON in step S1059 of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 215, the determination is YES in step S306a of the first timer interrupt process. Note that since the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF in step S306d, which will be described later, the determination is NO in step S306a of the second and subsequent timer interrupt processing. If there is a request to start acceleration, the process advances to step S306b, and if there is no request to start acceleration, the process advances to step S306f.

In step S306b, the value of the reel control status transition counter is set to 0, which is an initial value. Here, the reel control status transition counter is a counter that measures the number of repeated sets (cycle number) of rotation control data of 8 steps per cycle, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 212, it is repeated three times. and terminates the acceleration control process.

In step S306c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is an initial value.

In step S306d, the reel drive signal switching request flag is turned on. Also, the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306e, a dummy value of 0 is set to the value of a symbol interval counter (described in detail later). Note that the value of the symbol interval counter set in step S306e is used in the second constant speed control process described later. After completing the process in step S306e, the process advances to step S306q.

In step S306f, the value of the holding counter is subtracted by 1. The value of the holding counter is set in step S306q, which will be described later, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process. Note that the initial value set in the holding counter in step S306q is the value of the holding parameter corresponding to the set general-purpose offset counter value. For example, as shown in FIG. 212, when the general-purpose offset counter value is 0, is set to 12 as an initial value in the holding counter.

In step S306g, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306h, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted holding counter is 0 or not. If the value of the holding counter is 0, it is time to switch the rotation control data, so the process advances to step S306i, and if the value of the holding counter is not 0, it is not the time to switch the rotation control data, so the acceleration control process ends. become.

In step S306i, since it is time to switch the rotation control data, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON.

In step S306j, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter in order to set the next rotation control data.

In step S306k, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has ended, and the process advances to step S306l. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has ended. Since the control has not ended, the process advances to step S306q.

In step S306l, in order to move on to the next set (cycle) of rotation control, the general-purpose offset counter value is set to 0, which is an initial value.

In step S306m, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S306n, it is determined whether the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 3 or not. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 3, the process advances to step S306o, and if the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 3, the process advances to step S306q.

In step S306o, since all rotation controls set during acceleration control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 1 control in progress."

In step S306p, the value of the reel control status transition counter is set to 0, which is an initial value. After the process in step S306p ends, the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306q, the rotation control table shown in FIG. 212 is referred to, and the reel control status is "under acceleration control" and the holding parameter value corresponding to the set reel control status transition counter value and general-purpose offset counter value is acquired. Then, set the acquired retention parameter value as the initial value of the retention counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 212, when the reel control status transition counter value is 0 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value of the holding counter, and the reel control status transition counter value is 1 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0. In the case of 7, 1 is set as the initial value of the holding counter. After the process in step S306q ends, the acceleration control process ends.
<First constant speed control process>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process in step S308 shown in FIG. 219.

In step S308a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the first constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, since the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is performed. Note that since the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON in step S1309 of the acceleration control process, switching processing is not performed. During the second constant speed control process, it remains ON. Therefore, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 218, rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j of FIG. 218).

In step S308b, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process advances to step S308c to move on to the rotation control of the next set (cycle), and if the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is started. Since the rotation control has not ended, the first constant speed control process ends.

In step S308c, in order to move on to the next set (cycle) of rotation control, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to an initial value of 0.

In step S308d, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S308e, it is determined whether the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 16 or not. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 16, 16 sets of rotation control have been completed (see FIG. 212), so the process advances to step S308f. The constant speed control process ends.

In step S308f, since all the rotation controls set during constant speed 1 control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 2 control in progress."
<Second constant speed control process>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing in detail the second constant speed control process in step S310 shown in FIG. 219. The second constant speed control process mainly involves tracking the symbol positions on the reels. In order for the main control unit 300 to grasp the symbol position on the reels, two counters, a "symbol number counter" and a "symbol interval counter" are used to monitor the symbol position. Here, the "symbol number counter" and "symbol interval counter" will be explained.

FIG. 205 is also a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter. The symbol number counter is a counter provided in the RAM 308 to store and hold symbols located in the middle of the symbol display window 113, which is a reference position. The BB symbol is the reference position, and counting starts when the index sensor 606A passes the light shielding piece 612D. Each symbol and the count value are associated in advance, and the main control unit 300 can identify the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113 from the symbol number counter value when the reels are stopped and determine the winning amount. can. The symbol interval counter is also a counter provided in the RAM 308, and counts the number of drive pulses (timer interrupt processing number) per symbol. The main control unit 300 sets the number of drive pulses per symbol (here, 24) in the symbol interval counter, subtracts it every time a drive pulse is output, and when the value of the symbol interval counter reaches 0, the symbol number counter I am trying to update 1.

In step S310a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the second constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, since the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is performed. Furthermore, since the reel drive signal switching request flag continues to be ON, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 218, rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. (See step S208l of 218).

In step S310b, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process proceeds to step S310c in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle), and if the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is performed. Since the rotation control has not ended, the process advances to step S310d.

In step S310c, in order to move on to the next set (cycle) of rotation control, the general-purpose offset counter is set to an initial value of 0.

In step S310d, the value of the symbol interval counter is subtracted by 1. That is, the value of the symbol interval counter is decremented every interrupt time.

In step S310e, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the symbol interval counter is 0 or not. If the value of the symbol interval counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S310f, and if the value of the symbol interval counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S310h.

In step S310f, if the value of the symbol interval counter is 0, the next symbol is substituted, so the initial value 24 is set as the value of the symbol interval counter.

In step S310g, the value of the symbol number counter is subtracted by 1 in order to update to the next symbol.

In step S310h, index sensor detection information is acquired from the index sensor detection storage area of the RAM 308. As described above, this detection information is updated during the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 (step S208c). In each of the three reels, the light shielding piece is provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0, and the light shielding piece is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the index sensor. Detection is determined when the

In step S310i, if the acquired index sensor detection information has been detected, the process proceeds to step S310j, and if it has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S310n.

In step S310j, since the reel symbol position has been searched, stop button valid information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 308. In other words, when the light shielding piece provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0 is detected in a constant speed state, the stop position of the reel can be controlled, and the reel is in a stopable state. become. When the stop button validity information is set (when the stop button is enabled), the operation of the stop button becomes accepted. Note that if a stop button for which stop button enable information is not set is operated, even if the operation itself is accepted, the operation is invalidated and the reel corresponding to the stop button does not stop. Alternatively, the operation itself may not be accepted.

In this embodiment, the stop button valid information is set during the second constant speed control process, but the stop button valid information is set by executing steps S310h to S310j during the first constant speed control process. may be set during the first constant speed control process.

In step S310k, the initial value 24 is set to the value of the symbol interval counter.

In step S310l, the initial value 0 is set to the value of the symbol number counter.

In step S310m, the step-out detection counter provided in the RAM 308 is set to an initial value of 0. After the process in step S310m ends, the second constant speed control process ends.

In step S310n, step-out detection processing is performed based on the value of the step-out detection counter. In the step-out detection process, the value of the step-out detection counter is incremented by 1 for every 1 interruption to a specific value (for example, the value of the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees), here 504 ), it is determined that a step-out (so-called step-out) has occurred, and all reels that have not been operated are restarted from acceleration control, but only the reels that have stepped out may be restarted from acceleration control. Note that in this embodiment, the step-out detection process is performed only in the second constant-speed control process, so if the step-out detection process occurs during the period of the first constant-speed control process or acceleration control process that precedes the second constant-speed control process. In this case, the step-out detection process is not performed and the main control unit 300 is unable to detect the step-out, but the step-out detection process may be performed even during this period. Further, in addition to step-out, processing for detecting other abnormal conditions (for example, resonance, misstep, motor stop) may be performed. After the process in step S310n ends, the second constant speed control process ends.
<Stop button reception process>
FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing in detail the stop button reception process in step S208d shown in FIG. 218. Note that the stop button acceptance process is executed after the stop button enable information is set in a state where operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, that is, in step S310j of the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. It is something that will be done. The stop button reception process is a process of determining the stop position of the corresponding reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S208d1, stop reception information is acquired. Here, the stop acceptance information is stop button validity information or a part of reel control information, and means all the information necessary for determining whether to accept a stop.

In step S208d2, a stoppable reel is determined from the acquired stop reception information, and stoppable reel information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example, when it is determined that the left reel 110 is a stoppable reel, , setting the left reel 110).

In step S208d3, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the reel represented by the set stoppable reel information has been operated. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel has been received. If the stop button has been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d4, and if the stop button has not been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d8.

In step S208d4, data regarding the reel to be stopped (reel data to be stopped) is acquired.

In step S208d5, a pull-in counter setting process (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S208d6, when the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel is operated, the status of the reel on which the stop operation was performed is updated to "stop".

In step S208d7, the stop button reception flag, which has been set to allow reception, is set to prohibit reception.

In step S208d8, the light emitting mode information stored in the light emitting mode storage area prepared for each reel in the RAM 308 is updated. That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body built into the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped is updated from the second light emitting mode (e.g., blue light emitting mode) to the first light emitting mode (e.g., red light emitting mode). . When step S208d8 ends, the stop button reception process ends.
<Pull-in counter setting process>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process in step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223.

In step S8d51, the value of the symbol number counter is acquired and the position where the stop operation is performed is detected.

In step S8d52, the number of drawn frames is obtained from the selected reel stop control data based on the position where the stop operation was performed. That is, the reel stop control data is selected based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal lottery result) shown in FIG. 214. The reel stop control data defines the number of retractable frames corresponding to the symbol position number at the symbol position (middle stage reference) when the stop operation is performed.

In step S8d53, the number of remaining interrupts is obtained by referring to the excitation table. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the stop is made at a position corresponding to the AB phase, the rotation control data next to the excitation phase indicated by the previously set rotation control data (the last rotation control data set during constant speed 2 control) is The number of steps from the excitation phase to the excitation phase immediately before the AB phase is acquired as the number of remaining interrupts. For example, if a stop operation is performed during constant speed 2 control using the excitation table 22H, the number of remaining interrupts will be 3 steps.

In step S8d54, a pull-in counter value is calculated from the acquired pull-in frame number and the remaining number of interruptions, and the calculated pull-in counter value is set in the pull-in counter. Specifically, the rotor 740 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, in the AB phase corresponding to the stopped and held position) before the planned stopped and held position (for example, the position corresponding to the predetermined AB phase). The value up to the position corresponding to the AB phase one cycle before becomes the number of steps corresponding to the number of frames to be pulled in, and the value obtained by adding the remaining number of interrupts to this value is set in the pull-in counter.

In step S8d55, the reel control status is set to "retracting control in progress".
<Pull-in control processing>
FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process in step S313 shown in FIG. 219. Here, the pull-in control process refers to the reel movement from the symbol position where the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to a predetermined number of frames ( In this embodiment, this refers to the process of sliding (0 to 4 frames) and stopping. As a result, for winning combinations that have been internally won in an internal lottery or winning combinations that are carrying over flags, it is allowed to display all the corresponding symbol combinations, but if this is not the case, each winning combination is allowed to be displayed. The corresponding symbol combinations are not displayed together.

In step S3131, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the pull-in control process, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is updated every time the timer interrupt process is performed. Furthermore, since the reel drive signal switching request flag continues to remain ON, in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218, rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process ( (See step S208j in FIG. 218).

In step S3132, it is determined whether the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8 or not. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the remaining rotation control of the set (cycle) has been completed, and the process advances to step S3133. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is completed. Since the remaining rotation control has not been completed, the process advances to step S3134.

In step S3133, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is an initial value.

In step S3134, the value of the pull-in counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the pull-in counter is subtracted by 1.

In step S3135, it is determined whether the updated value of the pull-in counter is 0 or not. If the value of the attraction counter is 0, the process advances to step S3136, and if the value of the attraction counter is not 0, the attraction control process is ended.

In step S3136, the reel control status is set to "brake control in progress" because the value of the retraction counter becomes 0 and the stop position has been reached.

In step S3137, the initial value of 50 is set to the value of the holding counter. Here, the set holding counter value 50 is the holding time of the rotation control data when the reel control status is "brake control in progress" and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0 (see FIG. 212). Note that after the process in step S3137 ends, the pull-in control process ends.
<Brake control processing>
FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control process in step S312 shown in FIG. 219.

In step S3121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding counter. The value of the holding counter is initialized in step S3137 shown in FIG. 225 described above, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process.

In step S3122, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted holding counter is 0 or not. If the value of the holding counter is 0, the process advances to step S3123, and if the value of the holding counter is not 0, the brake control process is ended.

In step S3123, since the rotation control in the brake control has ended, the reel control status is set to "reel stop control in progress". Note that when the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", weak excitation (20% excitation) is continued at the stop holding position (for example, a predetermined AB phase) (see FIG. 212). After completing the process in step S3123, the brake control process ends.
<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 227. Note that (a) in the same figure is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 4B is a flowchart of command input processing of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 1C is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and ) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S2003.

In step S2003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S2004, first sub-control unit command input processing (described in detail later) is performed. In the first sub-control unit command input process, it is determined whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S2005, effect update processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S2004, performance data may be read out from the ROM 406 based on the results of each event process (for example, performance setting process, game state control process, etc.) corresponding to this command. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data of each effect device (speaker, lamp, liquid crystal image display device, shutter, etc.) is updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S2005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S2007, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S2005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S2008, information output processing is performed. In the information output process, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S2005, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S2002. As a result, the set control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.

Next, the command input process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 227(b). This first sub-control unit 400 command input process is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit 400 command input process in step S2004 of FIG. 227(a).

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command in the command storage area of the RAM 408. If there is an unprocessed command, the process advances to step S2102, and if there is no unprocessed command, the first sub-control unit 400 command input process ends.

In step S2102, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the unprocessed command. For example, if the unprocessed command is a medal insertion command, the medal insertion process, if the start lever reception command, the start lever reception process, if it is an internal lottery command, the internal lottery process, the stop button In the case of a reception command, the process jumps to stop button reception processing, in the case of a display judgment command, jumps to display judgment processing, and in the case of a gaming state command, jumps to gaming state control processing.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 227(c). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S2201 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 227(d). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S2301, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 227(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S2302, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, a specific example will be described in which each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating from a stopped state.

First, a conventional example will be explained using FIG. 228.

FIG. 228 shows a conventional change in the state of three reels, a change in the detection state of the light shielding piece provided on each reel in the index sensor, a change in the state in which the stop button corresponding to each reel can be operated, 5 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of a light emitter built into each stop button.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 shows start lever operation, left reel, middle reel, and right reel in order from the top. At the top of the timing chart, symbols indicating the timings (a) to (f) are marked, and below them are the arrows (a), (i), and (u). Arrows are shown. The arrow (a) indicates the period during which the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed. Before the period indicated by the arrow in (a), each reel 110 to 112 was in a stopped state after rotating. The arrow in (i) is an arrow representing the period during which the first constant speed control is being executed, shown in FIG. 212, and the arrow in (c) is an arrow representing the period in which the second constant speed control is being executed, shown in FIG. be.

At the timing (a), the start lever is turned on, and the left reel, middle reel, and right reel start rotating all at once. As indicated by the arrow (a), all reels are in a period where acceleration control is being executed. The acceleration control ends at the timing (b), and as indicated by the arrow (b), all the reels enter a period in which the first constant speed control is being executed. The first constant speed control ends at the timing (c), and as shown by the arrow in (c), all the reels enter a period in which the second constant speed control is being executed. In this example, no light shielding piece of any reel is detected during the period when the acceleration control is being executed or during the period when the first constant speed control is being executed, and during the period when the second constant speed control is being executed. The light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), the light shielding piece 612D of the middle reel is detected at the timing (e), and the light shielding piece of the right reel is detected at the timing (f). The timing at which the light shielding piece of each reel is detected varies, and the detection timing differs depending on the position at which the reel stopped before starting rotation.

Conventionally, during the execution period of the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, each stop button becomes ready for operation at the same time at the timing when all the light shielding pieces are detected. Until then, the operation of each stop button is not accepted even if it is operated, but after the timing (f), the operation of any stop button is accepted. The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 shows whether the operation of the left stop button can be accepted or not, the operation of the middle stop button can be accepted or not, and the operation of the right stop button can be accepted or not. In addition, even if the stop button operation is accepted, the operation may be treated as invalid or valid in terms of control.In short, if we consider the stopping of the reels, the operation of the stop button may be treated as invalid or valid. Acceptable/unacceptable indicates a reel stoppable/unstoppable state.

Further below, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body built into each stop button (hereinafter referred to as "stop button LED") is shown. The first light emitting mode of each stop button LED is, for example, a red light emitting mode, and the second light emitting mode is, for example, a blue light emitting mode. Both stop button LEDs change to the second light emission mode after the timing (f). That is, in a state in which stop button operations cannot be accepted (reels cannot be stopped), all stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode, and when the stop button is in a state in which operations can be accepted (reels can be stopped), all stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode. The button LED also changes to the second light emitting mode. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 218, the stop button LED notifies in the first light emitting mode that the stop button operation cannot be accepted (the reel cannot be stopped), and the stop button LED notifies that the stop button operation is not accepted (the reel can be stopped). state) is notified in a second light emitting mode.

FIG. 229 shows changes in the state of each reel 110 to 112, changes in the detection state of each light shielding piece, changes in the operation acceptance state of each stop button 137 to 139, and changes in each stop button LED 137a to 139 in this embodiment. 139 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of the light emitting device 139a. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 228 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 228.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, when the light shielding piece of any one of the three reels 110 to 112 is detected, the stop button 137 to 139 corresponding to the reel for which the light shielding piece has been detected is activated to accept the operation. Transition to possible state. That is, after starting rotation, it is possible to shift from the reel-unstoppable state to the reel-stoppable state for each reel. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, since the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (detected at the timing (d)), the left stop button 137 is detected first (detected at the timing (d)). ), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (detected at the timing (e)), so the middle stop button 138 shifts to the operation ready state at the timing (e). However, as the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is finally detected (detected at the timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to the operation ready state at the timing (f). However, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a do not change from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode until the timing when all the light shielding pieces are detected (timing (f)), as in the conventional case. . That is, it is possible to transition from the reel-stoppable state to the reel-stoppable state for each reel, but the three stop button LEDs collectively change to the second light emitting mode at the timing when the last reel shifts to the reel stoppable state. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the stop button LED is in the first light emitting mode, the corresponding stop button may be in an operation ready state. The arrows (E) shown in FIG. 229 represent the period during which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-receivable state. On the other hand, the arrow (o) represents the period during which all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready for operation.

According to the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, by accepting a stop operation from a reel whose light-shielding piece has been detected and the reel stop position can be controlled, the stop button operation can be accepted faster than before. You will be able to do it. Therefore, the game progresses at a good pace without the player feeling stressed. Further, the sense of realism of the game may be enhanced by immediate response to the player's operations.

FIG. 230 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the rotating right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 230, step-out occurs on the right reel 112 at a stage when no light shielding piece of any reel is detected. That is, while the second constant speed control is being executed on all reels 110 to 112, step-out occurs only on the right reel 112 (timing (g)). After a step-out occurs on the right reel 112, but before the step-out is detected in the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 222 (timing (a')), the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 It is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation (the left reel 110 becomes ready for stopping). In addition, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected before the step-out is detected (timing (e)), and the middle stop button 138 is also in the state ready for operation before the step-out is detected (the middle reel 111 is also in the state ready to be stopped). ). Even if some of the stop buttons are ready for operation (during the period indicated by the arrow in (e)), some of the stop buttons will not be operated, and eventually the right reel 112 will step out at the timing of (a'). is detected. At the time when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, both the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111 continue to rotate at a constant speed, but when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, all three reels start over from acceleration control. become. That is, not only the right reel 112 that has stepped out, but also the remaining two reels (110, 111) that were rotating at a constant speed are accelerated again. Due to step-out and re-acceleration, the positional relationship of the light-shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after re-acceleration, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (d')), then the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (f')). Therefore, after reacceleration, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before reacceleration. Note that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a remain in the first light emission mode before reacceleration, but change to the second light emission mode at timing (f') after reacceleration.

FIG. 231 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 230 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 230. In FIG. 231, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 231, after the right reel 112 steps out (timing in (g)), the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing in (d)), and the left stop button 137 is operated. Becomes ready for reception. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the step-out occurring on the right reel 112 is detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. Note that the timing chart in FIG. 231 shows the state of the left reel 110, ignoring the reel retraction control (the same applies to subsequent timing charts). Note that before the step-out that occurs on the right reel 112 is detected, the light shielding piece on the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)), but the middle stop button 138 is not operated and the middle reel 111 remains at the fixed position. Continue rotating rapidly.

Eventually, the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected at timing (a'). At the timing (a'), the left reel 110 is in a stopped state, the middle reel 111 is in a constant speed rotation state, and the right reel 112 is in a step-out state. When step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, acceleration control is started again for only the rotating reels, excluding the stopped reel. As a result, the right reel 112 that stepped out and the middle reel 111 accelerate again, and the left reel 110 that stopped earlier maintains the stopped state.

The left reel 110 maintains a stopped state even when the re-accelerated right reel 112 and middle reel 111 shift to constant speed rotation, so the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is not detected and the left stop button 137 is never in a state where it can accept operations.

The light shielding piece of the re-accelerated right reel 112 is detected at the timing (d'), and the light shielding piece of the re-accelerated middle reel 111 is detected at the timing (f'). When the light-shielding pieces of all the rotating reels are detected except for the stop reel, the stop button LED corresponding to the rotating reel changes from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode. In the example shown in FIG. 231, at the timing (f') when the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, the right stop button LED 139a and the middle stop button LED 138a change to the second light emission mode. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode.

FIG. 232 is a timing chart when a power outage recovery occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (timing of (d)), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e)), and finally The light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). During the period indicated by the arrow (o), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stoppable state. However, when none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is operated and the three reels 110 to 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed, a power outage occurs. All three reels 110 to 112, which were rotating due to inertia until the power is restored, stop. Eventually, the power is restored at timing (a'), all three reels 110 to 112 start acceleration control, and after passing through the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is being executed. As each reel stopped due to a power outage, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changed, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after the power was restored, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 was detected first ( (timing (d')), then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (f')). Therefore, after the power is restored, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before the power outage.

The example shown in FIG. 232 described above is an example in which a long time elapsed between the time when the power was cut off and the time when the power was restored, so long that the reel stopped. If the power is disconnected and the power is restored immediately, that is, if the power is restored before the reels stop although the rotational speed of the reels decreases, each reel is The step-out of reels 110 to 112 is detected, and each reel 110 to 112 is re-accelerated as the step-out is detected, like the right reel 112 described in the example shown in FIG.

The example of power failure recovery described using FIG. 232 may occur after the end of the examples shown in the timing charts after FIG. 229, before the start of those examples, or in the middle of those examples.

FIG. 233 is a timing chart when the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emitting mode in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. Also in FIG. 233, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. The light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected at the timing (e). At the timing (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, which means that the light shielding pieces of all the reels have been detected. Even at the timing (f), the middle reel 111 continues to rotate at a constant speed. That is, the middle stop button 138 is not operated even though it becomes ready for operation at the timing (e). At this timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emitting mode. In this way, the stop button LED of a reel that has stopped before changing to the second light emission mode remains in the first light emission mode. Note that if the middle stop button 138 is operated between the timing (e) and the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a will remain in the first light emitting mode even after the timing (f) has arrived. Therefore, only the right stop button LED 139a changes to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 234 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment is stopped at the shortest number of frames after detecting the light shielding piece. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. Also shown in FIG. 234 are a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139 at the bottom.

As shown by the holding parameter values in FIG. 212, acceleration control requires 60 interrupts, and first constant speed control requires 128 interrupts. Furthermore, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected, the stop button cannot shift to the operation-receiving state unless the state shifts to the second constant speed control state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 234, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing when the first constant speed control is started (the timing shown in (b)). Note that the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 may be detected during the acceleration control (the period indicated by the arrow in (A)). However, the light shielding piece may not be detected during acceleration control, but may be detected only in a constant speed state (during first constant speed control or second constant speed control).

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the state of the left reel at each timing. FIG. 235 shows FIG. 235(b), FIG. 235(b'), FIG. 235(c'), FIG. 235(c''-1), and FIG. 235(c''-2). In both figures, the left reel 110 is shown on the left side, the right reel 112 is shown on the right side, and the middle reel 111 is shown in the center.

In FIG. 235(b), the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are all rotating, but only the left reel 110 is shown so that the symbols are visible (FIG. 235(b') (The same applies to the same figure (c')). FIG. 235(b) shows the left reel 110 at the timing of FIG. 234(b). That is, on the left reel 110 at the time when the first constant speed control is started (when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected), the value of the symbol number counter shown in FIG. 205 is displayed in the middle of the symbol display window 113. 0 BB symbol is located.

It is necessary to output 24 drive pulses to move one symbol, and on the left reel 110, the middle row of the symbol display window 113 is displayed with a symbol whose symbol number counter value is 20 (cherry symbol) and a symbol whose value is 19 (BB symbol). , 18 symbols (replay symbols), and 17 symbols (bell symbols) pass in order. When the symbol (bell symbol) whose symbol number counter value is 17 has finished passing through the middle row of the symbol display window 113 (timing (b') shown in FIG. 234), 120 drive pulses are generated from the timing (b). (24 drive pulses x 5 symbols) is output. FIG. 235(b') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (b'), and the watermelon symbol whose symbol number counter value is 16 is located in the middle of the symbol display window 113. are doing.

Furthermore, when 8 drive pulses are output, the control switches to the second constant speed control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing at which these eight drive pulses are output is shown as timing (c). At timing (c), the second constant speed control is started, and the left stop button 137 shifts to an operation ready state. That is, in this example, even if the light-shielding piece is detected first, the stop button will not become operable until the second constant speed control is entered. However, the condition for transitioning to the state where the stop button can accept operation is the same as that of detecting the light shielding piece, but if the control state is the first constant speed control, the stop button can be operated. It may also be possible to transition to a state.

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing at which the second constant speed control is started and the first drive pulse is output is shown as timing (c'). At this timing (c'), the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped.

FIG. 235(c') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (c'), and in the middle of the symbol display window 113, the bar symbol whose symbol number counter value is 15 is 9. /24 frames are located. The bar symbol is a so-called DDT symbol, and if you operate the stop button with the aim of stopping this bar symbol in the middle row, you will not miss any small winning combinations. Note that the bar pattern may be referred to as a specific pattern or a certain pattern.

FIG. 235 (c''-1) and FIG. 235 (c''-2) are diagrams showing the stopping pattern mode of the left reel 110 when the stopping operation is performed at the timing of (c'). If the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won, the bar symbol will stop at the middle of the symbol display window 113, and the watermelon symbol will appear as shown in FIG. 235(c''-1). stops at the bottom. On the other hand, if the small winning combination of cherry shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won, the bar symbol will not stop at the middle stage of the symbol display window 113, as shown in FIG. 235(c''-2). First, retraction control is performed, and the cherry symbol slides two frames and stops at the upper row.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart when the effect regarding the reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 236, the production device is shown at the bottom. This presentation device is, for example, a presentation image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device).

The first performance in the performance device is started when the start lever 135 is operated. Alternatively, it starts when all reels 110-112 start rotating. Alternatively, it is started when acceleration control of all reels 110 to 112 is started. As will be described later, the reels may undergo random delay processing that delays the rotation start timing for each reel, and it is not always the case that all reels 110 to 112 will start rotating or be under acceleration control. do not have. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 236, the operation timing of the start lever 135, the rotation start timing of all reels 110 to 112, and the start timing of acceleration control for all reels 110 to 112 coincide, and the timing of (a) It is. The first performance in the performance device is started at the timing (a).

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing an example of the first performance in the performance device.

In each figure in FIG. 237, a production image display device 157, which is an example of a production device, is shown at the top, and below that, a left reel 110, a middle reel, 111, and a right reel 112 are shown. . Furthermore, stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to each reel are shown below each reel. Each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has built-in stop button LEDs 137a to 139a.

FIG. 237(A) shown on the left side is a diagram showing an example in which a small role suggestion performance is executed as the first performance on the performance image display device 157. On the other hand, FIG. 237(B) shown on the right side is a diagram showing an example in which a navigation effect is executed as the first effect on the effect image display device 157.

First, I will explain the production that suggests small roles. (a1) in FIG. 237(A) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236 (start timing of the first effect). In the performance image display device 157 shown in (a1), a watermelon symbol is displayed, suggesting that the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 205(b) has been internally won. Furthermore, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a1) have started rotating. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

(d1) in FIG. 237(A) is the timing (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected, and the timing when the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation) ) are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in (d1), the small role suggestion effect continues, and the watermelon symbol is displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built in the left stop button 137, which is now ready for operation, also emits light in the first light emitting mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f1) in FIG. 237(A) shows the performance at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. The performance image display device 157 shown in (f1) also continues the small role suggestion performance and displays the watermelon symbol. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Further, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode and emit light over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In addition, in the small role suggestion performance, the watermelon pattern may be continuously displayed, or the watermelon pattern may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

Next, navigation performance will be explained. The navigation performance is a performance that instructs the order of stop button stop operations in order to win a certain winning combination. (a2) in FIG. 237(B) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) of FIG. 236 (start timing of the first effect). In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a2), numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed at locations directly above each reel 110 to 112. That is, 3 is displayed above the left reel 110, 2 is displayed above the middle reel 111, and 1 is displayed above the right reel 112. Furthermore, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a2) have started rotating. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

(d2) in FIG. 237(B) is the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected, and the timing when the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation) ) are shown. The navigation effect continues on the effect image display device 157 shown in (d2), and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emitting mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built in the left stop button 137, which is now ready for operation, also emits light in the first light emitting mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f2) in FIG. 237(B) shows the performance at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. The navigation effect continues on the effect image display device 157 shown in (f2), and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Further, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Further, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode and emit light over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the navigation effect in FIG. 237(B) described above, the order of stop operations is displayed that is different from the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reels are detected. However, the order in which the light-shielding pieces of the reels are detected may coincide with the order in which the stop operations are instructed by the navigation effect.

Note that in the navigation performance, numbers representing the order of stop operations may be continuously displayed, or the numbers may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

FIG. 238 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when a slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139, but only some operations are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 238, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

The slide push operation refers to operating a plurality of stop buttons 137 to 139 in a short period of time. In the example shown in FIG. 238, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing of (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h1) From the timing, slide push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, the left stop button 137 is operated first, then the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are operated (depressed in order) in short succession. At the time when the slide push is performed, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and neither the middle stop button 138 nor the right stop button 139 remains in a state in which operation cannot be accepted. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the slide push operation is accepted, and the remaining operations of the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 is stopped due to brake control, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)), but the middle stop button 138 during the slide push operation is detected. and the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and in order to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, it is necessary to operate the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 again. Note that, as described above, the arrows (e) represent the period during which only some of the three stop buttons are in a state in which operations can be accepted. Further, at the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, where the reel has already been stopped, remains in the first light emitting mode.

When the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the arrow in (e)), the slide push for the two stop buttons, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, is performed. Perform operations. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing (h2), and the right stop button 139 is operated at the timing (h3). Brake control is executed for both the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 to stop them.

After each of the three reels 110 to 112 is stopped by executing the brake control, the start lever 135 is operated again, and each of the three reels 110 to 112 starts rotating (tying in (a')). That is, the next game is started. In this next game as well, after the first constant speed control is executed, a transition is made to the second constant speed control (timing (c')). During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Next, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e')), and the middle stop button 138 also becomes ready for operation. Finally, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f')), and the right stop button 139 also becomes ready for operation. In addition, when the light shielding pieces of all three reels 110 to 112 are detected while none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built into each stop button switch to the second light emitting mode. Changes to The first stop button LED 137a remained in the first light emitting mode in the previous game, but changes to the second light emitting mode in the current game.

FIG. 239 is a timing chart when all slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 238 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 238.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 239, the slide push operation is performed after all of the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, in a state where all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready for operation and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (period indicated by the arrow (o)), Slide push operation starts. Here too, operations are performed continuously in a short period of time in the order of pressing from the left stop button 137, and the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((h), (h'), (h'') (timing), brake control is executed on the corresponding reel to stop the corresponding reel, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode. The execution periods of brake control for each reel may overlap.

FIG. 240 is a timing chart when a real game is played after a pseudo game is played in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. Also in FIG. 240, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

The pseudo game is a type of reel performance (the above-mentioned second reel performance), and like the main game, it is a performance that makes it appear as if the reel corresponding to the operated stop button has been stopped by operating the stop button. . In the main game, after the reels have completely stopped, medals are awarded according to the derived stopping manner, but in the pseudo game, medals are not awarded according to the derived stopping manner.

Even in the pseudo game, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. Further, the light shielding pieces of each reel 110 to 112 are detected in the order of the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111, and the light shielding piece of the right reel 112, and the stop button corresponding to the reel in which the light shielding piece is detected is detected. 137 to 139 become ready for operation. Then, only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode. Therefore, even if a pseudo game is started, there is no difference from the real game, and the player cannot distinguish between the pseudo game and the real game. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 240, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, a slide push is performed from the left stop button 137, and the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((h) , (h'), (h'')), the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode. In the pseudo game, stop control is not performed, but instead, vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reels. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds in order to clearly show the symbols to the player. The state in which vibration control is performed is called a pseudo-stop state. In the pseudo game, when the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 shifts from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state, and the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 do not shift from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state. In addition, in the pseudo game, when the middle stop button 138 is operated, the middle reel 111 shifts from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state, and the left reel 110 and right reel 112 do not shift from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state. When the right stop button 139 is operated, the right reel 112 shifts from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state, and the left reel 110 and middle reel 111 do not shift from a rotating state to a pseudo-stop state. In the pseudo game, it is also possible to draw in more than the maximum number of drawing symbols. For example, if it is a BB internal winning state, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed vibrating (shaking display). Further, if the small winning combination is internally won, the bar symbol alignment is displayed vibratingly. The player notices from the vibration display that the previous game was a pseudo game.

When the vibration display is performed for about several seconds, the pseudo game ends and the real game starts. This game is started without operating the start lever 135. In a pseudo game, when the BB symbols are displayed vibrating ("7-7-7"), if the reels 110 to 112 start rotating at the same time, the reel 110 will move while maintaining the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are lined up side by side. ~112 will rotate. In such a positional relationship, the BB symbols on all the reels 110 to 112 appear in the symbol display window 113 at the same timing, making it easier for an expert player who is good at aiming at symbols to aim at the BB symbols. For this reason, it becomes impossible to ensure the fairness of the game with beginners who are not good at aiming at the symbols. Furthermore, since it becomes easier to aim at the symbols, the interest in the game decreases for players who look forward to aiming at the symbols and performing a stop operation. Therefore, random delay control is performed to randomly delay the rotation start timing of the reels between reels, thereby breaking the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are arranged side by side. The main game was started at the timing of (i), but none of the reels 110 to 112 started rotating, and first, after n1 (n1 ≧ 0) interruptions from the start of the main game (first time lapse), the right reel 112 starts rotating. Next, after the interruption occurs n2 times (n2>n1) from the start of the game (after the second time has elapsed), the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Finally, after the interruption occurs n3 times (n3>n2) from the start of the game (after the third time has elapsed), the left reel 110 starts rotating. When each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating, acceleration control is executed for 60 interruptions, but the execution periods are staggered. The arrow (A) shown in this game represents the period from the start of the acceleration control on the first right reel 112 until the end of the acceleration control on the last left reel 110. Next, in each reel, when the acceleration control ends, the first constant speed control is started. The arrow (i) shown in this game indicates the period from the start of the first constant speed control on the first right reel 112 until the end of the first constant speed control on the last left reel 110. It represents. Subsequently, in each reel, when the first constant speed control ends, the second constant speed control is started. In this game, the period during which the second constant speed control is performed on each reel 110 to 112 is represented by the arrow (C). Before the last left reel 110 finishes the first constant speed control, the first right reel 112 starts the second constant speed control. As the pseudo game and the random delay processing are performed, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in the main game, the light shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (f')), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (d')). Therefore, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different between the main game and the pseudo-game. Note that in this game as well, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode (timing (d')) only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected.

FIG. 241 is a timing chart when the main game is played after the reel action is performed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 240.

Reel action is a type of reel performance (the above-mentioned first reel performance), and unlike the main game, it is a performance that makes it appear as if the reels have stopped without operating the stop button. Note that medals are not awarded in the reel action as well as in the pseudo game.

In reel action, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. Further, the light shielding pieces of each reel 110 to 112 are detected in the following order: the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111, and the light shielding piece of the right reel 112. However, even if the light shielding piece is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 do not become operable and remain in the operation-disabled state. Further, even if the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a remain in the first light emission mode. Eventually, each reel 110-112 automatically starts brake control without operating the stop buttons 137-139. Even in this reel action, stop control is not performed, but instead, vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reel. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds in order to clearly show the symbols to the player. For example, if it is a BB internal winning state, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed vibrating (shaking display). Further, if the small winning combination is internally won, the bar symbol alignment is displayed vibratingly.

When the vibration display continues for several seconds, the reel action ends and the main game begins. This game is the same as the main game explained in FIG. 240, and random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. As the reel action and random delay processing are performed, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first. (timing of (f')), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing of (e')), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing of (d')). Therefore, the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected may be different between the main game and the reel action. However, in reel action, there is no need to operate the stop button, so even if the order is different, the effect on the player is small.

Next, simultaneous pressing will be explained. Simultaneous pressing here means that all the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated at the same time or almost at the same time. For example, if the time required from the first stop button operation to the last stop button operation is within a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms), it is determined that "simultaneous pressing" occurs. The above predetermined time is set in consideration of the average time required for continuous operation of all the stop buttons 137 to 139, and can be changed arbitrarily within the time range that is determined to be a relatively quick stop operation. It is.

When pressing simultaneously, in order for a specific symbol combination to win, the symbols on each reel that make up the specific symbol combination must be close within a maximum of 4 symbols between each reel. I can't.

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols constituting a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113.

FIG. 242(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where, in the BB internal winning state, a replay is internally won and the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 242(a), the replay symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a replay symbol whose symbol number counter value is 2 on the left reel 110, and a replay symbol whose symbol number counter value is 1 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 14, which is a replay symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the left reel 110, the second frame from the replay symbol on the middle reel 111, and from the replay symbol on the right reel 112. It is located in the first frame. Therefore, the state in which the replay symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 242(a) is a state in which the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination (in this case, BB symbols) are placed close to each other on each reel, and this state will be described below. It is called eye condition. By ending the game in the preparation state and pressing the buttons simultaneously in the next game, it is possible to easily win a specific symbol combination. That is, the preparation eye state refers to a state in which the symbols on each reel constituting a specific symbol combination are within a certain range. In FIG. 242(a), if the buttons are pressed simultaneously in the next game, the BB symbol alignment can be stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 as well as on any of the other winning lines L2 to L5 shown in FIG. 203. It is.

FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where, in the BB internal winning state, the bell is internally won and the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 242(b), the bell symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a bell symbol whose symbol number counter value is 1 on the left reel 110 and a bell symbol whose symbol number counter value is 19 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is a bell symbol of 15. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbols on the left reel 110 are located at the 2nd and 4th frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111, and the BB symbols on the right reel 112 are located 3 frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111. It is located in the eyes. Therefore, the state in which the bell symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 242(b) is also a preparation state, and the game can be ended in this preparation state, and in the next game, the BB symbols should be stopped and displayed by pressing the keys simultaneously. is possible.

In this example, the preparation state is made up of a replay symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter, and a bell symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter. It may be a configuration of a watermelon symbol, a configuration of a cherry symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter, or a configuration of a losing symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter.

In addition, the symbol combinations that result in the preparation eye state do not need to be displayed in the symbol display window 113, and the relative positional relationship of the symbols (BB symbols) constituting the specific symbol combination is as shown in FIG. 242(a). The relative positional relationship shown in FIG.

Note that when the BB internal winning state is in the preparation state, the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, etc. may be used to notify that the state is in the preparation state.

FIG. 243 is a timing chart when, in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed, but only some of the operations are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 229. In FIG. 243, left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown at the bottom.

In the example in FIG. 243, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing of (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h) From the timing, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously. At the time when the simultaneous presses are performed, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and neither the middle stop button 138 nor the right stop button 139 remains in a state in which operations cannot be accepted. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the simultaneous press operation is accepted, and the remaining operations of the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 stops at the timing (h), but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)), but the middle stop button 138 in the simultaneous pressing operation is detected. and the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and in order to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, it is necessary to operate the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 again. At the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, where the reel has already been stopped, remains in the first light emitting mode.

FIG. 244 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when all simultaneous pressing operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 243 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 243.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 244, the simultaneous push operation is performed after all of the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, in a state where all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready for operation and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (period indicated by the arrow (o)), Simultaneous pressing operations are performed (timing (h)). In response to the simultaneous push operation, brake control is performed on each of the three reels 110 to 112, and the three reels 110 to 112 are stopped at the same time. That is, at least a portion of the periods during which brake control is performed for each reel 110 to 112 overlap. Note that all the periods may overlap. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built into the three stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, return to the first light emitting mode at the same time. Note that they will stop at the same time. Strictly speaking, it looks like they stopped at the same time. and return at the same time. And to see it decrease, it looks like it returned at the same time. It is.

FIG. 245 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game. Hereinafter, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in FIG. 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 240.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 245, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, and the three reels 110 to 112 makes it appear as if they are simultaneous in terms of timing, and as if they have stopped in terms of state. That is, the vibration display starts almost simultaneously. For example, in the BB internal winning state, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed vibrating (shaking display). That is, here, a pseudo game (simultaneous reel effect) is performed in which the three rotating reels 110 to 112 appear to stop at the same time as an effect by simultaneous pressing operations.

When the vibration display is performed for about several seconds, the pseudo game ends and the real game starts. In this game, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. In this game, even if you press the three stop buttons 137 to 139 at the same time, the random delay process will cause the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") to stop and display. The possibility of doing so is extremely low. Note that during execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is first detected (timing (f')), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e')). ), the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is finally detected (timing (d')), and the order of the reels in which the light-shielding piece is detected is different between the pseudo game and the main game.

Further, although the present embodiment is related to the game of the slot machine 100, the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can be applied to other game machines such as pachinko.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel] can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, by accepting a stop operation from a prepared reel, the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted earlier than before. Therefore, the game progresses at a good pace without the player feeling stressed. Further, the sense of realism of the game may be enhanced by immediate response to the player's operations. These effects are also common effects for the game machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as the first common effect.

Note that the unstoppable state may be a state in which the operation of a stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel is not accepted, or a state in which the operation is accepted but is not treated as a valid operation. (The same applies below.) On the other hand, the stoppable state refers to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel is accepted and the operation is treated as a valid operation (the same applies below).

Further, when the stop position of the reel becomes controllable, the rotating reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (the same applies below).

Further, the reel control means may be a means capable of shifting the reel stop position to a controllable state during the execution of the constant speed control, and may be a means that can shift the reel stop position to a controllable state during the execution of the acceleration control. (The same applies below).

Furthermore, in the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
The notification means does not perform the notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, step S2703 shown in FIG. 217],
The notification means executes the notification for all of the plurality of rotating reels when all of the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, as shown in FIG. ), when the index sensor detects the light-shielding pieces of all the reels, the stop button LEDs 137a, 138a, and 139a start lighting all at once],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In a first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (d) timing shown in 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that in some cases, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, as shown in FIG. ') timing] (the same applies below).

Further, the stop operation means includes a first stop operation means [for example, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [for example, middle stop button 138], and the stop operation means The means [for example, the left stop button 137] is a means for stopping the rotating first reel when the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is operated in a stopable state, The second stop operation means [for example, the middle stop button 138] is operated so that the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] can be stopped, so that the second reel that is rotating is stopped. It may also be a means of stopping (the same applies below).

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 229 (d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs a second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stopping a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, by accepting a stop operation from a prepared reel, the stop button can be operated faster than before.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
While the constant speed control is being performed on one reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110], a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels [for example, , right reel 112] enters the first abnormal state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 230 (g)], the one reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. In some cases [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the first common effect described above, even if some of the reels are in the first abnormal state, the game can be continued with the remaining reels. In addition, it may be possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game without wasting the rotation of the reels that would not have been in the first abnormal state.

Note that if the stop position of the reel is in an uncontrollable state, the one reel will not shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
"Equipped with a first abnormal state detection means for detecting that the reel has entered the first abnormal state [for example, the main control unit 300 that executes the step-out detection process shown in FIG. 222],
While the constant speed control is being executed on one of the plurality of reels, a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels enters the first abnormal state. [For example, the timing of (g) shown in FIG. 230] may also be changed until the first abnormal state detection means detects the first abnormal state of the other reel [for example, the timing of (a' shown in FIG. 230]). )], the one reel can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (d) timing shown in 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs a second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stopping a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
Even if the second reel rotation drive means steps out during the period in which the reel control means executes the constant speed control on the second reel, the stop operation by the first stop operation means Acceptance of operations will begin.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by accepting a stop operation from a prepared reel, the stop button can be operated more quickly than before, and in addition, a player can play a game using some of the reels among the plurality of reels.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to add variety to the game by changing the order in which operations are accepted before and after the power is restored after a power outage.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
The rotational control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels includes acceleration control that increases the rotational speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], A second constant speed control to maintain a constant speed state [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212], and a brake control to transition from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212] a reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute at least the following;
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 234, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (c), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
The reel control means is a means that may shift the stop position of the reel to a controllable state before the second constant speed control is started [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 234 (b) ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there is no need to wait until the second constant speed control is started to shift the reel stop position to a controllable state, and the operation of the stop operation means is accepted at an earlier timing. You will be able to do it. Therefore, the first common effect mentioned above is further enhanced.

Note that the reel control means may be a means that can shift the reel stop position to a controllable state during execution of the second constant speed control, or may be a means that can shift the reel stop position to a controllable state while executing the acceleration control. It may be a means that can shift the stop position of the vehicle to a controllable state.

Further, the second constant speed control may be a control that maintains the constant speed state by being repeatedly executed.

Also,
“When the rotational speed of the reel reaches the constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means performs first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] after completing the acceleration control. and then executes the second constant speed control,
The second constant speed control is a control that is repeatedly executed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first constant speed control may be control using a current value (strong excitation) higher than the current value (for example, medium excitation) used in the second constant speed control (the same applies below). ).

Further, in the first constant speed control, a first control pattern [for example, a control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value in the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212 is from 0 to 7] is performed a first number of times [for example, After being repeatedly executed [16 times], the transition to the second constant speed control is made without fail. After the control pattern in which the counter value is from 0 to 7 is repeatedly executed an indefinite number of times [for example, until a light shielding piece is detected and a stop button is operated], the brake control is started.

Further, the reel control means is a means capable of shifting the reel stop position to a controllable state during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 234 (b)]. Good too.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In a first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (c) timing shown in 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the reel control means executes the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) shown in FIG. 234], the first detection signal is the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state when
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
The acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is performed when the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is received within a predetermined period of time after the acceleration control for the first reel is started. When the output is output, it may start after the predetermined time has elapsed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to detect the reel index before the constant speed flag is turned on, and it is possible to start receiving a reel stop operation earlier than when detecting the reel index after the constant speed flag is turned on.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

Also,
“The reel control means is capable of executing a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control as the constant speed control,
The reel control means executes the first constant speed control on the first reel during at least a part of the period until the predetermined time elapses, and performs the second constant speed control on the first reel after the predetermined time elapses. performing control on the first reel;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, reel index detection during the first constant speed control is effective.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
When a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are operated in succession [for example, when a slide push is performed], all the reels corresponding to the operated stop operation means are In some cases it is possible to stop [for example, the example shown in FIG. 239], and in some cases, only the reels corresponding to some of the operated stop operation means [for example, the left stop button 137] There is also a case where the stoppage is possible [for example, the example shown in FIG. 238].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, even if the slide push operation is performed, the first common effect described above can be obtained.

It should be noted that it may also be the case that a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, and in this case, "one of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels" The plurality of reels may be two of the three reels or three of the three reels.

In addition, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, all of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means are In some cases, the brake control is performed on only some of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the brake control may also be executed for the reel corresponding to the next operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even if the control is being executed, the stop operation means operated next may be in the non-stop state.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the stop operation means operated next may also be in the stop possible state.

Also,
``The above-mentioned ``case where multiple stop operation means are operated in succession'' refers to a case where an operation is performed in which multiple stop operation means are operated in succession in a tracing manner.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (d) timing shown in 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
If an operation on the first stop operation means and an operation on the second stop operation means are performed during the first period in the first case, the operation on the second stop operation means is invalid. Then,
In the second period after the first period in the first case, when the operation on the first stop operation means and the operation on the second stop operation means are performed, the second stop operation means The operation to the stop operation means is valid.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to create a situation in which some of the buttons do not stop even if a plurality of buttons are operated (slide push) in a short period of time, so that a player who is enthusiastic about the game can calm down.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The start time of accepting the stop operation in the first stop operation means may be earlier than the start time of accepting the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotational control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control that increases the rotational speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212] is repeated. A second constant speed control that maintains the constant speed state by being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212], and a brake control that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, a reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to perform at least the brake control shown in 212;
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, As shown in FIG. 229, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (e), and the right stop button 139 transitions to the receptive state at the timing (f). Transition to possible state],
When the rotational speed of the reel reaches a constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes a first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] after completing the acceleration control. and then executes the second constant speed control,
One of the plurality of reels (hereinafter referred to as "first reel") [for example, the left reel 110] has a plurality of types of symbols [for example, as shown in FIG. 205(a)] along the rotation direction. "Arrangement of patterns on the left"] is applied,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern [for example, the watermelon pattern shown in FIG. 235 (c''-1) or the cherry pattern shown in FIG. 235 (c''-2)]. can be,
The first symbol is a symbol that is advantageous to the player when stopped and displayed [for example, a symbol that wins a small prize],
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reel cannot be stopped when the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, when the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. Only the stop button valid information is set],
When the reel control means transitions to a state where the stop position of the first reel can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as "first state") during execution of the first constant speed control [e.g. There is a timing shown in FIG. 234 (b)],
When the first state is shifted to the first state during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 234], the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is activated. When the first symbol is operated [for example, timing (c') shown in FIG. 234] and the first symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 235 (c''-1) or FIG. 235 (c''-2) )]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, even reels with so-called DDT symbols can obtain the above-mentioned first common effect, and furthermore, if you are an expert who can judge the speed change of the reels, you can find the fastest timing. You will be able to win prizes.

Note that, for example, when the first state is shifted to the first state at the time when the first constant speed control is started, if the stop operation means is operated aiming at the start timing of the second constant speed control. The first symbol may be stopped and displayed.

Also,
“The first reel [e.g., left reel 110] has a first detection piece [e.g., light-shielding piece 612D],
The first detection piece is detectable during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 234 (b)],
The reel control means shifts to the first state when the first detection piece is detected.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“Among the plurality of reels, one reel that is different from the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is a second reel [e.g., middle reel 111],
In a third case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, (c) timing shown in 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The third case means that the reel control means changes the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before changing the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is the case when the transition occurs [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the reel control means executes the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 234], the first detection signal is the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state when
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the third case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The above-mentioned “If the first state is shifted to the first state during execution of the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated” means the first The stop operation means is operated at a time when the first symbol can be stopped and displayed for the first time after the reels start rotating.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
a first detection piece provided on the first reel;
a second detection piece provided on the second reel;
Equipped with
The first symbol position detection means outputs the detection signal when detecting the first detection piece,
The second symbol position detection means outputs the detection signal when detecting the second detection piece,
One of the plurality of types of designs is a first design,
The position of the first symbol is at least a position away from the position of the first detection piece toward the rear in the rotational direction in which the reel control means rotates until a predetermined time elapses after starting the constant speed control. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to press the first symbol at the earliest after receiving the operation.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
``When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
After the brake control is executed and stopped, each reel constituting the plurality of reels that has started rotating is stopped [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], and then stopped. It is possible to shift from the disabled state to the stoppable state [for example, as shown in FIG. Transition to available state, right stop button 139 transition to available state at timing (f')],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel performance [for example, a reel action (first reel performance) or a pseudo game (second reel performance)],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels,
For each reel that has started rotating after the random delay control is performed, it is possible to shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing (f'), (e') shown in FIG. 240 or 241 ) timing, (d') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, even if the game machine is equipped with random delay control, the first common effect described above can be achieved, and furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control in between, It can add variety to the game.

Note that the reel effect may be an effect that makes the rotating reels appear to have stopped.

Also,
“The reel performance is a pseudo game performance that makes it appear that the reel has stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means [for example, the timing of FIG. 240 (h), the timing of (h′), and the timing of (h'')] is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the first case where the plurality of reels start rotating after the brake control is executed and the reels are stopped [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 229 or in the case of the example shown in FIG. The first reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229 or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 238] ],
In the second case where the plurality of reels start rotating by performing the random delay control after the reel effect is executed [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 240 or the example shown in FIG. 241] case], the second reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing (e') shown in FIG. 240 or 241] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first case means that the reel control means brings the stop position of the first reel into a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state. This is a case where the transition occurs [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229 or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 238],
In the second case, the reel control means shifts the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state before shifting the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state. [For example, the timing (e') shown in FIG. 240 or 241]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of “left” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [for example, the arrangement of "medium" symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)] are applied along the rotation direction,
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection to identify the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the first reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs a second detection for identifying the stop display position of the plurality of types of symbols applied to the second reel. It is a state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (C) in FIG. 229]. In this case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the first case, the brake control of the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] is not started, and the brake control of the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] is not started either. When power is restored from a power failure [for example, power is restored from a power failure as shown in FIG. 232] in the state, the second reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does. [For example, the timing in FIG. 232(d')]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
In the first case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the first game in the first case, in the second game after the first game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means is executed. The reception start time may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give variety to the games by making the acceptance start times of the stop operation means for the first game and the second game different.

Also,
``The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to start accepting operations to stop the reels earlier than before.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the first case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, when the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 238] A game machine characterized in that the unstoppable state may transition to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 238] before [timing]. ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, if the stop operation means is operated without waiting for the notification by the notification means, the reels may be stopped, and the player's operation may be prioritized, increasing the sense of realism of the game. be. Furthermore, the game can proceed at a good pace without the player feeling stressed. These effects are also common effects for the game machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as second common effects.

Note that the certain reel may always transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification starts (the same applies below).

Further, the notifying means may start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state when all of the plurality of reels have transitioned to the stoppable state, and the notification means may start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state, and It is also possible to start notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state at the time when all the stop positions are in the controllable state (the same applies below).

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a fourth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 238], the first reel is brought out of the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Shifting to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that one reel constituting the plurality of reels is a third reel [for example, the middle reel 111], and the notification means also includes a third notification means [for example, the middle stop button LED 138a]. and the third notification means is capable of executing a third notification indicating that the third reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)]. In some cases, the third reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the third notification is started by the third notification means. For example, the timing (e) shown in FIG. 238] may be used (the same applies below).

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, right reel 112],
The notification means is a means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. (f) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the fourth case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time as the second notification is started by the second notification means. There may be.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position is in a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the timing at which the first notification is started by the first notification means and the timing at which the second notification is started by the second notification means may be the same (hereinafter the same). .

Also,
“After the fourth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that among the plurality of reels, a reel [for example, the right reel 112] different from the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means is There may be a case where the state shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state with the start of notification (the same applies below). That is, among the plurality of reels, a reel other than the certain reel for which the notification is started by the notification means changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time as the notification starts. (The same applies below.)

Furthermore, the other reel may be the last reel among the plurality of reels that has entered a state where the stop position of the reel can be controlled (the same applies below).

Further, at the timing when the notification is started for the certain reel, the notification for the other reel may also be started (the same applies hereinafter).In other words, the notification for the certain reel in the notification means may be started. The start timing of the notification and the start timing of the notification regarding the other reel in the notification means may be the same timing (the same applies below).

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the game machine can stop faster than conventional game machines, and the time between weights can be shortened.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, when the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 238] There is a case where the unstoppable state shifts to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 238],
Before the notification for the certain reel (hereinafter referred to as "a certain notification") is executed, the brake control for the certain reel is started (timing (h1) shown in FIG. 238). , the certain notification is not executed at the time when the notification for a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is executed ((f) to (h3) shown in FIG. 238);
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second common effect described above, the above-mentioned notification about the reel corresponding to the stop operation means that has been operated at an early stage is not performed, thereby misleading the player. Care has been taken to ensure that this does not occur.

Further, the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) in the left stop button LED 137a or the middle stop button LED 138a] for the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] is executed. If the brake control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing (h1) shown in FIG. is not executed [for example, the timing in FIG. 238(f')].

That is, before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the brake control of the certain reel is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 238 (h1 timing)] and the notification is executed only after the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 238 (f')].

Note that if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of all of the plurality of reels including the reel is started. Alternatively, if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification will not be executed unless the stop positions of all of the plurality of reels including the reel are brought into a controllable state. Alternatively, if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel is in the stoppable state. The notification is not executed unless all of the plurality of reels including the reel that is in the unstoppable state transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Further, if the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means executes the notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the plurality of reels The notification is not executed until after the brake control of all the reels other than the certain reel is completed.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a certain game in the fourth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 238] [for example, a game in which the reels start rotating from the timing (a) shown in FIG. 238], the first reel is before the first notification is started by the first notification means, transitioning from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238];
In the certain game, the brake control of the first reel is started before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, in (d) shown in FIG. timing] and the first notification by the first notification means is not executed in the certain game,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, right reel 112],
The notification means is a means that also includes a second notification means [for example, right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. (f) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position is in a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the fourth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [e.g. Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
In the second case, if the first stop operation means is operated before the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display, the game in the second case the first display by the first operation reception display means is not displayed;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, players are not misled.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, when the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 238] There is a case where the unstoppable state shifts to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 238],
Among the plurality of reels, the notification [for example, the notification in the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] for a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is started [e.g. , before the timing (f) shown in FIG. For example, during the period started at the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the other reel is in the stoppable state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

That is, notification that a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the right reel 112] is in the stoppable state [for example, by the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] Before [notification] is started by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, While the notification that the reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] is executed by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the 238], the other reel is in the stoppable state.

Further, the other reel may always be in the unstoppable state before the notification means starts notifying that the other reel is in the stoppable state.

According to this game machine, while achieving the second common effect described above, it is also possible to operate the stop operation means after waiting for the notification, allowing beginners to play the game calmly, and also You can also play games with peace of mind.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a] and a second notification means [for example, middle stop button LED 137b],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a fourth case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means,
In the fourth case, before the second notification is started, the second reel is in the unstoppable state, and after the second notification is started, the second reel is in the stopped state. is in a possible state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, as shown in FIG. 238 (f) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position is in a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the fourth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [e.g. Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
If an operation is performed on the second stop operation means during the third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means becomes invalid;
When the second stop operation means is operated during the fourth period after the third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means becomes effective;
The third period is a period in which the first display is not displayed by the second operation reception display means,
The fourth period is a period during which the first display is displayed by the second operation reception display means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the display of the second operation reception display means indicates a period in which only the first stop operation means of the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means is accepted, and a period in which both are accepted. It may be possible to suggest.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
``Multiple reels and
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
An internal winning combination determining unit that determines an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 that executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214],
A production means [for example, production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)] capable of executing a suggestion production that suggests the determined internal winning combination [for example, a small role suggestion production shown in FIG. 237(A)]; Prepare,
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, for a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means, the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 236]. The unstoppable state may transition to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 236],
The presentation means may perform the suggestion presentation [for example, the small role suggestion presentation shown in (a1) in FIG. 237(A)] before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. When starting execution, there is a method [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the second common effect described above is more effectively achieved. That is, by the above-mentioned suggestion effect, it is possible to grasp the discard game, and in the case of a discard game, it is possible to quickly finish the discard game by performing a stop operation at a quick timing. In addition, by the above-mentioned suggestion effect, it is possible to grasp the game of collecting small winning combinations, and in the game of collecting small winning combinations, it becomes possible to operate the stop operation means with care so as not to make an operation error.

In addition, the presentation means may be a means for starting the execution of the suggestion presentation at the same time as the acceleration control of the certain reel is started, or the presentation means may start the execution of the suggestion presentation when the certain reel starts rotating. It may also be a means for starting execution.

Further, the presentation means may be a means for always starting execution of the suggestion presentation before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a fifth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 236], the first reel is brought out of the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Shifting to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236],
In the fifth case, the effecting means executes the suggestion before the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236]. is a means of starting execution of a performance,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, right reel 112],
The notification means is a means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. (f) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position has been brought into a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the fifth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
an internally elected role determining means for determining an internally elected role;
a production means capable of executing a suggestive production suggesting the determined internally elected role;
Equipped with
The production means may execute the suggestion production in the second case,
In the second case, the time when the performance means starts executing the suggestive performance is earlier than the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to quickly complete the discard game while preventing erroneous operations in the small winning combination collection game.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
An internal winning combination determining unit that determines an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 that executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214],
A production means [for example, production image display device 157] capable of executing an instruction production [for example, the navigation production shown in FIG. 237(B)] that can stop the plurality of reels in a stop mode corresponding to the determined internal winning combination. (liquid crystal display device)] and
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, for a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means, the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 236]. The unstoppable state may transition to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 236],
Before the certain reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, the effect means causes the stop operation means to stop the reel corresponding to the certain reel as execution of the instruction effect. When starting execution of a presentation including an operation instruction for the operating means [for example, the navigation presentation shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)], there is a means [for example, the timing shown in (a) in FIG. 236]. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, there are other effects in addition to the second common effect mentioned above. That is, not only can a quick stop operation be performed while following the instruction performance, but even if a certain stop operation means is operated by mistake, the reel corresponding to that certain stop operation means will be in the unstoppable state. In this case, the player does not have to lose his chance to win a prize.

Note that, before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, the effect means performs a command corresponding to the certain reel of the stop operation means in order to execute the instruction effect. It may also be a means for always starting execution of a performance including an operation instruction for the stop operation means.

Also,
``The order in which each reel constituting the plurality of reels moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the order is left reel → middle reel → right reel]; The order of operating the stop operation means provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels as instructed by the instruction performance [for example, in the navigation performance shown in FIG. 237(B), the sequence is right reel → middle reel → left reel order] may be different from
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Furthermore, the order in which each reel constituting the plurality of reels transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, and the order in which each reel constituting the plurality of reels is provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels as instructed by the instruction performance. In some cases, the order in which the stop operation means are operated coincides with each other.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. It is possible to reset the reel and calculate the stop position of the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a fifth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 236], the first reel is brought out of the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Shifting to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236],
In the fifth case, the production means executes the instruction before the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236]. As execution of the effect, an effect including an operation instruction for the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel among the stop operation means [for example, the navigation effect shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)] is executed. is a means of starting,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, right reel 112],
The notification means is a means that also includes a second notification means [for example, right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. (f) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second reel is a reel whose reel stop position is in a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the fifth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, right reel 112] has not been started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
an internally elected role determining means for determining an internally elected role;
a production means capable of executing an instruction production capable of stopping the plurality of reels in a stopping manner corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The performance means may execute the instruction performance in the second case,
The instruction performance in the second case may include an operation instruction for the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, navigation can be quickly completed.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and provides notification that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode)] notification means [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, when the notification is started [for example, in (f) shown in FIG. 240] The unstoppable state may transition to the stoppable state before [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 240],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel performance [for example, a reel action (first reel performance) or a pseudo game (second reel performance)],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, as shown in FIG. 240 or 241, Executed between timing (i) and timing (f')],
Among the plurality of reels for which the random delay control has been performed and the rotation has started, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may start rotating before the notification about the other reel is started. In some cases, the unstoppable state shifts to the stoppable state before [for example, the timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or 241],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

That is, among the plurality of reels that have started rotating after the random delay control has been performed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels on which the reel performance has been performed, the notification is started by the notification means. A reel other than the reel [for example, the right reel 112] may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in FIG. 240 or 241] before the notification is started. The timing of (f') shown in FIG.

According to this game machine, even if the game machine is equipped with random delay control, the second common effect described above can be achieved, and furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control in between, It can add variety to the game.

Note that the reel effect may be an effect that makes the rotating reels appear to have stopped.

Also,
“The reel performance is a performance of a pseudo-game [for example, the pseudo-game shown in FIG. 240] that appears to have stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, right reel 112],
The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the left stop button LED 137a] and a second notification means,
The first notification means is a means capable of executing a first notification indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
The second notification means is a means capable of executing a second notification indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)]. ,
In a sixth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 240 or 241], the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] starts the first notification by the first notification means. The unstoppable state shifts to the stoppable state before [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 240 or 241], and then the reel production [for example, pseudo production or reel action] is executed. is,
In the sixth case, the random delay control is performed following the reel performance [for example, performed between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241], and the rotation The second reel that has started [for example, the right reel 112] shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in FIG. 240 or FIG. The timing of (f') shown in 241],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the random delay control in the sixth case is performed, the first notification is started by the first notification means and the first reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. [For example, the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or 241]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first reel, which has started rotating after the random delay control in the sixth case, is brought out of the unstoppable state at the same time as the second notification is started by the second notification means. There may be a transition to the stoppable state.

Also,
"The first reel is a reel whose reel stop position is brought into a controllable state at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 240, or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. The second notification by the second notification means is also started;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“After the sixth case, a power failure recovery [for example, power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232] occurs while the brake control of the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] has not started. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [e.g. Timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means is ready for operation;
a first operation reception display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means is ready for operation;
A game machine comprising:
In the second case, the time when the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than the time when the first operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display;
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the third game in which the second case occurs, in the fourth game after the third game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means is executed. The reception start time may be earlier than the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give variety to the games by making the acceptance start times of the respective stop operation means for the third game and the fourth game different.

Also,
"In the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is the same as the time when the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The timing at which the first operation reception display means starts displaying the first display is the same as the time when the second operation reception display means starts displaying the first display,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player feels that the time to start operating the first stop operation means is earlier than that of the second stop operation means.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage after the second case, the time when the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is indicated in the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the starting time.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated earlier than the first display are different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, 243 and 244, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receivable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receptive state at the timing of (e), and the right stop at the timing of (f) Button 139 Shift to ready state],
In the first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in FIG. 244], only some reels among the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, whereas during the second period [for example, (o) in FIG. 244], when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed [for example, the timing (h) shown in FIG. 244], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, while responding to quick operations such as simultaneous pressing, some reels may not stop, making it possible for players who are enthusiastic about the game to calm down.

Note that in the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, all of the plurality of reels may be stopped without fail (the same applies below).

Further, the second period may be a period after the first period (the same applies below).

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel. at least some periods of time may overlap;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, in the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, the brake control is performed for at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel, and the brake control is performed for the second reel. At least some of the periods shown may necessarily overlap (the same applies below).

Further, the stop operation means includes a first stop operation means [for example, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [for example, middle stop button 138], and the stop operation means The means is a means for stopping the rotating first reel by operating the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] in a stopable state, and the second stop operation means is a means for stopping the rotating first reel. , the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] may be operated in a stoppable state to stop the rotating second reel (the same applies below).

Also,
“In the seventh case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 243], the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 243(d)],
The first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in (e) in FIG. 243] is a part of the period in the seventh case,
In the first period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped;
Also in the eighth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 244], the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 244(d)],
The second period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 244] is a part of the period in the eighth case,
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [for example, left reel 110] and the second reel [for example, middle reel 111] are stopped.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“If the power is restored after power failure [for example] in a state where the brake control of the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is not started and the brake control of the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is not started, , power failure recovery shown in FIG. 232], the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [e.g. , timing of FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
The stop operation accepting means is configured to be able to accept simultaneous stop operations on the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation on the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, the operation on the second stop operation means is performed. becomes invalid and
In the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, when an operation on the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, The operation of the second stop operation means is valid.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, a situation is created in which some parts do not stop even if simultaneous stop operations are performed, thereby calming down players who are enthusiastic about the game.

Also,
“When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least part of the period in which stop control is performed on the first reel and at least one period in which stop control is performed on the second reel. The period of the parts overlaps,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the third case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted is different before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game.

In the above description,
“A plurality of reels [for example, two or more reels of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels],
A stop operation means is provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and is operated in a stopable state to stop the rotating corresponding reel [for example, a left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control to transition from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 212], constant speed to maintain the constant speed state control [for example, the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control], and brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state A reel control means [for example, the main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, the brake control shown in FIG. 212];
Equipped with
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped if the acceleration control is being executed [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only during processing],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], it is possible to transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, 243 and 245, the left stop button 137 transitions to the receivable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the receivable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop at the timing of (f) Button 139 Shift to ready state],
In the first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in FIG. 245], only some of the reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, whereas during the second period [for example, (h) in 245], when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed [for example, the timing (h) shown in FIG. 245], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped.
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel production (for example, a simultaneous reel production),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, from timing (i) to (f) shown in FIG. ')],
After a certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110] first transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 245], the reel effect is is executed [for example, the timing (h) shown in FIG. 245], and the plurality of reels start rotating by performing the random delay control [for example, from the timing (i) shown in FIG. ') out of the plurality of reels, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may first transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [ For example, the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 245],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

This game machine also supports quick operations such as simultaneous pressing, but some reels may not stop, which can calm down players who are enthusiastic about the game. In addition, with random delay control in between, the reel situation changes, making it possible to add variety to the game.

Note that the reel performance may be a simultaneous reel performance in which the plurality of rotating reels appear to stop at the same time [for example, the timing (h) shown in FIG. 245].

Also,
“The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when a light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. This means that the reel stop position can be calculated by resetting the reel.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [for example, left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [for example, middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel. at least some periods of time may overlap;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“In the seventh case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 243], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 243(d)],
In the seventh case, when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped [for example, in FIG. (h) timing shown in]
Also in the eighth case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 244], the first reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 244(d)],
In the eighth case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [for example, left reel 110] and the second reel [for example, middle reel 111] are stopped [for example, in FIG. (h) timing shown in]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The power failure occurs when the brake control of the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is not started and the brake control of the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is not started either. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 232(e')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first reel has multiple types of designs,
A second reel with multiple types of designs;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means that accepts a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means that receives a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding the rotation control performed on each of the plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control to shift to a constant speed state, constant speed control to maintain the constant speed state, and stop a reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for transitioning to the state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted in any one of the plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
Stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on the result of the determination by the stop operation acceptance determination means;
A game machine comprising:
The stop operation accepting means is configured to be able to accept simultaneous stop operations on the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation;
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation on the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, the operation on the second stop operation means is performed. becomes invalid and
In the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, when an operation on the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation on the second stop operation means are performed, The operation to the second stop operation means is valid,
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the fifth game in which the third case occurs, in the sixth game after the fifth game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means is executed. The reception start time may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the acceptance start times of the respective stop operation means for the fifth game and the sixth game are made different to give variety to the games.

Also,
“When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the first reel and at least one period during which the stop control is performed on the second reel. The period of the parts overlaps,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"If the power is restored after a power outage in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated after the third case, the stop operation at the second stop operation means The reception start time of the stop operation may be earlier than the start time of reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after the power is restored after a power outage, thereby adding variety to the game.

The identification prefixes described above, such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc., may be replaced as appropriate. For example, the "seventh case" may be changed to the "first case".

FIG. 246 is a timing chart in which notification timing by the notification means and the like are added to the timing chart shown in FIG. 239.

Also in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, the sequential slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, after the start lever 135 is turned on (after each of the three reels 110 to 112 starts rotating), the stop button, which is the second stop operation, is operated ((h') The period up to (the timing of) is shown as the first period. Note that, strictly speaking, the first period is a period until the second stop operation is accepted. Further, in this timing chart, when the start lever 135 is turned on, the pseudo game is not started, but the real game is started.

The notification means is shown at the bottom of the timing chart in FIG. 246. This notification means corresponds to, for example, the effect image display device 157 or the speakers 272 and 277. When the start lever 135 is turned on, the notification means starts the first notification. The first notification may be a notification based on a small role suggestion effect shown in FIG. 237(A), or a notification that foretells a shift to a certain gaming state (for example, AT state). Alternatively, it may be a notification (operation instruction notification) based on the push order navigation effect shown in FIG. 237(B), or a notification such as "Aim for 7 by pressing in order" (for example, "Aim for 7 by pressing in order") (rotation suggestion notification). The first notification may be continuously executed over a period until all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, or may be executed at a certain timing within the period. The stopped state here refers to a fully stopped state. In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 260, as the first notification, a notification (operation instruction notification) based on the push order navigation effect is executed, and the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 according to the operation instruction notification. It may be possible to perform a combination suggestion notification, or both an operation instruction notification and a combination suggestion notification may be performed.

When all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, the second notification is started. The second notification may be a result notification. For example, it may be a notification of a stopped small role, a notification of the number of acquired game values (game media) (a notification of getting ○○ pieces), or a game state to which it has been decided to move after this. It may be a notification (bonus transfer notification or AT transfer notification), or it may be a notification of information updated due to the completion of a game (number of credits, number of games, remaining AT count, etc.). This second notification may be performed continuously over a period until the main game ends, or may be performed at a certain timing within the period.

FIG. 247 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of sequentially pressing slide push operations on three stop buttons 137 to 139, as in the case of the timing chart shown in FIG. 246. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 247, the sequential push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example does not apply even if the forward press stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward press stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification. It's the same.

This will be explained below in comparison with the timing chart shown in FIG. 246.

When performing a slide push operation, since the player did not perform the stop operation with the eye button in mind, controls to assist the player such as reel retraction control were not performed, but in this implementation. In this embodiment, reel retraction control is performed. In the game machine of this embodiment, when you want to aim for a number of frames on the middle reel 111 that is off by one frame or several frames from the stopped figure of the left reel 110, or by one frame or several frames from the stopped figure of the middle reel 111, There are cases where the player wants to aim for a deviated number with the right reel 112, and in these cases, reel retraction control is executed to assist the player.

In the first stop operation (timing (h)) of the left reel 110, retraction control is not performed, and brake control is immediately performed in response to the stop operation, and the left reel 110 is stopped. Hereinafter, the act of immediately executing brake control in response to a stop operation and stopping the reel without performing pull-in control may be referred to as a stop.

Next, an operation to stop the middle reel 111 is performed (timing (h')). This stop operation corresponds to a second stop operation, and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 247 have the same period length. In the second stop operation in FIG. 247, retraction control is performed. The pull-in control is performed within a range of 4 frames or less. In this example, retraction for four frames is performed, and while the retraction is being performed, brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, and the stopping of the middle reel 111 is delayed.

Following the middle reel 11, the right reel 112 is stopped (timing (h'')). This stopping operation of the right reel 112 corresponds to a third stopping operation (final stopping operation), and is a stopping operation before the middle reel 111 stops. In the third stop operation, the right reel 112 is stopped with a beat stop. As a result, even if the stop operation for the middle reel 111 is performed at an earlier timing (timing (h')), the right reel 112 stops before the middle reel 111 stops.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a halt, and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246. That is, in the example of FIG. 247, the order of stopping the reels is left, right, and middle, but the contents of the second notification (for example, notification of watermelon as the winning combination, getting 9 pieces as the number of winnings, etc.) are as follows. This is the same as the left, middle, and right stopping order in FIG. 246. In other words, the example in FIG. 246 and the example in FIG. 247 differ in the order in which the reels stop, but the gaming value awarded to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. That is, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are in the stopped state, and in FIG. However, in FIG. 247, due to the retraction control being performed on the middle reel 111, the timing (β) is later than the timing (h'').

In addition, in this example, the pull-in control for 4 frames was performed for the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112 was stopped, but if the pull-in control for the right reel 112 was also performed for 3 frames or less, Even if there is, the right reel 112 may stop before the middle reel 111. In addition, when the pull-in control for 1 to 3 frames is performed on the middle reel 111, when the pull-in control is performed on the right reel 112 for a number of frames smaller than that of the middle reel 111, or when the right reel Even if 112 is a bit stop, the right reel 112 may stop before the middle reel 111.

Furthermore, in this example, the right reel 112 is in a stopped state while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be in a stopped state while the left reel 110 is being pulled in. . In addition, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 may be stopped while the right reel 112 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation, or the left reel 110 may be stopped while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation. Sometimes it happens.

Furthermore, when the push order navigation notifies the operating order of center, right, and left, the operator operates the center, right, and left in that order according to the notification, and while the center reel 111 is being controlled to pull in, the right reel 112 and the left The reel 110 may also be in a stopped state. In other words, even if you perform a stop operation according to the push order navigation, even if the reel stop order is right, left, middle, which is different from the order of the push order navigation, the reels will stop according to the push order navigation. A game value (for example, game media equal to the number of coins paid out when the push order bell is won) is awarded when the stop operation is performed. On the other hand, even if you perform a stop operation that ignores the push order navigation, the reels may stop in the same order as the push order navigation: middle, right, left, but in this case, No prize is won (for example, the bells are not aligned), and the above game value is not awarded.

Also, in this example, the stop order is reversed to the stop operation between the second and third stop reels, but if the stop order is reversed to the stop operation between the first and second stop reels. In some cases, the order of stopping is reversed between the first and third reels.

Next, a game machine equipped with an automatic reel stop function will be described. The reel automatic stop function is to operate the start lever 135 to start the reel rotation, and then stop the reel from rotating when a predetermined second period (for example, 40 seconds) has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control. This is a function where the reels automatically stop. For example, if none of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, the left reel 110 will first come to a halt after the second period has elapsed, and then a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 The middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped in this order every time seconds (seconds) elapse. If only the right stop button 139 among the three stop buttons 137 to 139 is not operated before the second period has elapsed, the right reel 112 will automatically stop when the second period has elapsed. become a state. A game machine equipped with an automatic stop function does not perform pseudo games. However, even if the game machine is equipped with an automatic stop function, it may be possible to perform pseudo games.

Note that while any stop button is held down (continued to be operated), even if another stop button is operated, the reel corresponding to the other stop button will not be stopped. Further, even if a plurality of stop buttons are operated simultaneously, only the reel corresponding to the stop button whose operation was detected earliest is stopped, and the remaining reels continue to rotate. Furthermore, even if the stop button is operated while any of the operating means of the start lever 135, payment button 134, and medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 is being operated, the reel corresponding to the stop button will not be stopped. Rather than not operating the stop button, the second period may elapse because the reel corresponding to the stop button does not come to a halt even if the stop button is operated.

In addition, the main control unit 300 counts during the second period, but during this counting, the reels may step out (so-called step-out) (for example, the rotating reels are intentionally stopped by hand). , if an abnormality occurs such as a power outage while the reel is rotating, the above second The period may be counted again, or the count may be continued from the count value at the time when the abnormality occurred.

FIG. 248 is a timing chart showing an example where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. In the example of FIG. 248, the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that even if the reverse push stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without being notified of the operation instruction, this example does not apply. It's the same.

In this example, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), and then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Thereafter, before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the middle stop button 138 is operated at the following timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). . Valid operations for this reverse slide push operation are the operation of the first right stop button 139 and the next operation of the middle stop button 138, and the left stop button of the left reel 110 where the light shielding piece is not detected. 137 operation is invalid (not accepted). Both the right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 are stopped with a beat stop. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 248 have the same period length.

After the middle reel 111 has stopped, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and only the left stop button LED 137a among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left stop button 137 is turned on. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. The player who should have operated up to the left stop button 137 operates the left stop button 137 again ((h2 ) timing). In response to this second operation, the left reel 110 stops at a beat stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 248 described above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated and the order in which the reels are stopped match.

However, in FIG. 248, the gray line indicates that the pull-in control for four frames is performed on the right reel 112, and the stop of the right reel 112 is delayed. In this case, the right stop button 139 was operated before the middle stop button 138, but the middle reel 111 was stopped before the right reel 112, and the order of operation of the stop buttons and the reel The stopping order of the two does not match.

FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 among the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. In the example shown in FIG. 249 as well, the sequential pressing stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example does not apply even if the forward press stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward press stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification. It's the same.

In FIG. 249, a predetermined second time period (eg, 40 seconds) is shown. As described above, when the start lever 135 is operated to start the rotation of the reel and the second period of time has elapsed after the transition to the second constant speed control, the rotating reel is automatically stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, before the second period elapses, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are sequentially pressed to perform a slide push operation. Regarding the right stop button 139, either the operation was not performed (for example, the slide push operation was stopped), or the second period elapsed before the right stop button 139 was operated, and the operation was not performed. It was not accepted (for example, the right stop button 139 was also operated by the slide push operation, but it was not accepted).

When the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 248, the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, and the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started. The stopping of the middle reel 111 is delayed. After finishing the operation of the middle stop button 111, the predetermined second period elapses while the user is sliding his or her finger on the right stop button 112 (timing (α)). As a result, the right reel 112 is brake-controlled and brought to a stopped state before the right stop button 112 is operated. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes disabled and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light emitting mode. Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a halt, and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification in FIG. 249 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246, and although the order in which the reels stop is different between the example in FIG. The gaming value awarded is the same. That is, in the example of FIG. 249, the reels stop in the order of left, right, and middle, but the contents of the second notification (for example, notification of watermelon as the winning combination, getting 9 pieces as the number of winnings, etc.) are as follows. This is the same as the left, middle, and right stopping order in FIG. 246. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 246, the timing is (h'') because the retraction control was not performed, but in FIG. 249, the automatic stop was performed on the right reel 112 because the retraction control was performed on the middle reel 111. The timing (β) is later than the timing (α).

In the example shown in FIG. 249, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but there are cases where only the left stop button 137 is operated, or where neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated. In this case, the rotating reels automatically come to a halt after the second period has elapsed. The order in which the reels are automatically shifted to the stopped state is given higher priority as the reels are located further to the left. However, in this embodiment, even when the reels are automatically stopped, retraction control is allowed, and retraction control may be executed.

Here, the number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reels once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and since 21 symbols are arranged on one reel, one frame The number of steps is 504/21=24 steps. Also, one holding time for holding one rotation control data is one interrupt time (for example, 1.49ms), and when the reel is in a constant speed state (constant speed 2 state), the time to move one frame is , 24 steps×1.49ms=35.76ms. As mentioned above, since the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped in this order every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, a maximum of 4 frame pull-in control is performed during automatic stop control. It is designed so that the reel stop order will not be reversed even if the reel is stopped. However, the predetermined time may be shortened, or one interruption time may be lengthened, so that the reel stopping order may be reversed by the pull-in control during the automatic stop control. Since the stop is automatic, there is no intervention by the player, and the interest in the game may be improved by showing the player a unique reel action. In addition, small prize winnings are achieved by performing pull-in control, and even if the reel stop order is reversed, the result is advantageous for the player, so the player does not feel distrustful.

Next, some examples will be described regarding the light emission mode of the stop button LEDs such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels are stopped.

As described above, for example, if all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped, all of those reels 110 to 112 have already shifted to the constant speed 2 state, and the light shielding piece is detected. In this case, the light emission mode of the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. In addition, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and the light shielding piece is detected, the remaining reels (rotating Only the stop button LED of the reel changes to the second light emitting mode.

FIG. 250 shows a case where retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. 3 is a timing chart illustrating an example. In the example of FIG. 250 as well, the sequential pressing stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example does not apply even if the forward press stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward press stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification. It's the same.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 248 will be mainly explained.

When the start lever 135 is operated at the timing of (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At the timing of (c), each reel 110 to 112 shifts to the constant speed 2 state.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (e), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected and the middle stop button 138 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, and the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, causing a delay in stopping the left reel 110. At the timing (h'), the middle stop button 138 is operated continuously, and the middle reel 111 is stopped at a beat stop. At the end of the sequential slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). At this timing (h''), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is not detected, the operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted, and the right reel 112 continues to rotate. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. Thereafter, at timing (f'), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the right stop button LED 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the right stop button 139 is in a state ready for operation. to move to.

FIG. 251 shows a case where retraction control is performed as a result of sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. 3 is a timing chart illustrating an example.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 250 will be mainly explained.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, and the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, causing a delay in stopping the left reel 110. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'). At this timing (h'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the middle stop button 138 is not accepted, and the middle reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is stopped with a beat stop. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. After that, at the timing (e'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the middle stop button LED 138a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the middle stop button 138 is in the state ready for operation. to move to.

FIG. 252 shows a case where retraction control is performed as a result of a sequential slide push operation being performed before the detection of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode. 3 is a timing chart illustrating an example.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 250 will be mainly explained.

In this example, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 shifts to the operation ready state, and the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected next (( (timing e)), the middle stop button 138 transitions to an operation-ready state. Then, before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, the forward push slide push operation is started. At the timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is not detected, the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted, and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'). The pull-in control for the middle reel 111 is performed for four frames, and the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, so that the stopping of the middle reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is stopped with a beat stop. That is, after the right reel 112 starts rotating, before the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the middle stop button 138 is activated before the right stop button 139 is operated. Even if it is operated, the middle reel 111 shifts to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state.

Eventually, the middle reel 111, which was under retraction control, stops (timing (β)). Thereafter, at the timing (d'), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the left stop button LED 137a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left top button 137 is in a state ready for operation. to move to. In FIG. 252, the period from when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating until the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode is shown as a fourth period. The right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 are in a stopped state within this fourth period.

Next, in the gaming machine equipped with the reel automatic stop function described using FIG. We will explain about game machines that are not equipped with the automatic stop function. In this game machine, after the start lever 135 is operated and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the rotation stops even after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control). If there is a reel for which the button has not been operated, the effect image display device 157 and the speakers 272, 277 issue a notification that the reel is rotating and prompts the user to stop the reel. If the player leaves his/her seat, a clerk at the game parlor operates the stop button.

FIG. 253 is a timing chart when sequential slide push operations are performed in a pseudo game and a main game that is started following the pseudo game.

In the pseudo game, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135 (timing in (a)), and then starts constant speed control after acceleration control (timing in (b)). The constant speed control is divided into a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control. After shifting to the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and the left stop button 13 is detected.
7 shifts to an operation-ready state, and at timing (e), the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 shifts to an operation-ready state. In this example, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is finally detected (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to the operation ready state, and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a all emit the second light. Change in form.

Also in the pseudo game, operation instruction notifications (notifications such as "left, middle, right") and role suggestion notifications (notifications such as "Aim for 7") are executed as first notifications. In this example, after this, according to the operation instruction notification (first notification), the slide push operation is performed in order, and the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((h), (h'), (h ''), the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode. In the pseudo game, stop control is not executed, but instead, vibration control is executed to slightly vibrate the reels. Vibration control causes the reel to vibrate slightly rather than completely stop, but it can be made to appear stopped, creating a pseudo-stop state. This pseudo-stop state is also a type of stop state. In addition, in the pseudo stop, the vibration width may be increased in order to make the difference from the real stop (determined stop) in the main game more clear.

Note that the period from the timing (a) when the start lever 135 is turned on to the timing (h') when the middle reel 111 is stopped is the first period, which is the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. The period and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 have the same period length.

When all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state (pseudo stopped state), the second notification is started. For example, when "7-7-7" is pseudo-stopped in response to the first notification, a result notification such as "Big Bonus Obtained" may be made as the second notification. If you are able to line up 7 symbols in the pseudo game, you may be able to transition to the AT state when the main game starts, and in this case, the second notification may be "Go to AT state". It may be a notification.

Eventually, the pseudo game ends, and the real game starts from the timing (i). This game may be automatically started when a predetermined time elapses without operating the start lever 135, or may be started by operating the start lever 135. However, even when the main game is started, the reels do not start rotating immediately; random delay control is performed as explained using FIG. 240, and each reel starts rotating at a different timing. In the example, the left reel 110 starts rotating the slowest, and the left reel 110 switches from acceleration control to first constant speed control at the timing (B). Then, all three reels 110 to 112 switch from the first constant speed control to the second constant speed control at the timing (C). After shifting to the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (D), the left stop button 137 shifts to the state in which operation can be accepted, and at the timing (E), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. The light-shielding piece of the reel 111 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 shifts to an operation ready state. Finally, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (F)), the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation ready state, and the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a all change to the second light emitting mode. .

In this game as well, sequential slide push operations are performed, and at the operation timing of each stop button 137 to 139 ((H), (H'), (H'') timing), the corresponding reel is brake controlled. The stop button is stopped and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emitting mode.

The notification means switches from the second notification to the first notification when the game starts (timing (i)), and starts the second notification when all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state. be done.

FIG. 254 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where pull-in control is performed as a result of performing a forward push slide push operation in a pseudo game. In the example of FIG. 254, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in the pseudo game, and a sequential push operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example applies even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification being performed. be.

Hereinafter, the differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 will be mainly explained.

In the sequential slide push operation, the left stop button 137 is operated first (timing (h)), and the left reel 110 is brake controlled immediately in response to the operation of the left stop button 137, and vibration control is performed. A pseudo-stop occurs.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated (timing (h')), the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, and a pseudo stop of the middle reel 111 is performed. I'll be late.

Finally, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). The operation timing of this right stop button 139 is the timing before the middle reel 111 stops. The right reel 112 is immediately subjected to brake control in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and is brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 enter a pseudo-stopped state (stopped state), and the second notification is started. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253. That is, in the example of FIG. 254, the order of pseudo-stopping of the reels is left, right, and middle, but the content of the second notification (for example, result notification such as "big bonus obtained") is the left, middle, and so on in FIG. , is the same as for the pseudo-stop order on the right. In other words, in the example of FIG. 253 and the example of FIG. 254, although the order of pseudo-stopping of the reels is different, the gaming value given to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. That is, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are in the stopped state (pseudo-stopped state), and in FIG. 253, since the pull-in control was not performed (h ''), but in FIG. 254, the timing (β) is later than the timing (h'') because the pull-in control has been performed for the middle reel 111.

In this example, the pull-in control for 4 frames was performed for the middle reel 111, and the pull-in control was not performed for the right reel 112, but the pull-in control for 3 frames or less was also performed for the right reel 112. Even in this case, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the middle reel 111. In addition, when the pull-in control for 1 to 3 frames is performed on the middle reel 111, when the pull-in control is performed on the right reel 112 for a number of frames smaller than the number of frames drawn on the middle reel 111, Even when the reel 112 is not subjected to retraction control, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the middle reel 111.

Further, in this example, the right reel 112 pseudo-stops during the retraction control of the middle reel 111, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the left reel 110. In addition, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 may pseudo-stop while the right reel 112 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation, or the left reel 110 may be pseudo-stop while the middle reel 111 is being pulled in by a reverse push operation. There is also. Furthermore, push order navigation may also be executed in pseudo-games, and when the push order navigation notifies the order of operations of middle, right, and left, the operations are performed in the order of middle, right, and left according to the notification. During the retraction control of the middle reel 111, the right reel 112 and the left reel 110 may come to a pseudo stop.

In addition, in this example, the order of pseudo stops between the second and third stop reels is the opposite of the stop operation, but between the first and second stop reels, the order of pseudo stops is the opposite of the stop operation. The order may be reversed, or the order of pseudo-stops may be reversed to the stop operations between the first and third reels.

Furthermore, in place of the slide push operation, multiple stop buttons may be pressed simultaneously. Even if they are pressed simultaneously, there is usually a difference in detection timing. For example, even if the left stop button 137 and right stop button 139 are pressed simultaneously, the operation of one stop button is detected first, and the operation of the other stop button is detected as the operation of the other stop button. The reel corresponding to the other stop button continues to rotate without pseudo-stopping. Note that the same applies when another stop button is operated while a certain stop button is being operated (long-pressed state). However, the operation of the other stop button or the operation of another stop button may be detected, and the corresponding reel may be pseudo-stopped. The above explanation is not limited to the pseudo game, but also applies to the main game.

Furthermore, although the explanation using FIG. 254 was an explanation of pull-in control within the maximum number of draw-in pieces, in a pseudo game, it is also possible to perform a reel action that looks like pull-in control that exceeds the maximum draw-in number of pieces. . For example, 20 frames may be drawn in, or even if the stop button is operated, the reels may continue to rotate for one round or more and then come to a pseudo stop (the same applies to the following description).

Furthermore, in the pseudo-game, as a reel action, the maximum number of pieces to be drawn in may be different for each reel, or the number of pieces to be drawn in may be determined to be a predetermined number for each reel (also in the following explanation). same.). Also, in this game, the upper limit number of pieces to be pulled in may be different for each reel within the maximum number of pieces to be drawn in (within a range of 1 to 4 pieces), or the number of pieces to be drawn in for each reel is determined to be a predetermined number. (The same applies to the following explanations.)

As mentioned above, a game machine that can perform simulated games does not have an automatic reel stop function for the main game, but in order to ensure the transition to the main game, an automatic pseudo-stop function that automatically stops the reels during the pseudo game is installed. Equipped with a stop function. Whereas the reel automatic stop function was a function that automatically executed the reel stop control when a predetermined second period (for example, 40 seconds) elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control, The reel automatic pseudo-stop function is a function that automatically performs reel vibration control when a third predetermined period has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control. The third period may be the same length as the second period, or may be shorter than the second period. Alternatively, the period may be longer than the second period. Since the pseudo-stopped state is also a type of stopped state, the reel automatic stop function and the reel automatic pseudo-stop function are the same in that they are functions that automatically shift the reels to the stopped state.

FIG. 255 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected in a pseudo game. In the example of FIG. 255 as well, the operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in the pseudo game, and the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example applies even if the reverse push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push operation is performed at the player's discretion without being notified of the operation instruction. be.

In this example, in the pseudo game, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), and then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Thereafter, before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the middle stop button 138 is operated at the following timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). . Valid operations for this reverse slide push operation are the operation of the first right stop button 139 and the next operation of the middle stop button 138, and the left stop button of the left reel 110 where no light shielding piece is detected. 137 operation is invalid (not accepted). Brake control is immediately executed for both the right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 in response to the stop operation, resulting in a pseudo stop. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 255 have the same period length.

After the middle reel 111 has stopped, the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), and only the left stop button LED 137a among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left stop button 137 is turned on. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. The player who should have operated up to the left stop button 137 operates the left stop button 137 again ((h2 ) timing). In response to this second operation, the left reel 110 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 255 described above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated and the order in which the reels are stopped match.

However, in FIG. 255, the gray line indicates that the pull-in control for four frames is performed on the right reel 112, and the stopping of the right reel 112 is delayed. In this case, the right stop button 139 was operated before the middle stop button 138, but the middle reel 111 pseudo-stopped before the right reel 112, and the order of operation of the stop buttons and the reels are different. The order of pseudo-stopping does not match.

FIG. 256 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 among the three reels 110 to 112 automatically pseudo-stops.

In FIG. 256, a predetermined third period (eg, 25 seconds) is shown. As described above, when the start lever 135 is operated to start the rotation of the reel and the third period has elapsed after shifting to the second constant speed control, the rotating reel automatically comes to a pseudo-stop.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, before the third period elapses, a slide push operation is performed on the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 by sequential pressing in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Regarding the right stop button 139, either the operation was not performed (for example, the slide push operation was stopped), or the third period elapsed before the right stop button 139 was operated, and the operation was not performed. It was not accepted (for example, the right stop button 139 was also operated by the slide push operation, but it was not accepted). Note that this example applies even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification being performed. be.

When the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 254, the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, and the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started. The pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 is delayed. After the operation of the middle stop button 111 is finished, the third predetermined period elapses while the finger is being slid onto the right stop button 112 (timing (α)). As a result, the right reel 112 is brake-controlled and pseudo-stopped before the right stop button 112 is operated. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes disabled and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light emitting mode. Eventually, brake control is executed for the middle reel 111 that has slipped by four frames due to the pull-in control, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a stop state (pseudo stop state), and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification in FIG. 256 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253, and although the order of pseudo-stopping of the reels is different between the example in FIG. The gaming value given to each player is the same. That is, in the example of FIG. 256, the order of stopping the reels is left, right, and middle, but the content of the second notification (for example, "Big bonus acquisition") is the pseudo-stopping order of left, middle, and right in FIG. 253. The same is true for the order of However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 253, the timing is (h'') because the pull-in control was not performed, but in FIG. 256, the pull-in control was performed on the middle reel 111, and the automatic pseudo-stop was performed on the right reel 112. The timing (β) is later than the timing (α).

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but there are cases where only the left stop button 137 is operated, or when neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated. In this case, when the third period elapses, the rotating reels automatically come to a pseudo-stop. The order of automatic pseudo-stops is that the reels located on the left side have higher priority. However, in this embodiment, retraction control is allowed even when automatic pseudo-stopping of the reels is performed, and retraction control may be executed.

As with the automatic stop described above, the next reel will pseudo-stop every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, so during the automatic pseudo-stop control, up to 4 frame retraction control can be performed. It is designed so that the order in which the reels pseudo-stop will not be reversed even if this occurs. However, the order in which the reels are pseudo-stopped by retraction control may be reversed during automatic pseudo-stop control by shortening the predetermined time or lengthening one interruption time.

Also, instead of controlling the reels that are spinning at the end of the third period from the left at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the same manner as when the stop button is operated, The reel control may be the same as when all stop buttons corresponding to the reels being rotated are operated at the same time. In this case, a specific pseudo-stop mode may be performed using the retraction control, or a pseudo-stop may be performed at a random point without performing the retraction control. Furthermore, if the rotating reel is not under constant speed control at the end of the third period (for example, if it has stepped out), it may be brought to a pseudo stop after passing through acceleration control → constant speed control, or Even if speed control is not applied, brake control may be executed to immediately bring the vehicle to a pseudo stop.

Next, some examples will be described regarding the light emission mode of the stop button LEDs such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels are stopped.

In the pseudo game, as in the main game, when the conditions are met, the light emission mode of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 257 shows that in a pseudo game, the detection of the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed, and as a result of performing the sequential push slide push operation before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where In the example of FIG. 257 as well, operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in the pseudo game, and sequential push operations are performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example applies even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without the operation instruction notification being performed. be.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 254 will be mainly explained.

When the start lever 135 is operated at the timing of (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At the timing of (c), each reel 110 to 112 shifts to the constant speed 2 state.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (e), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected and the middle stop button 138 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Continuously, at the timing (h'), the middle stop button 138 is operated, and the middle reel 111 is immediately brake controlled in response to the operation of the middle stop button 138, and pseudo-stopped by vibration control. At the end of the sequential slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h''1)). At this timing (h''1), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is not detected, the operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted, and the right reel 112 continues to rotate. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. Thereafter, at timing (f'), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the right stop button LED 139a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the right stop button 139 is in a state ready for operation. to move to.

The player operates the right stop button 139 again at timing (h''2) because the right reel 112 continues to rotate and the right stop button LED 139a is lit in the second light emission mode. In response to this second operation, the right reel 112 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. When the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo stop, the second notification is started, and then the main game is started from the timing (i).

FIG. 258 shows that in a pseudo game, the detection of the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed, and as a result of performing the sequential slide push operation before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where

The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 257.

At the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 shifts to a state ready for operation, and at the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 is activated. Transition to a state where operations can be accepted. Then, before the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, a sequential slide push operation is started. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is controlled to pull in four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'1). At this timing (h'1), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the middle stop button 138 is not accepted, and the middle reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the sequential push slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is immediately brake controlled in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and vibration control is performed. A pseudo-stop occurs. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was under retraction control, stops. After that, at the timing (e'), the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the middle stop button LED 138a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the middle stop button 138 is in the state ready for operation. to move to.

The player operates the middle stop button 138 again at the timing (h'2) because the middle reel 111 continues to rotate and the middle stop button LED 138a is lit in the second light emission mode. In response to this second operation, the middle reel 111 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. When the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo stop, the second notification is started, and then the main game is started from the timing (i).

FIG. 259 shows that in a pseudo game, the detection of the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is delayed, and as a result of performing the sequential slide push operation before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, retraction control is performed. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where

The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 257.

In this example, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 shifts to the operation ready state, and the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected next (( (timing e)), the middle stop button 138 transitions to an operation-ready state. Then, before the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, the forward push slide push operation is started. At the timing (h1), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h1), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is not detected, the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted, and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. The middle stop button 138 is continuously operated at timing (h'). The pull-in control for the middle reel 111 is performed for four frames, the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the sequential slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). The right reel 112 is immediately subjected to brake control in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and is brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. That is, after the right reel 112 starts rotating, before the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the middle stop button 138 is activated before the right stop button 139 is operated. Even when operated, the pseudo-stop occurs before the middle reel 111 pseudo-stops.

Eventually, the middle reel 111, which has been under retraction control, comes to a pseudo stop (timing (β)). Thereafter, at the timing (d'), the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, and among the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a, only the left stop button LED 137a becomes the second light emitting mode, and the left top button 137 is in a state ready for operation. to move to. In FIG. 259, as in FIG. 252, the period from when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating until the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode is shown as a fourth period. The right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 are in a stopped state within this fourth period.

The player operates the left stop button 138 again at the timing (h2) because the left reel 110 continues to rotate and the left stop button LED 137a is lit in the second light emission mode. In response to this second operation, the left reel 110 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. When the left reel 110 comes to a pseudo stop, the second notification is started, and then the main game is started from the timing (i).

FIG. 260 is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and middle stop button 138 are simultaneously pressed just before the third predetermined period elapses in a pseudo game.

In this example, when the stop buttons are pressed simultaneously, the operation of the stop button whose operation is detected after the second one is also treated as valid. That is, at timing (h), the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected first. As a result, the left reel 110 is immediately subjected to brake control and brought to a pseudo stop by vibration control. Next, the operation of the middle stop button 138 is detected, but the middle reel 111 is pulled in for four frames, the brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 is delayed. Note that also when the operation of the middle stop button 138 is detected first and then the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected, the middle reel 111 is controlled to retract and the left reel 110 immediately comes to a pseudo stop. Alternatively, the left reel 110 may be controlled to retract and the middle reel 111 immediately comes to a pseudo stop, or both the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111 may be controlled to be retracted.

Immediately after the simultaneous pressing is performed, a predetermined third period has elapsed (timing (α)), and the right stop button 139 is no longer operated. However, the automatic pseudo-stop function works for the right reel 112, and the reel automatically pseudo-stops. In the end, even if the right reel 112 automatically pseudo-stops, the middle reel 111 is in the middle of retraction control, and the pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 comes at the latest timing (timing (β)). In this example, even if the simultaneous press operation is performed before the automatic pseudo stop, the reel that will enter the pseudo stop state before the automatic pseudo stop (the left reel 110 that pseudo stops at the timing of (h)) and the reel that will pseudo stop before the automatic pseudo stop After that, there is a reel that comes to a pseudo-stop state (the middle reel 111 that pseudo-stops at the timing (β)).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 253 to 260, games in which a pseudo game is executed (pseudo game + main game) are shown, and in both pseudo games, the order of operation of the stop button and the order of pseudo stopping of the reels are inconsistent. However, even in the main game that is executed following the pseudo game, or only in the main game, the order in which the stop buttons are operated and the order in which the reels are stopped may not match.

Further, although a game machine capable of executing a pseudo game is not equipped with an automatic reel stop function in the main game, it may be installed. In this case, if the stop operation is performed just before the second period has elapsed in the main game that is executed following the pseudo game, the reels that were stopped immediately before the second period will be slower than the reels that automatically stop. Sometimes it may stop.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 248 (h'') , the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel enters the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h'), the timing of FIG. 255 (h')]. [For example, the timing in FIG. 248 (h''), the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 247(h'), 249 (h'), the timing of FIG. 254 (h'), the timing of FIG. 256 (h')], the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, ), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [For example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'' ) timing, FIG. 249 (α) timing, FIG. 254 (h'') timing, FIG. 256 (α) timing],
The gaming machine is capable of executing a game in which a pseudo game is played,
The pseudo game is a reel performance in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it appear that the reels have stopped before the main game in which a fixed stop of the reels is executed,
In a game in which the pseudo game is played [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the second reel reaches the second stop before the first stop button is operated. When the button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h')] [For example, the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')]
In a game in which the pseudo game is played [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated. Even if the button is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (β)] before the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, 256 (α) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

In addition,
"A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The gaming machine is capable of executing a game in which a pseudo game is played,
The pseudo game is a reel performance in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it appear that the reels have stopped before the main game in which a fixed stop of the reels is executed,
In a game in which the pseudo game is played [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the second reel reaches the second stop before the first stop button is operated. When the button is operated [for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel shifts to a state in which the pseudo-stop is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "pseudo-stop state"). [For example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h')] may shift to the pseudo-stop state [for example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')],
In a game in which the pseudo game is played [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated. Even if a button is operated, the first reel may shift to the pseudo-stop state before it shifts to the pseudo-stop state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (β)]. [For example, the timing of FIG. 256(α)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with a notification means capable of notifying that the reel is in a stoppable state,
The plurality of reels are capable of transitioning from an unstoppable state to a stoppable state [for example, a state in which a light shielding piece of the reel is detected when the rotating reel is in a constant speed state] for each reel,
The notifying means is a first notifying means [for example, a middle stop button] capable of giving a first notice that the first reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED138a],
The notifying means is a second notifying means [for example, a right stop button] capable of giving a second notification that the second reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED139a].
The first notification means does not execute the first notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
The second notification means does not execute the second notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
After the second reel starts rotating, the second stop button is pressed before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h''), the timing of FIG. 255 (h'') ) timing],
After the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. Even when the first reel is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 252 (h''), the timing of FIG. 259 ( h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

moreover,
``Even if the second stop button is not operated after the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 256(h')], the pseudo-stop is executed. (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo stop state") [for example, the timing of FIG. 256 (β)] before the second reel moves to the pseudo stop state. [For example, the timing of FIG. 256(α)],
The second reel does not shift from the rotating state to the pseudo-stop state due to the operation of the first stop button.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 248 (h'') , the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel enters the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h'), the timing of FIG. 255 (h')]. [For example, the timing in FIG. 248 (h''), the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 247(h'), 249 (h'), the timing of FIG. 254 (h'), the timing of FIG. 256 (h')], the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, ), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [For example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'' ) timing, FIG. 249 (α) timing, FIG. 254 (h'') timing, FIG. 256 (α) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the reel (the second reel) that is different from the reel that corresponds to the stop operation (the first reel) shifts to the stopped state first, which can give the player a sense of discomfort. , the interest in playing games may improve.

The stopped state may be a state in which the reels appear to have stopped (a pseudo-stop state in a pseudo game), or the main game is started by a pseudo start from a pseudo game, and the reels are stopped in the main game. It may be in a stopped state (a pseudo-stop may be referred to as a real stop or a definite stop) (the same applies below).

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
stop operation means [for example, stop buttons 137 to 139] provided in a one-to-one relationship for each of the plurality of reels and each operated by a player;
Operation instruction means [for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277] capable of executing operation instruction notification [for example, first notification (notification by push order navigation effect)] that instructs the order of operation of the stop operation means; and,
Equipped with
The stop operation means includes a first stop button [for example, middle stop button 138] and a second stop button [for example, right stop button 139],
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated according to the operation instruction notification [for example, FIG. 255 (h'') timing], the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h'), the timing of FIG. 255 (h')] There are cases where the system shifts to a stopped state before [for example, the timing in FIG. 248 (h''), the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')],
After the second reel starts rotating, if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated according to the operation instruction notification [for example, FIG. ') timing, FIG. 249(h') timing, FIG. 254(h') timing, FIG. , the timing of FIG. 247(β), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)]. 247 (h'') timing, FIG. 249 (α) timing, FIG. 254 (h'') timing, FIG. 256 (α) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification, a reel (the second reel) different from the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) is brought to a stopped state first. Shifting to this can give the player a sense of discomfort and may improve the interest of the game.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the second reel is moved before the first reel shifts to a stopped state. transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h''), the timing of FIG. 249 (α), the timing of FIG. 254 (h''), The timing shown in FIG. 256 (α)], or the case where the first reel shifts to the stopped state before the second reel shifts to the stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [ For example, there is also the timing shown in FIG. 246 (h'), the timing shown in FIG. 253 (h'),
The gaming value given to the player in the first case [for example, the number of gaming media paid out] and the gaming value given to the player in the second case [for example, the number of gaming media paid out] are are the same,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second case in which the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) shifts to the stopped state before a different reel (the second reel), the reel corresponding to the stop operation There is also a first case in which a reel (the second reel) different from the reel (the first reel) enters the stopped state first, and in the first case, it may give the player a sense of discomfort. , the interest in playing games may improve. On the other hand, whether in the first case or the second case, the gaming value given to the player remains the same, so the player will not be disadvantaged.

Note that the gaming value is, for example, the profit given to the player. The same gaming value may mean that the amount of gaming media awarded to the player is the same, or a game that maintains an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT state) that is given to the player. The number of additional games may be the same.

Also,
"Equipped with operation instruction means capable of executing operation instruction notification for instructing the order of operation of the first stop button and the second stop button,
When the first stop button and the second stop button are operated according to the first operation order instructed by the operation instruction means, the order in which the first reel and the second reel are stopped is as follows: It may be the same as the first operation order, or it may be different from the first operation order,
Even if the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order instructed by the operation instruction means, the first reel and the order of stopping the second reel may be the same as the order of operation of the first reel,
In a game where the first operation order is instructed by the operation instruction means, a first game value is awarded when the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in accordance with the first operation order. is,
In a game where the first operation order is instructed by the instruction means, as a result of operating the first stop button and the second stop button in the second operation order, the first reel and the second stop button are Even if the second reel stop order is the same as the first operation order, the first gaming value will not be awarded.
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
a first stop button [e.g., middle stop button 138] operated by the player;
a second stop button [e.g., right stop button 139] operated by the player;
A game result notification means [for example, effect image display device 157] that can execute game result notification [for example, stop small role notification, etc.];
Equipped with
The plurality of reels are in a first state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the first stop button. 1 reel [for example, middle reel 111],
The plurality of reels are in a second state that can be shifted from a rotating state to a stopped state [for example, a real stop (determined stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game] by operating the second stop button. It also includes the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the second reel is moved before the first reel shifts to a stopped state. transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h''), the timing of FIG. 249 (α), the timing of FIG. 254 (h''), The timing shown in FIG. 256 (α)], or the case where the first reel shifts to the stopped state before the second reel shifts to the stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [ For example, there is also the timing shown in FIG. 246 (h'), the timing shown in FIG. 253 (h'),
The timing at which the game result notification means starts executing the result notification is later in the first case than in the second case [for example, the timing at which the game result notification means starts execution of the result notification is delayed by the amount of delay in the timing when the stop state is reached by the pull-in control. ] There are cases where
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second case in which the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) shifts to the stopped state before a different reel (the second reel), the reel corresponding to the stop operation There is also a first case in which a reel (the second reel) different from the reel (the first reel) enters the stopped state first, and in the first case, it may give the player a sense of discomfort. , the interest in playing games may improve. Additionally, the timing of starting execution of the result notification is later in the game that resulted in the first case than in the game that resulted in the second case, so that the first case may not have occurred. This may be easier for the player to understand, may give the player a sense of discomfort, and may further improve the interest in the game.

The result notification may be a stop small role notification, a notification of the number of acquired gaming values (gaming media), or a notification of an advantageous gaming state to which it has been decided to proceed. It may be a bonus transfer notification or an AT transfer notification), or it may be a notification of information updated due to the completion of a game (number of credits, number of games, remaining AT count, etc.).

For example, when a second stop operation is performed using the first stop button, and then a third stop operation is performed using the second stop button, the first reel is controlled to pull in four frames; If the second reel is controlled to pull in one frame, and the first reel shifts to the stopped state before the second reel shifts to the stopped state (in the second case) )become. On the other hand, in the same way, even if a second stop operation is performed using the first stop button, and then a third stop operation is performed using the second stop button, the first reel may When the retraction control is performed and the retraction control is not performed on the second reel, if the second reel transitions to the stopped state before the first reel transitions to the stopped state ( In the first case). The timing of starting execution of the result notification may be later in the game in the first case than in the game in the second case, but the first stop button and the second It changes depending on the operation interval of the stop button. That is, even in the second case, if the operation interval is widened (if the third stop operation using the second stop button is performed after a period of time), the timing at which execution of the result notification is started is as follows. The game in the second case is slower than the game in the first case.

Also,
``The second reel is operated when the first stop button is operated while the first reel is in a stopable state [for example, in a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the middle reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)]. Even if the second stop button is operated after the first reel is stopped [for example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h''), the timing of FIG. 254 (h'')], the first reel is stopped. [For example, the timing of FIG. 247 (h'), the timing of FIG. 254 (β)] may shift to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 254 (h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the reel corresponding to the subsequent operation (the second reel) stops first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the order in which the operation was performed is different from the order in which the stopped state is reached. This can give the player a more sense of discomfort and may improve the interest of the game.

Note that if the first stop button is operated before detecting the detection piece [for example, a light-shielding piece] of the first reel, then the second stop button is operated. The second reel shifts to a stopped state before the first reel shifts to a stopped state.

Also,
``The second reel is set when the second stop button is not operated after the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(h'), the timing of FIG. 256(h')]. Even in the case where the first reel moves to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 249 (β), the timing of FIG. 256 (β)], the first reel may shift to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. [For example, the timing of FIG. 249 (α), the timing of FIG. 256 (α)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the unoperated reel, which is different from the operated reel, stops first, thereby giving the player a more sense of discomfort, which may improve the interest of the game.

In addition,
"Equipped with a control means capable of executing retraction control of the first reel,
The second reel is in a rotating state and the second stop button is not operated before a predetermined period [for example, a second period (40 seconds) or a third period (25 seconds)] elapses. In this case, the rotating state automatically shifts to the stopped state after the predetermined period has elapsed.
If the first stop button is operated immediately before the predetermined period elapses and the first reel is controlled to pull in a certain number of frames, which is one or more frames, the rotating state stops when the predetermined period elapses. The second reel that automatically shifts to the stopped state may shift to the stopped state earlier than the first reel [for example, the timing in FIG. 249 (α), the timing in FIG. 256 (α)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

In this case, the second stop button is not operated.

Further, in a game machine where the reels are automatically stopped in the main game, a pseudo game in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it appear that the reels have stopped is not started. However, a pseudo game may be started. Further, in a game machine that can perform a pseudo game, automatic stopping of the reels can be executed in the pseudo game, but automatic stopping of the reels is not executed in the main game. However, it may also be possible to automatically stop the reels in this game.

Also,
`` Equipped with a notification means capable of notifying that the reel is in a stoppable state,
The plurality of reels are capable of transitioning from an unstoppable state to a stoppable state [for example, a state in which a light shielding piece of the reel is detected when the rotating reel is in a constant speed state] for each reel,
The notifying means is a first notifying means [for example, a middle stop button] capable of giving a first notice that the first reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED138a],
The notifying means is a second notifying means [for example, a right stop button] capable of giving a second notification that the second reel in a rotating state is in a stoppable state [for example, lighting in a second light emitting mode]. LED139a].
The first notification means does not execute the first notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
The second notification means does not execute the second notification unless all of the plurality of reels transition to the stoppable state,
After the second reel starts rotating, the second stop button is pressed before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248 (h''), the timing of FIG. 255 (h'') ) timing],
After the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. Even if the first reel is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state before shifting to the stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 252 (h''), the timing of FIG. 259 ( h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the reels that are different from the reels that correspond to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stop first, thereby giving the player a more sense of discomfort and improving the interest of the game. There are cases where

Note that after the first reel starts rotating, the second reel is activated before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed. Even when the stop button is operated, the second reel may shift to the stopped state before it shifts to the stopped state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 248(α), Timing of FIG. 255(α)].

Also,
``If the second stop button is operated within the period from when the reels start rotating until when the notification means starts executing the notification [for example, the fourth period shown in FIG. 249] The first stop button may be operated first, and the second reel may shift to the stopped state within the period before the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, as shown in FIG. '') timing, Figure 259 (h'') timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the different reels stop first before the notification from the notification means, it is possible to give the player a more sense of discomfort, and the interest in the game may be improved.

Also,
“After the second reel shifts to the stopped state within the period, the first reel may also shift to the stopped state within the period [for example, the timing of FIG. 252(β), the timing of FIG. 259( β) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a reel different from the reel corresponding to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stops first, and then the reel corresponding to the operation stops, causing a feeling of discomfort to the player. This may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
``The gaming machine is capable of executing a game in which a pseudo game is played,
The pseudo game is a reel performance in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it appear that the reels have stopped before the main game in which a fixed stop of the reels is executed,
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the second reel is pressed to the second stop before the first stop button is operated. When the button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h'')], the first reel shifts to the stopped state before [for example, the timing of FIG. 255 (h')] [For example, the timing in FIG. 255 (h'')]
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a real game], after the second reel starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed before the second stop button is operated. Even if the button is operated, the first reel may shift to the stopped state [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (β)] before the first reel shifts to the stopped state [for example, 256 (α) timing],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, even in a game in which a pseudo game is executed, it is possible to give the player a more sense of discomfort, and the interest in the game may be improved.

In addition,
"The second reel starts rotating in the period before the main game starts (the so-called pseudo game period) in the game in which the pseudo game is executed, and then the first stop button is pressed. If the second stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, the first reel may shift to a pseudo-stop stop state before shifting to a pseudo-stop stop state. can be,
Even if the first stop button is operated after the second reel starts rotating during the period and before the second stop button is operated, the second reel The reel may shift to a pseudo-stopped state before it shifts to a pseudo-stopped state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

or,
"The second reel starts rotating during the period of the main game in the game in which the pseudo game is executed (the period after the pseudo stop ends), and then the first stop button is operated. If the second stop button is operated before the first reel moves to the fixed stop stop state, the first reel may shift to the fixed stop stop state,
Even if the first stop button is operated after the second reel starts rotating during the period and before the second stop button is operated, the second reel The reel may shift to a fixed stop state before it shifts to a fixed stop state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

The functions and effects described in the above embodiments are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments. do not have.

Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may not be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

<About the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>
Next, an example of the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 261 to 264. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 261 is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. The slot machine 100 is internally provided with a locking mechanism 1401 that locks the front door 102 in a closed state to the main body 101, and this locking mechanism 1401 is shown in dotted lines in FIG. 261. This locking mechanism 1401 includes a lock main body 1401A provided on the front door 102 side and a locked shaft 1401B provided on the main body 101 side. When the front door 102 is closed, the locking part 1402 (described later) of the lock body 1401A is fixed to the locked shaft 1401B, and the front door 102 in the closed state is locked to the body 101 as shown in FIG. Ru. Note that the lock body 1401A moves on a circular orbit in response to the opening and closing of the front door 102, but when the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B are close to each other, this movement is a movement along the front and back direction of the slot machine 100. It can be considered as Therefore, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the moving direction of the lock body 1401A is the front-rear direction of the slot machine 100 unless otherwise specified. Note that hereinafter, the state in which the locking portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is locked on the locked shaft 1401B is referred to as a locked state, and the state in which the locking portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is not locked on the locked shaft 1401B is referred to as a locked state. is called the unlocked state.

262(a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in the unlocked state, and FIG. 262(b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in FIG. 262(a). FIG. 262(c) is a view showing the lock body 1401A when the lock mechanism 1401 is in the locked state from the side side of the slot machine 100. Furthermore, FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B.

The lock body 1401A has a locking portion 1402 and a housing portion 1404. The accommodating part 1404 has a space for accommodating the locking part 1402, and an opening through which a part of the locking part 1402 can be exposed is formed on the back side. FIG. 262(a) shows a state in which a portion of the locking portion 1402 accommodated in the accommodation portion 1404 is exposed from the back side of the accommodation portion 1404. This locking portion 1402 has a recessed portion 1402DP formed therein, and is rotatable around a rotating shaft 1403. Further, the locking portion 1402 is biased by a spring member (not shown) in the direction of protruding from the opening of the housing portion 1404 toward the back side (clockwise in FIG. 262(a)). In the unlocked state (FIGS. 262(a) and 262(b)), a portion of the locking portion 1402 protrudes from the back side of the accommodating portion 1404 and comes into contact with the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the accommodating portion 1404, It will come to a halt at that position.

An approach path 1404ER is formed in the housing portion 1404 along the moving direction (front-back direction), and the locked shaft 1401B is received along this approach path 1404ER by movement of the front door 102 (FIG. 263(a)). ～(d)). In the approach path 1404ER, a part of the surface of the locking part 1402 (hereinafter referred to as the receiving surface 1402RS) is located toward the opening of the approach path 1404ER, and the locked shaft 1401B that has entered along the approach path 1404ER The receiving surface 1402RS is pushed, and the locking part 1402 rotates in the direction in which it is accommodated in the housing part 1404 (counterclockwise in FIG. 262(a)). When the front door 102 moves to a closed position, the locking portion 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown) (FIGS. 262(c) and 263(d)). At this time, the locking portion 1402 is locked to the locked shaft 1401B. More specifically, as the posture of the locking portion 1402 changes due to rotation, the locked shaft 1401B becomes immovable in the front-rear direction inside the recess 1402DP, and the front door 102 becomes locked. Note that by inserting the door key into the door key hole 140 and rotating it, the locking portion 1402 is released from being fixed by the latch mechanism, and the front door 102 can be opened.

Further, the main body 101 is provided with a door sensor 1406 for detecting the closed state of the front door 102. This door sensor 1406 is pressed by the lock body 1401A when the front door 102 is closed, and when the front door 102 is completely closed (FIG. 263(d)), a signal detecting the closed state is output. . Note that the member that presses the door sensor 1406 may be located at another location on the front door 102, instead of the lock body 1401A. Alternatively, the door sensor 1406 may be provided on the front door 102 and the main body 101 may press the door sensor 1406.

When performing maintenance on the slot machine 100, it is necessary to open the front door 102. However, if the front door 102 closes naturally and enters the locked state while the user is not paying attention, the front door 102 will have to be opened again, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of maintenance work. If a stopper is used to prevent the front door 102 from being locked, the number of tools on hand will increase, making the work complicated. To solve this problem, the locking mechanism 1401 of this embodiment is designed to maintain the unlocked state by using a setting key used for maintenance work. This specific configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 264(a) is a side view showing the setting key SK inserted into the lock body 1401A, and FIG. 264(b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in FIG. 264(a) with a solid line. FIG. 264(c) is a view of the lock body 1401A of FIG. 264(a) viewed from the back side. In the lock body 1401A of this embodiment, a slit 1401SL into which a setting key SK can be inserted is formed between the housing part 1404 and the locking part 1402 (between the inner wall 1404WA of the housing part 1404 and the locking part 1402). (See FIG. 262(b)). FIGS. 264(a) to 264(c) show a state in which the setting key SK is inserted into this slit 1401SL. Note that the inserted setting key SK is configured to be supported by the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the housing part 1404 and the rotating shaft 1403 so as not to fall into the interior of the housing part 1404.

Note that although there are two gaps between the accommodating part 1404 and the locking part 1402 in FIG. 262(b), there is only one gap (slit 1401SL) into which the setting key SK can be inserted; is configured such that the setting key SK cannot be inserted. More specifically, the setting key SK can be inserted into the slit-shaped first space (slit 1401SL) formed between the locking portion 1402 and one inner wall 1404WA of the housing portion 1404; The configuration is such that the setting key SK cannot be inserted into the second space formed between the inner wall 1404WB and the other inner wall 1404WB of the accommodating portion 1404. With this configuration, it is easy to determine the space in which the setting key SK is inserted during maintenance, and confusion can be prevented. Note that the configuration that prevents the setting key from being inserted into the second space is not particularly limited, and may include a configuration such as narrowing the opening portion or providing a member that prevents insertion as in this embodiment. It can be done. Alternatively, for example, the second space may have a width narrower than the first space. At this time, the second space may be a space in which the setting key SK cannot be inserted, or may be a space in which the setting key SK can be inserted, but in any case, the width of the second space is greater than that of the first space. By keeping it narrow, it is easy to determine the space in which the setting key SK is inserted during maintenance, and confusion can be prevented.

Note that in this embodiment, the width of the slit 1401SL into which the setting key can be inserted is slightly larger than the thickness of the setting key SK, and the setting key SK is not held between the slits 1401SL. The setting key SK may be made narrower so that when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, and the setting key SK is held by the reaction force. In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling out from the lock body 1401A and being lost.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), even if the front door 102 is moved, the locked shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK as shown in FIG. 264(d), The locking shaft 1401B becomes unable to enter along the entry path 1404ER. In this state, the front door 102 is not in the locked state and can be maintained in the unlocked state.

Here, the position where the locked shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK (diagonally lower left in FIG. 264(d), the right side of the locking part 1402 in FIG. 264(c)) and the position where it contacts the receiving surface 1402RS (In Fig. 263(b), it is directly on the side (left), in Fig. 264(c), it is on the left side of the view setting key SK).By making the position different from the one on the right (right side (left) in Fig. 263(b), and on the left side of the view setting key SK in Fig. 264(c)), the same position of the locked shaft 1401B does not wear out and increases durability. be able to. Note that the above-mentioned difference in position may be different in the front-rear direction of the slot machine 100, or may be different in the up-down direction, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment.

Note that in a state where the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), a signal indicating the closed state is not output (the closed state is not detected). This configuration may be such that the door sensor 1406 does not come into contact with the lock body 1401A (the detection piece does not move) so that the closed state is not detected, or the door sensor 1406 contacts the lock body 1401A but does not detect the closed state. The detection piece may not move to the detection position.

In addition, in FIG. 264(a), a part of the setting key SK is in a state protruding from the accommodating part 1404, but the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be accommodated in the accommodating part 1404. Note that by having a portion of the setting key SK protrude from the housing portion 1404, the setting key SK can be easily taken out at the end of the work.

Furthermore, when the door key is operated in the state shown in FIG. 264(a), the locking portion 1402 is in the unlocked state, so the same posture is maintained, and the setting key SK is also in the same state (the state shown in FIG. 264(a)). It is. Therefore, even if the operator forgets that the setting key SK is inserted and operates the door key, the setting key SK can be prevented from falling or being lost. In addition, regarding the structure in which the state of FIG. 264(a) is maintained when the door key is operated, the door key may be operated clockwise or counterclockwise. Further, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the position or orientation of the locking portion 1402 does not change, but a configuration may be adopted in which the setting key SK remains inserted even if the position or orientation changes.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state in the state shown in FIG. 264(d). Note that in this embodiment, the unlocked state can be determined by visually recognizing the locking portion 1402 that protrudes to the outside of the housing portion 1404; however, for example, if the locking portion 1402 is visually recognized in the locked state, Even if this is possible, the configuration allows visual confirmation of whether the locking portion 1402 is in the locked or unlocked state. That is, it is sufficient that the locking portion 1402 is visible in either the locked state or the unlocked state. Further, when the setting key SK is visually recognized in the state shown in FIG. 264(d), it can also be confirmed that the setting key SK is in the unlocked state. Furthermore, the position and direction of visual confirmation are not particularly limited, and may be visible from the boundary between the front door 102 and the main body 101 (the side of the slot machine 100), or may be visible from above the slot machine 100. It may be. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 264(d), the reel unit and the main control board may be visible from a position where they can be seen.

In this embodiment, a configuration using the setting key SK has been described, but a configuration using game medals or 500 yen coins may be adopted, for example. FIG. 264(e) shows an example in which game medals MD are inserted into the lock body 1401A. Note that the metal pieces used to maintain the unlocked state are not limited to those mentioned above, but by reusing the metal pieces used during maintenance work, the trouble of preparing a separate stopper can be avoided. It can be eliminated.

In the above embodiment, the lock body 1401A is provided on the front door 102 side, and the locked shaft 1401B is provided on the main body 101 side. However, the locked shaft 1401B is provided on the front door 102 side, A structure may be adopted in which the lock body 1401A is provided on the 101 side. Further, in this embodiment, a configuration in which one locking mechanism 1401 is provided has been described, but a configuration in which a plurality of such locking mechanisms are provided may also be used. There may be a locking mechanism at the front and a locking mechanism at the rear.

<About the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described using FIGS. 261 to 264 will be explained using FIGS. 264-1 and 264-2.

When the front door 102 is unlocked by operating the door key, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 is in the state shown in FIG. You can also push it inside. When the locking part 1402 is pushed into the housing part 1404 until it is accommodated, the locking part 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown), resulting in the state shown in FIG. 262(c).

Even when the locking part 1402 is housed in the housing part 1404, the unlocked state of the front door 102 can be maintained by inserting the setting key SK or the like into the slit 1401SL as in the example of FIG. 264-1(a) to (e) show how the operations described in FIGS. 264-1(a) to 264-(e) are applied to a state where the locking part 1402 is housed in the housing part 1404. ing.

Here, a state in which the locking portion 1402 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1404 and the setting key SK is inserted into the slit 1401SL as shown in FIG. 264-1(a) will be described. In this state, by operating the door key, the locking portion 1402 is released from being fixed by the latch mechanism, and a spring member (not shown) causes the locking portion 1402 to protrude from the opening of the housing portion 1404 toward the rear side (clockwise in FIG. 262(a)). A force is generated that causes the locking portion 1402 to move. At this time, the movement of the locking part 1402 is inhibited by the frictional force between the setting key SK inserted in the slit 1401SL and the locking part 1402. Therefore, if the force for moving the locking portion 1402 exceeds this frictional force, the locking portion 1402 will move, and if it does not exceed this frictional force, the locking portion 1402 will not move. Further, the locking portion 1402 that has once moved may stop midway. In particular, when the locked shaft 1401B is in contact with the setting key SK as shown in FIG. As the distance increases, the locking portion 1402 becomes more difficult to move.

Further, during the above operation, unless the locking part 1402 moves, the setting key SK will not move, and even if the locking part 1402 moves, the setting key SK will be held by the locked shaft 1401B. In this case, movement of the setting key SK is restricted. Even so, the setting key SK may be moved due to movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key.

FIG. 264-2(a) shows an example in which the door key is operated from the state shown in FIG. 264-1(d), but the locking portion 1402 and setting key SK do not move. Furthermore, FIG. 264-2(b) shows an example in which the locking portion 1402 moves and the game medal MD does not move when the door key is operated from the state shown in FIG. 264-1(e). There is. Although FIGS. 264-2(a) and 264-2(b) show an example using the setting key SK and an example using the game medal MD, the movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key is Depending on this frictional force, the locking part 1402 may move even if the setting key SK is used, or even if the game medal MD is used. In some cases, the locking portion 1402 does not move. Further, as the locking portion 1402 moves, the inserted metal piece may also move.

As described above, the locking part 1402 is housed in the housing part 1404, and a metal piece (for example, setting key SK, game medal MD, 500 yen coin) for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted into the slit 1401SL. In this state, movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key is inhibited by the frictional force between the locking portion 1402 and the metal piece inserted into the slit 1401SL. With this configuration, even if a game clerk accidentally operates the door key while a metal piece that maintains the unlocked state is inserted, movement of the locking portion 1402 is restricted, so the inserted metal piece can be confirmed. It can be made easier. In particular, when the metal piece is in contact with the locked shaft 1401B, the locking portion 1402 becomes difficult to move, making it easier to confirm the metal piece.

Further, in a state where the locking part 1402 is accommodated in the accommodation part 1404 and a metal piece (for example, a setting key SK, a game medal MD, a 500 yen coin) for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted into the slit 1401SL. In this case, the movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key is inhibited. Therefore, even if the door key is operated, a metal piece may remain inserted to maintain the unlocked state. In addition, by adjusting the force of movement of the locking part 1402 based on the operation of the door key and the frictional force between the metal piece inserted in the slit 1401SL and the locking part 1402, the locking part 1402 can be unlocked even when the door key is operated. A metal piece for maintaining the locked state may be configured to ensure that the inserted state is maintained.

Further, in FIG. 264, an example has been described in which a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted along the slit 1401SL, but the method of insertion may be changed. 264-2(c) to (f), a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted obliquely from the outside of the inner wall 1404WA forming the slit 1401SL, and the tip of the metal piece is inserted into the locking part 1402. It is shown that it is in a pressed state. Note that in FIGS. 264-2(c) and 264-2(d), the locking portion 1402 is in the state shown in FIG. 262(a), and in FIGS. 264-2(e) and (f), the locking portion 1402 is in the state shown in FIG. The state is as shown in (c). In addition, in Figures 264-2(c) and (e), the metal piece that maintains the unlocked state is the setting key SK, and in Figures 264-2(d) and (f), the metal piece that maintains the unlocked state is the setting key SK. It is a game medal MD. Even with this insertion method, the end of the metal piece is closer to the locked shaft 1401B than the end of the locking part 1402 in the unlocked state, and when the front door 102 is moved, Since the shaft 1401B comes into contact with the metal piece and the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, the unlocked state of the front door 102 can be maintained.

In the example of FIGS. 264-2(c) to (f), a metal piece that maintains the unlocked state protrudes from the locking part 1402 toward the inner wall 1404WA side and outside the housing part 1404, and this metal piece maintains the unlocked state. It is sandwiched between three locations: the outer wall (P1) of the accommodating portion 1404, the inner wall 1404WA (P2) of the accommodating portion 1404, and the locking portion 1402 (P3). At this time, a force that inhibits movement of the locking portion 1402 is applied to the tip of the metal piece. Even with this configuration, if the game clerk accidentally operates the door key while the metal piece that maintains the unlocked state is inserted, the movement of the locking part 1402 will be restricted, so the inserted metal piece will be This can be made easier to confirm.

<About the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (3))>
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described using FIGS. 261 to 264, FIGS. 264-1, and 264-2 will be explained using FIG. 264-3.

In FIGS. 261 to 264-2, an example has been described in which a metal piece (setting key SK, game medal MD, 500 yen coin) for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted into the slit 1401SL of the lock body 1401A. Here, the locking portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A may be provided with a convex portion that protrudes toward the slit 1401SL side (or toward the inner wall 1404B side). 264-3(a) to (f) show two protrusions 1402PR provided on the locking portion 1402 and a recess 1402DE formed on the opposite side of the protrusions 1402. . Note that FIG. 264-3(a) is a view of the locking portion 1402 viewed from the side opposite to the slit 1402SL, and FIG. 264-3(b) is a view of the locking portion 1402 viewed from the side opposite to the slit 1402SL. This is a diagram seen from. Further, FIG. 264-3(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the locking portion 1402 provided with the convex portion 1402PR in FIG. 262(c) is applied, and FIG. ), and FIG. 264-3(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the locking portion 1402 provided with the protrusion 1402PR is applied to the locking portion 1402 provided with the protrusion 1402PR in FIG. FIG. 264-3(f) is a diagram showing a state in which the locking portion 1402 provided with a convex portion 1402PR in FIG. 264(c) is applied.

The convex portion 1402PR is formed by extruding and deforming the locking portion 1402 from the opposite side, and is paired with the concave portion 1402DE formed on the opposite side. Further, among the two convex portions 1402PR, one is located inside the housing portion 1404 and is not visible, and the other is provided at a position that is visible from the outside of the housing portion 1404.

When a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL of the lock body 1401A, the unevenness of the metal piece gets caught on these protrusions 1402PR, so that falling or loss of the metal piece can be prevented. Furthermore, in the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 264-1, the frictional force between the metal piece and the locking portion 1402 can be improved. Further, since the entire locking portion 1402 does not come into contact when the metal piece is inserted, deterioration of the locking portion 1402 as a whole can be prevented.

<About the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4))>
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described using FIGS. 261 to 264, FIGS. 264-1, 264-2, and 264-3 will be described using FIG. 264-4.

When explaining the configuration in which one locking mechanism 1401 is provided in FIG. 261, it is also possible to have a configuration in which multiple locking mechanisms are provided, and that the lock main body 1401A (or locked shaft 1401B) is connected to the main body 101 and the front surface. It has been mentioned that there is no particular limitation as to which of the doors 102 it is provided on. A specific example will be described below.

FIGS. 264-4(a) to 264-4(c) show an example of a configuration in which a plurality of locking mechanisms 1401 are provided for the front door 102. Of these, FIGS. 264-4(a) and 264-4(c) have a configuration in which a lock body 1401A is provided on the front door 102 and a locked shaft 1401B is provided on the main body 101. Further, in FIG. 264-4(b), a lock main body 1401A is provided on the main body 101, and a locked shaft 1401B is provided on the front door 102. Furthermore, FIG. 264-4(c) shows a configuration in which the locking mechanism 1401 of FIG. 264-4(a) is upside down (the vertical relationship between the locked shaft 1401B and the rotating shaft 1403 of the locking portion 1402 is reversed). It becomes. Although these plurality of locking mechanisms 1401 are provided separately, they are configured so that when the door key is operated, all the locking parts 1402 move to the unlocked state (the state shown in FIG. 262(a)). ing. Note that the plurality of lock bodies 1401A (the plurality of accommodating portions 1404) may be integrally constructed, and the plurality of locked shafts 1401B may be integrally constructed.

In FIG. 264-4(d), the front door 102 is divided into an upper door and a lower door, and each door is provided with a plurality of lock mechanisms 1401. In this configuration, when the door key is operated, all the locking portions 1402 on the lower door side move to the unlocked state (the state shown in FIG. 262(a)). When the upper door release lever, which becomes operable when the lower door is in the open state, is operated, all the locking parts 1402 on the upper door side move to the unlocked state (the state shown in FIG. 262(a)). is configured to do so. That is, the locking portion 1402 of the locking mechanism 1401 is configured to move in conjunction with each door.

Here, it is assumed that one of the plurality of lock mechanisms 1401 (all in the state shown in FIG. 262(a)) provided on the opened door is put into the state shown in FIG. 264 (a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL). . In this case, the unlocked state of the locking mechanism 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 264 is maintained, so the door is not closed and the other locking mechanisms 1401 also remain in the unlocked state.

Next, the locking parts 1402 for the plurality of locking mechanisms 1401 provided on the opened door are stored in the housing part 1404 (all of them are in the state shown in FIG. 262(c)), and then one of the locking mechanisms 1401 is 264-1 (a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL). In this case, the door cannot be closed by the lock mechanism 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 264-1. Further, since the locking portion 1402 of the other locking mechanism 1401 is housed in the housing portion 1404, the door cannot be closed. At this time, when the door key (or release lever) is operated, the lock mechanism 1401 in the state shown in Fig. 264-1 operates (or does not operate) according to the example shown in Figs. 264-2 (a) and (b). , in the locking mechanism 1401 that is not in the state shown in FIG. 264-1 (the locking mechanism 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 262(c)), the locking portion 1402 is in the position protruding from the housing portion 1404 (the position shown in FIG. 262(a)). I will have to move. However, if the metal piece inserted into the slit 1401SL is maintained, the door cannot be closed. Note that even if the metal piece is inserted by the method described in FIGS. 264-2(c) to (f) instead of the method described in FIG. 264-1, the metal piece inserted into the slit 1401SL is maintained. In some cases, the door cannot be closed even if the door key is operated.

As described above, even in a configuration in which multiple locking mechanisms 1401 are provided, the door can be kept open by inserting a metal piece into the slit 1401SL, and the door can be closed by its own weight during maintenance. It is possible to reduce the work burden caused by

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of locking mechanism of front door 102 of slot machine 100]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 261 to 264-4 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door lock mechanism (for example, a lock mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, deterioration of the locking portion over time can also be prevented.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking portion with respect to the locked portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
a door sensor (for example, door sensor 1406) that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to make it as shown in FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the locking portion and the door sensor over time.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking part with respect to the locked part (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door lock mechanism (for example, a lock mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to make it as shown in FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The part of the locked part that the locking part contacts is different from the part of the locked part that the certain metal piece contacts (for example, FIG. 264(d));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, aging deterioration of the locking portion and the locked portion can be prevented.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking portion with respect to the locked portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a portion of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from penetrating deep into the storage section.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door lock mechanism (for example, a lock mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
The door lock mechanism is capable of releasing the lock between the locking part and the locked part and changing from the locked state to the unlocked state by operating a door key,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to make it as shown in FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
In the predetermined state, the predetermined state is maintained even if the door key is operated (for example, the state of FIG. 264(a) is maintained even if the door key is operated);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, deterioration of the locking portion over time can also be prevented. Furthermore, even if the operator forgets that he is inserting a certain metal piece and operates the door key, it is possible to prevent the metal piece from falling or being lost.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking portion with respect to the locked portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door lock mechanism (for example, a lock mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
In the predetermined state, it is visible from the outside that the locking part is in the unlocked state;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the door body can be easily maintained in an open state, and the work efficiency of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved. Moreover, deterioration of the locking portion over time can also be prevented. Further, the operator can grasp the state of the door lock mechanism from the state of the locking portion.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more than the locking part with respect to the locked part (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the open state of the door body can be maintained without bringing the locking part and the locked part into contact.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a portion of the certain metal piece protrudes from the accommodation portion (for example, FIG. 264(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is easy to take out a certain piece of metal after finishing the work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has a lower end of its opening (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) formed by the accommodating part,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (for example, a rotating shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 4(a));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the depths of the accommodating part.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-like space, the slit-like space is expanded by the thickness of the certain metal piece and becomes the predetermined state (for example, when the setting key SK is inserted When the slit 1401SL is pushed and expanded, the setting key SK may be held by the reaction force."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, by holding a certain metal piece, it is possible to prevent it from falling or being lost during work.

Further, the game machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part and the inner wall of the accommodating part at a position housed in the accommodating part. It is possible to set it to a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 264-1(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (for example, FIG. 264-1(d)),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Moreover, it is possible to easily confirm the state in which a certain metal piece has been inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part and the inner wall of the accommodating part at a position housed in the accommodating part. It is possible to set it to a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 264-1(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (for example, FIG. 264-1(d)),
If the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked part in the predetermined state, the inserted state of the certain metal piece is maintained even if the door key is operated (<slot machine 100 Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102, see the description in (2)>),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Moreover, it is possible to easily confirm the state in which a certain metal piece has been inserted. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from falling off and being lost.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part and the inner wall of the accommodating part at a position housed in the accommodating part. It is possible to set it to a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 264-1(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (for example, FIG. 264-1(d)),
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked part in the predetermined state, the inserted state of the certain metal piece may be maintained even if the door key is operated ( (Refer to the description in (2) regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Moreover, it is possible to easily confirm the state in which a certain metal piece has been inserted. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from falling off and being lost.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part and the inner wall of the accommodating part at a position housed in the accommodating part. It is possible to set it to a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 264-1(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (for example, FIG. 264-1(d)),
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked part in the predetermined state, movement of the locking part based on the operation of the door key is inhibited by the certain metal piece (<slot machine 100 Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102, see the description in (2)>),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the movement of the locking portion is restricted, making it easier to confirm the inserted metal piece.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked part in the predetermined state, even in a state where movement of the locking part based on the operation of the door key is obstructed by the certain metal piece, The locking part may move (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the movement of the locking portion is restricted, making it easier to confirm the inserted metal piece.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A first door lock that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when the first locking portion (for example, the locking portion 1402) and the first locked portion (for example, the locked shaft 1401B) lock together. a mechanism (e.g., locking mechanism 1401);
A second door lock that changes from the unlocked state to the locked state when the second locking portion (for example, the locking portion 1402) and the second locked portion (for example, the locked shaft 1401B) lock together. a mechanism (e.g., locking mechanism 1401, FIG. 264-4);
A game machine comprising:
The first door locking mechanism has a first accommodating part (for example, accommodating part 1404) that can accommodate the first locking part,
The second door locking mechanism has a second accommodating part (for example, accommodating part 1404) that can accommodate the second locking part,
A certain metal piece ( For example, it is possible to enter a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 264-1(a)) in which the setting key SK) is inserted,
In the predetermined state, the second locking part is housed in the second housing part,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece contacts the first locked part before the first locked part and does not enter the locked state, The open state of the door body is maintained (for example, FIG. 264-1(d)),
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked part in the predetermined state, movement of the first locking part based on the operation of the door key is inhibited by the certain metal piece. (Refer to <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>),
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked part in the predetermined state, the second metal piece is moved to the most protruding position from the second accommodating part based on the operation of the door key. The locking part moves (see <About the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4))>),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the movement of the locking portion is restricted, making it easier to confirm the inserted metal piece. Further, when the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the second locking portion may move to the most protruding position, and the clerk may realize that the door key has been operated erroneously.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked part in the predetermined state, movement of the first locking part based on operation of the door key is inhibited by the certain metal piece. The first locking portion may move even when the slot machine 100 is closed (see description in (2) regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, even if the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the movement of the locking portion is restricted, making it easier to confirm the inserted metal piece. Further, when the game store clerk accidentally operates the door key, the second locking portion may move to the most protruding position, and the clerk may realize that the door key has been operated erroneously.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first accommodating part and the second accommodating part are integrally configured (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4)>),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The main body has the locking part,
The door body has the locked portion,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A gaming machine (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>) has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Moreover, it is possible to easily confirm the state in which a certain metal piece has been inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The main body has the locked portion,
The door body has the locking part,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A gaming machine (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>) has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Moreover, it is possible to easily confirm the state in which a certain metal piece has been inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing part. (for example, FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The width of the slit-shaped space is wider than the width of the space formed by the second inner wall of the accommodating portion facing the first inner wall and the locking portion (for example, as shown in the figure);
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A gaming machine (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>) has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, the space into which the game store clerk inserts a certain metal piece can be guided to one of the slit-shaped spaces.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A certain metal piece (e.g., setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing part. (for example, FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The certain metal piece cannot be inserted into the space formed by the second inner wall of the accommodating part opposite to the first inner wall and the locking part,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A gaming machine (see <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>) has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Furthermore, the game store clerk can easily determine the space into which a certain metal piece is to be inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
The locking portion has a convex portion (for example, a convex portion 1402PR) that protrudes toward the inner wall,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Further, the convex portion prevents the entire side surface of the locking portion from coming into contact with a certain metal piece, thereby preventing deterioration of the locking portion.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (for example, front door 102),
a main body (for example, main body 101);
A door locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 1401) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part (for example, a locking part 1402) and a locked part (for example, a locked shaft 1401B) are locked; ,
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing part (for example, housing part 1404) that can house the locking part,
The accommodating part has an opening at a position facing at least a part of the side surface of the locking part,
A predetermined state in which a certain metal piece (for example, setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (for example, slit 1401SL) formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the accommodating part ( For example, it is possible to set it as FIG. 264(a)),
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained (e.g., FIG. 264(d)),
When inserting the certain metal piece into the slit-shaped space, it is also possible that the certain metal piece protrudes from the side surface of the locking part through the opening and out of the accommodation part. (For example, Figures 264-2(c) to (f)),
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is easy to maintain the open state of the door body, and the work of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff can be improved by eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door. Furthermore, since the parts of the locking part and the locked part that a certain metal piece comes into contact with can be made different, deterioration of the locking part and the locked part can be prevented.

<About the board of the slot machine 100 and the attached sticker>
Next, an example of the board of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 265 to 268. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

Various stickers are affixed to the board of the slot machine 100, including a sticker certifying that the machine has passed an inspection. In addition, there are cases where an already affixed sticker is peeled off and a new sticker is affixed. If such stickers are allowed to be placed in the wrong position or at an inclined angle, fraud may be easily committed. Furthermore, there is a risk that the pattern on the substrate may be damaged when the seal is once removed. A configuration for dealing with these problems will be described below.

FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between the wiring pattern on the board and the sticker affixed to the board.

First, in the example of FIG. 265(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wiring lines L1 and L2. It is also shown that a sticker ST is attached to a space SA partitioned by two wires L1 and L2. Note that, including this example, the board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are not limited, and may be, for example, any of ICs, resistors, capacitors, FETs, diodes, LEDs, switches, connectors, etc. In addition, the wiring lines L1 and L2 including this example may be any one of a signal line, a power supply line, a ground line, etc. Further, in this example, a two-dimensional code is attached to the sticker ST, but the content displayed on the sticker is not limited.

In the above example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the seal ST. By using this guide, it becomes easy to grasp the affixing position of the sticker ST, and by using the space SA without a pattern, it is possible to prevent the pattern on the substrate from being damaged. That is, it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying the seal for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 265(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wirings L1 and L2 as in FIG. 265(a); It is shown that a seal ST is affixed to a space SA divided by . In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and lower sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(a) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left and right sides of the seal ST, but in this example as well, this guide and space SA can be used as in FIG. 265(a). This can improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 265(c), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a wiring L1, but this differs from FIG. 265(a) in that there is only one wiring L1. It is also shown that a sticker ST is attached to a space SA partitioned by one wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the seal ST. By using this guide, it becomes easy to grasp the affixing position of the sticker ST, and by using the space SA without a pattern, it is possible to prevent the pattern on the substrate from being damaged. That is, it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying the seal for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 265(d), the two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by one wiring L1, similar to FIG. 265(c), and are separated by one wiring L1. It is shown that a sticker ST is attached to the space SA. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper, lower, and right sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left side of the sticker ST, but this guide and space SA can be used in this example as well as in FIG. 265(c). This can improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 266(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by one wiring L1 as in FIG. 265(c), and are separated by one wiring L1. It is shown that a sticker ST is attached to the space SA. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper side and left and right sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the lower side of the sticker ST, but this guide and space SA can be used in this example as well as in FIG. 265(c). This can improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the example of FIG. 266(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by one wiring L1 as in FIG. 265(c), and are separated by one wiring L1. It is shown that a sticker ST is attached to the space SA. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and left sides of the seal ST. Note that this example differs from FIG. 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the right side and bottom side of the seal ST, but in this example as well, this guide and the space SA By using this, it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off and reapplying stickers for maintenance or inspection.

In the above example, ease of maintenance can be improved by providing the wiring pattern with straight line portions that serve as guides for at least two of the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the seal. In both FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b), the first straight line and the second straight line in the wiring pattern are connected to the third straight line and the fourth straight line of the seal ST. It is shown that the lines are approximately parallel to each other. In particular, in the case of a sticker with a two-dimensional code attached as in the present embodiment, the effectiveness of the guide can be enhanced by having a pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code.

Furthermore, in the above example, the sticker ST is attached to the space SA where there is no wiring pattern, but if at least a part of the sticker ST is attached to the area where there is no wiring pattern, the sticker ST can be removed from this area. Peeling it off prevents the wiring pattern from being damaged.

In addition, in the configuration in which the wiring pattern is used as a guide, a configuration may also be provided in which silk printing is separately provided to indicate the position where the sticker is attached. FIG. 267(a) shows an example in which the configuration shown in FIG. 265(c) is provided with silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of the sticker. Further, FIG. 267(b) shows an example in which the configuration of FIG. 265(c) is applied with silk printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the two upper right and lower left corners of the sticker.

Further, the slot machine 100 is provided with various substrates, and for example, a substrate having a sticker pasted using a wiring pattern as a guide, and a substrate having a sticker pasted using silk printing as a guide are used. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the guide of the seal is different depending on the substrate. With this configuration, the type of substrate can be distinguished based on the guide of the seal.

Further, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, rules may be set for the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the direction of the board. In this configuration, fraud can sometimes be determined by the fact that the orientation of the two-dimensional code is against the rules. For example, with respect to the reference direction of the board (depth direction for horizontally arranged boards, upward direction for vertically arranged boards), the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to this reference direction ( The positions of the patterns for detecting the positions of the corners of the two-dimensional code may be different between the first substrate and the second substrate. In Figure 268(a), the two-dimensional code of the sticker ST1 affixed to the board A (facing upward, in the normal position) and the two-dimensional code of the seal ST2 affixed to the board B (facing the right, tilted 90 degrees to the right from the normal position) are shown. An example is shown in which the position) is different from the reference direction. Note that these two boards may be housed in the same board case. With this configuration, store staff can easily check the two boards, increasing maintenance efficiency.

Further, a similar configuration may be adopted for the substrate and the case covering the substrate. For example, the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the board (the depth direction for horizontally arranged boards, the upward direction for vertically arranged boards) is , the substrate and the case covering the substrate may be different. In FIG. 268(b), the two-dimensional code (facing upward) of the sticker ST1 affixed to the board A and the two-dimensional code (facing downward) of the seal ST3 affixed to the case of this board A are different from the reference direction. An example is shown.

As shown in Figure 268(a), when the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction is made different between the first board and the second board, the effect of fraud prevention can be further enhanced by combining other configurations. be able to. An example of such a configuration will be described below using FIGS. 268-1 and 268-2.

In the example of Figure 268-1, board A (main control board) is housed in board case A, and board C (sub-control board) on which board B (sub-control unit ROM board) is stacked is housed in board case B. has been done. In this configuration, there are eight two-dimensional codes QRA1 to QRA5 and QRB1 to QRB3, which will be explained in order below. Note that although the sizes of the two-dimensional codes are not the same, all the two-dimensional codes are shown in the same size in the drawings below. Also, in the example below, the sticker on which the two-dimensional code is displayed is approximately rectangular, but it may be approximately square, it may have rounded corners, or it may be approximately rectangular if a character string is displayed in the margin. .

First, the two-dimensional code around the board case A will be explained.

On the top of the board A, an upward two-dimensional code QRA1 is provided. This two-dimensional code QRA1 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA1 is 4 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA1 is a 25-digit alphanumeric character string.

Board A carries parts A and B, and two-dimensional codes QRA2 and QRA3 facing left are applied to each of these parts, respectively. These two-dimensional codes QRA2 and QRA3 are printed directly on the parts. It should be noted that a sticker STA1 indicating the part name (medal number control ROM) is affixed to part A in the same left-facing state as the two-dimensional code QRA2 (with the letters tilted 90 degrees to the left). Furthermore, a sticker STA2 indicating the model name is affixed to part B in the same left-facing position as the two-dimensional code QRA3 (with the letters tilted 90 degrees to the left).

A board case A that covers the board A has a two-dimensional code QRA4 pointing upward on a plane in the same direction as the board A. This two-dimensional code QRA4 is applied to the attached sticker. In addition, while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA4 is 7 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 75 mm in both length and width, and the margins contain content that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRA4 and other information. There is. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA4 is a 10-digit alphanumeric character string.

A board case A that covers the board A has a two-dimensional code QRA5 pointing rightward on a plane (left side) facing in a direction different from that of the board A. This two-dimensional code QRA5 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA5 is 9 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 60 mm in both length and breadth, and the margin portion contains content different from the content that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRA5. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA5 is a 10-digit alphanumeric character string.

Note that the two-dimensional code QRA5 placed on the left side of the board A in the board case A may not be visible from a position where the two-dimensional code on the board A can be seen. In the case of this embodiment, the two-dimensional code on the board A can be seen from a position directly facing the board A, but the two-dimensional code QRA5 applied to the left side of the board A cannot be seen. . Note that the part (for example, the margin) other than the two-dimensional code QRA5 of the sticker having the two-dimensional code QRA5 may be attached from the side surface to the front surface of the board case A.

Note that the board case A is configured such that its right end can be rotated toward the front about the left end, and by rotating 90 degrees toward the front, the back surface of the board A becomes visible. At this time, the left side surface rotates 90 degrees to face the back side, making the two-dimensional code QRA5 invisible.

Next, the two-dimensional code around the board case B will be explained.

A downward two-dimensional code QRB2 is placed on the top of the board C. This two-dimensional code QRB2 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRB2 is 4 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB2 is a 25-digit alphanumeric character string.

A downward two-dimensional code QRB1 is provided at the bottom of the substrate B stacked on the substrate C. This two-dimensional code QRB1 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that the size of the two-dimensional code QRB1 is 5 mm in length and width, whereas the size of the sticker is 8 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB1 is an 11-digit alphanumeric character string. It should be noted that a sticker STB1 indicating the model name and part name is affixed to the board B in a right-facing state (the characters are tilted 90 degrees to the right), which is different from the two-dimensional code QRB1. On the board B, these stickers are pasted in accordance with the positions determined by silk printing.

The board case B is provided with an upward two-dimensional code QRB3. This two-dimensional code QRB3 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRB3 is 9 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 25 mm in both length and width, and the margin portion contains content different from the content that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRB3. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB3 is a 12-digit alphanumeric character string.

In the example in Figure 268-1, the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board A is in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board B is QRB1 is in a direction different from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientations of these two-dimensional codes are different with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, on the board B, the characters of the sticker STB1 (model name and part name) are tilted with respect to the reference direction of the board B (facing right in the figure), similarly to the two-dimensional code QRB1. In this example, it is possible to notice fraud not only by the orientation of the two-dimensional code, but also by the combination of the characters, including the inclination.

In the example in Figure 268-1, the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board A is in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board B is QRB1 is in a direction different from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientations of these two-dimensional codes are different with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code QRA4 on the sticker affixed to board case A housing board A is in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRA4 is affixed to board case B housing board B. The two-dimensional code QRB3 of the sticker is in the same direction as the reference direction of the board B (upward in the figure). In this configuration, the two-dimensional code QRA4 of the board case A and the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the board A are oriented in the same direction with respect to the reference direction of the board A. Furthermore, with respect to the reference direction of the board B, the two-dimensional code QRB3 of the board case B and the two-dimensional code QRB1 of the board B have different orientations. In this example, fraud can be detected not only by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes of the two boards, but also by a combination including the orientation of the two-dimensional codes of the board case that houses these boards. There is.

In the example in Figure 268-1, the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board A is in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the sticker affixed to board B is QRB1 is in a direction different from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientations of these two-dimensional codes are different with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code QRA5 on the sticker affixed to the left side of board case A that accommodates board A is in a direction different from the reference direction of board A (rightward in the figure), and board case B that accommodates board B The two-dimensional code QRB3 on the sticker attached is in the same direction as the reference direction of the board B (upward in the figure). In this configuration, the two-dimensional code QRA5 on the left side of the board case A and the two-dimensional code QRA1 of the board A are oriented in different directions with respect to the reference direction of the board A. Furthermore, with respect to the reference direction of the board B, the two-dimensional code QRB3 of the board case B and the two-dimensional code QRB1 of the board B have different orientations. In this example, fraud can be detected not only by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes of the two boards, but also by a combination including the orientation of the two-dimensional codes of the board case that houses these boards. There is.

Next, in the example of FIG. 268-2, board A (main control board) is housed in board case A, and board C (sub-control board) on which board B (sub-control unit ROM board) is stacked is housed in board case A. It is stored in B. In this configuration, there are seven two-dimensional codes QRA6 to QRA9 and QRB4 to QRB6, which will be explained in order below. Note that although the sizes of the two-dimensional codes are not the same, all two-dimensional codes are shown as having the same size in the drawings below. Also, in the example below, the sticker on which the two-dimensional code is displayed is approximately rectangular, but it may be approximately square, or may have rounded corners, or approximately rectangular if a character string is displayed in the margin. .

First, the two-dimensional code around the board case A will be explained.

On the top of the board A, an upward two-dimensional code QRA6 is provided. This two-dimensional code QRA6 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA6 is 4 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA6 is a 25-digit alphanumeric character string.

Board A has component B mounted thereon, and is marked with an upward two-dimensional code QRA7. This two-dimensional code QRA7 is printed directly on the part. It should be noted that a sticker STA3 indicating the model name is attached to part B in the same upward direction as the two-dimensional code QRA7 (the letters are not tilted).

A two-dimensional code QRA8 pointing upward and a two-dimensional code QRA9 pointing right are provided on the board case A that covers the board A on a plane in the same direction as the board A. These two-dimensional codes QRA8 and QRA9 are applied to the attached stickers. In addition, while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA8 is 7 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 75 mm in both length and width, and the margins contain the same content and other information that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRA8. There is. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA8 is a 10-digit alphanumeric character string. Furthermore, while the size of the two-dimensional code QRA9 is 9 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 60 mm in both length and width, and the margin portion contains content different from the content that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRA9. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA9 is a 10-digit alphanumeric character string.

Next, the two-dimensional code around the board case B will be explained.

On the top of the board C, an upward two-dimensional code QRB5 is provided. This two-dimensional code QRB5 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRB5 is 4 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB5 is a 25-digit alphanumeric character string.

A downward two-dimensional code QRB4 is applied to the substrate B stacked on the substrate C. This two-dimensional code QRB4 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRB4 is 5 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 8 mm in length and width, and nothing is written in the margin portion. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB4 is an 11-digit alphanumeric character string. It should be noted that a sticker STB2 indicating the part name is attached to the board B in a left-facing state (the letters are tilted 90 degrees to the left), which is different from the two-dimensional code QRB4. On the board B, these stickers are pasted in accordance with the positions determined by silk printing.

The board case B is provided with an upward two-dimensional code QRB6. This two-dimensional code QRB6 is applied to the attached sticker. Note that while the size of the two-dimensional code QRB6 is 9 mm in length and width, the size of the sticker is 25 mm in both length and breadth, and the margin portion contains content different from the content that can be read with the two-dimensional code QRB6. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB6 is a 12-digit alphanumeric character string.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment of the board of the slot machine 100 and the attached sticker]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 265 to 268-2 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a substantially rectangular seal (for example, seal ST) having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A game machine comprising:
The seal is attached to the first substrate so that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line,
The seal is attached to the first substrate so that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line,
A game machine (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b)) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, the sticker can be easily pasted using the circuit board wiring as a guide, so that it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off the sticker and re pasting it for maintenance or inspection.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the corners of the stickers can be easily aligned.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

Further, the game machine described above,
At least a portion of the seal is affixed to an area of the first board where there is no wiring (for example, space SA);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring when removing the sticker.

Further, the game machine described above,
The seal has a two-dimensional code displayed (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence of the pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code increases the effectiveness of the guide and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a substantially rectangular first seal having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate having a certain printed indicia (e.g., a silk-screened seal position guide);
a second seal,
A game machine comprising:
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line,
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line,
The second sticker is affixed to the second substrate along the certain printed indication,
A game machine characterized by this (for example, see the description that ``a configuration in which the guide of the seal may be different depending on the board'') has been described.

In this game machine, the sticker can be easily pasted using the circuit board wiring as a guide, so that it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off the sticker and re pasting it for maintenance or inspection. Further, the first substrate and the second substrate can be distinguished from each other by the difference in the way the first and second stickers are pasted.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the corners of the stickers can be easily aligned.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

Further, the game machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is affixed to an area of the first board where there is no wiring (for example, space SA);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring when removing the sticker.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal display a two-dimensional code (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence of the pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code increases the effectiveness of the guide and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a substantially rectangular first seal having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate;
a second seal,
A game machine comprising:
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line,
The first sticker is attached to the first substrate so that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The orientation of the first seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate is different from the orientation of the second seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
A game machine characterized by this (for example, the configuration of FIG. 268(a) for the seal ST of FIGS. 265(a) to 265(d) and FIGS. 266(a) to 266(b)) has been described.

In this game machine, the sticker can be easily pasted using the circuit board wiring as a guide, so that it is possible to improve maintainability when peeling off the sticker and re pasting it for maintenance or inspection. Additionally, fraud can sometimes be identified by the orientation of the first and second stickers.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) (c) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the corners of the stickers can be easily aligned.

Further, the game machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to easily align the opposite sides of the seal.

Further, the game machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is affixed to an area of the first board where there is no wiring (for example, space SA);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring when removing the sticker.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal display a two-dimensional code (for example, FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIGS. 266(a) to (b)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the presence of the pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code increases the effectiveness of the guide and improves maintainability.

Further, the game machine described above,
a first board case that houses the first board and has a third seal (for example, seal ST3) affixed;
a second board case that houses the second board and has a fourth sticker attached;
The orientation of the first seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate is different from the orientation of the third seal with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate,
The orientation of the second seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate is different from the orientation of the fourth seal with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate,
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268(b)) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, fraud can sometimes be detected by the orientation of each sticker.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 268);
a second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 268);
a first seal (for example, seal ST1) on which a first two-dimensional code is displayed;
a second sticker (for example, sticker ST2) on which a second two-dimensional code is displayed;
A game machine comprising:
The first seal is affixed to the first substrate,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
the first substrate and the second substrate are housed in one certain substrate case;
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the statement, ``From the perspective of fraud prevention, rules may be set for the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the direction of the board'') has been described.

With this game machine, fraud can be easily noticed by changing the direction of the two-dimensional code. Furthermore, it is easy for the game store clerk to confirm the two two-dimensional codes.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 268-1);
a second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 268-1);
a first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker displaying a second two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB1);
a third sticker (for example, sticker STB1) on which characters are displayed;
A game machine comprising:
The first seal is affixed to the first substrate,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The third seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
The direction of the letters on the third seal is tilted with respect to the reference direction of the second substrate.
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268-1) characterized by this has been described.

With this game machine, fraud can be easily noticed by changing the direction of the two-dimensional code. Additionally, the combination of the orientation of the characters and the orientation of the two-dimensional code can also make it easier to notice fraud.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 268-1);
a second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 268-1);
a first board case (for example, board case A) that accommodates the first board;
a second board case (e.g., board case B) that accommodates the second board;
a first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker displaying a second two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB1);
a third sticker displaying a third two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA4);
a fourth sticker displaying a fourth two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB3);
A game machine comprising:
The first seal is affixed to the first substrate,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The third seal is affixed to the first board case,
The fourth seal is affixed to the second board case,
The orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
The orientation of the third two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is the same as the orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board,
The orientation of the fourth two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268-1) characterized by this has been described.

With this gaming machine, fraud can be detected not only by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but also by the combination including the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards. There are cases.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 268-1);
a second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 268-1);
a first board case (for example, board case A) that accommodates the first board;
a second board case (e.g., board case B) that accommodates the second board;
a first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker displaying a second two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB1);
a third sticker displaying a third two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA5);
a fourth sticker displaying a fourth two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB3);
A game machine comprising:
The first seal is affixed to the first substrate,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The third seal is affixed to the first board case,
The fourth seal is affixed to the second board case,
The orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
The orientation of the third two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board,
The orientation of the fourth two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268-1) characterized by this has been described.

With this gaming machine, fraud can be detected not only by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but also by the combination including the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards. There are cases.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 268-1);
a second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 268-1);
a first board case (for example, board case A) that accommodates the first board;
a first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker displaying a second two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRB1);
a third sticker displaying a third two-dimensional code (for example, two-dimensional code QRA5);
A game machine comprising:
The first seal is affixed to the first substrate,
The second seal is affixed to the second substrate,
The third seal is affixed to the first board case,
The orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first board is different from the orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the second board,
The reference direction is the upward direction for a board installed vertically, and the depth direction of the game machine for a board installed horizontally,
the third two-dimensional code is not visible from a certain direction in which the first two-dimensional code is visible;
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268-1) characterized by this has been described.

With this game machine, fraud can be easily noticed by changing the direction of the two-dimensional code. Further, by making the third seal difficult to see from a certain direction, it is possible to make it difficult for unauthorized persons to understand the two-dimensional code to be compared.

Further, the game machine described above,
The plane direction of the part where the first two-dimensional code is located is different from the plane direction of the part where the third two-dimensional code is located.
A game machine (for example, FIG. 268-1) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, by providing two-dimensional codes to be compared on planes with different orientations, it is possible to make it difficult for unauthorized persons to realize the existence of two-dimensional codes.

<About the power module>
Next, an example of a power supply module provided inside the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 269 to 270. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating an example of the power supply module PM. In this power supply module PM, a power supply board PW is attached to a board pedestal CA2, and a cover CA1 that covers this power supply board PW is attached to the board pedestal CA2 and fixed to the slot machine 100 with an unillustrated member. The cover CA1 includes a top surface TP, a bottom surface BT, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK, and a right surface RT, which form a space for accommodating the power supply board PW. Note that a plurality of vent holes AH are formed on each of these surfaces over almost the entire surface. The board pedestal CA2 is provided with corner members CR1 to CR4, and when the cover CA1 is attached to the board pedestal CA2, these corner members CR1 to CR4 press the cover CA1 from the outside.

FIG. 270(a) is a diagram of the lower surface BT viewed from below. This figure shows that the corner member CR1 of the board pedestal CA2 is on the front left side, and the corner member CR2 is on the rear left side. Further, FIG. 270(b) shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 270(a), and FIG. 270(c) shows a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 270(a). It is shown. In FIGS. 270(b) and 270(c), the corner member CR1 and the corner member CR2 are located further below the lower surface BT, so that there is a space between the lower surface BT and the installation surface SP located below it. It is shown that a space is created. This space allows smooth ventilation through the vent AH. Furthermore, since ventilation becomes smooth, the degree of freedom regarding the shape and arrangement of the ventilation holes AH can be increased.

The thickness of the corner member CR1 and the corner member CR2 below the lower surface BT is smaller than the thickness of the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key does not enter the space created below the lower surface BT. There is. This allows air intake and exhaust from the vent AH to be carried out smoothly, and makes it difficult to tamper with the power supply module PM. Note that the thickness of the setting key is only one standard, and for example, the thickness of game medals and 500 yen coins is used as a standard, and the thickness of the game medals and 500 yen coins should be taken as a standard so that the game medals and 500 yen coins do not fit into the space created below the bottom BT. It may also be a configuration.

Note that the top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK of the power supply module PM are in a state in which any two of the corner members CR1 to CR4 are overlapped on the outside, similar to the bottom surface BT described in FIG. 270(a). Even if other devices approach the surface of the vent AH, the vent AH will be less likely to be blocked, allowing smooth air intake and exhaust.

[About the power module board configuration]
Next, an example of the power supply board PW used in the power supply module PM will be described using FIGS. 270-1 to 270-5. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 270-1 is a diagram showing an example of the power supply board PW. This figure is a view of the power supply board PW provided in the slot machine 100 as viewed from the right side of the slot machine 100 toward the left side. The vertical and longitudinal arrows in the figure indicate the direction of the slot machine 100, and for example, the horizontal direction in FIG. 270-1 corresponds to the longitudinal direction of the slot machine 100.

FIG. 270-2(a) is a diagram when looking rearward from the cross section taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram of the power supply board PW in a state seen from the front side.

FIG. 270-3(a) is a diagram when looking forward from the cross section taken along the line BB in FIG. 270-1, and FIG. 270-3(b) is a diagram showing the cover CA1 attached to the power supply board PW. FIG. 4 is a diagram of the power supply board PW in a state seen from the rear side.

Figure 270-4 (a) is a diagram of the power supply board PW in Figure 270-1 viewed from below, and Figure 270-4 (b) is a diagram of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached. It is a diagram when the power supply board PW is viewed from below.

FIG. 270-5 is a diagram showing a state in which the cover CA1 is attached to the power supply board PW of FIG. 270-1.

The power supply board PW shown in FIG. 270-1 is provided with a connector, a heat sink, a relay, a capacitor, a coil, a ferrite bead inductor, a resistor, a regulator, and a transformer, which will be described in detail below.

The power supply board PW is provided with four heat sinks HS1 to HS4 extending in the vertical direction of the slot machine 100. In the following description, the area above these heat sinks HS1 to HS4 (above the line L1 in FIG. 270-1) will be referred to as an upper area. In addition, the area below this upper area is the area sandwiched between the two heat sinks HS1 and HS2 on the front side (hereinafter referred to as the front area), and the area further behind the two heat sinks HS3 and HS4 that are vertically connected on the rear side. It will be described separately into a side area (hereinafter referred to as a rear area) and a central area sandwiched between the front area and the rear area (hereinafter referred to as a central area).

In the upper area, two connectors CN1, CN2 and three capacitors CP2, CP12, CP13 are provided. Of these, capacitors CP2 and CP12 are of a type without a safety valve, and capacitor CP13 is an electrolytic capacitor provided with a safety valve. This safety valve has a concavity and convexity (in this case, a T-shaped concavity) formed on the top of the capacitor, and is designed to rupture this part when a load is applied to reduce damage. Further, the capacitor CP13 is covered with a film from the side surface to the upper edge (to the edge of the unevenness of the safety valve), and a mark (line) for identifying the negative terminal is displayed in the direction where the negative terminal is located. In this power supply board PW, the mark for identifying the negative terminal of the capacitor CP13 faces toward the rear side of the slot machine 100. Since the safety valve part is not covered with this film (the metal part is exposed), strong reflected light occurs when light is applied to it. Note that the position of the T-shaped recess is unrelated to the position of the terminal, and there may be a deviation from the position of the negative terminal (mark for identifying the negative terminal) for each individual.

The front area is provided with a relay RC1, a coil ID1, a coil ID2, a relay RC2, a coil ID3, a connector CN3, a relay RC3, a resistor RS1, and a capacitor CP1 in order from the top. Among these, the capacitor CP1 is an electrolytic capacitor provided with a safety valve, and has the largest capacity on the power supply board PW. This safety valve has an unevenness (in this case, a large-shaped depression) formed on the top of the capacitor, and is designed to burst when a load is applied to reduce damage. Further, the capacitor CP1 is covered with a film from the side surface to the upper edge (up to just before the unevenness of the safety valve), and a mark (line) for identifying the negative terminal is displayed in the direction where the negative terminal is located. In this power supply board PW, the mark for identifying the negative terminal of the capacitor CP1 faces upward of the slot machine 100. Since the safety valve part is not covered with this film (the metal part is exposed), strong reflected light occurs when light is applied to it.

In the rear region, nine capacitors CP3 to CP11 are provided in order from the top. These capacitors CP3 to CP11 are the same type of electrolytic capacitors as the capacitor CP13 in the upper region, and have the same features such as the shape of the safety valve. In particular, the marks for identifying the negative terminals of these capacitors CP3 to CP11 also face the rear side of the slot machine 100.

In the central region, two transformers TR1 and TR2 are arranged one above the other in the center. Two regulators RG1 and RG2 adjacent to the heat sink HS2 are provided near the front side of these transformers TR1 and TR2. Furthermore, two regulators RG3 to RG6 are provided adjacent to each of the two heat sinks HS3 and HS4 on the rear side, and ferrite bead inductors FB1 to FB4 are further provided near each regulator. . In addition, two capacitors CP14 and CP15 are provided above the upper transformer TR1, and a capacitor CP16 is provided further below the lower transformer TR2. These capacitors CP14 to CP16 are electrolytic capacitors without a safety valve.

Furthermore, a capacitor CP17 and an integrated circuit IC1 are provided on the back surface of the power supply board PW.

In the above example, the shape of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP1 is different from the shape of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP3 in the rear region. Such a difference in shape may make it easier to notice fraud on the power supply board PW. For example, the direction of the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 and the electrolytic capacitor CP3 is different, and fraud may be noticed by paying attention to the shape of the safety valve or the direction of the negative terminal. Further, for example, the plurality of electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region have the same safety valve shape and the negative terminals have the same direction. Even if safety valves with the same shape but with different negative terminal orientations were fraudulently installed, it would be easy to notice.

As shown in FIG. 269, a cover CA1 is provided on the power supply board PW. The power supply board PW is responsible for supplying power to the entire slot machine 100, and has a vent AH formed therein for heat radiation (FIGS. 269 and 270). When checking for the presence of fraud as described above, the inside can be checked using the vent AH without removing the cover CA1. In particular, reflected light can be easily seen near the head of an electrolytic capacitor, and it may be easy to notice an unauthorized component installed near this area. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 274-5, the electrolytic capacitor's safety valve can be seen through multiple vents AH, making it easier to identify unauthorized parts. You can check whether the safety valve is activated by applying it to the head of the capacitor.

In the above-described power supply board PW, contents may be ejected from the safety valve when a load is applied to the electrolytic capacitor, and there is a risk that surrounding components may be contaminated or damaged by the ejected contents. For this reason, for example, by not placing movable objects such as reels in positions facing the safety valve, it is possible to prevent the above problem from occurring even if the contents spout out. .

Further, when using a plurality of electrolytic capacitors, if these electrolytic capacitors are scattered, there is a risk that various locations may be contaminated or damaged. In the above-described power supply board PW, a plurality of electrolytic capacitors are placed side by side on the edge of the board in the rear area, and heat sinks HS3 and HS4 are provided on the opposite side of the board, which may cause contamination or damage. The area can be restricted.

Further, if the components constituting the circuit are not located below the electrolytic capacitor, even if the contents of the electrolytic capacitor spout and flow downward, the circuit itself can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, in the above example, a configuration is adopted in which the electrolytic capacitor CP1 with the maximum capacity is provided at the bottom. In addition, if the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board PW is activated due to the application of overvoltage or reverse voltage and the liquid content spouts out, the power supply board It is possible to prevent the PW from being contaminated with the content liquid, it is easy for a game store clerk to discover the content liquid that has flowed below the power supply module PM, and an abnormality in the electrolytic capacitor can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, even if the parts that make up the circuit are installed below the electrolytic capacitor, if the height of these parts is lower than the height of the electrolytic capacitor, a space will be created below the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor, and if the electrolytic capacitor Even if the contents of the capacitor spout out and flow downward, the circuit itself can be prevented from being damaged. For example, ferrite bead inductors FB1 to FB4 and regulators RG3 to RG6 are provided below electrolytic capacitor CP13 in the upper region, but since these are all components whose height is lower than that of electrolytic capacitor CP13, As shown in -4(a), a space is created below the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP13. Therefore, even if the contents of the electrolytic capacitor CP13 blow out, the ferrite bead inductors FB1 to FB4 and the regulators RG3 to RG6 are less likely to be contaminated.

Note that in order to prevent damage caused by the contents of the electrolytic capacitor being ejected, a component higher than the height of the electrolytic capacitor may be provided adjacent to the electrolytic capacitor. From this point of view, there are places on the power supply board PW where a heat sink that is taller than the electrolytic capacitor is provided adjacent to it.

Here, depending on the shape of the vent AH formed in the cover CA1 of the power supply board PW, contamination by the contents of the electrolytic capacitor may be reduced. For example, if the vent AH is formed at a position overlapping (opposing) the center of the safety valve of an electrolytic capacitor, the contents of the electrolytic capacitor should be covered to make it easier to get out of CA1 and make it difficult to contaminate the power supply board PW. Can be done. FIG. 274-5 shows that the vent AH is formed at a position overlapping the center of the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor CP3.

For example, if the vent AH is not formed at a position overlapping (opposing) the center of the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor will be covered and will be difficult to escape from CA1, making it difficult for the parts around the power module PM to can be made more difficult to stain. FIG. 274-5 shows that among the electrolytic capacitors in the rear region, no vent hole AH is formed at a position overlapping the center of the safety valve other than electrolytic capacitor CP3. It is also shown that the vent AH is not formed at a position overlapping the center of the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

Also, for example, by narrowing the width of the vent AH in the short direction relative to the width of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor will be covered and difficult to come out of CA1, thereby contaminating the surrounding parts of the power supply module PM. It can be made difficult. FIG. 274-5 shows that the width of the vent AH in the lateral direction is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region. It is also shown that the width of the vent AH in the short direction is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

Also, for example, by making the longitudinal width of the vent AH narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor are covered and are less likely to come out of CA1, making it difficult to contaminate the surrounding parts of the power supply module PM. can do. FIG. 274-5 shows that the width of the vent AH in the longitudinal direction is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

For example, if the vent AH is not formed at a position that overlaps (opposes) at least a part of the safety valve mark of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor will be covered and difficult to escape from CA1, and the power supply module PM It is possible to prevent the surrounding members from becoming dirty. FIG. 274-5 shows that the vent AH is not formed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the safety valve marks of the electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region. It is also shown that the vent AH is not formed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the safety valve mark of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

Note that the circuit components of the power supply board PM are not limited to the above examples, but include passive elements (resistors, capacitors, coils, transformers, filters), active elements (diodes, transistors, ICs, relays, thyristors, operational amplifiers, LEDs, sensors), etc. can be used.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of power supply module]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 269 to 270-5 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A game machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, a power supply module PM) having a case formed by combining a first member (for example, a cover CA1) and a second member (for example, a substrate pedestal CA2),
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface (for example, lower surface BT) of the first member, and further includes a second surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1, CR2) in a part thereof. are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent the vent hole on the first surface from being blocked due to the second surface coming into contact with other parts, and it is possible to cool the power supply device.

Further, the game machine described above,
The second surface is made of a plate-like member that is thinner than the thickness of a certain metal piece,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain metal piece from entering the gap below the first surface.

Further, the game machine described above,
On the lower surface of the case, one of the plurality of vent holes is located between the plurality of second surfaces (for example, FIG. 270(a), FIG. 270(c)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the degree of freedom in arranging the vents on the first surface can be increased.

Further, the game machine described above,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is a third surface (for example, top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK) of the first member, and a plurality of ventilation holes are formed, Further, a fourth surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps a part of the outer peripheral side,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the vents from being blocked on surfaces other than the bottom surface.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first board (for example, power supply board PW);
A certain movable body (for example, reels 110 to 112),
A game machine comprising:
The first substrate has a certain capacitor (for example, electrolytic capacitors CP1, CP3 to CP11, CP13 to 16),
A safety valve is provided at the head of the certain capacitor,
The certain movable body is provided at a position not facing the safety valve,
A gaming machine (see the description of [Regarding board configuration of power supply module]) that is characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent a certain movable body from being soiled by contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board has a certain component (for example, heat sink HS2, HS3, HS4),
The height of the certain component from the first board is higher than the height of the certain capacitor from the first board,
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent contamination due to contents or debris when the safety valve is activated by using a certain part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is a power supply board,
A case formed by combining a first member (for example, cover CA1) and a second member (for example, substrate pedestal CA2),
the first board is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface (for example, lower surface BT) of the first member, and further includes a second surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1, CR2) in a part thereof. are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is constituted by the third surface (for example, the top surface TP, the front surface FR, and the rear surface BK) of the first member, and further includes the second surface in a part thereof. The fourth surface of the member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps the outer circumferential side,
A plurality of vents (vents AH) are formed in the third surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, the contents can be prevented from being blocked. It may be easy for a game store clerk to discover it.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first board (for example, power supply board PW);
A game machine comprising:
The first substrate has a plurality of certain capacitors (for example, electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11) provided along one of its edges,
A safety valve is provided at the head of one of the plurality of capacitors,
The first substrate is provided with a certain component (for example, heat sinks HS3, HS4) adjacent to the plurality of certain capacitors on the opposite side from one of the edges,
A game machine (for example, see FIG. 270-1) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, by grouping a plurality of certain capacitors together, it is possible to secure an area that will not be contaminated when the safety valve is activated.

Further, the game machine described above,
The height of the certain component from the first substrate is higher than the height of the certain capacitor from the first substrate.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent contamination due to contents or debris when the safety valve is activated by using a certain part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is a power supply board,
A case formed by combining a first member (for example, cover CA1) and a second member (for example, substrate pedestal CA2),
the first board is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface (for example, lower surface BT) of the first member, and further includes a second surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1, CR2) in a part thereof. are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is constituted by the third surface (for example, the top surface TP, the front surface FR, and the rear surface BK) of the first member, and further includes the second surface in a part thereof. The fourth surface of the member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps the outer circumferential side,
A plurality of vents (vents AH) are formed in the third surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, the contents can be prevented from being blocked. It may be easy for a game store clerk to discover it.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first board (for example, power supply board PW);
A game machine comprising:
The first substrate is provided with a certain capacitor (for example, electrolytic capacitor CP1) on either edge,
A safety valve is provided at the head of the certain capacitor,
the edge on the side where the certain capacitor is provided is located on the lower side (for example, see FIG. 270-1);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a certain capacitor is placed at the bottom, so that even if contents or debris fall downward when the safety valve is activated, the circuit can be prevented from being contaminated.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board has a certain component (for example, a heat sink HS2),
The height of the certain component from the first board is higher than the height of the certain capacitor from the first board,
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent contamination due to contents or debris when the safety valve is activated by using a certain part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is a power supply board,
A case formed by combining a first member (e.g., cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., substrate pedestal CA2),
the first board is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface of the first member (e.g., lower surface BT), and further includes a part of the second surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2). are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is constituted by the third surface (for example, the top surface TP, the front surface FR, and the rear surface BK) of the first member, and further includes the second surface in a part thereof. The fourth surface of the member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps the outer circumferential side,
A plurality of vents (vents AH) are formed in the third surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, the contents can be prevented from being blocked. It may be easy for a game store clerk to discover it.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first board (for example, power supply board PW);
A game machine comprising:
The first substrate has a first capacitor (for example, electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11),
The first substrate has a second capacitor (for example, electrolytic capacitor CP1),
A first safety valve is provided at the head of the first capacitor,
A second safety valve is provided at the head of the second capacitor,
The mark on the first safety valve is different from the mark on the second safety valve,
A game machine (for example, see FIG. 270-1) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, fraud by an unauthorized person may be noticed if the marks on the plurality of safety valves are different from those at the time of the previous maintenance.

Further, the game machine described above,
The negative terminal display of the first capacitor is provided facing a predetermined direction (for example, the right direction in FIG. 270-1, the rear direction of the slot machine 100),
The negative terminal display of the second capacitor is provided facing in a direction different from the predetermined direction (for example, upward in FIG. 270-1, upward of slot machine 100),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the negative terminal display differs depending on the shape of the safety valve, so it may be possible to identify fraud.

Further, the game machine described above,
At least a predetermined number of two or more first capacitors are provided,
Negative terminal indications of the predetermined number of the first capacitors are all oriented in a predetermined direction;
A game machine (for example, see electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 and CP13 in FIG. 270-1) characterized by this has been described.

In this game machine, since the negative terminals of capacitors with the same safety valve shape are oriented in the same direction, fraud can sometimes be detected.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board has a certain component (for example, heat sink HS3, HS4),
The height of the certain component from the first substrate is higher than the height of the first capacitor from the first substrate,
the certain component is adjacent to the first capacitor;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent contamination due to contents or debris when the safety valve is activated by using a certain part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is a power supply board,
A case formed by combining a first member (for example, cover CA1) and a second member (for example, substrate pedestal CA2),
the first board is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface (for example, lower surface BT) of the first member, and further includes a second surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1, CR2) in a part thereof. are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is constituted by the third surface (for example, the top surface TP, the front surface FR, and the rear surface BK) of the first member, and further includes the second surface in a part thereof. The fourth surface of the member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps the outer circumferential side,
A plurality of vents (vents AH) are formed in the third surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, the contents can be prevented from being blocked. It may be easy for a game store clerk to discover it.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first board (for example, power supply board PW);
A case having multiple ventilation holes (for example, a combination of cover CA1 and substrate pedestal CA2),
A game machine comprising:
The first substrate has a certain capacitor (for example, electrolytic capacitors CP1, CP3 to CP11, CP13 to 16),
A safety valve is provided at the head of the certain capacitor,
The first width (for example, the width in the vertical direction in FIG. 270-5) of the first vent (for example, vent AH) among the plurality of vents is greater than the width of the head of the certain capacitor. is also narrow (for example, see Figure 270-5),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, when the safety valve is activated, the contents are allowed to escape from the vent to the outside, but pieces of the safety valve are prevented from flying out to the outside, thereby preventing damage to other parts.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board has a certain component (for example, heat sink HS2, HS3, HS4),
The height of the certain component from the first board is higher than the height of the certain capacitor from the first board,
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to prevent contamination due to contents or debris when the safety valve is activated by using a certain part.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board is a power supply board,
The case is formed by combining a first member (for example, cover CA1) and a second member (for example, substrate pedestal CA2),
the first board is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is composed of a first surface (for example, lower surface BT) of the first member, and further includes a second surface of the second member (for example, corner members CR1, CR2) in a part thereof. are overlapped on the outer periphery,
A plurality of vent holes (for example, vent holes AH) are formed on the first surface,
Any one of the top surface, front surface, and back surface of the case is constituted by the third surface (for example, the top surface TP, the front surface FR, and the rear surface BK) of the first member, and further includes the second surface in a part thereof. The fourth surface of the member (for example, corner members CR1 to CR4) overlaps the outer circumferential side,
A plurality of vents (vents AH) are formed in the third surface.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

This game machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, the contents can be prevented from being blocked. It may be easy for a game store clerk to discover it.

<About the board and board case of the slot machine 100>
Next, an example of the board and board case of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 271. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 271(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case. FIG. 271(a) shows a board CB and a board case CA that covers the board CB. The board CB is provided with components such as capacitors and ICs that constitute a circuit on the board, and FIG. 271(a) shows circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3 as examples of such components. The board case CA is made of a transparent material and has a shape whose height varies according to the height of the board CB (the height of the circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3). . Note that the area NA of the board CB is an area containing only lands in which circuit components are not mounted (hereinafter, unmounted land area NA). In the board case CA, the area ID corresponding to this unmounted land area NA is an area to which text information regarding the board CB is attached (hereinafter referred to as text information area ID).

When a board case CA as shown in FIG. 271(a) is provided, it is possible to enhance the effect of preventing fraud on the board CB, but once fraud is committed, the board CB becomes difficult to see and the board Another problem is that it becomes difficult to notice fraud. By using a transparent material in the above board case CA, such problems are less likely to occur.

Here, the board case CA has a structure for locking it to the board CB (for example, caulking), and a structure that prevents access to the connector on the board CB after the cable is taken out from the board CB. A configuration for locking the lid member (e.g., crimping), and a configuration for displaying information regarding the board CB and information regarding the functions of the board case CA (e.g., text display and stickers), etc. may be established. When each of these configurations is provided, the visibility of the board CB at that portion is reduced, and there is a possibility that fraud may be committed. Here, if there is an unmounted land area NA on the board CB that is unlikely to be the target of fraud, the above configuration is provided in the area corresponding to this unmounted land area NA, thereby making it difficult for fraud to occur. be able to. FIG. 271(a) shows that the text information area ID corresponding to the unmounted land area NA is used in the configuration for displaying information regarding the board CB. In addition, as an example of the character information area ID, characters may be printed, or recognizable characters may be formed by the unevenness of the board case CA. Note that the text information area ID is a transparent area, although its visibility is reduced due to the presence of text, and it is possible to visually check the unmounted land area NA to confirm the presence or absence of an unauthorized member. Note that if silk printing is applied to the unmounted land area NA, fraud can be prevented by making this printing also visible.

FIG. 271(b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which caulking CL is provided in the unmounted land area NA. Since no components are provided in the unmounted land area NA, the height of the board case CA is not required. The character information area ID in FIG. 271(a) does not have a structure that requires a particular height, so it has the same height as the surrounding area. On the other hand, the caulking CL shown in FIG. 271(b) requires a certain level of height. However, since no components are provided in the unmounted land area NA and there is an allowance in height, it is possible to suppress the height of the board case CA and make it compact. In FIG. 271(b), while ensuring the height of the caulking CL, it is shown that the height of the location where the caulking CL is provided is lower than the height of the location where the circuit component CE1 is provided. Note that the caulking CL is made of a transparent member, although its visibility is reduced due to its structure, and it is possible to visually check the unmounted land area NA to confirm the presence or absence of an unauthorized member. Note that if silk printing is applied to the unmounted land area NA, fraud can be prevented by making this printing also visible.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of board and board case of slot machine 100]
The technical idea described in the explanation of FIG. 271 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate (e.g., substrate CB);
a first substrate case (e.g., substrate case CA) that houses the first substrate and has transparency;
A game machine comprising:
The first board has an unmounted component land where no component is mounted (for example, an unmounted land area NA),
The first board case has a first function in a first area that covers the component-unmounted land (for example, text information area ID, caulking CL),
The first function is a function of displaying information regarding the first board, or a function of enabling a predetermined operation in the first board case,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the component-unmounted land can be used for configuring the first function.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first board case has an area whose height relative to the first board is higher than the first area (for example, in FIGS. 271(a) and 271(b), an area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA (higher at the location where circuit component CE1 is installed),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the first board case can be made compact.

Further, the game machine described above,
the component-unmounted land can be visually recognized from the first area;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to check whether an unauthorized member is attached to an unmounted land.

Further, the game machine described above,
A silk-printed display corresponding to the component-unmounted land can be visually recognized from the first area;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to check whether an unauthorized member is attached to an unmounted land.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function of displaying information regarding the first board,
information regarding the first substrate is formed in the first area (for example, a text information area ID);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the component-unmounted land can be used for display.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function of displaying information regarding the first board,
A sticker containing information regarding the first substrate is affixed to the first area.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the component-unmounted land can be used for sealing.
Further, the game machine described above,
The first function is a function that enables a predetermined operation (for example, a member locking operation) in the first board case,
A caulk (for example, a caulk CL) that enables the predetermined operation when released is provided in the first region;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the space above the land where no components are mounted can be used for caulking.

<About warning displays regarding reels>
Next, an example of the operation during reel rotation will be described using FIGS. 272 to 281. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

[Example of normal game operation]
FIG. 272 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. In this figure, it is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state.

First, at the timing when a bet operation is made, the number of bets required to start the game will be in a state. At this stage, before the start of the game by lever operation (reel stop state), the effect image display device 157 (display means) normally displays the background, the speakers 272 and 277 normally output BGM, and various types of The lamp 420 is in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the lever monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the second mode described below). This lever monitor LED is in a second mode when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. Note that the lever monitor LED is not limited to the board of the main control section 300, but may be provided, for example, on a relay board between the lever and the main control section.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a game is started (the reels start rotating) upon receiving a signal of this change. At this time, the first display (for example, operation instruction display (press order navigation, aim for 〇〇), small role suggestion display, preview display, etc.) starts on the effect image display device 157, and the first display starts from the speakers 272 and 277. The output of the first sound (effect corresponding to the first display) starts, and the various lamps 420 become in the first light emission mode (effect corresponding to the first display). Further, the lever monitor LED is in a second mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the first mode).

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation. Note that the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. . Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a third stop sound corresponding to the third stop operation. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays the second display (stop result display (stop small role display, XX pieces obtained display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)) etc.) is being displayed, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in the second light emitting mode (corresponding to the second display). It is a performance that will be performed). Further, the lever monitor LED is the first aspect. Then, since the game has ended, the player enters a state in which the number of bets necessary to start the game has not been placed (non-bet state).

[Example of operation according to time elapsed after lever operation]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation according to the passage of time after the lever operation will be described using FIG. 273. In FIG. 273, similarly to FIG. 272, it is assumed that the operations are performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, middle stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that the description of parts that overlap with those described with reference to FIG. 272 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those shown in FIG. 272.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has passed without a stop operation being performed since the start lever was subsequently operated. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (hereinafter referred to as warning display) will be displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Assume that in this state, a time t2 (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation being performed. At this time, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the effect image display device 157 is switched to "Time t2 or more has passed".

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, the first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is emitted from the speakers 272 and 277. is not output. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the first message and the messages "Time t2 or more has passed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels", and the various lamps 420 continue to display the first light emitting mode. are doing. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Subsequently, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, a second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is emitted from the speakers 272 and 277. is not output. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the first message and the messages "Time t2 or more has passed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels", and the various lamps 420 continue to display the first light emitting mode. are doing. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" are cleared, and the third stop operation in Figure 272 is performed. The situation will be the same as before.

Note that in the above operation, an example has been described in which three types of messages are displayed as warning displays regarding the reels, but the configuration is not limited to the above, and at least one of these messages may be displayed. The warning display regarding the reel may be displayed so as to partially overlap the first display (for example, the operation navigation). Further, in the above operation, an example has been described in which the warning display regarding the reels is displayed until the third stop operation is performed, but it may be made to be hidden when any of the stop operations is performed.

Further, in the above operation, an example has been described in which the output of the first sound is stopped together with the warning display regarding the reels, but the volume of the first sound may be lowered or silenced.

With the above configuration, the player can be made aware that the reels are still rotating.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 274. In FIG. 274, it is assumed that operations including a bet operation, a lever operation, and a left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has passed without a stop operation being performed since the start lever was subsequently operated. The operation at this time is similar to that in FIG. 273. Note that the lamp provided inside each stop button continues to display the second light emission.

Here, it is assumed that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connected to the main control section 300 is disconnected). In this example, all the reels stop due to an abnormality, and the lamps provided inside each stop button change from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display corresponding to the abnormality of the reels, and the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels" continue. Is displayed. Further, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode, and the lever monitor LED remains in the first mode.

In a state where an abnormality has occurred in the reel, the reel sensor cannot perform normal detection, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not effectively accepted. FIG. 274 shows that although the left stop operation is performed in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the reel, the corresponding operation is not executed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was explained in which the warning display regarding the reel continues when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected. (or step-out) may occur, the same operation as in the case of disconnection may be performed.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 275. In FIG. 275, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Here, it is assumed that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connected to the main control section 300 is disconnected). In a state where an abnormality has occurred in the reel, the reel sensor cannot perform normal detection, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not effectively accepted. In this example, all the reels stop due to an abnormality, and furthermore, the lamps provided inside each stop button change from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the effect image display device 157 does not perform a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and continues to display the first display. Further, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Assume that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start lever was subsequently operated. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (warning about the reels) are added to the first display. display) is displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Note that the lamp provided inside each stop button continues to display the first light emission.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was explained in which the reel-related warning display is executed even when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected. Even if an abnormality (or a step-out) occurs, the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may be performed.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 276. In FIG. 276, it is assumed that operations including a bet operation, a lever operation, and a left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has passed without a stop operation being performed since the start lever was subsequently operated. The operation at this time is similar to that in FIG. 273. Note that the lamp provided inside each stop button continues to display the second light emission.

Here, it is assumed that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connected to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. This example shows that the display by the lamp provided inside each stop button is not executed (non-display, for example, the light is turned off) due to an abnormality. At this time, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display corresponding to the abnormality of the stop button unit, and the first display and messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reels are rotating", and "Please stop the reels" continue. will be displayed. Further, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first mode, and the lever monitor LED remains in the first mode.

FIG. 276 shows that although the left stop operation is performed in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the stop button unit, the corresponding operation is not executed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was explained in which the warning display regarding the reel continues when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected. The same operation may be possible.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever is operated will be described below with reference to FIG. 277. In FIG. 277, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from the first light emitting display (for example, red light emission) to the second light emission display (for example, blue light emission). The first light-emitting display indicates that the stop button cannot be operated, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the stop button can be operated.

Here, it is assumed that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connected to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. This example shows that the display by the lamp provided inside each stop button is not executed (non-display, for example, the light is turned off) due to an abnormality. At this time, the effect image display device 157 does not perform a display corresponding to the abnormality of the stop button unit, and continues to display the first display. Further, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Assume that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start lever was subsequently operated. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (warning about the reels) are added to the first display. display) is displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Note that the lamp provided inside each stop button continues to be hidden.

In addition, in the above operation, an example has been described in which a warning display regarding the reel is executed even when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected. The same operation may be possible.

[Example of operation when executing reel production]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the reel effect is executed will be explained using FIG. 278. In FIG. 278, it is assumed that after a bet operation and a lever operation, a reel effect is executed, and further operations including a left stop operation, a middle stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, operations in response to bet operations are similar to those in FIGS. 272 and 273.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start rotating. However, this differs from FIGS. 272 and 273 in that the rotation of the reels at this time is not due to the start of the game but due to reel performance.

After that, all the reels that were rotating come to a pseudo stop, and the reel performance ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the reel performance ends, the reels start rotating. Here, it is assumed that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has passed without a stop operation being performed since the end of this reel performance. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (warning about the reels) are added to the first display. display) is displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Note that when time t2 (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the end of the reel performance, the message "Time t1 or more has elapsed" on the performance image display device 157 is switched to "Time t2 or more has elapsed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

In FIG. 273, an example was explained in which a message calling attention to the reels is displayed based on the elapsed time from the lever operation (or the start of the game), but in FIG. 278, the message calling attention to the reels is The difference is that the display is based on the elapsed time since the end of the game (or the start of the game). As in the above example, if the reel performance ends at time t3 (for example, 15 seconds) after the lever is operated, the warning display message regarding the reels will be executed after the time t1+t3 after the lever is operated.

[Example of operation when performing a pseudo game (1)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 279. In FIG. 279, it is assumed that after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations including a left stop operation, a middle stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, operations in response to bet operations are similar to those in FIGS. 272 and 273.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start rotating. However, this differs from FIGS. 272 and 273 in that the rotation of the reels at this time is not due to the start of a game but due to the start of a pseudo game.

In a pseudo game, the reels can be pseudo-stopped by the player's stop operation, but in this case, the player does not perform the stop operation, and as time t3 has elapsed, all the reels that were rotating are pseudo-stopped and the reels are pseudo-stopped. Assume that the game has ended. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start rotating. Here, it is assumed that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed without a stop operation being performed since the end of this pseudo game. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (warning about the reels) are added to the first display. display) is displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Note that when the time t2 (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the effect image display device 157 is switched to "More than time t2 has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

In FIG. 273, an example was explained in which a message calling attention to the reels is displayed based on the elapsed time from the lever operation (or the start of the game), but in FIG. 279, the message calling attention to the reels is The difference is that the display is based on the elapsed time since the end of the game (or the start of the game). As in the above example, if the pseudo game ends at time t3 (for example, 15 seconds) after the lever is operated, the warning display message regarding the reels will be executed after the time t1+t3 from the lever operation.

[Example of operation when performing a pseudo game (2)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 280. In FIG. 280, it is assumed that after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations including a left stop operation, a middle stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, operations in response to bet operations are similar to those in FIGS. 272 and 273.

Subsequently, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start rotating. However, this differs from FIGS. 272 and 273 in that the rotation of the reels at this time is not due to the start of a game but due to the start of a pseudo game.

In a pseudo-game, when time t3 elapses, all the reels that were rotating pseudo-stop and the pseudo-game ends, but here, before this time t3 elapses (at the timing when time t4 has elapsed), the game starts. It is assumed that all the reels are pseudo-stopped by the player's stop operation and the pseudo-game ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. There is. Further, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start rotating. Here, it is assumed that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed without a stop operation being performed since the end of this pseudo game. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has elapsed," "Reels are rotating," and "Please stop the reels" (warning about the reels) are added to the first display. display) is displayed. In addition, although the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode, the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect. Note that when the time t2 (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the effect image display device 157 is switched to "More than time t2 has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Subsequently, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation and a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stopped state as in FIG. 273. Then, the message calling attention to the reels continues to be displayed, and the states of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED continue. Then, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the warning display message regarding the reels is cleared, and the same state as when the third stop operation is performed in FIG. 272 occurs.

In FIG. 273, an example was explained in which a message calling attention to the reels is displayed based on the elapsed time from the lever operation (or the start of the game), but in FIG. The difference is that the display is based on the elapsed time since the end of the game (or the start of the game). As in the above example, if the pseudo game ends at time t4 (for example, 5 seconds) after the lever is operated, the warning display message regarding the reels will be executed after the time t1+t4 after the lever is operated.

[Example of operation when power is restored during a game]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when a power failure/recovery occurs during a game will be described using FIG. 281. In FIG. 281, it is assumed that a power outage occurs after a bet operation and a lever operation, and the power is restored. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout the entire operation, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state in which it has detected the closed state. Note that descriptions of parts that overlap with those described in FIGS. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as in FIGS. 272 and 273.

Suppose that a power outage occurs when a time t5 (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without a stop operation being performed after the start lever was subsequently operated. In the state immediately before the power cut, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first light emission mode continues on the various lamps 420, and the first sound is output on the speakers 272 and 277. continues. The lever monitor LED is in the first aspect.

After the power is restored, each control section of the slot machine 100 executes a return process to return to the state before the power was cut off. This return process is executed by each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, but the return process of the main control unit 300 is completed earliest, and the reels are thereby rotated again. Start. In addition, until the return processing of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the effect image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the return processing is in progress, and the speakers 272 and 277 display the display when the power is turned on. A sound is output, and the various lamps 420 assume the light emission mode when the power is turned on. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Then, when the time t6 (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored and the recovery processing of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the effect image display device 157 displays the demo image instead of the first display. Display is executed. Moreover, the audio outputted from the speakers 272 and 277 when the power is turned on ends, and the various lamps 420 are turned off. Note that since the demonstration image display device 157 executes a demonstration display, so-called operation navigation is not displayed, but this operation navigation may be performed using the light emitting mode of the stop button, or the 7-segment It may also be displayed on a display or the like.

In addition, the first display that would be executed if there was no power outage, the display corresponding to the game progress operation, and the effects corresponding to these will be changed depending on the game progress operation after the power is restored. Part of the display or presentation may be performed sequentially. For example, if an operation according to the operation condition is performed when the operation navigation suggesting a certain operation condition is not displayed (demonstration display is being executed), part of the first display may be executed or stopped. There may be cases where the various lamps 420 are operated without outputting audio corresponding to the operation. Note that by executing the first display and the corresponding performance at the timing of starting a new game, it is possible to return to the normal state from this game.

Suppose that a time t1 (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated and the stop operation was not performed, excluding the time due to power interruption. At this time, the demonstration display continues on the effect image display device 157, but messages such as ``Time t1 or more has elapsed'', ``Reels are rotating'', and ``Please stop the reels'' appear to cover part of this display (related to the reels). warning display) will be displayed. Further, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output no audio, and the various lamps 420 continue to be turned off. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Assume that in this state, a time t2 (for example, 5 minutes, excluding the power outage time) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation being performed. At this time, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the effect image display device 157 is switched to "More than time t2 has passed".

In addition, in the above example, the warning display regarding the reels is executed while the demo display is being displayed, but for example, if the timing when the above time t1 has elapsed is the period of the returning display, the display will be different from the demo display. Similarly, a warning display regarding the reels may be executed, or a warning display regarding the reels may be executed after the returning display is finished. Additionally, if a warning display regarding the reel was being executed before the power outage, the warning display regarding the reel may be executed while the recovering display is displayed after the power is restored, or the reel alert display may be displayed while the recovering display is being displayed. After the reels are finished, a warning display regarding the reels may be displayed. Furthermore, even if the time due to the power outage exceeds the time t1, the above example excludes the time due to the power outage, but an RTC (real time clock) may be installed to include the time due to the power outage.

Furthermore, in the above example, the passage of time t1 is determined based on the timing when the start lever is operated, but the passage of time t1 is determined based on the timing when the power is restored, and a warning display regarding the reels is executed. You can do it like this. At this time, there may be a delay from the elapse of time t1 due to the recovery process.

[Technical idea corresponding to embodiment of warning display regarding reel]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 272 to 281 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that can perform a predetermined notification regarding the rotating reel (for example, a warning display regarding the reel) when a predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 273 reference),
Even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, in FIG. 275 reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that does not perform notification corresponding to the stoppage of the reel when the predetermined notification is executed with the reel stopped without the stop operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 274, see Figure 275),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it may be possible to make players aware of abnormalities while paying attention to predetermined notifications.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a warning notification regarding the reel (for example, see FIG. 273);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Further, the game machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of performing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not perform the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being performed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the reel performance from being disturbed by the predetermined notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the elapse of the predetermined time while the reels are rotating after the execution of the reel effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 278 to 278). 280),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that can perform a predetermined notification regarding the rotating reel (for example, a warning display regarding the reel) when a predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 273 reference),
The predetermined notification may be executed in a state where the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIG. 277),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed in a state where the stop operation is invalid, the player will not be able to take any action, so the game store clerk may be able to understand the abnormality of the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, in FIG. 275 reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that does not perform notification corresponding to the invalid state of the stop operation when the predetermined notification is executed when the stop operation is invalid (for example, as shown in FIG. 276, see Figure 277),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it may be possible to make players aware of abnormalities while paying attention to predetermined notifications.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a warning notification regarding the reel (for example, see FIG. 273);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Further, the game machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of performing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not perform the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being performed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the reel performance from being disturbed by the predetermined notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the elapse of the predetermined time while the reels are rotating after the execution of the reel effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 278 to 278). 280),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that can perform a predetermined notification regarding the rotating reel (for example, a warning display regarding the reel) when a predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, as shown in FIG. 273 reference),
If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses while the plurality of reels are rotating, the predetermined notification is executed at a time different from the time when the predetermined time elapses after the power is restored. In some cases (for example, see Figure 281),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, a predetermined notification can be made after power is restored.

Further, the game machine described above,
Even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time elapses while the reel is rotating (for example, in FIG. 275 reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
During execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reels stop without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be performed (for example, see FIG. 274);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, if a predetermined notification is executed while the reels are stopped, this is not a normal behavior, so the game store clerk may be able to detect an abnormality in the game machine through the player.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time elapses after the power is restored (for example, in FIG. 281, the time t1 is the elapsed time t5 before the power cut and the elapsed time t6 after the power is restored). Since the determination is made based on the sum of
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed after the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is restored (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 281, regardless of the elapsed time t5 before the power is restored, At the end of t1, a warning display regarding the reels is displayed, and there is a further delay for the return process).
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a warning notification regarding the reel (for example, see FIG. 273);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

Further, the game machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of performing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not perform the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being performed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to prevent the reel performance from being disturbed by the predetermined notification.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the elapse of the predetermined time while the reels are rotating after the execution of the reel effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 278 to 278). 280),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it is possible to notify a player or a visiting store clerk that the reels are rotating excessively and to urge them to stop them.

<About operations when an abnormality occurs in the connection between boards>
Next, an example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 282 and 283. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 189 described above shows an example of a board placed inside the slot machine 100 and a harness connecting these boards. For example, the main control board 300B provided with the main control unit 300 is connected to the relay board RB1 via an upstream harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to the lever unit 135U (start lever 135U) via downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5. ), a stop button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137 to 139), a bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130, 132, and a settlement button 134), a selector unit, and a door sensor.

The relay board RB1 is provided with an IC for grasping the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, and the status of each device grasped by this IC is transmitted to the main control board 300B. It becomes.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Fig. 282 shows a state in which no game is being executed (demonstration is being displayed), various harnesses are connected normally, each operating means is not operated, and the reels are in a stopped state. It is shown. Furthermore, a demonstration display is being executed on the effect image display device 157 (display means), normal BGM is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light emitting mode. Further, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in a first mode (lighting or extinguishing, a mode different from the second mode described below). This door sensor monitor LED becomes a second mode when the door sensor detects an open state, and is provided to check the state of the front door 102. Note that the door sensor monitor LED is not limited to the board of the main control section 300, but may be provided, for example, on a relay board between the door sensor and the main control section.

Here, it is assumed that the downstream harness HA5 connecting the door sensor and the relay board RB1 is disconnected. FIG. 282 shows that the door sensor and relay board RB1 are not connected (non-connected). In the relay board RB1, the state of the door sensor cannot be determined due to the disconnection of the downstream harness HA5. In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300. In FIG. 282, the door sensor is detecting the closed state, but the effect image display device 157 (display means) is displaying a door open error, and the speakers 272 and 277 are emitting a door open error sound. The various lamps 420 are in a door open error light emitting mode. Further, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is a second aspect. In this configuration, a notification indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is executed even though the front door 102 is in the closed state, so it is possible that some abnormality has occurred in the mechanism of the front door 102. In some cases, the user may be able to understand that there is an abnormality in the downstream harness HA5.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Similar to FIG. 282, FIG. 283 shows that the game is not being played (demonstration is being displayed).

Here, assume that the upstream harness HB1 connecting the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B is disconnected. FIG. 283 shows that the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (non-connected). The relay board RB1 knows the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, but because the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, it is unable to send the status of each device to the main control board 300B. Can not. In this case, in this embodiment, since no new information is transmitted from the relay board RB1, no operation is performed and no error notification is performed. FIG. 283 shows that no change occurs even when the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are in a state where they are not connected (non-connected). Although FIG. 283 shows an example during a demonstration display, if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected during a period other than when the power is turned on (for example, during a bet state or during a game (while the reels are rotating)), the above-mentioned Similarly, no action is taken.

Note that if the power is turned on while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 recognizes this disconnection state through the power-on processing and notifies the board connection error. In FIG. 283, when the power is turned off once and then turned on again with the upstream harness HB1 disconnected, a board connection error display is executed on the effect image display device 157 (display means), and the speakers 272, 277 It is shown that a board connection error sound is output from , and the various lamps 420 are in a board connection error lighting mode.

In the above configuration, since various operations cannot be accepted due to the upstream harness HB1 being disconnected, it is possible to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Then, depending on whether a board connection error is reported when the power is turned on again, the location where the abnormality has occurred may be identified.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when an abnormality occurs in the connection between boards]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 282 and 283 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
door sensor and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second board (for example, relay board RB1);
A game machine comprising:
The first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (for example, upstream harness HB1),
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (for example, downstream harness HA5),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a door opening error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means that can execute the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness because the door is in a closed state.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the same signal as when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is transmitted from the second board to the second harness. (For example, see the description "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.")
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
A monitor LED (for example, a door sensor monitor LED) that assumes a predetermined mode (for example, the second mode in FIG. 282) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state. ,
The monitor LED is an LED that assumes the predetermined mode when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be noticed that there is an abnormality in either the first harness or the second harness.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
door sensor and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a second board (for example, relay board RB1);
A game machine comprising:
The first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (for example, upstream harness HB1),
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (for example, downstream harness HA5),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a door opening error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means that can execute the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282),
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification different from the predetermined notification (for example, board connection error) when the first harness is in a disconnected state when the power is turned on (for example, see FIG. 283). ,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness. Further, the game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the first harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closing detection state and the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness because the door is in a closed state.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the second harness changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, the same signal as when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is transmitted from the second board to the second harness. (For example, see the description "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.")
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, a game store clerk may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

Further, the game machine described above,
A monitor LED (for example, a door sensor monitor LED) that assumes a predetermined mode (for example, the second mode in FIG. 282) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state. ,
The monitor LED is an LED that assumes the predetermined mode when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be noticed that there is an abnormality in either the first harness or the second harness.

<About configurations with unused screw holes>
Next, an example of the structure of the board of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 284 and 285. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations already described in other embodiments (for example, FIGS. 17 to 32), and the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example shall take precedence.

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B corresponding to the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. This control board 500B has a configuration in which a second board CB2 is provided over a part of the first board CB1. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the first substrate CB1. In FIG. 285, the region where the second substrate CB2 overlaps is indicated by a dotted line.

The control board 500B is provided with components CM1 to CM14 that constitute the board. Of these, components CM1 to CM13 are provided on the first board CB1, and component CM14 is provided on the second board CB2. Note that component CM1 is a CPU, component CM13 is a VDP, components CM12 and CM14 are ROMs, components CM8 and CM11 are ICs, components CM2 and CM9 are resistors, components CM7 and CM10 are capacitors, and components CM3 to CM6 are LEDs. Of these, components CM5 to CM9 are provided at positions where they are no longer visible due to the second board CB2.

In addition to the components CM to CM13 described above, the first board CB1 is provided with connectors CN1 and CN2, one of which, the connector CN2, is used for connection to the second board CB2. The second board CB2 has screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed at four corners, and is fixed to the first board CB1 at two of these holes with screws and spacers. FIG. 284 shows that the second board CB2, which is connected to the first board CB1 through the connector CN2, is screwed through two screw holes SH1 and SH2. Note that a distance between the first substrate CB1 and the second substrate CB2 is maintained by a spacer.

Among the screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed in the second board CB2, two screw holes SH3 and SH4 are unused screw holes that are not used for fixing to the first board CB1. A part of the first board CB1 can be visually recognized through the screw hole. In FIGS. 284 and 285, the range VA visible from the screw hole SH3 is indicated by a dotted line. Regarding the parts CM1, CM2, CM4 to CM6 within this range VA, it is possible to check whether there are any irregularities through the screw holes SH3. In particular, the components CM5 and CM6 under the second board CB2 can be confirmed even if they are difficult to see due to the second board CB2. Note that it is possible to check not only the parts but also the display on the board in the same way.

In the slot machine 100, the board may be housed in a case to prevent fraud. Although these cases are made of materials that allow the inside to be seen (for example, transparent materials), it may be difficult to see the inside due to stickers or management information written on the case. For example, in FIGS. 284 and 285, if a sticker affixed to the case covers the area NA, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the state of the area NA. If an unused screw hole is intentionally provided as described above, an area that is difficult to see due to some reason can be seen from a different angle, and it is possible to check whether there is any fraud. In the example of FIG. 285, components CM1, CM2, and CM4 in area NA can be confirmed through screw holes SH3.

Note that unused screw holes SH5 and SH6 are also formed in the first substrate CB1. The presence of such unused screw holes makes it difficult to notice that the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 in the second board CB2 are used for component confirmation. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who commits fraud to feel wary of the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 in the second board CB2.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when there is an unused screw hole]
The technical ideas described in the explanations of FIGS. 284 and 285 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate (for example, first substrate CB1);
a second substrate (for example, second substrate CB2) disposed at a position covering a portion of the first substrate;
A game machine comprising:
The second substrate has a plurality of screw holes (for example, screw holes SH1 to SH4),
The second substrate is fixed to the first substrate using a first screw hole (for example, screw holes SH1, SH2) among the plurality of screw holes,
A second screw hole (for example, screw hole SH3, SH4) among the plurality of screw holes is in an unused state;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the game clerk can check the parts and displays of the first board located below the second board through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
Among the parts or displays arranged on the first board, some of the parts (for example, parts CM5 and CM6) located under the second board are visible through the second screw hole.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, parts and displays under the second board can be checked through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
Among the parts or displays arranged on the first board, some of the parts (for example, parts CM1, CM2, CM4) that are not located under the second board are visually recognized through the second screw hole. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to check parts or displays that are not under the second board through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first substrate and the second substrate are arranged inside a transparent case,
The case has an area where the interior is visible and an area where the interior is not visible (for example, an area covered with a seal),
Among the parts or displays arranged on the first board, some of the parts or displays that are not located under the second board and are directly under the invisible area (for example, in the area NA) a certain component CM1, CM2, CM4) is visible from the visible area through the second screw hole;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, it may be possible to check areas that are not visible due to the case through the second screw hole.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first substrate has an unused screw hole at a position not covered by the second substrate.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel wary of the second screw hole.

[Technical ideas corresponding to other embodiments]
In the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
reset switch and
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, RWM clear processing (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, the RWM clearing process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
The notification means is capable of executing a second notification of RWM clear (see step S1009 in FIG. 187, for example),
The notification means does not execute the second notification while executing the first notification (for example, in a game stop state, the RWM clearing process is not executed even if the power is turned on by operating a reset switch, and the second notification is not executed. (the first notification is executed instead of the first notification),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first notification that the game is in a stopped state is not interrupted by the second notification.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
reset switch and
A medal count clear switch that the player cannot operate,
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, RWM clear processing (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, the RWM clearing process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the medal number clear switch being operated, a medal number clearing process is executed;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this game machine, the medal count clearing process is executed by the medal count clear switch even when the game is stopped, so that the maintenance efficiency for the game store clerk is improved.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a first count value (for example, MY value) regarding gaming value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
reset switch and
a second counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates the second count value;
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A game machine comprising:
Based on the first count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the first count value reaching the first value ( For example, step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, RWM clear processing (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, the RWM clearing process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The second counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to obtain the second count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the end condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the second count value from the initial value reaches a second value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The second counting means is a means capable of updating the second count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the second value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the player can know that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the RWM clearing process. Furthermore, even if the second count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, there is still room for the player to recover.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the second count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
reset switch and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED);
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, RWM clear processing (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, the RWM clearing process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the player can know that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the RWM clearing process. Furthermore, it may be possible to detect a malfunction in the first harness during a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (for example, main control unit 300) that updates a count value (for example, MY value) related to gaming value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, game information display 126, payout number display 127, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
reset switch and
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); ,
A game machine comprising:
Based on the count value reaching a first value (for example, 19000), the non-gaming halt state changes to the gaming halt state (for example, Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (for example, complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 188 step S1705),
When the power is cut off in the non-gaming stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, RWM clear processing (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
If the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated, the RWM clearing process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 in FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In this gaming machine, the player can know that the game is in a stopped state by not executing the RWM clearing process. In addition, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade, if there is a problem with the first harness, the first processing will be executed, and the first operating unit will become normal. You may be able to confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a problem in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300, first counting means) capable of updating the first count value;
a second counting means (for example, main control unit 300, second counting means) capable of updating the second count value;
A gaming machine comprising a determining means (for example, a main control section 300),
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to calculate the first count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the first count value from the initial value reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the first count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
When the first count value of the first counting means is updated, the second count value of the second counting means may also be updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a)(1) , Figures 169 (4) to (6)),
When a first operation (for example, a first stop left operation) is performed in a first game, the first count value of the first counting means is updated, and the first count value of the second counting means is updated. The second count value is updated (for example, FIG. 168(a)(1), FIG. 169(4) to (6)),
When a second operation (for example, the first stop is other than a left operation) is performed in the first game, the first count value of the first counting means is updated, and the second counting means The second count value of is not updated (for example, FIG. 168(a)(2), FIG. 169(7) to (12)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the first count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover. Further, since the second counting means does not reflect the second operation, it is possible to grasp the value when the first operation is performed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the first count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the first count value;
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A first board (for example, main control board 300B),
a light emitting means (for example, a lever monitor LED);
a first operation part (for example, start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, lever unit harness HA1);
A game machine that is capable of executing a first process (for example, starting reel rotation) based on the operation of the first operation section,
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to calculate the first count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the first count value from the initial value reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the first count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the first process may be executed ([Lever unit harness is disconnected]). Example of operation in case (1)] [Example of operation when lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
The light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operating section is operated and when the first operating section is not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is not operated, the light emitting means is configured to perform the first operation when the first harness is in the connected state. (See [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)] [Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the first count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover. Furthermore, it may be possible to detect a malfunction in the first harness during a pre-shipment inspection at a factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the first count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the first count value;
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); A game machine comprising:
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to calculate the first count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the first count value from the initial value reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the first count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the first count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover. In addition, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade, if there is a problem with the first harness, the first processing will be executed, and the first operating unit will become normal. You may be able to confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a problem in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the first count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the first count value;
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (for example, stop button unit 136U, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, stop button unit harness HA2, menu button unit harness HC1); A game machine comprising:
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to calculate the first count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the first count value from the initial value reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the first count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an upward direction button),
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, stopping the middle reel 111 and moving the cursor upward) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
The first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second direction button;
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the first count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover. In addition, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade, if there is a problem with the first harness, the first processing will be executed, and the first operating unit will become normal. You may be able to confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a problem in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the first count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first counting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the first count value;
A determining means (for example, main control unit 300),
A first board (for example, main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B),
A game machine comprising a first operation unit (for example, menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (for example, menu button unit harness HC1),
It has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
Shifting to the second section based on the transition condition being satisfied in the first section,
Shifting to the first section based on the judgment means determining that the termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means adds the number of game values awarded as a result of the game and subtracts the number of game values used for the game in the second period to calculate the first count value (for example, the difference). It is a means that can update the number of sheets (counter),
The determining means is means for determining that the termination condition is satisfied when the amount of change of the first count value from the initial value reaches a first value (for example, 2400 sheets),
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the first count value within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range includes, with the initial value as a border, a first range to which the total value of the initial value and the first value belongs, and a second range different from the first range,
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see <Regarding the initial value of the counter to reduce the load of arrival determination processing>),
The first operation unit has a first operation section and a second operation section (for example, a left direction button and a right direction button),
A first process (for example, moving a cursor to the left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (for example, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operation unit is being operated, the first process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed;
When the first harness changes from the unconnected state to the connected state while both the first operating section and the second operating section are being operated, one of the first processing and the second processing is performed. Only the first process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are pulled out] [Example of operation when menu button harness is pulled out]),
The first operation unit is a first direction button,
The second operation unit is a second direction button,
When the second process is executed after the first process is executed, the state may return to the state before the first process was executed;
If the first process is executed after the second process is executed, the state may return to the state before the second process was executed.
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the first count value falls within the second range depending on the player's gaming situation, it is possible to leave room for the player to recover. In addition, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at an amusement arcade, if there is a problem with the first harness, the first processing will be executed, and the first operating unit will become normal. You may be able to confirm that it is working. Further, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a problem in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Further, the game machine described above,
The determination means is means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using values from the upper to a specific digit of the bit pattern corresponding to the first count value (for example, Regarding the initial value of the counter for
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

With this game machine, the processing load and data capacity can be reduced compared to the case where all the digits of the second counting means are determined.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (1)

The door body and
The main body and
a door locking mechanism that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking part and a locked part are locked;
A game machine comprising:
The door lock mechanism has a housing section that can accommodate the locking section,
A certain metal piece may be inserted into a slit-shaped space formed by the locking part in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing part, and a predetermined state can be set;
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece comes into contact with the locked part before the locking part and the locked state is not achieved, so that the door body is not in the open state. is maintained,
The width of the slit-shaped space is wider than the width of the space formed by the second inner wall of the accommodating part opposite to the first inner wall and the locking part,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin,
A game machine characterized by:

Images